GENERAL SPECIFICATION

FOR

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

IN

GOVERNMENT BUILDINGS

OF

THE HONG KONG SPECIAL ADMINISTRATIVE REGION

2007 EDITION

ARCHITECTURAL SERVICES DEPARTMENT

THE GOVERNMENT OF THE HONG KONG SPECIAL ADMINISTRATIVE REGION
 PREFACE

This General Specification aims to lay down the technical requirements of materials
and equipment, the standards of workmanship, the requirements on testing and
commissioning as well as requirements on document submissions for electrical installation
in Government Buildings of the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region (HKSAR).

The 2007 edition of this General Specification was developed based on its 2002
edition by the Electrical Specialist Support Group that was established under the Building
Services Branch Technical Information and Research & Development Committee. Apart
from the adoption of a new arrangement which gives the document a more compact and well
defined structure, this new edition comprises revisions to incorporate updated international
standards and covers technological developments which find applications in Hong Kong.
The other emphasis is on green initiatives, e.g. reduction of construction waste and
enhancement of client satisfaction on completed projects. This is in line with the
department’s endeavour to reduce the environmental burden on our neighbours and help to
preserve common resources while improving the quality of our service.

With the benefit of information technology, electronic version of this new edition is
to be viewed on and free for download from the Architectural Services Department (ArchSD)
Internet homepage. As part of the Government’s efforts to limit paper consumption, hard
copies of this General Specification will not be put up for sale.

The draft of this edition has been circulated to stakeholders within and external to the
Government before finalization. Nevertheless, the Architectural Services Department
welcomes comments on its contents at anytime since the updating of this General
Specification is a continuous process for the inclusion of any developments that can help
meeting the needs of our community.
 DISCLAIMER

This General Specification is solely compiled for an electrical installation carried out
for or on behalf of the ArchSD in Government buildings of the HKSAR.

There are no representations, either expressed or implied, as to the suitability of this

General Specification for purposes other than that stated above. Users who choose to adopt
this General Specification for their works are responsible for making their own assessments
and judgement of all information contained here. The ArchSD does not accept any liability
and responsibility for any special, indirect or consequential loss or damage whatsoever
arising out of or in connection with the use of this General Specification or reliance placed
on it.

The materials contained in this document may not be pertinent or fully cover the
extent of the installation in non-government buildings and there is no intimated or implied
endorsement of the sales, supply and installation of the materials and equipment specified in
this General Specification within the territory of the HKSAR.
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

PART A - SCOPE AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION A1 SCOPE OF SPECIFICATION

A1.1 Installation to Comply with this General Specification

A1.2 Scope of the Works
A1.3 Terms and Definitions
A1.4 Singular and Plural

SECTION A2 STATUTORY OBLIGATIONS AND OTHER REGULATIONS

A2.1 Statutory Obligations and Other Requirements

A2.1.1 Statutory Obligations
A2.1.2 Other Requirements
A2.1.3 Safety Requirements
A2.1.4 Technical Standards
A2.2 Case of Conflict

SECTION A3 EXECUTION OF WORKS

A3.1 The International System of Units (SI)

A3.2 Programme of Works
A3.3 Builder’s Work
A3.4 Coordination of Contract Works
A3.5 Cooperation with Other Contractors
A3.6 Site Supervision
A3.7 Sample Board
A3.8 Advice of Order Placed
A3.9 Record of Materials Delivery
A3.10 Protection of Materials and Equipment

SECTION A4 DRAWINGS AND MANUALS

A4.1 Standard Drawings

A4.2 Drawings in Electronic Format
A4.3 Installation Drawings
A4.3.1 Drawing Submission Schedule
A4.3.2 Size of Installation Drawings
A4.3.3 Contents of Installation Drawings
A4.3.4 Builder’s Work Drawings
A4.3.5 Manufacturer’s Shop Drawings
A4.4 As-built Drawings
A4.4.1 Submission of As-built Drawings
A4.4.2 Size of As-built Drawings
A4.4.3 Content of As-built Drawings
A4.4.4 Framed Drawings

Table of Contents EE_GS

Page 1 of 22 2007 Edition
 A4.5 Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manual and User Manual
A4.5.1 General
A4.5.2 Presentation
A4.5.3 Checking and Approval
A4.5.4 Structure and Contents of O&M Manual
A4.5.5 Structure and Contents of User Manual
A4.5.6 Intellectual Property Rights

PART B - INSTALLATION METHODOLOGY

SECTION B1 GENERAL

B1.1 Workmanship
B1.1.1 Tradesmen
B1.1.2 Tool and Instrument
B1.1.3 Safety on Site
B1.2 Label and Notice
B1.2.1 Inscription of Label and Engraving
B1.2.2 Material for Label
B1.2.3 Fixing of Label
B1.2.4 Engraving for Electrical Accessory
B1.2.5 Warning Notice
B1.2.6 Other Labels and Notices
B1.3 Guard and Railing for Moving or Rotating Parts of Equipment
B1.4 Identification of Cable and Conduit
B1.5 Fixing to Wooden Plug
B1.6 Painting of Metal Work
B1.7 Water Proofing
B1.8 Provision of Spare Fuses in Main Switch Room

SECTION B2 INSTALLATION OF WIRING SYSTEMS

B2.1 Wiring in Steel Conduit System

B2.1.1 Type of Cable
B2.1.2 Concealed Steel Conduit System
B2.1.3 Surface Conduit System
B2.1.4 Minimum Size of Conduit
B2.1.5 Flexible Conduit
B2.1.6 Conduit Continuity
B2.1.7 Joint in Conduits
B2.1.8 Provision of Adaptable Box
B2.1.9 Spacing between Conduits
B2.1.10 Termination of Conduits at Metal Casing of
Equipment
B2.1.11 Conduit Bend
B2.1.12 Conduit Crossing Expansion Joint
B2.1.13 Use of Extension Piece
B2.1.14 Prevention of Ingress of Foreign Matters
B2.1.15 Prevention of Accumulation of Water or Moisture

Table of Contents EE_GS

Page 2 of 22 2007 Edition
 B2.1.16 Conduit Laid Direct in Ground
B2.1.17 Fixing of Distance (Spacing) Saddle
B2.1.18 Conduit Installed Outdoors or in Damp Situation
B2.1.19 Swabbing Out of Conduit
B2.1.20 Fire Barrier
B2.1.21 Cable Capacity of Conduit
B2.1.22 Method of Drawing Cables into Conduit
B2.1.23 Segregation of Cables of Different Circuit
Categories
B2.1.24 “Looping-in” Wiring System
B2.1.25 Grouping of Cables in Conduit
B2.1.26 Termination of Bonding Conductors at Conduit
Installation
B2.2 Wiring in Steel Trunking System
B2.2.1 General
B2.2.2 Provision of Cable Retaining Bar and Cable
Support
B2.2.3 Cable Capacity of Trunking
B2.2.4 Correction Factor of Grouping
B2.2.5 Segregation of Cables of Different Circuit
Categories
B2.2.6 Connection to Equipment
B2.2.7 Connection to Distribution Board
B2.2.8 Fixing of Surface Trunking
B2.2.9 Cables through Trunking
B2.2.10 Fire Barrier
B2.2.11 Prevention of Electrolytic Action
B2.2.12 Prevention of Ingress of Water
B2.3 Wiring in Plastic Conduit or Plastic Trunking System
B2.3.1 General
B2.3.2 Pliable Conduit
B2.3.3 Joint in PVC Conduit
B2.3.4 Plastic Boxes
B2.3.5 Termination of PVC Conduit at Casing of
Equipment
B2.3.6 Conduit Bend
B2.3.7 Allowance for Thermal Expansion
B2.3.8 Fixing of Trunking
B2.3.9 Earthing
B2.4 Surface Wiring System
B2.4.1 Type of Cable
B2.4.2 Minimum Size of Live Conductors and CPC
B2.4.3 Identification of Cable Core
B2.4.4 Joint in Cable or Cord
B2.4.5 Installation of Non-flexible Cable
B2.4.6 Installation of Flexible Cable and Flexible Cord
B2.5 Tool and Workmanship
B2.5.1 Approved Tool
B2.5.2 Cutting in Metal Work for Conduit or in Trunking
B2.5.3 Making Good of Damaged Coating

Table of Contents EE_GS

Page 3 of 22 2007 Edition
SECTION B3 INSTALLATION OF POWER CABLES, CABLE TRAYS AND
CABLE LADDERS

B3.1 General
B3.1.1 Scope
B3.1.2 Electromagnetic Interference
B3.2 Cable Mounted on Surface
B3.3 Cable Laid in Enclosed Trench
B3.4 Cable Enclosed in Duct
B3.4.1 General
B3.4.2 Drawing-in of Cables
B3.4.3 Internal Barrier
B3.4.4 Fire Barrier
B3.4.5 Draw-in Pit
B3.4.6 Segregation of Cables of Different Circuit
Categories
B3.4.7 Sealing of Duct Entry to Building
B3.5 Cable Buried Direct in Ground
B3.5.1 Protection of Cable
B3.5.2 Cable Marker
B3.6 Bending Radius of Cable
B3.7 Cable Joint and Cable Termination
B3.7.1 General
B3.7.2 Joint Box and Terminating Box
B3.7.3 Identification at Joint or Termination
B3.7.4 Earth Continuity across Joint
B3.7.5 Straight-through Joint for Copper Conductors
B3.7.6 Tee-joint for Copper Conductor
B3.7.7 Joint for Aluminium Cables
B3.7.8 Termination of PVC-insulated or XLPE-insulated
Cable with Copper Conductors
B3.7.9 Termination of PVC-insulated or XLPE-insulated
Cable with Aluminium Conductors
B3.7.10 Use of Heat Shrinkable Tubing
B3.7.11 Other Methods of Joint and Termination
B3.8 Special Requirements for Mineral Insulated Cables
B3.8.1 Cable Route
B3.8.2 Cable Support
B3.8.3 Bending Radius
B3.8.4 Cable Loop for Prevention of Vibration and Low
Temperature Cold Store
B3.8.5 Cable Termination
B3.8.6 Insulation Resistance
B3.8.7 Bonding of Cable Sheath to Metalwork
B3.8.8 Laying of Single-core Cables
B3.8.9 Protection from Mechanical Damage
B3.9 Installation of Cable Trays
B3.9.1 Connection between Adjacent Lengths of Tray
B3.9.2 Cutting of Tray
B3.9.3 Hole in Tray
B3.9.4 Fixing of Tray
B3.9.5 Fixing of Cable on Tray

Table of Contents EE_GS

Page 4 of 22 2007 Edition
 B3.10 Installation of Cable Ladder
B3.10.1 Dropout Plate for Cable Exit
B3.10.2 Flexible (Expansion) Couplers across Building
Expansion Joint
B3.10.3 Ladder Covers
B3.10.4 End Connectors
B3.10.5 Earthing
B3.10.6 Minimum Inside Radius of All Bends
B3.10.7 Supports
B3.10.8 Blank
B3.10.9 Safety Working Load

SECTION B4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL LIGHTING AND POWER

B4.1 Installation of Lighting System and Luminaires

B4.1.1 Pendant
B4.1.2 Luminaire Mounted on Pattress
B4.1.3 Ceiling Rose
B4.1.4 Stroboscopic Effect
B4.1.5 Painting
B4.1.6 Special Requirements for Outdoor Luminaires
B4.2 Installation of Wiring Accessories
B4.3 Installation of Domestic Switches
B4.3.1 General
B4.3.2 Lighting Switch
B4.3.3 Time Switch
B4.3.4 Application in Bathroom
B4.4 Installation of Socket Outlets
B4.4.1 General
B4.4.2 Shaver Supply Unit
B4.4.3 Socket Outlet at Hazardous Area
B4.4.4 Socket Outlet of Surface Conduit System
B4.4.5 Socket Outlet for Different Voltage System
B4.4.6 Application in Bathroom
B4.5 Installation of Measuring Instrument
B4.5.1 Mounting of Current Transformers Associated
with Watt-hour Meter
B4.5.2 Identification of Instrument
B4.5.3 Mounting Position of Selector Switch

SECTION B5 INSTALLATION OF DOMESTIC APPLIANCES

B5.1 General
B5.1.1 Connection to Appliances
B5.1.2 Use in Bathroom and Toilet
B5.1.3 Engraving for Identification
B5.1.4 Earthing of Appliance
B5.1.5 Appliance Requiring Exclusive Circuit
B5.2 Ceiling Fan and Ceiling-mounted Rotary Fan
B5.2.1 Method of Supply
B5.2.2 Fixing of Fan
B5.2.3 Fan Regulator
B5.3 Wall-mounted Fan
Table of Contents EE_GS
Page 5 of 22 2007 Edition
 B5.4 Exhaust Fan
B5.4.1 Fixing of Fan
B5.4.2 Method of Supply
B5.5 Electric Fire or Heater
B5.5.1 Wall-mounted Radiator
B5.5.2 Panel Fire
B5.5.3 Tubular Heater
B5.6 Water Heater and Water Boiler
B5.6.1 Oversink Water Heater
B5.6.2 Other Type of Water Heater
B5.6.3 Water Boiler
B5.7 Tea Urn
B5.8 Household Electric Cooker
B5.9 Hand/Face Dryer
B5.10 Room Cooler
B5.10.1 Method of Supply
B5.10.2 Position of Connection Unit
B5.11 Refrigerator

SECTION B6 INSTALLATION OF BUSBAR TRUNKING SYSTEM

B6.1 General
B6.2 Site Storage and Protection
B6.3 Busbar Identification
B6.4 Joint in Busbar
B6.5 Expansion Unit
B6.6 Feeder Unit
B6.7 Tap-off Unit Connection
B6.8 Fire Barrier
B6.9 Busbar Trunking Accessories
B6.10 Support of Busbar Trunking System
B6.11 Earthing
B6.12 Requirements for Air-insulated Busbar Trunking System
B6.12.1 Application
B6.12.2 Busbar Supports
B6.12.3 Tap-off
B6.12.4 Fire Barrier
B6.12.5 Mounting Brackets
B6.13 Requirement for All Insulated Busbar Trunking System
B6.13.1 Application
B6.13.2 Busbar Jointing
B6.13.3 Expansion Unit
B6.13.4 Tap-off Unit
B6.13.5 Supporting Hangers and Fixing Brackets

SECTION B7 INSTALLATION OF EARTHING SYSTEM

B7.1 General
B7.2 Main Earthing Terminal
B7.3 Earth Electrode
B7.3.1 Types of Earth Electrode
B7.3.2 Rod Electrode
B7.3.3 Tape Electrode
Table of Contents EE_GS
Page 6 of 22 2007 Edition
 B7.3.4 Plate Electrode
B7.3.5 Electrode in Deep Bored Hole
B7.3.6 Connection between Electrodes
B7.4 Earthing Conductor
B7.4.1 Conductor Material
B7.4.2 Connection to Electrodes
B7.5 Main Equipotential Bonding Conductor
B7.5.1 Conductor Material
B7.5.2 Bonding Position
B7.5.3 Bonding Method
B7.6 Supplementary Bonding Conductor
B7.6.1 Conductor Material
B7.6.2 Application in Bathroom
B7.6.3 Application in Other Areas
B7.6.4 Bonding Method
B7.7 Circuit Protective Conductor (CPC)
B7.7.1 General
B7.7.2 CPC for Socket Outlet
B7.7.3 CPC for Flexible Conduit
B7.7.4 CPC for Busbar Trunking
B7.7.5 CPC for Ring Final Circuit
B7.8 Joints in Protective Conductors
B7.9 Identification and Labelling
B7.9.1 Colour Identification
B7.9.2 Label for Earthing and Bonding Connections
B7.10 Sizing of Protective Conductor
B7.10.1 General
B7.10.2 Equipotential Bonding Conductor
B7.11 Earth Fault Loop Impedance
B7.11.1 Automatic Disconnection Time
B7.11.2 Maximum Earth Loop Impedance
B7.11.3 Condition for Compliance
B7.12 Use of Residual Current-operated Circuit Breaker
B7.12.1 General
B7.12.2 Application in Household Installation
B7.12.3 Equipment Outside an Equipotential Zone

SECTION B8 MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATIONS

B8.1 Telecommunication Systems

B8.1.1 Scope
B8.1.2 Conduit for Telephone, Computer Network,
Inter-communication and PA Systems
B8.1.3 Outlet Box for Telephone Point
B8.1.4 Outlet Box for Computer Point
B8.1.5 Outlet Box for Inter-communication and PA
System
B8.1.6 Conduit for Staff Paging System
B8.1.7 Conduit for Broadcast Reception System
B8.1.8 Outlet Box for Broadcast Reception System

Table of Contents EE_GS

Page 7 of 22 2007 Edition
B8.2 Bell and Audible Warning System
B8.2.1 Class-change Bell System for Schools
B8.2.2 Bell for Mains Voltage
B8.2.3 Call Bell and Door Bell Systems
B8.2.4 Bell and Buzzer for Extra Low Voltage
B8.2.5 Bell Transformer
B8.2.6 Call Bell Push
B8.2.7 Mounting of Call Bell Push
B8.2.8 Table-type Push
B8.2.9 Table-type Push in Concealed Conduit Installation
B8.2.10 Bell Indicator
B8.2.11 Segregation of Circuits
B8.3 Installation in Hazardous Areas
B8.3.1 General
B8.3.2 Electrical Equipment Selection
B8.3.3 Wiring System
B8.3.4 Conduit Fitting, Cable Glands, Terminal Box and
Enclosure
B8.3.5 Screw or Bolt
B8.3.6 Luminaire
B8.3.7 Conduit Pendant
B8.3.8 Cables or Conduits Passing through Floor, Wall or
Partition
B8.3.9 Precautions to Prevent Passage of Inflammables
Gases or Vapours
B8.3.10 Equipotential Bonding of Conduit
B8.4 External Lighting System
B8.4.1 Scope
B8.4.2 Specification and Drawing
B8.4.3 Luminaire
B8.4.4 Construction of Lamp Pole
B8.4.5 Foundation of Lamp Pole
B8.4.6 Service Box
B8.4.7 Underground Cable to Pole
B8.4.8 Cable between Service Box and Luminaire
B8.4.9 Switch Fitted to Pole
B8.4.10 Control Gear for Discharge Lighting
B8.4.11 Testing of Illumination Level
B8.4.12 Numbering of Lamp Pole
B8.5 Lightning Protection System
B8.5.1 Installation of Lightning Protection System
B8.5.2 Scope
B8.5.3 Type of Lightning Protection System
B8.5.4 Air Termination
B8.5.5 Down Conductor
B8.5.6 Test Joint
B8.5.7 Earth Termination
B8.5.8 Spacer Saddle
B8.5.9 Connection to Earth Termination
B8.5.10 Bonding to Other Services
B8.5.11 Bond
B8.5.12 Joint in Conductors
B8.5.13 Testing
Table of Contents EE_GS
Page 8 of 22 2007 Edition
SECTION B9 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRIC MOTORS AND HIGH
VOLTGE EQUIPMENT

B9.1 Low Voltage-Electric Motors

B9.1.1 Maintenance Access and Safety
B9.1.2 Terminals
B9.1.3 Anti-condensation Heater
B9.1.4 Belt Drives and Pulleys
B9.1.5 Protective Guards
B9.1.6 Warning Label
B9.2 Motor Switchgear, Starter and Control Panels
B9.2.1 General
B9.2.2 Local Motor Control Panels
B9.2.3 Motor Control Switchboard
B9.3 High Voltage-General
B9.4 High Voltage-Electric Motors
B9.4.1 Motor Foundation
B9.4.2 Provision for Cabling and Termination
B9.5 High Voltage Motor Control Switchboard
B9.5.1 General Requirements
B9.5.2 Primary Busbars and Connections
B9.5.3 Anti-condensation Heaters
B9.5.4 Cables Boxes
B9.5.5 Labels and Warning Notice
B9.6 High Voltage Auto-transformers
B9.7 High Voltage Power Factor Correction Capacitors
B9.8 High Voltage Power Cables

Table of Contents EE_GS

Page 9 of 22 2007 Edition
PART C - MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION

SECTION C1 GENERAL

C1.1 Material and Equipment

C1.1.1 International Standards
C1.1.2 Other Standard Specifications
C1.1.3 Service Conditions
C1.1.4 Selection of Equipment
C1.1.5 Equipment Catalogue and Manufacturer’s
Specification
C1.2 Voltage Covered by this Specification
C1.3 Insulating Material
C1.4 Minimum Size of Cable Conductor
C1.5 Use of PVC-Insulated Cable at Low Temperature
C1.6 Fixing Screw and Bolt
C1.7 Sheet Metal Work
C1.8 Cable Markers in addition to Cable Color Identification

SECTION C2 WIRING SYSTEM: CABLES, CONDUITS, TRUNKING AND

ACCESSORIES

C2.1 Cables in Wiring System

C2.1.1 General
C2.1.2 Non-sheathed Cables
C2.1.3 Sheathed Cables
C2.1.4 Flexible Cables
C2.1.5 Conductor
C2.1.6 Fire Performance of Cables Having Low Emission
of Smoke and Corrosive Gases Characteristics
C2.1.7 Fire Performance of Fire Resistant Cables
C2.2 Steel Conduit and Accessories
C2.2.1 Steel Conduit
C2.2.2 Steel Flexible Conduit
C2.2.3 Steel Conduit Fitting
C2.2.4 Metal Boxes for Electrical Accessories
C2.2.5 Class of Protection against Corrosion
C2.2.6 Screw
C2.3 Plastic or PVC Conduit and Accessories
C2.3.1 Rigid Conduit and Conduit Fittings
C2.3.2 Pliable Conduit
C2.3.3 Plastic or PVC Conduit Boxes
C2.3.4 Plastic Couplers
C2.4 Steel Trunking and Accessories
C2.4.1 Steel Trunking
C2.4.2 Class of Protection against Corrosion
C2.4.3 Construction
C2.4.4 Dimension
C2.4.5 Connection between Lengths of Trunking
C2.4.6 Steel Surface Trunking Cover

Table of Contents EE_GS

Page 10 of 22 2007 Edition
 C2.4.7 Screw
C2.5 Plastic or PVC Trunking and Accessories

SECTION C3 POWER CABLES AND ASSOCIATED CABLING FACILITIES

C3.1 General
C3.2 Types of Power Cables
C3.3 Conductor
C3.4 Armour
C3.5 Fire Performance of Cables having Low Emission of Smoke
and Corrosive Gases Characteristics
C3.6 Fire Performance of Fire Resistant Cables
C3.7 Identification of Core
C3.8 Special Requirements for Mineral Insulated (MI) Cable
C3.8.1 Outer Covering
C3.8.2 Restriction of Use
C3.8.3 Cable Saddle and Clip
C3.9 Cable Duct
C3.10 Metal Cable Tray
C3.10.1 Material
C3.10.2 Dimensions of Tray
C3.10.3 Bend Piece
C3.10.4 Perforation on Bend
C3.10.5 Tee Piece
C3.10.6 Cable Tray Accessory
C3.11 Cable Ladder
C3.11.1 Material
C3.11.2 Fittings and Accessories
C3.11.3 Construction of Cable Ladder

SECTION C4 WIRING ACCESSORIES AND MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

C4.1 Wiring Accessories - General

C4.2 Domestic Switches
C4.2.1 General
C4.2.2 Lighting Switch
C4.2.3 Double Pole Switch for Appliance
C4.2.4 Sparkless Switch
C4.2.5 Time Switch
C4.3 Socket Outlets
C4.3.1 General
C4.3.2 Shaver Supply Unit
C4.3.3 Plug
C4.4 Connection Units
C4.4.1 Blank
C4.4.2 Switched or Unswitched Fused Connection Unit
C4.5 Insulated Terminal Block
C4.6 Lighting System
C4.6.1 Luminaire Track System
C4.6.2 Photocell Device
C4.6.3 Ceiling Rose
C4.6.4 Lampholder

Table of Contents EE_GS

Page 11 of 22 2007 Edition
 C4.7 Measuring Instrument
C4.7.1 Watt-hour Meter
C4.7.2 Ammeter and Voltmeter
C4.7.3 Current Transformer
C4.7.4 Selector Switch for Ammeter
C4.7.5 Selector Switch for Voltmeter
C4.7.6 Meter Chamber

SECTION C5 SWITCHGEAR AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT

C5.1 General
C5.1.1 Scope
C5.1.2 Service Condition
C5.1.3 Short-circuit Rating and Continuous Current
Rating
C5.1.4 Voltage Rating
C5.1.5 Degree of Protection for Enclosure
C5.1.6 Material
C5.1.7 ON and OFF Indication
C5.1.8 Identification of Circuit
C5.2 Switch, Disconnector, Fuse-switch and Switch-fuse
C5.2.1 Scope of Switch
C5.2.2 General
C5.2.3 Operating Mechanism
C5.2.4 Construction
C5.2.5 Operating Performance
C5.2.6 Utilization Category
C5.2.7 Padlocking Facility
C5.3 Circuit Breaker - General
C5.3.1 Scope of Circuit Breaker
C5.3.2 Number of Poles
C5.3.3 Operating Mechanism
C5.3.4 Casing
C5.3.5 Current Rating
C5.4 Air-circuit Breaker (ACB)
C5.4.1 General
C5.4.2 Performance Characteristic
C5.4.3 Closing and Tripping Operation
C5.4.4 Racking Gear
C5.4.5 Interlocking Facility
C5.4.6 Main Isolating Contacts and Safety Shutter
C5.4.7 Contact
C5.5 Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
C5.5.1 General
C5.5.2 Operating Characteristic
C5.5.3 Performance Characteristic
C5.5.4 Shunt Trip Release
C5.5.5 Locking Facility
C5.6 Miniature Circuit Breaker (MCB)
C5.6.1 General
C5.6.2 Operating Characteristic
C5.6.3 Short Circuit Breaking Capacity

Table of Contents EE_GS

Page 12 of 22 2007 Edition
C5.7 Residual Current-operated Circuit Breaker without Integral
Overcurrent Protection (RCCB) and Residual
Current-operated Circuit Breaker with Integral Overcurrent
Protection (RCBO)
C5.7.1 RCCB – General
C5.7.2 RCCB – Electrical and Operating Characteristics
C5.7.3 RCCB – Test Device
C5.7.4 RCBO – General
C5.7.5 RCBO – Electrical and Operating Characteristics
C5.7.6 RCBO – Test Device
C5.8 Fuse
C5.8.1 Scope of Fuse
C5.8.2 General
C5.8.3 Fuse Carrier and Holder
C5.8.4 Blank
C5.8.5 Fuse Ratings and Dimensions
C5.9 Busbar Chamber
C5.9.1 General
C5.9.2 Construction
C5.9.3 Color Identification of Busbar
C5.9.4 Interconnection to Other Equipment
C5.10 Distribution Board - General
C5.10.1 Scope of Distribution Board
C5.10.2 Construction of Enclosure
C5.10.3 Arrangement of Component Parts
C5.10.4 Busbar
C5.10.5 Earthing Terminal
C5.10.6 Provision of Spare Ways
C5.10.7 Shrouding of Live Part
C5.11 MCCB Distribution Board
C5.11.1 General
C5.11.2 Type of MCCB Distribution Board
C5.11.3 Busbar
C5.12 MCB Distribution Board
C5.12.1 General
C5.12.2 Construction
C5.12.3 Method of Mounting
C5.13 Blank
C5.14 Electromechanical Contactors
C5.14.1 General
C5.14.2 Performance Requirements
C5.14.3 Co-ordination with Short-circuit Protective
Devices
C5.14.4 Control Circuit
C5.15 Automatic Changeover Switch
C5.16 Active Harmonic Filter
C5.16.1 General Requirements
C5.16.2 Performance Requirements
C5.16.3 Construction
C5.17 Surge Protection Device
C5.17.1 General Requirements
C5.17.2 Performance Requirements
C5.17.3 Construction
Table of Contents EE_GS
Page 13 of 22 2007 Edition
 C5.18 Solid State Soft Motor Starter
C5.18.1 General Requirements
C5.18.2 Performance Requirements
C5.18.3 Selection of Softstarter and Operating Precautions
C5.19 Variable Speed Drives for Centrifugal Fans and Pumps
C5.19.1 General Requirements
C5.19.2 Performance Requirements
C5.19.3 Construction
C5.20 Digital Multifunction Power Meter
C5.20.1 General Requirements
C5.20.2 Technical Requirements
C5.21 Charger and Battery Set
C5.21.1 General Requirements
C5.21.2 Technical Requirements
C5.21.3 Construction
C5.21.4 Selection Criteria
C5.22 Power Factor Correction Equipment
C5.22.1 General Requirements
C5.22.2 Requirements of the Components
C5.23 Digital Protection Relay
C5.23.1 General Requirements
C5.23.2 Technical Requirements
C5.24 Digital Power Analyzer
C5.24.1 General Requirements
C5.24.2 Technical Requirements
C5.25 Electric Motors
C5.25.1 General
C5.25.2 Insulation Test
C5.25.3 Starting Torque and Current
C5.25.4 Maintenance Access and Safety
C5.25.5 Noise and Vibration
C5.25.6 Minimum Motor Efficiency
C5.25.7 Continuous Rating
C5.25.8 Tachometers
C5.25.9 Terminals
C5.25.10 Anti-condensation Heater
C5.25.11 Belt Drives and Pulleys
C5.25.12 Protective Guards
C5.25.13 Motor Fed by Converter
C5.26 Motor Switchgear, Starters and Control Panel
C5.26.1 General
C5.26.2 Local Motor Control Panels
C5.26.3 Motor Control Switchboard
C5.26.4 Motor Starters

SECTION C6 BUSBAR TRUNKING SYSTEM

C6.1 General
C6.2 Busbar Trunking Construction
C6.3 Busbar Insulation
C6.4 Busbar
C6.5 Feeder Unit
C6.6 Tap-off Units
Table of Contents EE_GS
Page 14 of 22 2007 Edition
 C6.7 Busbar Expansion Unit
C6.8 Fire Barrier in Busbar Trunking System
C6.9 Busbar Trunking Accessories
C6.10 Requirement for Air-insulated Busbar Trunking System
C6.10.1 Busbar Enclosure
C6.10.2 Busbar Supports
C6.10.3 Busbar Jointing
C6.10.4 Suspension Unit, Flexible Joint and Stop-end Unit
C6.10.5 Tap-off Unit
C6.10.6 Testing and Certification
C6.11 Requirement for All Insulated Busbar Trunking System
C6.11.1 Busbar Enclosure
C6.11.2 Busbar Insulation
C6.11.3 Tap-off Units
C6.11.4 Joint in Busbar Trunking System
C6.11.5 Testing and Certification

SECTION C7 FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRE AND LAMP

C7.1 General
C7.2 Type of Luminaires
C7.3 Group 1 Luminaires
C7.4 Group 2 - Special Luminaires
C7.5 Group 3 - Self-contained Emergency Fluorescent Luminaires
C7.5.1 General
C7.5.2 Standards
C7.5.3 Functional Requirements
C7.5.4 Construction
C7.6 Blank
C7.7 Fluorescent Lamps
C7.8 Electronic Ballasts
C7.8.1 General
C7.8.2 Construction
C7.8.3 Performance Requirements
C7.8.4 Additional Requirements for Dimmable Electronic
Ballasts

SECTION C8 HIGH PRESSURE DISCHARGE LAMP AND LUMINAIRE

C8.1 General
C8.2 High Pressure Sodium Vapour Discharge Lamp (SON-T and
SON-E or LBS: HST and HSE)
C8.3 Elliptical High Pressure Mercury Vapour Discharge Lamp
(MBF or LBS : HME)
C8.4 Linear Metal Halide/Linear High Pressure Sodium Lamp
C8.5 Luminaire for Floodlighting
C8.5.1 General
C8.5.2 Construction
C8.5.3 Lamps

Table of Contents EE_GS

Page 15 of 22 2007 Edition
SECTION C9 TUNGSTEN HALOGEN LAMP

C9.1 General
C9.2 Special Requirements for Mains Voltage (220V) Lamp
C9.3 Special Requirements for Extra-low Voltage (ELV) Lamp
C9.3.1 General
C9.3.2 The Transformer

SECTION C10 DOMESTIC APPLIANCES

C10.1 General
C10.1.1 Compliance with Regulation
C10.1.2 General Requirements
C10.1.3 Technical Literature
C10.2 900 mm, 1200 mm and 1400 mm Ceiling Fan
C10.2.1 General Requirements
C10.2.2 Performance Requirements
C10.2.3 Construction
C10.3 400 mm Sweep Auto Cycle/Oscillating Fan
C10.3.1 General Requirements
C10.3.2 Performance Requirements
C10.3.3 Construction
C10.4 400 mm Sweep Wall Fan
C10.4.1 General Requirements
C10.4.2 Performance Requirements
C10.4.3 Construction
C10.5 400 mm Sweep Desk Fan
C10.5.1 General Requirements
C10.5.2 Performance Requirements
C10.5.3 Construction
C10.6 400 mm Sweep Pedestal Fan
C10.6.1 General Requirements
C10.6.2 Performance Requirements
C10.6.3 Construction
C10.7 Domestic Exhaust Fan
C10.7.1 General Requirements
C10.7.2 Performance Requirements
C10.7.3 Construction
C10.8 Propeller Fan – Ring Mounted Type
C10.8.1 General Requirements
C10.8.2 Performance Requirements
C10.8.3 Construction
C10.9 Fume Cupboard Exhaust Fan
C10.9.1 General Requirements
C10.9.2 Performance Requirements
C10.9.3 Construction
C10.10 1 kW Electric Fire, Wall Mounted Type
C10.10.1 General Requirements
C10.10.2 Performance Requirements
C10.10.3 Construction
C10.11 2 kW Convector Fire
C10.11.1 General Requirements
C10.11.2 Performance Requirements
Table of Contents EE_GS
Page 16 of 22 2007 Edition
 C10.11.3 Construction
C10.12 2 kW Oil-filled Electric Radiator
C10.12.1 General Requirements
C10.12.2 Performance Requirements
C10.12.3 Construction
C10.13 300 mm and 1200 mm Single Tubular Heater Complete with
Wire Guard
C10.13.1 General Requirements
C10.13.2 Performance Requirements
C10.13.3 Construction
C10.14 10-Litre Open-outlet Type, Electric Sink Water Heater
C10.14.1 General Requirements
C10.14.2 Performance Requirements
C10.14.3 Construction
C10.15 90-Litre and 135-Litre Thermal Storage Electric Water Heater
C10.15.1 General Requirements
C10.15.2 Performance Requirements
C10.15.3 Specific Safety Requirements
C10.15.4 Construction
C10.16 Electric Tea Urn
C10.16.1 General Requirements
C10.16.2 Performance Requirements
C10.16.3 Construction
C10.17 Electric Kettle 3.5-4.5 Litres
C10.17.1 General Requirements
C10.17.2 Performance Requirements
C10.17.3 Construction
C10.18 Mains-supply Drinking Water Dispenser for "Cold" Water
C10.18.1 General Requirements
C10.18.2 Performance Requirements
C10.18.3 Construction
C10.19 Domestic Electric Cooker (Table Model)
C10.19.1 General Requirements
C10.19.2 Performance Requirements
C10.19.3 Construction
C10.20 Domestic Electric Cooker (Four Radiant Plates Type)
C10.20.1 General Requirements
C10.20.2 Performance Requirements
C10.20.3 Construction
C10.21 Electric Hot Plate
C10.21.1 General Requirements
C10.21.2 Performance Requirements
C10.21.3 Construction
C10.22 10-Persons and 15-Persons Electric Rice Cooker
C10.22.1 General Requirements
C10.22.2 Performance Requirements
C10.22.3 Construction
C10.23 2 kW Electric Toaster
C10.23.1 General Requirements
C10.23.2 Performance Requirements
C10.23.3 Construction
C10.24 Electric Hand/Face Dryer
C10.24.1 General Requirements
Table of Contents EE_GS
Page 17 of 22 2007 Edition
 C10.24.2 Performance Requirements
C10.24.3 Construction
C10.25 Blank
C10.26 Wall Clock Battery-operated
C10.26.1 General Requirements
C10.26.2 Performance Requirements
C10.26.3 Construction
C10.27 Electric Dry Iron
C10.27.1 General Requirements
C10.27.2 Performance Requirements
C10.27.3 Construction
C10.28 Vacuum Cleaner
C10.28.1 General Requirements
C10.28.2 Performance Requirements
C10.28.3 Construction
C10.29 Floor Polisher
C10.29.1 General Requirements
C10.29.2 Performance Requirements
C10.29.3 Construction
C10.30 7-Litres and 9-Litres Dehumidifier
C10.30.1 General Requirements
C10.30.2 Performance Requirements
C10.30.3 Construction
C10.31 Room Cooler
C10.31.1 Type of Room Cooler
C10.31.2 General Requirements
C10.31.3 Performance Requirements
C10.31.4 Construction
C10.32 Refrigerator
C10.32.1 Type of Refrigerator
C10.32.2 General Requirements
C10.32.3 Performance Requirements
C10.32.4 Construction

SECTION C11 LOW VOLTAGE CUBICLE SWITCHBOARD

C11.1 General
C11.2 Design Requirements
C11.3 Performance Requirements
C11.4 Construction and Finish
C11.5 Electricity Characteristics of the Switchboard
C11.6 Service Conditions
C11.7 Busbars, Wiring and Earthing
C11.8 Circuit Breakers, Fuseswitches and Automatic Changeover
Switches
C11.9 Metering, Protective Relays and Indicating Lamps
C11.10 Supply Company Metering
C11.11 Labels
C11.12 Cable Arrangements
C11.13 Automatic Interlocking Facility
C11.14 Ancillary Equipment
C11.15 Operation Instruction/Drawing at the Main Switch Room

Table of Contents EE_GS

Page 18 of 22 2007 Edition
 C11.16 Inspection and Testing for Low Voltage Cubicle Switchboard
Installation
C11.17 Requirements during Maintenance Period

SECTION C12 DIESEL GENERATING SET INSTALLATION

C12.1 Requirements of Diesel Generating Sets

C12.1.1 Generating Set Rating
C12.1.2 General Requirements of Diesel Engine
C12.1.3 General Requirements of Alternator
C12.1.4 Starting System
C12.1.5 Electrical Loads
C12.1.6 Suitability for Cold Starting and Step Load
Acceptance
C12.1.7 Radio Interference Suppression
C12.1.8 Painting
C12.1.9 Baseframe Assembly
C12.1.10 Welding
C12.1.11 Structural Steel
C12.2 Construction of Control Cubicle
C12.3 Operation Requirement
C12.3.1 Automatic Operation
C12.3.2 Protection
C12.4 Control Requirement
C12.4.1 Instruments and Functions for Control Cubicle
C12.4.2 Interfacing with CCMS System
C12.5 Installation of Diesel Generating Sets
C12.5.1 Position
C12.5.2 Guards and Insulations
C12.5.3 Air-ducts
C12.5.4 Engine Exhaust System
C12.5.5 Electrical Works
C12.6 Engine Cooling System Using Remote Radiator
C12.6.1 General
C12.6.2 Remote Radiators
C12.6.3 Heat Exchangers
C12.6.4 Water Circulating Pumps
C12.6.5 Expansion Tank
C12.6.6 Pipework and Valve
C12.6.7 Hydraulic Test
C12.6.8 Power Supply and Control System
C12.7 Fuel Supply System
C12.7.1 Underground Horizontal Fuel Storage Tank
C12.7.2 Daily Services Fuel Tank
C12.7.3 Fuel transfer Pumping System
C12.7.4 Pipeworks and Fittings
C12.7.5 Diesel Fuel Level Switches
C12.8 Acoustic Treatment Installation
C12.8.1 Performance Requirements
C12.8.2 Scope of Work
C12.8.3 Installation of the Acoustic Treatment System
C12.9 Exhaust Fan for Emergency Generator Room
C12.10 Lifting Hoist
Table of Contents EE_GS
Page 19 of 22 2007 Edition
 C12.11 Warning Sign
C12.12 Schematic Diagrams
C12.13 Testing
C12.13.1 Testing of Diesel Generating Sets
C12.13.2 Testing of Control Cubicle
C12.13.3 Testing of Daily Service Tank, Fuel Storage Tank
and Pipework
C12.13.4 Testing of Noise Control System
C12.13.5 Testing of Exhaust Fan
C12.14 Submission to the Authorities

SECTION C13 HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR AND EQUIPMENT

C13.1 High Voltage – General

C13.2 High Voltage – Electric Motors
C13.2.1 Performance Requirements
C13.2.2 Enclosure
C13.2.3 Thermal Insulation & Characteristics
C13.2.4 Motor Stators & Windings
C13.2.5 Rotor
C13.2.6 Bearings
C13.2.7 Motor Foundation
C13.2.8 Provision for Cabling and Termination
C13.2.9 Motor Termination Boxes
C13.2.10 Markings and Data Plates
C13.2.11 Temperature Detectors for Motor Protection
C13.3 High Voltage – Motor Control Switchboards
C13.3.1 General Requirements
C13.2.2 General Construction
C13.3.3 Primary Busbars and Connections
C13.3.4 Circuit Breakers
C13.3.5 Earthing and Earthing Devices
C13.3.6 Testing Facilities
C13.3.7 Mechanical Indication
C13.3.8 Auxiliary Switches
C13.3.9 Anti-Condensation Heaters
C13.3.10 Current Transformers
C13.3.11 Voltage Transformers
C13.3.12 Cables Boxes
C13.3.13 Protective Relays
C13.3.14 Control and Timer Relays
C13.3.15 Indicating Instruments
C13.3.16 Labels and Warning Notice
C13.3.17 Ancillary Equipment
C13.3.18 Operation Diagram
C13.4 High Voltage – Auto-transformers
C13.4.1 General
C13.4.2 Rating
C13.4.3 Insulation
C13.4.4 Transformer Windings
C13.4.5 Tap Changers
C13.4.6 Internal Earthing of Transformers
C13.4.7 Enclosure
Table of Contents EE_GS
Page 20 of 22 2007 Edition
 C13.4.8 Finishes
C13.4.9 Rating Plates and Diagrams
C13.4.10 Cable Boxes
C13.5 High Voltage – Power Factor Correction Capacitors
C13.6 High Voltage – Power Cables
C13.6.1 General
C13.6.2 Cross-Linked Polyethylene (XLPE) Cables
C13.6.3 Conductors
C13.6.4 Cable Terminations

PART D - INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING DURING

CONSTRUCTION PERIOD

SECTION D1 GENERAL REQUIREMENT

D1.1 General Requirement

SECTION D2 ROUTING INSPECTION

D2.1 Off-site Routine Inspection and Functional Test
D2.2 Inspection of Materials and Equipment Delivered to Site
D2.3 Visual Inspection of Installation
D2.4 Inspection and Functional Test of Installed Works

SECTION D3 HANDOVER INSPECTION

SECTION D4 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

D4.1 General
D4.2 Testing and Commissioning Procedure
D4.3 Testing of Emergency Lighting, Exit Sign and Emergency
Generator Installations

Table of Contents EE_GS

Page 21 of 22 2007 Edition
PART E - TRAINING, INSPECTION, ATTENDANCE AND
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DURING
MAINTENANCE PERIOD

SECTION E1 TRAINING TO USERS AND OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE AGENTS

E1.1 Particulars of Training Course and Training Schedule

SECTION E2 EMERGENCY SERVICES AND ATTENDANCE TO FAULT

CALLS

E2.1 Requirements on Response Time

E2.2 Monitoring Mechanism on Contractor’s Performance
E2.3 Follow Up Action after Emergency and Fault Cases

SECTION E3 INSPECTION, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

REQUIREMENTS

E3.1 Maintenance Schedule

E3.2 Monitoring Mechanism on Contractor’s Performance
E3.3 Final Inspection before the End of Maintenance Period
E3.4 Final Inspection before the End of Maintenance Period for
Low Voltage Cubicle Switchboard

SECTION E4 COMPLETION OF OUTSTANDING AND DEFECTIVE WORKS

ANNEX I LIST OF TECHNICAL STANDARDS QUOTED IN THIS

GENERAL SPECIFICATION

Table of Contents EE_GS

Page 22 of 22 2007 Edition
 PART A – SCOPE AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION A1

SCOPE OF SPECIFICATION

A1.1 INSTALLATION TO COMPLY WITH THIS GENERAL

SPECIFICATION

The electrical installation shall comply with this General Specification which
details the intrinsic properties (including materials and workmanship) of the
installation, in so far as it is not overridden by the General Conditions of
Contract, Special Conditions of Contract, Particular Specification for the Works,
Drawings and/or written instructions of the Architect.

A1.2 SCOPE OF THE WORKS

This General Specification, Particular Specification, Tender Equipment

Schedule and Drawings detail the performance requirements of the Works. The
Works to be carried out in accordance with this General Specification shall
include the installation and supply of all materials necessary to form a complete
installation including any necessary tests, adjustments, commissioning and
maintenance as prescribed and all other incidental sundry components together
with the necessary labour for installing such components, for the proper
operation of the installation.

A1.3 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS

In this General Specification, the following words or expressions shall have the
meanings assigned to them except when the context otherwise requires:

A1.3.1 Terms and Definitions

Architect The Architect or the Maintenance Surveyor or the

Supervising Officer as defined in the Contract.

Building The contractor employed by the Employer for the

Contractor execution of the Works as defined in the Contract or
the contractor separately employed by the Employer
to execute the builder’s work associated with the
Works as appropriate.

BS British Standards, including British Standard

Specifications and British Standard Codes of Practice,
published by the British Standards Institution.

BSB Building Services Branch of the Architectural

Services Department, the Government of the Hong
Kong Special Administrative Region.
Section A1 EE_GS
Page 1 of 3 2007 Edition
BS EN European Standard adopted as British Standard

Contract The Contract defined in the General Conditions of

Contract for the Works or the Sub-contract defined in
the Specialist Sub-contract for the Works or the Sub-
contract defined in the Nominated Sub-contract for
the Works as appropriate

Contractor The contractor employed by the Employer or the

Specialist Sub-contractor employed by the Building
Contractor or the Nominated Sub-contractor
nominated by the Architect for the execution of the
Works as appropriate

CSA Cross-sectional area of a conductor

Electricity Supplier A person or organization who generates, supplies and

sells electricity at low and high voltages for use in an
electrical installation

EMSD Electrical and Mechanical Services Department, the

Government of the Hong Kong Special
Administrative Region

EN European Standards prepared by European

Committee for Electrotechnical Standardisation or
European Committee for Electrotechnical
Commission Publication

FSD The Fire Services Department, the Government of the

Hong Kong Special Administrative Region

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

IET The Institution of Engineering and Technology, U.K.,

previously the Institution of Electrical Engineers,
U.K.

ISO International Organisation for Standardization

Standard Drawings The drawings for reference purpose prepared by BSB

to show detailed arrangements of the common
standard installations

Tender The Contractor’s tender for the Works Contract or the

Specialist Sub-contractor’s tender for the Works
Specialist Sub-contract or the Nominated Sub-
contractor’s tender for the Works Nominated Sub-
contract as appropriate

Section A1 EE_GS
Page 2 of 3 2007 Edition
A1.4 SINGULAR AND PLURAL

Words importing the singular only also include the plural and vice versa where
the context requires.

Section A1 EE_GS
Page 3 of 3 2007 Edition
 SECTION A2

STATUTORY OBLIGATIONS AND OTHER REGULATIONS

A2.1 STATUTORY OBLIGATIONS AND OTHER REQUIREMENTS

The electrical installation shall comply with the following:

A2.1.1 Statutory Obligations

(a) Electricity Ordinance, Chapter 406, and other subsidiary

legislation made under the Ordinance;

(b) Waste Disposal Ordinance, Chapter 354 and other subsidiary

legislation made under the Ordinance; and

(c) Environmental Impact Assessment Ordinance, Chapter 499

and other subsidiary legislation made under the Ordinance.

A.2.1.2 Other Requirements

(a) Code of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations

issued by Electrical and Mechanical Services Department, the
Government of the HKSAR;

(b) IEC 60364 series for Low-voltage Electrical Installations or

Electrical Installations of Building;

(c) Electricity Supplier Requirements;

The Supply Rules and other requirements issued by electricity

suppliers;

(d) IEC, ISO, EN, BS EN and BS;

(e) Fire Services Department Requirements;

The current requirements of FSD, including those specified in

the FSD Circular Letters and the current edition of the “Codes
of Practice for Minimum Fire Service Installations and
Equipment and Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of
Installations and Equipment”;

(f) Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency of Electrical

Installations, 2007 Edition, issued by Electrical and
Mechanical Services Department, the Government of the
HKSAR; and

Section A2 EE_GS
Page 1 of 2 2007 Edition
 (g) Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency of Lighting
Installations, 2007 Edition, issued by Electrical and
Mechanical Services Department, the Government of the
HKSAR.

A2.1.3 Safety Requirements

(a) Occupational Safety and Health Ordinance, Chapter 509, and

other subsidiary legislation made under the Ordinance;

(b) Factories and Industrial Undertakings Ordinance, Chapter 59,

and other subsidiary legislation made under the Ordinance;

(c) Public Health and Municipal Service Ordinance, Chapter 132,

and other subsidiary legislation made under the Ordinance;

(d) Construction Site (Safety) Regulations;

(e) Construction Site Safety Manual issued by Environmental,

Transport and Works Bureau, the Government of the HKSAR;

(f) Electricity Ordinance, Chapter 406 and relevant Code of

Practices;

(g) Code of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations

issued by Electrical and Mechanical Services Department, the
Government of the HKSAR;

(h) IEC 60364-7-704 Ed. 2.0:2005: Low-voltage Eelectrical

Installations – Part 7-704: Requirements for Special
Installations or Locations - Construction and Demolition Site
Installations;

A2.1.4 Technical Standards

BS, BS EN, ISO Standards, IEC Standards, Codes of Practice, etc.

shall be deemed to include all amendments, revisions and standards
superseding the standards listed herein, which are current at the
closing date of the tender of the Contract unless otherwise specified.

A summary of technical standards quoted in this General

Specification to which the Works shall comply with is listed in
Annex I.

A2.2 CASE OF CONFLICT

The documents forming the Contract are to be taken as mutually explanatory of

one another but in case of ambiguities or discrepancies the same shall be
explained by the Architect who shall issue to the Contractor instructions
clarifying such ambiguities or discrepancies.

Section A2 EE_GS
Page 2 of 2 2007 Edition
 SECTION A3

EXECUTION OF WORKS

A3.1 THE INTERNATIONAL SYSTEM OF UNITS (SI)

The International System of Units (System International d’Unites) of weights

and measures shall be used for all materials, equipment and measurements.

A3.2 PROGRAMME OF WORKS

The Contractor shall submit to the Architect a detailed programme of the Works
within 4 weeks from the acceptance of his Tender showing the intended method,
stages and order of work execution in coordination with the building
construction programme, together with the duration he estimated for each and
every stage of the Works. The programme shall include at least the following:

(a) Dates for the placement of orders for equipment and materials;

(b) Expected completion dates for builder’s work requirements, i.e. when
work site needs to be ready;

(c) Delivery dates of equipment and materials to Site;

(d) Dates of commencement and completion of every stage of the Works in

line with the building construction programme, i.e. each floor level
and/or zone area;

(e) Dates of documents/drawings submissions to relevant Government

departments to obtain the necessary approvals;

(f) Dates of requirement of temporary facilities necessary for testing and

commissioning, e.g. electricity supply, water and town gas;

(g) Dates of completion, testing and commissioning; and

(h) Short term programmes showing the detailed work schedules of coming
weeks and months shall also be provided to the Architect. Programmes
shall be regularly updated to reflect the actual progress and to meet the
Contractor’s obligations under the Contract.

In addition, detailed submission schedules for installation drawings, equipment

and testing and commissioning shall be submitted to the Architect for approval.
The formats and information to be included in the schedules shall be as required
by the Architect.

Section A3 EE_GS
Page 1 of 5 2007 Edition
A3.3 BUILDER’S WORK

All builder’s work including openings or holes through building structure or

partition walls; trenches, ducts and cutting; and all plinths, concrete bases,
supports, ducts, etc. required for the installation will be carried out as part of the
building works by the Building Contractor at the expense of the Employer
provided that the Contractor has submitted full details of such requirements
within a reasonable time to the Architect for approval, so that due consideration
may be given before the Building Contractor commences the building works in
accordance with the building programme in the areas concerned. After
obtaining the said approval of the Architect, the Contractor is required to mark
out at the relevant locations of the Site the exact positions and sizes of all such
works and to provide detailed information of such works to the Building
Contractor to facilitate him to carry out the builder’s works as the works proceed.

All ‘cutting-away’ and ‘making-good’ as required to facilitate the Contractor’s

works will be carried out by the Building Contractor, except for minor
provisions required for the fixing of screws, raw plugs, redhead bolts, etc. which
shall be carried out by the Contractor. The Contractor shall mark out on Site
and/or supply drawings of all ‘cutting-away’ to the Building Contractor within a
reasonable time.

All expenses properly incurred and losses suffered by the Employer as a result
of the Contractor’s failure to comply with the above requirements are
recoverable by the Employer from the Contractor.

The Contractor shall ensure that such works are essential for the execution of the
Works. In the event that any of such works is proved to be non-essential,
unnecessary and/or abortive, the Contractor shall bear the full cost of such
works including but not limited to any unnecessary or incorrect ‘cutting-away’
and making-good and shall reimburse the Employer for all cost incurred in this
connection.

Upon completion of the builder’s works by the Building Contractor, the

Contractor shall forthwith check and examine that all builder’s works so
executed have been completed in accordance with his requirements. If at any
time it becomes apparent to the Contractor that any builder’s works completed
by the Building Contractor does not comply with his requirements in any respect
whatsoever, the Contractor shall forthwith give notice in writing to the Architect
and specify in details the extents and effects of such non-compliance in that
notice. The Contractor is deemed to have satisfied with the builder’s works
after a period of 14 days from the date of completion of the builder’s works if
the above notice is not served to the Architect within such period. All additional
expenditure properly incurred and all loss suffered in this connection by the
Employer in having such works re-executed and rectified shall be recoverable
by the Employer from the Contractor.

Section A3 EE_GS
Page 2 of 5 2007 Edition
A3.4 COORDINATION OF CONTRACT WORKS

The Contractor shall coordinate the Works with those works of the Building
Contractor and any other contractors and sub-contractors.

The Contractor shall note that the Drawings supplied to him only indicate the
approximate locations of the works. He shall make any modification reasonably
required of his programme, work sequence and physical deployment of his work
to suit the outcome of work coordination or as necessary and ensure that all
cleaning, adjustment, test and control points are readily accessible while keeping
the number of loops, cross-overs and the like to a minimum.

The Contractor shall pay particular attention to the building works programme
and shall plan, coordinate and programme his works to suit and adhere to the
building works in accordance with the building programme.

Any significant problems encountered during the coordination work, which are
beyond the Contractor’s control shall promptly be reported to the Architect.

A3.5 COOPERATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS

The Contractor shall cooperate at all times with the Building Contractor and all
other contractors and sub-contractors in order to achieve efficient workflow on
Site.

Any significant problems beyond the Contractor’s control shall promptly be

reported to the Architect.

A3.6 SITE SUPERVISION

The Contractor shall keep on the Site a competent and technically qualified site
supervisor to control, supervise and manage all his Works on Site. The
supervisor shall be vested with suitable powers to receive instructions from the
Architect.

The site supervisor shall be technically competent and have adequate site
experience for the Works. The Contractor shall also refer to the Particular
Specification for other specific requirements, if any, on site supervision.

Approval by the Architect shall be obtained prior to the posting of the supervisor
on Site. The Contractor shall immediately replace the site supervisor whose
experience, skill or competency is, in the opinion of the Architect, found to be
inadequate for the particular work.

Section A3 EE_GS
Page 3 of 5 2007 Edition
A3.7 SAMPLE BOARD

Within 6 weeks of the acceptance of his Tender and prior to the commencement
of Works, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect for approval in a
reasonable time a sample board of essential components proposed to be used in
the Contract.

However, the Contractor may request the Architect in writing for an extension
of time, if 6 weeks are practically insufficient.

Items displayed shall be deemed to be adequate for the Works unless otherwise
clearly indicated. Each sample, with clear numbering and labeling, shall be
firmly fixed onto a rigid wooden or metal board. A list shall also be affixed on
the sample board to show the item description, make and brand, country of
origin and locations of installation (if not generally used). Samples rejected by
the Architect shall be replaced as soon as possible. Upon approval of all items,
the Architect will endorse the list on the sample board and the Contractor shall
deliver the board to the site office for reference.

The board shall contain samples of all ‘compact’ sized materials and accessories
to be used in the Works. Written approval of all samples and technical details
shall be obtained from the Architect before commencement of any installation
work.

In the context of this General Specification the term ‘compact’ means any item
that will fit into a 300 mm cube.

The following items shall be included in the sample board as a minimum.

(a) Conduit and accessories

(b) Trunking and accessories

(c) Cable and accessories

(d) Wiring accessories

A3.8 ADVICE OF ORDER PLACED

The Contractor shall submit copies of all orders placed for major items of
equipment and materials to the Architect for record.

A3.9 RECORD OF MATERIALS DELIVERY

All materials and equipment delivered to Site shall be accurately listed and
recorded in the site record books maintained by the representatives of the
Architect on Site.

Section A3 EE_GS
Page 4 of 5 2007 Edition
 Materials and equipment delivered to Site and paid for in interim payment shall
be the Employer’s property. Such materials and equipment shall not be
removed from Site without the approval of the Architect in writing and
appropriate deduction shall be made in the next interim payment in accordance
with the Contract.

Where the Building Contractor is in overall control of the Site, the Building
Contractor may also be required to record details of all incoming/outgoing
materials. In this case, the Contractor shall comply with the Building
Contractor’s arrangements.

A3.10 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

Unless the responsibility is clearly defined in the Contract that the protection on
Site for delivered equipment, materials and installation is solely by other
contractors, the Contractor shall be responsible for the safe custody of all
materials and equipment as stored or installed by him until finally inspected,
tested and accepted. In addition, the Contractor shall protect all work against
theft, fire, damage or inclement weather and carefully store all materials and
equipment received on Site but not yet installed in a safe and secure place unless
otherwise specified.

All cases of theft and fire must immediately be reported to the police, the
Building Contractor, the Architect and the Architect’s representatives on Site
with full details.

Where necessary the Contractor shall provide lockable steel container or other
equally secure enclosures placed within a securely fenced-in compound
provided by the Building Contractor on Site for the storage of materials and
equipment.

The Contractor shall co-ordinate and arrange with the Building Contractor who
shall provide clean, reasonably finished and lockable secure accommodation for
the storage of sensitive and/or expensive items before installation.

If there is no Building Contractor, all the storage facilities and spaces shall be
provided by the Contractor.

Section A3 EE_GS
Page 5 of 5 2007 Edition
 SECTION A4

DRAWINGS AND MANUALS

A4.1 STANDARD DRAWINGS

There are standard abbreviations, symbols and standard drawings prepared by

BSB to show details of the common standard installations. The Contractor shall
refer to these standards and drawings whenever such are mentioned or specified
in the Drawings or the Particular Specification for the Works. The same
standards shall also be used in the Contractor's as-built drawings, etc., whenever
applicable.

A4.2 DRAWINGS IN ELECTRONIC FORMAT

The Contractor shall provide drawings in electronic format as required in the

following clauses. These drawings shall conform to the latest version of CAD
Standard of Works Projects (CSWP) as posted in the web site of the Works
Branch, Development Bureau and in accordance with the latest version of CAD
Manual for Architectural Services Department Projects. Should any technical
conflict between the CSWP and the CAD Manual arise, the CSWP shall take
precedence.

A4.3 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS

A4.3.1 Drawing Submission Schedule

The Contractor shall submit a detailed installation drawing

submission schedule and programme to the Architect. The Contractor
shall allow reasonable time in the programme for vetting of the
installation drawings by the Architect and for drawing resubmissions
as necessary.

The Contractor shall submit to the Architect a comprehensive

“Submission Schedule” of installation drawings and builder’s work
drawings within 2 weeks after the acceptance of Tender, taking into
account of the overall programme of the Works including any
Specialist Works and works by the utility undertakings. No
equipment shall be delivered to the Site and no works shall be
executed until the installation drawings have been approved by the
Architect. The Contractor shall ensure that installation drawings and
builder’s work drawings are progressively submitted in accordance
with the approved “Submission Schedule”.

The Contractor shall provide at least 6 hard copies and one electronic
copy, unless otherwise specified in the Contract, of the approved
installation drawings to the Architect for distribution.

Section A4 EE_GS
Page 1 of 10 2007 Edition
A4.3.2 Size of Installation Drawings

Drawings submitted by the Contractor shall only be of standard sizes

from A0 to A4 or B1 size as stipulated in ISO 5457:1999.

A4.3.3 Contents of Installation Drawings

The Contractor shall ensure all installation drawings are accurate

representation of the Works, before submitting them to the Architect.
All installation drawings shall be fully dimensioned and suitably
scaled showing construction, sizes, weights, arrangements, operating
clearances and performance characteristics.

Installation drawings shall be dimensioned and showing construction,

sizes, weights, arrangements, operating clearances, performance
characteristics and the necessary builder’s work involved. Installation
drawings for conduit layout shall clearly indicate the proposed
position and size of conduit runs together with the number of cables,
size and circuiting of the cables therein.

A4.3.4 Builder’s Work Drawings

Unless otherwise approved by the Architect, the Contractor shall

submit to the Architect in accordance with the approved “Submission
Schedule”, 6 copies of drawings showing details of all builder’s work
required e.g. the weight and the load on each support of equipment.
Such drawings shall clearly indicate the details and positions of all
openings, holes, trenches, ducts and cutting required and construction
details for plinths and equipment bases.

A4.3.5 Manufacturer’s Shop Drawings

The manufacturer’s shop drawings are drawings for equipment or

plant to be manufactured by a specialist manufacturing supplier in
their own workshops and places away from the Site.

The drawings shall show detailed construction, principal dimensions,

weights and clearances for maintenance, etc. Immediately after
placing of any order or at any event within 4 weeks unless otherwise
approved in writing by the Architect, the Contractor shall forward to
the Architect for comment, 4 copies of manufacturer’s shop drawings
indicating detailed construction, principal dimensions and weights,
clearances for withdrawals and/or cleaning, etc. No work shall
proceed on or off Site unless drawings requiring approval are so
approved in writing by the Architect.

Section A4 EE_GS
Page 2 of 10 2007 Edition
A4.4 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

A4.4.1 Submission of As–built Drawings

The Contractor shall submit 3 sets of the first draft prints of as-built
drawings within 28 days of the issuance of the certificate of
completion to the Architect for checking. The Architect after
checking the above draft prints shall return one set of the marked up
copies of these as-built drawings to the Contractor within 42 days
from the date of submission of the Contractor’s draft prints with
comments. The Contractor shall within a further 28 days from the
date of receiving the Architect’s comments on the draft as-built
drawings re-submit to the Architect for his approval another 3 sets of
the second draft prints of as-built drawings with the Architect’s
comments incorporated. This process of submission and approval
shall continue until the final approval of the Architect on these as-
built drawing is obtained.

The final approved as-built drawings shall be in 3 sets of hard copies

and 3 sets of electronic copies. These shall be submitted within 21
days from the date of final approval. Each electronic copy shall be in
the form of CD-ROM, labelled, with cross reference to a printed list
of files explaining the contents and purpose of each file and supplied
in sturdy plastic containers.

The detailed requirements and the media of as-built drawings set out
in the Preliminaries of the Bills of Quantities or the Specification
Preliminaries shall be followed as appropriate.

A4.4.2 Size of As-built Drawings

As-built drawings shall only be of standard sizes of A0, A1 or B1 size

as stipulated in ISO 5457:1999.

A4.4.3 Content of As-built Drawings

The Contractor shall ensure all as-built drawings are accurate

representation of the Works, before submitting them to the Architect.
The as-built drawings required to be provided by the Contractor for
various types of BS/E&M installations shall include, but not limited
to the following:

(a) Building services layout plans such as ducting arrangement,

trunking arrangement, piping arrangement, etc;

(b) System schematic diagrams, control diagrams and wiring

diagrams;

(c) Concealed work layout plan such as concealed conduit routing,

etc; and

(d) Installation details and assembly drawings such as LV cubicle

switchboard layout, motor control cubicle layout, etc.
Section A4 EE_GS
Page 3 of 10 2007 Edition
 As-built drawings shall show the positions of all conduits, cables,
switchgear, distribution boards, luminaires, lightning protection and
earthing and all other items which have been installed.

A4.4.4 Framed Drawings

The Contractor shall provide framed drawings to each major

switchroom showing the schematic wiring diagrams, tables or charts
to indicate the type and composition of circuits, identification and
location of item of equipment from that switchroom. The framed
drawings shall be fixed to the wall in such a way that it can easily be
removed for reference.

A4.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUAL AND USER

MANUAL

A4.5.1 General

The Contractor shall provide two types of manuals to the Architect

with all changes made to the installation during the course of the
Contract suitably incorporated.

The O&M Manual is for use by the maintenance agent of the

completed installation. It shall contain detailed technical information
covering both operation and maintenance aspects of the installation.

The User Manual seeks to give users of the completed installation an

overview of the essential information of the installation. The contents
of the manual should be concise and succinct for ease of
comprehension by people with a non-technical background.

A4.5.2 Presentation

All manuals shall be written in English, unless otherwise specified.

The text of descriptive parts shall be kept concise while at the same
time ensure completeness. Diagrammatic materials shall also be
supported by comprehensive descriptions.

The manuals shall comprise A4 size loose-leaf and, where necessary,

A3 size folded loose-leaf. The loose-leaves shall be of good quality
paper that is sufficiently opaque to avoid “show-through”. Unless
otherwise specified in the Contract, the manuals shall be bound in
durable loose-leaf four ring binders with hard covers. The manuals
shall have labels or lettering on the front cover and spine. The
Architect’s approval shall be obtained on this at the draft manual
stage. The electronic copy of manuals including the technical
literatures, shall be in PDF format readable by Acrobat Reader
Freeware.

Section A4 EE_GS
Page 4 of 10 2007 Edition
A4.5.3 Checking and Approval

The Contractor shall submit 3 sets of the first draft of O&M Manuals
together with a list of recommended spare parts for one year’s
operation and a list of special tools, both complete with prices to the
Architect for comment within 28 days of the issuance of the
completion certificate.

The Contractor shall submit 2 sets of the first draft of the User
Manual to the Architect for comment at least 56 calendar days before
the date of completion.

The Architect will check the drafts and return them to the Contractor
within 42 days from the date of submission with comments necessary
for a final and approved set of document. The Contractor shall then
make all necessary amendments to the documents and resubmit them
to the Architect within 21 days from the date of receipt of comments.

The Contractor shall submit 4 sets of hard copies (one of which shall
be the original) and one set of electronic copy of the final approved
O&M Manuals in CD-ROM within 21 days from the date of approval
by the Architect.

The Contractor shall submit 2 sets of hard copies and one electronic
copy of the final approved User Manuals in CD-ROM within 21 days
from the date of approval by the Architect.

A4.5.4 Structure and Contents of O&M Manual

The detailed requirements, structure and contents of the O&M

Manual shall be as specified elsewhere in the Contract and shall
include the following information under separate sections where
appropriate:

(a) Project Information

This shall include:

Project title, site address, contract no., contract title,

contractor/sub-contractor name, address, contact persons and
their telephone/fax nos., contract commencement date,
substantial completion date and end date of Maintenance
Period.

(b) System Description

- Type(s) of system(s) and equipment installed;

- Design criteria, design data and parameters;
- Locations of the system and major equipment, and what
they serve;
- Description of operation and functions of the system
and equipment; and

Section A4 EE_GS
Page 5 of 10 2007 Edition
 - General operating conditions, expected performance
and energy and resources consumption where
applicable.

(c) List of Installed Equipment

Schedule of all items of equipment and plant stating the

location, name, model no., manufacturer's serial or reference
no., manufacturer’s design duties and data.

(d) Spare Parts and Special Tools Lists

- List of Spare Parts supplied by the Contractors:

Item descriptions, supplied quantities, model nos.,
manufacturer’s serial or reference nos. and storage
locations; and

- Recommended Spare Parts List and Special Tools List:

Manufacturers’/suppliers’ recommendations for spare
parts and special tools with item description, unit rate,
recommended stock quantities as well as the agents for
the spare parts and special tools.

(e) Manufacturers’ Certificates/Guarantees

- Manufacturers’ certificates such as factory test

certificates, laboratory test reports and guarantees and
any others where required for the equipment and plants,
etc.; and

- Originals of Statutory Inspection Certificate for various

installations, including:

Originals of Work Completion Certificate – Form No.

BS/GN.69.

(f) Safety Precautions for Operation and Maintenance

State, where applicable, hazard warnings and safety

precautions of which the operation and maintenance staff need
to be aware:

- mandatory requirements relating to safety;

- known hazards against which protection measures shall
be taken; and
- known features or operational characteristics of the
installed equipment or systems which may cause hazard
and the related safety precautions.

Section A4 EE_GS
Page 6 of 10 2007 Edition
(g) Operation Instructions

Instructions for the safe and efficient operation, under both

normal and emergency conditions, of the installed system
which shall comprise:

- an outline of the operating mode;

- control logic and data (sequence, effect, limits of
capability, modes and set points);
- procedures and sequences for start-up and shut-down;
- interlocks between equipment/system;
- calling on of stand-by equipment;
- precautions necessary to overcome known hazards;
- means by which any potentially hazardous equipment
can be made safe;
- estimation of energy consumption and energy costs;
- forms for recording plant running hours, energy
consumption and energy costs; and
- operating data such as running current, operating
pressure, operating flow rates etc.

(h) Maintenance

(i) Maintenance instructions

Manufacturers’ and the Contractor's recommendations

and instructions for the maintenance of the installed
equipment. Clear distinction should be made between
planned tasks (preventive maintenance) and fault-repair
tasks (corrective maintenance). Instructions shall be
given on each of the following, as appropriate:

- nature of deterioration, and the defects to be looked

for;
- isolation and return to service of plant and
equipment
- dismantling and reassembly;
- replacement of components and assemblies;
- dealing with hazards which may arise during
maintenance;
- adjustments, calibration and testing; and
- special tools, test equipment and ancillary services.

(ii) Maintenance schedules

Proposed maintenance schedules for all the preventive

maintenance tasks identified above. The schedules
shall be based on both manufacturers' recommendations
and other authoritative sources (e.g. statutory or
mandatory requirements) and should include:

Section A4 EE_GS
Page 7 of 10 2007 Edition
 - routine servicing;
- inspections;
- tests and examinations;
- adjustments;
- calibration; and
- overhaul.

The frequency of each task may be expressed as

specific time intervals, running hours or number of
completed operations as appropriate. Collectively, the
schedules will form a complete maintenance cycle,
repeated throughout the whole working life of the
installation.

(i) Drawing Lists

- A complete list of as-built drawings identified with

drawing number/reference;
- A complete list of manufacturers’ shop drawings with
drawing number/reference, where applicable; and
- A brief description of CD-ROM for these drawings.

(j) Technical Literatures

A complete set of manufacturers' literatures for all the plant

and equipment installed in the system. The contents of these
literatures shall cover the following areas where applicable:

- description of equipment with model numbers

highlighted;
- performance-behavioural characteristics of the
equipment;
- applications - suitability for use;
- factory/laboratory test reports, detailed drawings,
circuit diagrams;
- methods of operation and control;
- operation instructions;
- cleaning and maintenance requirements;
- plants, materials and space required for maintenance;
- protective measures and safety precautions for
operation and maintenance; and
- part lists.

(k) Contact addresses and telephone numbers of suppliers of

major equipment.

Section A4 EE_GS
Page 8 of 10 2007 Edition
A4.5.5 Structure and Contents of User Manual

The detailed requirements, structure and contents of the User Manual

shall include, where applicable, the following information:

(a) Project Information

This shall include:

Project title, site address, contract no., contract title, contract
commencement date, substantial completion date and end date
of Maintenance Period.

(b) System Description

- Type(s) of system(s) and equipment installed, and their

purposes;
- Locations of major plant rooms and riser ducts;
- Brief description of the operation and functions of the
systems and equipment; and
- Listing of set points which can be adjusted by the user
to suit their operation needs.

(c) Schedule of Major Plant Rooms and Installed Equipment

- Schedule of major plant rooms and riser ducts including

their locations; and
- Schedule of major equipment and plants including their
locations and serving areas.

(d) Safety Precautions for Operation

Any safety precautions and warnings signals that the users

shall be aware of in the daily operation of the various systems
and equipment in the installation including:

- mandatory requirements relating to safety;

- features or operational characteristics of the installed
systems or equipment which may cause hazard and the
related safety - precautions;
- protective measures and safety precautions for
operation; and
- list of warning signals and the related meanings that the
user shall be aware of and the actions to be taken.

(e) Operation Instructions

Instructions for the safe and efficient operation, under both

normal and emergency conditions, of the installed system
which shall comprise:

Section A4 EE_GS
Page 9 of 10 2007 Edition
 - an outline of the operating mode;
- step by step operation instructions for systems and
equipment that are to be operated by the user, including
at least procedures for start-up and shut-down;
- means by which any potentially hazardous situation can
be made safe; and
- cleaning and basic maintenance procedures.

(f) List of Statutory Periodic Inspections and Tests

A schedule of periodic inspections and tests that owner and/or

user of the installation have to arrange to achieve compliance
with the requirements stipulated in the relevant Laws of Hong
Kong. The frequency of such inspections and tests shall be
expressed in specific time intervals.

(g) Drawings

A set of selected as-built drawings which shall be able to

illustrate to the user the general layout of the completed
installation.

(h) Photographs

A set of photographs with suitable captions to illustrate to the

user the appearance and locations of devices which require
their setting and operation.

A4.5.6 Intellectual Property Rights

The Government shall become the absolute and exclusive owner of

the O&M Manuals and the User Manual and all intellectual property
rights subsisting therein free from all encumbrances.

In the event that the beneficial ownership of any intellectual property

rights subsisting in the above Manuals are vested in anyone other than
the Contractor, the Contactor shall procure that the beneficial owner
shall grant to the Employer a transferable, non-exclusive, royalty-free
and irrevocable licence (carrying the right to grant sub-licences) to
utilize the intellectual property rights in the manuals for the purposes
contemplated in the Contract. For the avoidance of doubt such
purposes shall, but not limited to, include providing free copying of
the materials in the manuals by any subsequent owner or user of the
installation, and/or any party responsible for the operation and
maintenance of the installation in connection with any subsequent
alteration, extension, operation and maintenance of the installation.

Section A4 EE_GS
Page 10 of 10 2007 Edition
 PART B – INSTALLATION METHODOLOGY
SECTION B1

GENERAL

B1.1 WORKMANSHIP

B1.1.1 Tradesmen

All electrical works shall be carried out by or under the direct

supervision of “registered electrical workers” of the appropriate grade
in accordance with the Electricity Ordinance.

All tradesmen shall be experienced in the trade and the work carried
out shall be consistent with the good practice in Hong Kong and to
the satisfaction of the Architect.

B1.1.2 Tool and Instrument

Proper tools shall be used for carrying out the electrical installations.
Adequate and accurate testing/measuring instruments shall be used to
demonstrate compliance of the electrical installations with the
relevant specifications and regulations. The Architect has the right to
stop any work on which the correct tools and/or instruments are not
being used.

Instruments used for acceptance tests shall be calibrated at

appropriate intervals and as required in the Contract for a particular
project.

B1.1.3 Safety on Site

Works shall be carried out in such a manner as to comply with all the
ordinances, regulations, etc., as listed in Clause A2.1 together with
any amendments made thereto.

B1.2 LABEL AND NOTICE

B1.2.1 Inscription of Label and Engraving

Inscription of label and engraving shall be in both Chinese and

English characters. Details shall be submitted to the Architect for
agreement prior to engraving.

Section B1 EE_GS
Page 1 of 4 2007 Edition
B1.2.2 Material for Label

Label shall be of white plastic with black or red lettering engraved as

required. Where distribution board is fitted with labels provided by
the manufacturer of the distribution board, these labels may be used
in lieu of the white plastic label provided that they are of equivalent
quality and approved by the Architect.

B1.2.3 Fixing of Label

Label shall be fixed to switchgear and distribution board by screws.

Where drilling and tapping of the equipment is impracticable,
approved means of glue fastening may be used subject to prior
approval of the Architect.

B1.2.4 Engraving for Electrical Accessory

The front plate of each switch socket or control switch feeding an

essential circuit or a fixed electrical appliance, such as water heater,
cooker, wall-mounted fan, wall-mounted radiator, room cooler, etc.,
shall be engraved according to the appliance being controlled.
Details of the inscription shall be submitted to the Architect for
approval.

Additional engraving to other electrical accessories will be specified

in the Particular Specification and/or order by the Architect.

B1.2.5 Warning Notice

Warning notices shall be provided as required by the Electricity

Ordinance and the Code of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring)
Regulations. In addition, the following warning notices in Chinese
and English shall be provided at the appropriate positions:

(a) A label having minimum size of 65 x 50 mm marked with

the words ‘DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE’ in Chinese
characters and English lettering of not less than 5 mm high to
be fixed on every container or enclosure of ancillary
equipment for discharge lighting installations operating at
voltages exceeding “low voltage”.

(b) A label to indicate the maximum voltage present in an item

of equipment or enclosure within which a voltage exceeding
250V exists, or items or equipment or enclosure which can
be reached simultaneously and a voltage exceeding 250V
exists between simultaneously accessible terminals or other
fixed live parts: such voltages are normally not expected to
exist with the equipment or enclosure.

Section B1 EE_GS
Page 2 of 4 2007 Edition
 (c) A label to be fixed in such a position that any person gaining
access to the live parts of an item of equipment or enclosure,
which are not capable of being isolated by a single device
and not provided with an interlocking arrangement to isolate
all circuits concerned, will be adequately warned of the need
of taking special precautionary measures to use the
appropriate isolating devices.

(d) A label with the words ‘FOR EQUIPMENT OUTDOORS’

for each socket outlet intended to supply equipment used at
outdoors or area outside the same equipotential zone.

B1.2.6 Other Labels and Notices

Other labels and notices as required by the Electricity Ordinance or

the Code of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations shall be
provided where appropriate.

B1.3 GUARD AND RAILING FOR MOVING OR ROTATING PARTS OF

EQUIPMENT

All moving or rotating parts of equipment shall be provided with an approved

guard and railing complying with the Factories and Industrial Undertakings
(Guarding and Operation of Machinery) Regulations, together with any
amendments made thereto.

Guards shall be of rigid and substantial construction and shall consist of heavy
mild steel angle frames, hinged and latched with either heavy galvanised mild
steel wire crimped mesh securely fastened to frames or galvanised sheet metal
of 1.2 mm minimum thickness. All apertures shall be such that finger access to
dangerous part is not possible. All sections shall be bolted or riveted. Railings
shall be made of 32 mm diameter galvanised mild steel pipe and railing fittings.

B1.4 IDENTIFICATION OF CABLE AND CONDUIT

Cables for control circuits, inter-communication circuits, signalling circuits, and

bell wiring shall be identified as required for each particular circumstance.
Cables for power and lighting circuits shall be identified in accordance with IEC
60364-1:2005 and the associated parts of the standard.

Electrical conduits, where required to be distinguished from pipelines or other

services, shall use orange (BS color reference No. 06 E 51 to BS 4800:1989) as
the basic identification color in compliance with BS 1710:1984.

B1.5 FIXING TO WOODEN PLUG

Screws shall not be fixed to wooden plugs unless otherwise specified. Proper
methods of fixing, such as expanding plugs of adequate size or other purpose-
designed fixing devices approved by the Architect, shall be used.

Section B1 EE_GS
Page 3 of 4 2007 Edition
B1.6 PAINTING OF METAL WORK

Painting shall be carried in accordance with the appropriate Clauses in the

current “General Specification for Building” issued by the Architectural
Services Department, the Government of the HKSAR and any amendments or
revisions made thereto.

Agreement on the type, brand and color of the paint to be used shall be obtained
from the Architect before the work commences. Undercoat and finish coat shall
be of properly matching type and the finish coat shall give a hard gloss finish or
as required.

B1.7 WATER PROOFING

Where any work pierces the waterproofing including waterproof structure, the
method of installation shall be as agreed by the Architect.

B1.8 PROVISION OF SPARE FUSES IN MAIN SWITCH ROOM

The Contractor shall supply and install one complete set of spare fuses for each
rating of switchfuse, fuseswitch and fuses in control circuit installed. The spare
fuses shall be hung on a wooden board fixed at a convenient position inside the
main switch room.

The wooden board shall be smoothed on the front face and edges, and shall be
painted to the approval of the Architect.

Section B1 EE_GS
Page 4 of 4 2007 Edition
 SECTION B2

INSTALLATION OF WIRING SYSTEMS

B2.1 WIRING IN STEEL CONDUIT SYSTEM

B2.1.1 Type of Cable

Wiring system installed in conduits shall be non-sheathed copper

cables. Cables for 3-phase circuit shall be 450/750V grade or above.

B2.1.2 Concealed Steel Conduit System

Unless otherwise specified in the Particular Specification or on the

Drawings, conduits shall be concealed within walls, floor slabs, false
ceilings, raised floor or other suitable space.

Chase for conduit to be concealed in wall, column or beam shall be

vertical or horizontal.

B2.1.3 Surface Conduit System

Unless otherwise specified in the Particular Specification or on the

Drawings, surface conduit shall be run in a vertical or horizontal
direction.

Conduit boxes, adaptable boxes and metal boxes for accessories shall
be securely fixed to walls, ceilings or other substantial parts of a
structure by means of suitable brass screws correctly spaced. The
fixing of these boxes shall be independent of the fixing of the
associated conduits.

Particular precaution shall be taken in situations where the high

temperature cables may be touched, or where they may touch other
materials.

B2.1.4 Minimum Size of Conduit

The minimum outside diameter of any conduit shall be 20 mm.

B2.1.5 Flexible Conduit

Flexible conduit shall be used as short as possible. The length of

flexible conduit shall be not more than 1 m for general applications or
2 m inside false ceiling and raised floor. (Note: PVC pliable conduit
may be used in place of steel flexible conduit wherever appropriate.
In such case, requirements in Clause B2.3 shall apply.)

Section B2 EE_GS
Page 1 of 19 2007 Edition
B2.1.6 Conduit Continuity

The steel conduit installation shall be mechanically and electrically

continuous throughout and effectively earthed.

Where the circuit protective conductor is formed by the conduits, the

terminal of a socket outlet shall be connected by a separate circuit
protective conductor having the same cross-sectional area and type as
the live conductor to an earth terminal incorporated in the associated
metal box or enclosure.

Flexible conduit shall not be used as a circuit protective conductor. A

separate circuit protective conductor having the same cross-sectional
area and type as the largest live conductor shall be drawn into the
flexible conduit for earth continuity. This circuit protective conductor
shall be fixed to an earth terminal incorporated, at each end, in the
metal boxes or enclosures onto which the ends of the flexible conduit
are locked.

B2.1.7 Joint in Conduits

Joint in steel conduits shall be made by means of a solid coupler into

which the adjacent ends of the two conduits shall be inserted to
approximately half into it and screwed up tightly in order to make the
conduit run mechanically and electrically continuous. No threads on
either conduit shall be exposed.

Running couplings shall not be used. In case where such a coupling

cannot be avoided, approval from the Architect must be obtained
before it is adopted. In this case, the coupler shall be screwed up
tightly onto the short threaded portion of one conduit, the threaded
portion of which shall project approximately half way into the length
of the coupler. The threaded portion of the mating conduit shall also
project approximately half way into the coupler. Electrical continuity
shall be ensured by tightening up a hexagon locknut against the
coupler. Any exposed threads on either conduit shall be painted with
at least two coats of anti-rust paint.

B2.1.8 Provision of Adaptable Box

An adequate number of suitably sized adaptable boxes shall be

provided in all conduit runs to enable cables to be drawn in and out
easily without damage. Adaptable boxes shall be provided
immediately after every two bends, or after a bend plus a maximum
straight run of 10m, or after a maximum straight run of 15m.

B2.1.9 Spacing between Conduits

Adjacent or parallel conduits cast in concrete shall be separated by a

spacing of not less than 25 mm so as to allow concrete aggregate to
pass and set between them.

Section B2 EE_GS
Page 2 of 19 2007 Edition
B2.1.10 Termination of Conduits at Metal Casing of Equipment

Where a steel conduit terminates at a metal casing, a coupler and a

brass male bush shall be used. The brass male bush shall be screwed
into the coupler or adaptor from the inside of the metal casing through
a clearance hole drilled in the metal casing to suit the bush. Both the
conduit and the bush shall be screwed tightly into the coupler or
adaptor so as to grip the metal casing securely for mechanical and
electrical continuity. Threads on the steel conduit shall be at least half
the coupler length. Connection between flexible conduit and the
adaptor shall be securely fixed. No threads on the metal casing shall
be allowed.

In case of using flexible steel conduit, a brass adaptor together with a

brass male bush shall be used. The brass adaptor shall comprise two
parts, an inner core and an outer ferrule. The inner core shall screw
into the bore of the conduit together with an outer ferrule which caps
off the end of the conduit, so that the adaptor can provide an
extremely strong joint. The core shall lock against the outer ferrule
and isolate any sharp cut edges in the conduit.

Where a metal casing is painted or enamelled, the electrical

continuity between the conduit and the casing shall be achieved by
means of a separate circuit protective conductor of adequate size,
connecting the earth terminal of the conduit and an earth terminal
inside the metal casing. A copper earthing piece placed between the
bush and the metal casing may be used as an earthing terminal of the
conduit. Neither the paint nor the enamel shall be damaged or
removed in order to achieve the electrical continuity.

B2.1.11 Conduit Bend

Conduit shall not be bent more than 90 degrees. The internal radius of
the bend shall not be less than 2.5 times the outside diameter of the
conduit.

B2.1.12 Conduit Crossing Expansion Joint

Where a steel conduit crosses an expansion joint, special

arrangements shall be made to allow relative movement to occur on
either side of the expansion joint. A separate circuit protective
conductor (CPC) shall be installed in accordance with Clause B2.3.9
of this specification to maintain an effective electrical continuity
across the expansion joint.

B2.1.13 Use of Extension Piece

An extension piece shall be fitted to a conduit box where the plaster

wall finish (including plaster) is more than 25 mm from the conduit
box. Only extension pieces of the correct depth shall be used. Under
no circumstances shall multiple extension pieces be permitted.

Section B2 EE_GS
Page 3 of 19 2007 Edition
B2.1.14 Prevention of Ingress of Foreign Matters

During the building construction, all open ends of the conduit

termination, which are liable to be filled with water, moisture or other
foreign matters, shall be plugged with approved conduit stopping
plugs; paper, rag or similar materials shall NOT be used for this
purpose. Steel conduit boxes in similar circumstances shall also be
similarly plugged to prevent concrete aggregate or plaster from
entering into the boxes during building construction.

B2.1.15 Prevention of Accumulation of Water or Moisture

The conduits shall be so laid to prevent accumulation of condensed

moisture and the ingress of water in any part of the installation.

Approved type of sealant for the prevention of condensed moisture

shall be applied to ceiling conduit outlets installed in a cooled space
subject to the influx of warm air.

B2.1.16 Conduit Laid Direct in Ground

Steel conduits laid direct in ground or buried in soil shall be painted

with two coats of bituminous paint and wrapped with self-
amalgamating tapes or other wrapping materials for protection against
corrosion and approved by the Architect.

B2.1.17 Fixing of Distance (Spacing) Saddle

Saddles, for the support of surface conduits, shall be provided

throughout the entire route at regular intervals. The spacing between
adjacent saddles for steel conduits shall not be greater than those
given in Table B2.1.17

Each bend of a surface conduit shall be supported by a saddle on

either side of the bend, and the saddles shall be fixed as near to the
bend as practicable.

Saddles shall be fixed with brass screws in expanding plugs or other

purpose-designed fixing devices approved by the Architect.

Table B2.1.17 - Spacing of Supports for Conduit

Maximum distance between supports (m)

Conduit
size Rigid steel Rigid plastic/PVC Pliable/flexible
(mm) conduit conduit conduit

Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical

20 1.75 2.00 1.50 1.75 0.40 0.60

25, 32 2.00 2.25 1.75 2.00 0.60 0.80

Section B2 EE_GS
Page 4 of 19 2007 Edition
B2.1.18 Conduit Installed Outdoors or in Damp Situation

Where steel conduits are installed outdoors or in damp situations, all

conduit fittings and conduit accessories shall not be placed in contact
with other metals with which they are liable to set up electrolytic
action. In addition, where the conduit installation is subject to weather,
the conduit fittings and conduit accessories shall be provided with
weatherproof sealant or other materials to ensure that the installation
is completely weatherproof.

B2.1.19 Swabbing Out of Conduit

Conduits shall be swabbed out and free from moisture before wiring
work is to commence. The swabbing operation shall be witnessed by
the authorised representative of the Architect. Only approved draw-in
tape or steel wire of appropriate size and absorbent cloth shall be used.

B2.1.20 Fire Barrier

Where a conduit passes through fire resistant structural elements,

such as walls and floors designated as fire barriers, the opening made
shall be sealed according to the appropriate degree of fire resistance
of the wall and/or floor. In addition, where a conduit is installed in a
channel, duct, ducting, trunking or shaft which pass through such
elements, suitable fire-resistant barriers shall also be provided to
prevent the spread of fire.

B2.1.21 Cable Capacity of Conduit

The number of cables drawn into a conduit shall be such that no

damage will be caused to the cables or to the conduits during their
installation.

In determining the size of the conduit, the “unit system” method shall
be adopted. The sum of all factors for the cables as given in Table
B2.1.21-1 shall NOT be greater than the conduit factor as given on
Table B2.1.21-2.

Section B2 EE_GS
Page 5 of 19 2007 Edition
Table B2.1.21-1 - Cable Factors for Single Core Insulated Copper
Cables

Conductor Cable factors for cables in

cross-sectional conduits Cable factors
area (See Note 2) for cables in
(mm²) For For long runs trunking
(See Note 1) short run or
run with bends
1.0 Solid 22 16 5.8

1.5 Solid 27 22 7.1

1.5 31 22 8.1

2.5 Solid 39 30 10.2

2.5 43 30 11.4

4.0 58 43 15.2

6.0 88 58 22.9

10.0 146 105 36.3

Notes: 1. Unless otherwise noted, all cables are stranded

cables.

2. “Short run” means a straight conduit run not

exceeding 3m long. “Long run” means a straight
conduit run exceeding 3m long.

Section B2 EE_GS
Page 6 of 19 2007 Edition
 Table B2.1.21-2 - Conduit Factors

Length
of Conduit diameter (mm)
conduit
Runs 20 25 32 20 25 32 20 25 32
(m) Straight run Run with one bend Run with 2 bends
1 460 800 1400 303 543 947 286 514 900
1.5 460 800 1400 294 528 923 270 487 857
2 460 800 1400 286 514 900 256 463 818
2.5 460 800 1400 278 500 878 244 442 783
3 460 800 1400 270 487 857 233 422 750
3.5 290 521 911 263 475 837 222 404 720
4 286 514 900 256 463 818 213 388 692
4.5 282 507 889 250 452 800 204 373 667
5 278 500 878 244 442 783 196 358 643
6 270 487 857 233 422 750 182 333 600
7 263 475 837 222 404 720 169 311 563
8 256 463 818 213 388 692 159 292 529
9 250 452 800 204 373 667 149 275 500
10 244 442 783 196 358 643 141 260 474

Notes: 1. The size of conduit, which will satisfactorily

accommodate the cables, is that size having a factor
equal to or exceeding the sum of the cable factors.

B2.1.22 Method of Drawing Cables into Conduit

Conduit system shall be completely erected before cable is drawn in

and there shall be adequate means of access for drawing cable in or
out.

Cables shall be drawn into a conduit by using approved draw-in tape

or steel wire of the appropriate size. Under no circumstances shall the
use of lubricants, e.g. grease, graphite, talcum powder, etc., be
permitted to assist in the drawing the cables.

Galvanized iron draw-wires of adequate size shall be provided in all

empty conduits.

B2.1.23 Segregation of Cables of Different Circuit Categories

Separate conduits shall be provided for cables of different circuit

categories or using different voltage levels.

B2.1.24 “Looping-in” Wiring System

Each cable in a run shall be of one continuous length and wired on the
“loop-in” system. No joint in cable run shall be allowed.

Section B2 EE_GS
Page 7 of 19 2007 Edition
 B2.1.25 Grouping of Cables in Conduit

Conduits running from a distribution board to the final distribution

point may each contain all live conductors of a number of final
circuits provided that the effective current-carrying capacity of all
circuits, upon taking the correction factors into consideration, shall
exceed the rating of their respective over-current protection devices
and all conditions as stipulated in Clause B2.1.21 above are satisfied.

For conduits serving final circuits direct from a distribution board or

from an adaptable box used as a final distribution point, each conduit
shall contain all live cables of one final circuit only except in the case
of lighting final circuit where two circuits with 1.0 mm2 or 1.5 mm2
cables will be permitted in a 20 mm diameter conduit.

The neutral cable of a lighting final circuit using single core cables
may be routed in the conduit direct to the lighting point without
passing through the switch box.

B2.1.26 Termination of Bonding Conductors at Conduit Installation

For surface conduit installations, the supplementary bonding

conductors shall be terminated at the nearest conduit or conduit box
forming an integral part of the conduit installation.

For concealed conduit installations, the supplementary bonding

conductors shall be terminated at a copper earthing terminal fitted
inside a metal box forming an integral part of the conduit installation.
The metal conduit box shall be located as near as possible to the
bonding position and the exposed part of the supplementary bonding
conductor shall be made as short as possible.

B2.2 WIRING IN STEEL TRUNKING SYSTEM

B2.2.1 General

Where steel trunking is specified, they shall be installed neatly on the

surface of the walls, columns, beams or flushed with floor screeding
and shall be installed along a vertical or a horizontal plane.

The complete trunking installation shall be mechanically and

electrically continuous throughout, and effectively earthed.

Wiring system in trunking installation shall consist of non-sheathed

copper cables or sheathed copper cables. Cables for 3 phase circuit
shall be 450/750V grade or above.

Cables in each final circuit and/or in each sub-main shall be bunched

and tied or clipped together.

Particular precaution should be taken in situations where high

temperature cables may be touched or where they may touch other
Section B2 EE_GS
Page 8 of 19 2007 Edition
 materials.

Where cable trunking is required to be installed on floor to meet the

site constraints and special environmental conditions, such as inside
lift machine room, plant room, etc., this may be permissable subject
to safety consideration, workmanship and approval by the Architect.

B2.2.2 Provision of Cable Retaining Bar and Cable Support

Surface trunking, which is installed in such a position that the cables

might fall out when the cover is removed, shall be fitted with cables
retaining bars or other suitable devices to prevent the cables from
falling out.

Surface trunking installed vertically with length exceeding 5m shall

contain sufficient supporting devices such as pin racks within the
trunking to prevent strain on the cables due to the weight of the cables,
and to prevent vertical movement of the cables.

B2.2.3 Cable Capacity of Trunking

The number of cables put into a trunking shall be such that no

damage is caused to the cables or the trunking during their installation.

In determining the size of the trunking required for a particular

installation, the “unit system” method shall be adopted. The sum of
all factors of the cables, as given in Table B2.1.21-1 shall NOT be
greater than the trunking factor as given in Table B2.2.3.

Table B2.2.3 - Trunking Factors

Trunking 50 x 50 x 75 x 75 x 100 x 100 x 100 x

Dimensions 37.5 50 50 75 50 75 100
(mm x mm)
Trunking 767 1037 1555 2371 2091 3189 4252
Factors

Notes: 1. The size of trunking which will satisfactorily

accommodate the cables is that size having a factor equal
to or exceeding the sum of the cable factors.

2. For sizes and types of cables and sizes of trunking other

than those given in Tables B2.1.21-1 and B2.2.3, the
number of cables installed shall be such that the resulting
space factor does not exceed 45%. The space factor is
expressed as the ratio (expressed as percentage) of the
sum of the overall cross-sectional areas of cables to the
internal cross-sectional area of the trunking in which the
cables are installed. The effective overall cross-sectional
area of a non-circular cable is taken as that of a circle of
diameter equal to the major axis of the cable.

Section B2 EE_GS
Page 9 of 19 2007 Edition
B2.2.4 Correction Factor of Grouping

Where more than one circuit of single-core cables or more than one
multi-core cables are enclosed in a common trunking, suitable
correction factor for grouping, as recommended by IEC 60364-
1:2005 and other associated parts of the standard, shall be applied in
determining the size of the cables to be installed. The effective
current carrying capacity of all circuits, upon taking the correction
factors into consideration, shall exceed the rating of their respective
over-current protection devices and all conditions as stipulated in
Clause B2.2.3 above are satisfied.

B2.2.5 Segregation of Cables of Different Circuit Categories

Where a common trunking is used to accommodate cables for

different circuit categories, they shall be effectively segregated by
means of partitions or dividers except in the case where trunking is
manufactured using two smaller pieces of trunking attached together
with a common cover. The partitions or dividers shall be adequately
secured to the body of the trunking.

For underfloor (duct) trunking, the partitions or dividers shall also be

of full depth to provide support and strength to the top surface of the
assembly.

B2.2.6 Connection to Equipment

Connection between trunking and equipment shall be made by means

of a standard flange coupling or an adaptor neck, fabricated or cast.
For direct attachment of trunking to equipment, cable entries shall be
provided with smooth bore bushes or grommets and the return edge
of the lid of the trunking shall be left intact.

B2.2.7 Connection to Distribution Board

Where connection is made between trunking and a distribution board,

the connectors for cable entry shall be sized to accept all cables from
all available circuits including circuits marked as “spare”.

B2.2.8 Fixing of Surface Trunking

Individual pieces of trunking shall be independently supported by

means of at least two fixed points per piece. On straight runs,
supports for trunking shall be fixed at regular intervals with
maximum spacing as given in Table B2.2.8. For runs with bends,
supports shall be fixed as near to the bend as practicable.

Overhead trunking shall be suitably supported by means of mild steel

hangers, brackets or other approved means, so that no visible sag is
observed when loaded with cables. These supports shall be painted
with at least two coats of an approved anti-rust paint to prevent
corrosion.

Section B2 EE_GS
Page 10 of 19 2007 Edition
 Table B2.2.8 - Spacing of Supports for Cable Trunking

Maximum distance between supports (m)

Trunking cross-
sectional area
(mm2) Steel trunking Plastic/PVC trunking
Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical
Exceeding 300 but 0.75 1.0 0.50 0.50
not exceeding 700
Exceeding 700 but 1.25 1.5 0.50 0.50
not exceeding
1500
Exceeding 1500 1.75 2.0 1.25 1.25
but not exceeding
2500
Exceeding 2500 3.0 3.0 1.50 2.00
but not exceeding
5000
Exceeding 5000 3.0 3.0 1.75 2.00

Notes: 1. The spacing tabulated above assume that the trunking is

not exposed to mechanical stress other than that due to
the weight of the enclosed cables, and the trunking and
fittings.

2. The above figures do not apply to trunking which is

used for supporting luminaires or other equipment.

B2.2.9 Cables through Trunking

Cables penetrating through trunking shall be protected by conduits

except insulated and sheathed cables if such cables form part of a
surface wiring system. In such case, the holes in the trunking, through
which such cables penetrate, shall be fitted with suitable rubber
grommets or insulated bushes.

B2.2.10 Fire Barrier

Where a trunking passes through a fire resistant structural element,

such as floor and wall, having specified fire resistance, the opening
thus formed shall be internally and externally sealed with approved
type of fire resisting material according to the appropriate degree of
required fire resistance.

B2.2.11 Prevention of Electrolytic Action

Where a trunking is installed in a damp situation, or where a trunking

is likely to be exposed to weather, the trunking shall be kept away
from other metalwork with which electrolytic action is liable to incur.

Section B2 EE_GS
Page 11 of 19 2007 Edition
 B2.2.12 Prevention of Ingress of Water

Every entry to a trunking shall be so placed as to prevent or to be

protected against ingress of water.

B2.3 WIRING IN PLASTIC CONDUIT OR PLASTIC TRUNKING SYSTEM

B2.3.1 General

Where wiring in plastic conduits or plastic trunking is specified, they

shall comply, where applicable, with the relevant Clauses in B2.1 and
B2.2.

PVC conduit shall be heavy duty and shall not be used for installation
where the ambient temperature exceeds 60°C or below minus 5°C.

Conduits may be corrugated, plain or reinforced. Suitable conduit

cutter shall be used for cutting rigid PVC conduit.

B2.3.2 Pliable Conduit

Pliable conduit shall be used as short as possible. The length of

pliable conduit shall be not more than 1m for general applications or
2m inside false ceiling and raised floor. Pliable conduit shall not be
used in situations where they would be subject to continuous flexing.

B2.3.3 Joint in PVC Conduit

Joint in PVC conduit shall be made by means of a solid PVC coupler

into which jointing cement shall be applied to the outer surface of the
conduit to be joined in turn and then shall be inserted firmly into a
coupler and twist a quarter turn to spread cement evenly in order to
make the conduit run mechanically continuous.

B2.3.4 Plastic Boxes

PVC adaptable boxes and PVC boxes for enclosure of electrical

accessories shall be interchangeable with the steel boxes.

PVC boxes shall be provided with a brass earthing terminal complete

with screw for the connection of circuit protective conductor. They
shall not be used for suspension of luminaires or other equipment,
where considerable heat will be produced or where the mass of the
luminaire or equipment exceeds 3 kg.

Where a concealed conduit system is used in floor slab or wall, a

system of PVC rigid conduit fitted with a “screwed to plain PVC
converting adaptor” firmly screwed into a deep pattern type cast iron
ceiling mounted “BESA” box shall be employed for the suspension of
luminaires or other equipment. The system shall also be suitable for
the suspended load at the expected working temperature. The

Section B2 EE_GS
Page 12 of 19 2007 Edition
 threaded portion of the mating converting adaptor shall project to
cover the full threaded portion of the “BESA” box and shall be
screwed up tightly in order to make the conduit run mechanically
continuous. Any exposed threads on the “BESA” box shall be painted
with at least two coats of anti-rust paint.

B2.3.5 Termination of PVC Conduit at Casing of Equipment

Where a PVC conduit terminates at a casing, a coupler and a PVC

bush (i.e. a “plain to screwed” PVC coupler) with a male PVC bush
or a “screwed to plain PVC converting adaptor” with a female PVC
bush shall be used. In the case of flexible conduit, a rigid PVC glands
or a PVC adaptor together with a PVC male bush shall be used.

Where PVC adaptor with male bush are used, the male bush shall be
screwed into the coupler or adaptor from the inside of the metal
casing through a clearance hole drilled in the casing to suit the bush.
The bush shall be screwed tightly into the coupler or adaptor so as to
grip the casing securely for mechanical continuity. Threads on the
male bush shall be long enough to cover the full threaded portion of
the coupler. The jointing cement shall be applied on the surface of
pliable conduit prior to insertion into the coupler/adaptor and twist.

B2.3.6 Conduit Bend

Conduit bend shall be made by the use of purpose made solid elbow
or, for PVC conduit not exceeding 25 mm diameter, by bending the
conduit itself . Conduit bend shall not be bent more than 90 degrees.
The internal radius of the bend shall not be less than 4 times the
outside diameter of the conduit.

In case of the conduit bend is made by bending the PVC conduit, the
conduit bend shall be made by using the appropriate size of conduit
bending springs. Conduit shall be fixed in position as soon as possible
after bending.

B2.3.7 Allowance for Thermal Expansion

Due allowance shall be made for the expansion of PVC tubing at high
temperature. Expansion coupling or other fittings shall be installed in
a straight run of 8m or more. Saddles or clips shall be of sliding fit.

B2.3.8 Fixing of Trunking

The trunking shall be fixed and supported in the normal way by

screws, but the holes in the trunking shall always be made slightly
oversize to allow for the movement of expansion. Washers shall be
used under the head of the screw which shall not be over-tightened.

The spacing between adjacent supports for trunking shall not be

greater than those given in Table B2.2.8.

Section B2 EE_GS
Page 13 of 19 2007 Edition
 B2.3.9 Earthing

A PVC insulated cable shall be drawn into the conduit or trunking

system to serve as the circuit protective conductor (CPC), the cross-
sectional area of which shall comply with IEC 60364-1:2005 and
other associated parts of the standard for the size of the largest live
conductors enclosed.

B2.4 SURFACE WIRING SYSTEM

B2.4.1 Type of Cable

Where surface mounted wiring is specified, sheathed copper cables

shall be used for fixed installation. Cables for 3-phase circuit shall be
450/750V grade or above. Cables shall not be buried in concrete or
plaster.

Flexible cables or flexible cords shall be used for connection to

apparatus, appliances or equipment via an appropriate wiring
accessory. Flexible cables or flexible cords shall not be used in fixed
installation, except for final connection to a fixed equipment.

B2.4.2 Minimum Size of Live Conductors and CPC

Cables shall have CSA not less than 1.0 mm2 for 6A circuits,1.5 mm2
for 10A circuits and 2.5 mm2 for 16A circuits.

Flexible cables and flexible cords shall have CSA not less than
0.75 mm2.

The minimum CSA of a CPC shall be 1.5 mm2 if the CPC is

integrated in a cable carrying the associated live conductors. The
minimum CSA of a separate CPC shall be 2.5 mm2 if protection
against mechanical damage is provided (e.g. sheathed cable), and
4 mm2 if mechanical protection is not provided (e.g. non-sheathed
cable).

CPC shall be properly sized in accordance with Section B7.

B2.4.3 Identification of Cable Core

All conductors shall be colored as specified in Table C3.7 of this

Specification.

B2.4.4 Joint in Cable or Cord

Joints in cables or cords shall not be allowed unless approved by the

Architect. In such case, the joints shall be electrically and
mechanically sound, be protected against mechanical damage and any
vibration liable to occur.

Section B2 EE_GS
Page 14 of 19 2007 Edition
B2.4.5 Installation of Non-flexible Cable

(a) General

All cables shall be run in a vertical or horizontal direction,

and shall be secured flat on the surface of walls, columns,
partitions or ceilings, etc. throughout the entire route,
including at bends. Fixing onto the ceiling shall be avoided
unless the cable is required to feed a point on the ceiling.

Where required, the cables may be run under floors, between

partitions or inside ceiling voids provided that they are
enclosed in ducts, conduits or trunking which comply fully
with the relevant Clauses in B2.1, B2.2 and B2.3.

When cables are routed along or cross steel joints, beams,

stanchions, etc. they shall be enclosed in steel or rigid PVC
trunking/conduit.

Cables shall not be run as a span between beams, trusses, etc.,

without rigid support throughout their length.

(b) Protection to Cable Susceptible to Damage

Cables susceptible to damage shall be protected by means of

metal channels. Where protection is required for cables
running up a wall from the floor, the metal channel shall be
fixed to a minimum height of 1.5m above finished floor level.

(c) Cable Passing through a Building Structure

Where cables pass through a building structure such as a wall

or column, the cables shall be drawn through PVC sleeves
inserted into the building structure. The size of the PVC
sleeves shall be such that the space factor shall not exceed
40%. The gap between the structure and the sleeve and that
between the cables and the sleeve shall be completely filled
with cement or approved fire-resisting material.

Cables crossing an expansion joint shall be formed into a

loop such that any movement in the joint shall not stress the
cables.

(d) Cable Passing through Metal Work

Rubber grommets or insulated bushes shall be used to protect

the cables passing through metal part of a distribution board,
a luminaire, a metal box or any other metal work.

(e) Segregation from Other Services

Cables shall be run at least 150 mm clear of all other non-

electrical services.
Section B2 EE_GS
Page 15 of 19 2007 Edition
(f) "Looping-in" Wiring System

The cables shall be wired on the "looping-in" system. Cable

joints of any type in cable runs shall not be allowed.

(g) Neutral Conductor at Switch Position

The neutral conductor of a twin core cable for a lighting final

circuit shall be looped through an insulated connector
enclosed in the moulded box or pattress accommodating the
switch.

(h) Termination of Cable

Cable terminated at a moulded box or pattress, a luminaire or

other fittings shall have the overall protective sheath carried
into the moulded box or pattress, luminaire or other fittings
for a minimum of 13 mm.

The CPC shall be terminated at the earth terminal provided

in the moulded box or pattress housing the wiring
accessories.

Where it is not required to terminate the CPC in an accessory,

it shall not be cut back or removed. Instead, it shall be coiled
away from the live terminals or any bare conductors and
shall be insulated and sleeved with a green-and-yellow PVC
sleeve.

(i) Bending Radius of Cable

The internal bending radii of cables shall not be less than the
values given in Table B2.4.5-1.

Table B2.4.5-1 - Bending Radius of Non-Flexible Cable

Minimum internal radius

Overall diameter of
of cable bend
cable (D)
Non-armoured Armoured
Not exceeding 10 mm 3D 6D
Exceeding 10 mm but 4D 6D
not exceeding 25 mm
Exceeding 25 mm 6D 6D

Section B2 EE_GS
Page 16 of 19 2007 Edition
(j) Fixing of Cable

Cables having an overall diameter not exceeding 10 mm

shall be fixed by means of buckle clips. Cables of other
diameters shall be fixed by means of cables saddles.

Where a number of cables running together on the surface of

walls, columns, partitions or ceiling such that their
aggregated width exceeds 50 mm, a 13 mm thick hard wood
batten of adequate width shall be fixed along the cable route
for mounting the cables. The hard wood batten shall be
finished with one coat of approved priming on front and
edges, and waterproof compound treated at the back. Lengths
of the batten shall be properly fitted together and fixed in
position by counter-sunk brass screws in raw plugs.

(k) Fixing of Clip

Buckle clips shall be fixed and secured by pins driven into

surface of wall, column, partition or ceiling. The head of
every pin shall be level with the surface of the clip so that no
damage to the sheath of the fixed cables can occur.

Every hole in the buckle clip shall require a fixing pin.

A separate buckle clip shall be required for every cable of

size above 2.5 mm2 twin with CPC, or of equivalent size.
Not more than two cables shall be allowed in one clip under
all circumstances.

Buckle clips shall be provided along the entire cable route at

regular intervals not exceeding 250 mm on horizontal runs
and 400 mm on vertical runs.

A clip shall also be provided at a distance not exceeding

75 mm from a termination and from both sides of a bend.

(l) Fixing of Cable Saddle

Cable saddles shall be securely fixed by fixing screws.

Saddles shall be provided along the entire cable route at
regular intervals. The spacing between adjacent saddles shall
not exceed the values given in Table 25(3) of the Code of
Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations.

A saddle shall also be provided at a distance not exceeding

150 mm from a termination and form both sides of a bend.

Section B2 EE_GS
Page 17 of 19 2007 Edition
 (m) Correction Factor to Current Rating of Cable

Where more than two twin cables are fixed together, or when
the cables are installed at or in thermally insulated materials,
etc., suitable correction factors, as recommended by IEC
60364-1:2005 and other associated parts of the standard shall
be applied in determining the size of the cables to be
installed. The effective current carrying capacity of each
cable shall be calculated and ensured that it is within the
intended operating value of the circuit.

B2.4.6 Installation of Flexible Cable and Flexible Cord

(a) Connection to Portable Equipment

Flexible cables or flexible cords for connections to portable

appliance or equipment shall have suitable length (preferably
1.5m to 2m) to avoid undue risk of mechanical damage.

(b) Connection to Fixed Equipment

Exposed lengths of flexible cable or flexible cord used for

final connections to fixed equipment or appliance shall be as
short as possible.

(c) Connection to Luminaire

Where a flexible cord supports or partly supports a pendant

luminaire, the maximum mass acting on the cord shall not
exceed 3 kg for flexible cord of 0.75 mm2, and shall not
exceed 5 kg for flexible cord of larger conductor CSA.

B2.5 TOOL AND WORKMANSHIP

B2.5.1 Approved Tool

Only tools which are proven to be suitable shall be used.

Conduit bushes, couplers and similar items shall be tightened with

bush spanner or other suitable tools approved by the Architect.

Conduit bends shall be formed on an approved bending machine, and

the conduits shall not be flattened or with protective coating damaged
at the bends.

Suitable cutters shall be used for cutting PVC conduits or trunking.

Section B2 EE_GS
Page 18 of 19 2007 Edition
B2.5.2 Cutting in Metal Work for Conduit or in Trunking

Holes in metal work for the termination of conduits shall be drilled on

site with a twist drill of the correct size or by means of an approved
hole cutting device.

Holes in trunking shall be drilled, punched or cut by ring saw.

After cutting, burrs and sharp edges on the metal work or trunking
shall be removed to prevent abrasion of cables.

B2.5.3 Making Good of Damaged Coating

Where the protective coating on a steel conduit or trunking has been

damaged after installation, such surface shall be effectively restored
by at least two coats of anti-rust paint or other suitable coating to
prevent corrosion.

Section B2 EE_GS
Page 19 of 19 2007 Edition
 SECTION B3

INSTALLATION OF POWER CABLES, CABLE TRAYS AND CABLE LADDERS

B3.1 GENERAL

B3.1.1 Scope

This Section covers the installation of power cable, which includes

those listed in Clause C3.2 of Section C3. It also covers the
installation of the associated cabling facilities, including cable trays
and cable ladders.

Unless otherwise specified elsewhere, all cables shall have copper

conductors.

B3.1.2 Electromagnetic Interference

To minimize the electromagnetic interference generated from single

core cables, the following arrangements shall be adopted:

(a) All the single core cables of a circuit shall be of the same
conductor, same cross sectional areas, same type, same
construction and from the same manufacturer;

(b) All the single core cables of a circuit shall be of equal length,
and shall follow the same route of installation;

(c) The single core cables shall not be able to operate

individually; and

(d) The layout of single core cables shall be arranged as shown

in Figure B3.1.2(d) at the end of this Section B3.

B3.2 CABLE MOUNTED ON SURFACE

Unless otherwise specified, power cables shall be mounted on the surface of

wall or ceiling or other building structure. They shall be cleated in position by
approved type cable cleats or cable saddles. Cable cleats or cable saddles shall
be provided along the entire cable route according to the Table 25(3) of the
Code of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations.

When specified, power cables may be supported on cable trays or cable ladders.
In such cases, the requirements of Clauses B3.9 and B3.10 shall apply.

For vertical cable runs exceeding 100m, tension releasing sections shall be
provided in accordance with the recommendation of the cable manufacturer,
failing which, a tension releasing section shall be provided for every 100m
vertical run.

Section B3 EE_GS
Page 1 of 14 2007 Edition
B3.3 CABLE LAID IN ENCLOSED TRENCH

When power cables are laid in an enclosed trench, the cables shall be installed in
accordance with the installation methods 18, 19 and 20 of Appendix 7 of the
Code of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations. Correction factors
shall be applied to the current ratings as indicated in Table A5(6) of the Code of
Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations, where applicable.

B3.4 CABLE ENCLOSED IN DUCT

B3.4.1 General

Cables laid in ducts shall be sheathed and armoured. Where mineral

insulated cables are specified, they shall be with PVC or XLPE outer
cover as specified.

Where the ducts are formed from wood, cables shall be held in
position by clips, saddles, or approved fixings.

The space factor in a cable duct shall not exceed 35%.

B3.4.2 Drawing-in of Cables

Prior to the drawing-in of the cables, the cylindrical ducts shall be

cleaned with a cylindrical brush of appropriate size.

Attachment to facilitate the pulling of cables through a duct shall be

made to the cores, insulation, inner and outer sheaths and not to the
armour in order to avoid twisting. Attachment to the armour will only
be permitted for small cables with the approval of the Architect.
When pulling power cables into small ducts, cable lubricant which
should not negatively interact with the cables they lubricate and
should not increase the flame spread or decrease the fire resistance
properties of the cable may be used for brushing onto the cable
surfaces where they enter the duct to reduce friction during pulling.

When pulling-in lead-sheathed insulated power cables, the following

precautions shall be taken:

(a) Maximum stress in sheath - 10,000kPa (with stocking

pulling grip);

(b) Maximum stress in conductors - 70,000kPa (with pulling eye

attached to conductors); and

(c) Maximum pull shall be limited to 220,000 Newtons.

Section B3 EE_GS
Page 2 of 14 2007 Edition
B3.4.3 Internal Barrier

In every vertical duct, which is designed as totally enclosed without

ventilation, internal barriers shall be provided to prevent the air at the
top of the duct from attaining an excessively high temperature. The
distance between adjacent barriers shall be the distance between
floors. Where the floor to floor distance exceeds 5m, additional
barriers shall be provided at an interval not exceeding 5m.

B3.4.4 Fire Barrier

Where a cable duct passes through fire resistant structural elements,

such as floor or wall designated as fire barriers, the opening thus
formed shall be sealed with fire resistant materials having the same
degree of fire resistance as the structural element. In addition, suitable
internal fire barriers shall also be provided. An internal fire barrier
may also serve as an internal barrier described in Clause B3.4.3 above.

B3.4.5 Draw-in Pit

Where cables in a duct are inaccessible for the greater part of their
length, adequate number of draw-in pits shall be provided at every
turning point and at regular intervals of not greater than 15m.
Sufficient room shall be available in the draw-in pits to enable the
cables to be manoeuvred without damage. In the case of armoured
cables, the draw-in pits shall be concrete or brick lined and shall be
fitted with a waterproof heavy cast iron lid. Draw-in pits shall not be
filled with sand or other materials.

Where a change in direction in a duct occurs, provision shall be made

to enable the cables in the duct to have adequate radii of curvature in
accordance with the relevant requirements in this Section.

B3.4.6 Segregation of Cables of Different Circuit Categories

Separate ducts shall be provided for cables of different circuit

categories. However, cables of different categories may be allowed to
pass through the same draw-in pit provided that they are properly and
appropriately segregated in accordance with the requirements
specified in the current Code of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring)
Regulations.

B3.4.7 Sealing of Duct Entry to Building

After the cables have been installed, both the cables and the exposed
duct end shall be sealed to form a gas, water and fire barrier. Open
ends of spare ducts shall be closed with tapered hardwood plugs and
then sealed similarly.

Section B3 EE_GS
Page 3 of 14 2007 Edition
B3.5 CABLE BURIED DIRECT IN GROUND

B3.5.1 Protection of Cable

Power cables buried direct in ground shall be armoured. They shall be

buried at a depth of not less than 450 mm and shall be protected by
means of approved cable cover tiles. The bottom of the cable trench
shall be covered, to a depth not less than the diameter of the largest
cable, with a bedding layer of sand or fine soil. On top of the cables,
an after layer of sand or fine soil, to a depth of 100 mm, shall again be
provided. The sand or fine soil shall not be larger than 13 mm sieve.
Particular care shall be taken to ensure that there shall be no pebbles
or small stones in the bedding layer or after layer of the fine sand or
soil. The cables shall then be covered, throughout the entire route, by
approved type cable cover tiles which shall be laid on top of the after
layer.

B3.5.2 Cable Marker

The route of all power cables buried direct in ground shall be clearly
indicated by cable markers laid on the ground. The cable markers
shall be engraved with the following wording:

"DANGER - ELECTRIC CABLES"

Cable markers shall be placed at regular intervals not exceeding 60m

apart and also at positions where the cable route changes direction.

At the position of each underground junction box, a cable marker

shall also be installed. Such markers shall be engraved, in addition to
the wordings mentioned above, the appropriate information, such as
"3 way Joint Box".

B3.6 BENDING RADIUS OF CABLE

The internal bending radius of every power cable shall not be less than the
appropriate values given in Table B2.4.5-1 of this specification.

B3.7 CABLE JOINT AND CABLE TERMINATION

B3.7.1 General

Unless otherwise specified in the Particular Specification and

approved by the Architect, cable joint for power cable shall not be
used for new electrical installation.

Joints and terminations of all power cables shall be made by skilled

cable jointers who shall be approved by the Architect before work
commences.

Section B3 EE_GS
Page 4 of 14 2007 Edition
 No reduction in the number of strands of a cable core shall be allowed
at a cable joint or termination.

Ferrules, compression connectors and bare portions of cable core

resulting from a jointing or terminating process shall be insulated
with an approved type of insulating tape, heat shrinkable tubing or
approved means of insulating material after completion of process.
Such insulating material shall have equal or better electrical and
mechanical properities as those of the original insulation removed,
and shall be adhered to the cores, securely and permanently. The final
thickness shall be in a smooth contour throughout the whole length.

Every compression joint shall be of a type which has been the subject
of a test certificate as described in IEC 61238-1:2003 and other
associated parts of the standards. When a compression joint is made,
the appropriate tools specified by the manufacturer of the joint
connectors shall be used.

B3.7.2 Joint Box and Terminating Box

Boxes for joints in all power cables shall be of cast-iron, compound

filled and of adequate size. The boxes shall be fitted with suitable
armouring clamps and glands. The armouring of the cables shall be
terminated at the armouring clamps and the inner sheath shall pass
through the gland.

The box shall be warmed thoroughly before the compound is poured

to allow total adhesion between the compound and the box. The
compound shall then be allowed to cool and topped up before the box
is closed. No air locks shall be formed within the box.

Plastic shells fitted with suitably sized armour bond and filled with
approved type cold pouring encapsulating compound may be used as
alternative for jointing PVC insulated power cables. The complete
jointing kit, including plastic shell, compound, insulating tape, etc.
shall be from the same proprietary manufacturer who is specialised in
manufacturing products for this purpose. The jointing method and
procedure as laid down by manufacturer shall be followed strictly.

B3.7.3 Identification at Joint or Termination

At each joint or termination, a non-ferrous metallic label shall be

fixed to the cable giving the size and identification of the cable,
e.g. 50 mm2 4-core XLPE/SWA/PVCS copper cable to "Services
Block".

B3.7.4 Earth Continuity across Joint

A circuit protective conductor having adequate cross sectional area

shall be installed and connected to maintain the effectiveness of the
earth continuity across every cable joint.

Section B3 EE_GS
Page 5 of 14 2007 Edition
B3.7.5 Straight-through Joint for Copper Conductors

In such joint, the two conductors shall be butted together after the
strands have been soldered solid and shall be jointed by means of a
weak back ferrule, soldered to the cores. Soldering shall be carried
out by pouring tin-man's solder over the cores and weak back ferrule.
Under no circumstances shall direct flame from a blow lamp be used
for soldering.

As an alternative, conductors may be jointed by approved type

compression connectors using the appropriate tools and connectors.

B3.7.6 Tee-joint for Copper Conductor

When two cables with copper conductors are tee-jointed, the branch
conductor shall be connected to the main conductor by means of claw
type or weak back ferrules. The strands in both branch and main
conductors are to be sweated solid before sweating to the ferrule.
Soldering shall be carried out as detailed in Clause B3.7.5 above.

As an alternative, conductors may be jointed by approved type

compression connectors using the appropriate tools and connectors.

B3.7.7 Joint for Aluminium Cables

(a) Soldered Joint

Prior to making a soldered joint, each conductor shall be

cleaned by means of steel wool or similar abrasive and then
tinned by pouring solder, specially made for use with
aluminium, over the cores. Both cores shall then be inserted in
a weak-backed aluminium ferrule and butted together. The
ferrule shall then be closed. Soldering shall be completed by
pouring the solder over the ferrule, after applying a layer of
flux recommended by the cable manufacturer for this purpose.

(b) Compression Joint

Alternatively, the aluminium cores may be jointed by means of

an approved type compression joint. A compression joint shall
be made by inserting the aluminium cores to be jointed into
the opposite ends of an aluminium compression jointing tube,
which shall have the correct size for the conductors. The tube
shall then be compressed onto the cores by means of a
compressing tool. The tool used and the working procedure
adopted shall be as recommended by the cable manufacturer.

Section B3 EE_GS
Page 6 of 14 2007 Edition
B3.7.8 Termination of PVC-insulated or XLPE-insulated Cable with Copper
Conductors

PVC-insulated or XLPE-insulated cables shall be terminated in a

gland fitted with an armour clamp. Provision shall be arranged to
enable a watertight seal to be made between the gland and inner
sheath. The gland body shall be provided with an internal conical
seating to receive the armour clamping cone and a clamping nut
which shall secure the armour clamping cone firmly to the armour
wires ensuring that the armour wires are tightly clamped between the
armour cone and conical armour seating. The spigot on the gland
body shall be threaded to suit standard conduit accessories. A shroud
of PVC or alternative approved materials shall be fitted to cover the
body of the gland and the exposed armour wires.

The copper cores shall be soldered to the cable lugs or cable sockets
by the "damp sweat" method as described in Clause B3.7.5 above.

As an alternative, conductors may be terminated by approved type

compression terminations using the appropriate tools and
terminations.

B3.7.9 Termination of PVC-insulated or XLPE-insulated Cable with

Aluminium Conductors

Terminating gland and armour clamp for power cables with

aluminium conductors shall be made from aluminium. Termination of
gland and clamping of armour shall be the same as for copper core
armoured cables as described in Clause B3.7.8 above. Cores shall be
terminated in a hot tinned brass or copper lug, which should be
shaped in a vice or by means of a hammer to suit the sector shape of
the conductor. The core shall be tinned, and then soldered into the lug.

As an alternative to terminating cores in a tinned brass or copper lug,

a compression termination may be used. In such case, the cores shall
be inserted into the sleeve of an aluminium compression type cable
lug. The sleeve shall then be compressed onto the cores by means of a
compressing tool. The tool used and the working procedure adopted
shall be as recommended by the cable manufacturer.

Prior to connection to the terminal, the cable lug shall be painted with
an anti-oxidizing paste. The anti-oxidizing paste shall be suitable for
preventing the creation of electrolytic action due to contact between
the aluminium lug and copper or brass terminal, for an indefinite
period. Alternatively, copper/aluminium bimetal cable lugs may be
accepted.

Section B3 EE_GS
Page 7 of 14 2007 Edition
 B3.7.10 Use of Heat Shrinkable Tubing

All heat shrinkable tubing and accessories used for cable joints or
termincations shall be suitable for use with the type and construction
of cable to be jointed or terminated.

The heat shrinkable materials shall have electrical and mechanical

properties equal to or better than those of the cable insulation and
sheath, where applicable. After the application of the heat, the heat
shrinkable materials shall seal the interfaces between the heat
shrinkable materials or between the heat shrinkable materials and the
cable surfaces.

Whenever heat shrinkable tubing and accessories are used, the

complete kit shall be from the same proprietary manufacturer who is
specialised in manufacturing products for this purpose. The method
and procedures adopted shall be strictly as those laid down by the
manufacturer.

B3.7.11 Other Methods of Joint and Termination

Methods for jointing or terminating a power cable, other than those

specified in this Sub-section, will not be precluded provided:

(a) that the method used shall be proven to be capable of affording

the degree of safety, reliability, durability and efficiency not
less than that achieved by those specified in this Sub-section,

(b) that the method used shall satisfy the requirements of IEC
60364-1:2005 and other associated parts of the standard and
other relevant Standards, and

(c) that prior agreement of the Architect has been obtained.

B3.8 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MINERAL INSULATED CABLES

B3.8.1 Cable Route

Mineral-insulated cables shall be run neatly on the surface of the

walls, columns, beams or ceilings in a vertical or horizontal direction,
and at least 150 mm clear of all plumbing and mechanical services.
The use of conduit and/or cable trunking to enclose such cables shall
be kept to the minimum.

Section B3 EE_GS
Page 8 of 14 2007 Edition
B3.8.2 Cable Support

Mineral-insulated cables shall be adequately supported by saddles

which shall be of the same manufacturer as the cables. Saddles shall
be provided throughout the entire cable route at regular intervals. The
spacing between adjacent saddles shall not exceed the values given
Table B3.8.2. Saddles shall also be provided at a distance not
exceeding 150 mm away from a termination and from both sides of a
bend.

Table B3.8.2 - Spacing of Saddles for Mineral-insulated Cable

Overall diameter Maximum spacing

of cable (d) mm Horizontal run Vertical run
d≤9 600 mm 800 mm
9 < d ≤ 15 900 mm 1200 mm
d > 15 1500 mm 2000 mm

B3.8.3 Bending Radius

The minimum internal bending radius for a mineral-insulated cable

shall be 6 times the overall diameter of the cable.

B3.8.4 Cable Loop for Prevention of Vibration and Low Temperature Cold
Store

A loop shall be introduced in a cable immediately before its entry into

an equipment which is subject to vibration or occasional movement.
A clear space of at least 10 mm shall be maintained at the point in the
loop where the cable passes over itself.

Cable loop or similar means shall be provided for mineral-insulated

cables serving and running inside low temperature cold store.

B3.8.5 Cable Termination

Cable terminations shall generally comply with IEC 60702-2:2002.

The cable to be terminated shall be cut, screwed, sealed with cold

compound and fitted with brass terminating glands, nuts, compression
ring, gland body, sealing pot, disc and sleeves. The conductors shall
be carried unbroken through the sealing pot to the terminal sockets or
clamping screws.

Section B3 EE_GS
Page 9 of 14 2007 Edition
 Sealing shall be properly carried out to protect the cable ends from
moisture and the insulation shall be thoroughly dry before the sealant
is applied. The sealing material and material used to insulate the
conductors when they emerge from the insulation shall have adequate
insulating and moisture-proofing properties which shall be retained
throughout the range of temperature they may be subjected to in
service.

Where a mineral insulated cable is terminated at an insulating casing

or enamelled/painted metal casing, the sealing pot shall be provided
with a copper circuit protective conductor, complying with the
requirements of IEC 60228:2004, and of an appropriate size in
accordance with IEC 60702-2:2002.

Where more than one cable terminates at a galvanized or zinc coated

enclosure, the gland plate shall be of brass or insulating materials.

PVC shrouded terminating glands shall be used when the cables are
fitted with PVC outer covering.

Only tools recommended by the manufacturer of the cables shall be

used and the manufacturer's recommended methods of cable
termination shall be adopted in all cases.

B3.8.6 Insulation Resistance

The insulation resistance between the cores and between each core
and the sheath shall be measured before the cable end is sealed. The
measured resistance shall be infinity on a 500V insulation resistance
tester. If the reading is less than infinity, the cable shall be heated by
means of a blow lamp or similar device so that moisture is driven out
to the open end of the cable. Heating shall be continued until the
measured insulation resistance reaches infinity, and sealing shall be
applied immediately. The insulation resistance shall be measured
again when the cable end has been sealed to ensure infinite resistance.
For mineral-insulated cable with outer covering, adequate length of
the outer covering shall be cut out in the event of low insulation
resistance to allow dehydration by the application of blowlamp as
described above. After the process is completed, the section of outer
covering shall be re-installed as specified.

B3.8.7 Bonding of Cable Sheath to Metalwork

Where a mineral-insulated cable passes through or makes contact

with any metal, the metal and cable sheath shall be effectively bonded
together.

B3.8.8 Laying of Single-core Cables

Single-core mineral-insulated cables running together shall be laid

with the cable sheaths in contact. Mineral-insulated cables for 3-phase
circuits shall be laid in trefoil formation. Where cables used are rated
at 100A or above, gland plates of apparatus shall be of brass.
Section B3 EE_GS
Page 10 of 14 2007 Edition
 B3.8.9 Protection from Mechanical Damage

Mineral-insulated (MI) cables shall be protected by steel sleeves

where they are exposed in vulnerable positions (e.g. passing through
floors, ceilings and walls). Insert material between copper oversheath
of cable and steel sleeve shall be dielectrically isolated form one
another to prevent galvanic action. The openings or holes through
which the cables pass shall be made good with cement or other non-
combustible material.

B3.9 INSTALLATION OF CABLE TRAYS

B3.9.1 Connection between Adjacent Lengths of Tray

Connections between adjacent lengths of tray, tee or bend pieces,

shall be made by butt joints and fixed by mushroom-head steel
roofing bolts and nuts complying with BS 1494-1:1964.

The connection shall be mechanically strong so that no relative

movement between the two lengths can occur.

B3.9.2 Cutting of Tray

Cable trays shall be cut along a line of plain metal only, i.e. they shall
not be cut through the perforation. All cut edges of the galvanized
cable tray shall be prepared and treated with a cold galvanized paint.

B3.9.3 Hole in Tray

Holes cut in a cable tray for the passage of cable shall be provided
with grommets. Alternatively, they shall be bushed or lined.

B3.9.4 Fixing of Tray

The cable tray except those of short run less than 300mm long where
at least 1 set of hanger or bracket is required, shall be supported by at
least 2 sets of hangers or brackets of adequate mechanical strength
securely fixed to the walls, ceiling or other structure. The hangers or
brackets shall be painted with anti-rust epoxy paint unless otherwise
specified. Fixings for cable trays shall be disposed at regular intervals
not exceeding 1.2m for straight run and at a distance not exceeding
225 mm on both sides from a bend or intersection.

A minimum clear space of 20 mm shall be left behind all cable trays.

Section B3 EE_GS
Page 11 of 14 2007 Edition
 B3.9.5 Fixing of Cable on Tray

Saddles for securing multi-core cables to the cable tray shall be made
from PVC covered metal strip, and shall be shaped to the form of the
cables to be secured. The saddles shall be fixed to the cable tray by
means of corrosion resistant cheese-headed screws and nuts. The
shanks of the screws shall not protrude beyond the nuts by more than
three threads. Where saddles exceed 150 mm in length, intermediate
fixings shall be provided such that the maximum spacing between
screws shall not exceed 150 mm.

Single-core cables shall be secured to the cable tray by clamps made

of wood or other non-ferrous materials specially designed to suit the
dimension of the cables. The clamp shall be secured to the cable tray
by means of bolts, washers and nuts.

Cable saddles or cable clamps shall be provided along the entire cable
route with their spacing in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendation.

B3.10 INSTALLATION OF CABLE LADDER

B3.10.1 Dropout Plate for Cable Exit

Dropout plate of width same as the cable ladder shall be provided to

support the cables locally as they exit a ladder down between the
rungs.

B3.10.2 Flexible (Expansion) Couplers across Building Expansion Joint

The cable ladders shall be jointed by flexible (expansion) couplers

across the expansion joints of the building structure. The selection
and installation details of such flexible couplers shall be
recommended by the manufacturer and submitted to the Architect for
acceptance. Rigid fitting across the expansion joints shall not be
allowed.

B3.10.3 Ladder Covers

Unless otherwise specified, proprietary ladder covers (ventilated or

closed as specified) shall be fixed onto the cable ladder following the
installation details recommended by the manufacturer.

B3.10.4 End Connectors

The end of a run of cable ladder shall be fixed to the wall or slab with
proprietary end connectors. If it is far from the wall or slab, a
proprietary “stop end” connector shall be fixed to the end of a cable
ladder run in order to give a neater appearance. Installation details
shall follow the manufacturer’s recommendation.
Section B3 EE_GS
Page 12 of 14 2007 Edition
B3.10.5 Earthing

The cable ladders shall be bonded and earthed throughout. Across all
joints of the cable ladder, copper connectors shall be fixed onto the
cable ladder in order to maintain the earth continuity. Factory-made
attachment points shall be provided near the joints for fixing the earth
continuity connectors. The length of the copper connectors shall be
slightly longer than the length between the two attachment points to
allow for movement at the joints due to expansion or some other
reasons.

B3.10.6 Minimum Inside Radius of All Bends

The inside radius of all bends of the cable ladder system shall not be
less than 300 mm.

B3.10.7 Supports

The cable ladder except those of short run less than 300mm long
where at least 1 set of hanger or bracket is required, shall be
supported by at least 2 sets of hangers or brackets. Supports shall be
properly spaced at distance not exceeding 1500 mm for straight run to
satisfactorily support the weight of the ladder and cables. They shall
also be provided at a distance not exceeding 300 mm on every side
from a bend or intersection.

B3.10.8 Blank

B3.10.9 Safety Working Load

The weight of cables per span of the cable ladder shall be uniformly
distributed and shall not exceed the maximum working load specified
by the manufacturer.

Section B3 EE_GS
Page 13 of 14 2007 Edition
Figure B3.1.2(d) - Design and Installation of LV Single-core Cable to Minimize
Electromagnetic Interference

Section B3 EE_GS
Page 14 of 14 2007 Edition
 SECTION B4

INSTALLATION OF GENERAL LIGHTING AND POWER

B4.1 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING SYSTEM AND LUMINAIRES

B4.1.1 Pendant

Tube pendant shall comprise a dome cover and a biscuit ring and a
piece of screwed steel conduit of suitable length to give the required
mounting height of the luminaire.

Plain pendant shall comprise a ceiling rose and a cord-grip

lampholder connected by a flexible cord having a suitable length to
give the required mounting height of the lamp shade.

B4.1.2 Luminaire Mounted on Pattress

When a luminaire is not provided with facility for a surface cable

entry, the luminaire shall be mounted on pattress. The cable shall then
enter the luminaire from the rear through a slot and a hole formed in
the pattress.

B4.1.3 Ceiling Rose

Ceiling rose shall not be used for the attachment of more than one
outgoing flexible cord or cable unless it is specially designed for
multiple pendants.

B4.1.4 Stroboscopic Effect

Luminaires, other than those using tungsten filament lamps or

fluorescent lamps with electronic ballast, installed over rotating
machinery, shall be arranged so that at least two luminaires connected
to different phases are used to illuminate the moving parts of the
machinery. Alternatively where different phases are not available or
the use of which is impracticable, separate tungsten filament lamps
shall be used in addition to gas discharge lamps to eliminate the
stroboscopic effect.

B4.1.5 Painting

Unless otherwise specified, lighting equipment and luminaires other

than those indicated to be self-finished such as stainless steel,
anodized aluminium, etc, shall have factory-finished.

Metal parts such as cover plates for adaptable boxes, blanking plate
for any boxes and conduit pendants, etc. shall be painted white or a
suitable color to match the interior finish of a particular location.

Section B4 EE_GS
Page 1 of 5 2007 Edition
 B4.1.6 Special Requirements for Outdoor Luminaires

Outdoor luminaires shall be able to withstand the weather. Metal

work should be protected against corrosion, and parts which have to
be removed for access to the interior shall be provided with proper
gaskets to restrict the entrance of moisture and dirt. Mounting
brackets shall be heavily galvanized and stainless steel or galvanized
bolts and nuts shall be used.

The adjustment bolts and nuts of a luminaire which is mounted on

high level shall be captive to prevent accidental loss during servicing.
Safety chains shall be provided to hold the luminaire from falling. A
luminaire installed in a location within hand reach shall be of robust
construct, fitted with an impact-resistant transparent or diffusing front
panel, and shall have secret key fixings for the panel to the body of
the luminaire. Where necessary, wire guards shall be fitted over the
front panel to give extra protection.

Cables within the outdoor luminaire shall be such a type that it can
sustain the lamp operation at a high ambient temperature due to the
waterproof/airtight natures of the luminaire design. Heat resistant
cable is considered as an acceptable mean of internal cable for
outdoor luminaire. Any other cable type with appropriate type test
certification demonstrating satisfactory use for outdoor luminaire
shall be submitted for approval by the Architect. Heat resistant sleeve
shall be used for external cable entering the luninaire for wiring
connection as far as practicable. Where installation of heat resistant
sleeve is found impracticable due to environmental constraints,
alternative mean avoiding cause of adverse effect as a result of high
internal operating temperature shall be submitted for Architect’s
approval.

Where the heat resistant sleeves is required, the sleeves within the
luminaire shall be extended to a distance of 150mm outside the
luminiare.

B4.2 INSTALLATION OF WIRING ACCESSORIES

Wiring accessories, including lighting switches, socket outlets and domestic

type switches for electrical appliances, shall be designed for flush mounting.

Where surface wiring installation is specified, wiring accessories shall be fixed

onto moulded boxes or pattresses. In conduit installation, they shall be fixed
onto moulded, galvanized steel or cast iron boxes.

Where a waterproof or flameproof configuration is required, wiring accessories

shall be mounted as the particular circumstances demand.

The front plate of a switch or socket outlet shall be labelled in accordance with
Clause B1.2.

Section B4 EE_GS
Page 2 of 5 2007 Edition
B4.3 INSTALLATION OF DOMESTIC SWITCHES

B4.3.1 General

Switch for domestic and similar purposes shall be mounted at a height

of 1350 mm above finished floor level unless otherwise specified.

B4.3.2 Lighting Switch

When lighting switches are mounted adjacent to one another, they

shall be grouped in a single enclosure (multi-gang box) and shall
share a common switch plate, subject to a maximum of three lighting
switches per single-gang plate.

Lighting switches installed adjacent to a door shall be located on the

handle side of the door, and shall be as near to the door as practicable.

B4.3.3 Time Switch

Time switch shall be housed in a factory or purpose made metal

enclosure provided with a removal cover of durable clear plastic
material.

B4.3.4 Application in Bathroom

No switch shall be installed inside a toilet or a room containing a

fixed bath or shower. All control switches shall be located
immediately outside the room.

This restriction does not apply to insulating cord switches, remotely

operated switches using mechanical actuators with linkage
incorporating insulating components, switched supplied from
Separated Extra Low Voltage (SELV) and shaver units.

B4.4 INSTALLATION OF SOCKET OUTLETS

B4.4.1 General

Socket outlet intended for supplying a fixed or stationary appliance

shall be located as near as possible to the appliance.

Socket outlet shall be mounted at a height of 1350 mm above finished

floor level in kitchens, sculleries, ironing rooms and the like. In other
locations, they shall be mounted at 300 mm from finished floor level,
75 mm from surface top measured from bottom of socket outlet or as
specified.

B4.4.2 Shaver Supply Unit

The complete unit shall be enclosed in a galvanized metal box for

flush mounting, or a galvanized cast iron or plastic surface box for
surface mounting.
Section B4 EE_GS
Page 3 of 5 2007 Edition
 B4.4.3 Socket Outlet at Hazardous Area

The installation of socket outlets in hazardous areas should be

avoided as far as possible. Where it is absolutely essential to install a
socket outlet in such area, the socket outlet shall comply with IEC
60079-0:2004 and other associated parts of the standard and shall be
controlled by a sparkless switch. The socket outlet shall be
interlocked with the plug so that removal or insertion shall not be
possible unless the controlling switch is in the OFF position. The plug
shall have shrouded pins and the design of the pin contacts shall be
such as to guard against development of hot spots or sparking.
Requirements for wiring installation in hazardous areas are specified
in Clause B8.3.

B4.4.4 Socket Outlet of Surface Conduit System

In plant room, switch room or similar area where surface conduits are
installed, socket outlets shall be metalclad or bronze front plate.

B4.4.5 Socket Outlet for Different Voltage System

Socket outlet and plug for one voltage system shall not be
interchangeable with those for use at other voltage and/or frequency
systems in the same installation.

B4.4.6 Application in Bathroom

Shaver supply units complying with IEC 61558-2-5:1997 can be

installed inside a room containing a fixed bath or shower and inside a
toilet. Socket outlets inside such a room, if so required under the
contract, shall be installed in accordance with requirements of Code
26A(3)(j) of Code of Practice for Electricity (Wiring) Regulations.

B4.5 INSTALLATION OF MEASURING INSTRUMENT

B4.5.1 Mounting of Current Transformers Associated with Watt-hour Meter

Current transformers, if required to be associated with a watt-hour

meter, may be mounted inside the meter chamber, or in a separate
current transformer chamber, as dictated by the circumstances of each
particular job. When current transformers are mounted in the meter
chamber, separate partitioned compartments with separate front
access covers for the current transformers and meters respectively
shall be provided. Suitable engraved labels shall be fixed on the
covers to identify the installed equipment therein.

B4.5.2 Identification of Instrument

Each measuring instrument shall be identified by means of a label

fitted under the associated instrument. This label shall denote the
function of the circuit connected to the meter.
Section B4 EE_GS
Page 4 of 5 2007 Edition
B4.5.3 Mounting Position of Selector Switch

Selector switch for ammeter or voltmeter shall be mounted

immediately below the meter with which it is associated.

Section B4 EE_GS
Page 5 of 5 2007 Edition
 SECTION B5

INSTALLATION OF DOMESTIC APPLIANCES

B5.1 GENERAL

B5.1.1 Connection to Appliances

Domestic appliances shall each be connected to the electrical supply

through a suitable wiring accessory and a suitable length (preferably
1.5 m to 2 m) of flexible cable or PVC insulated cables enclosed in a
flexible conduit.

For portable appliance, plug and socket shall be used. For fixed
appliances, the wiring accessories shall be opened or removed only
by means of a tool.

Wiring accessories shall meet the requirements of Section C4 and

shall be installed as near as practicable to the appliances to be
connected. Fuse-links shall comply with IEC 60127-1:2006 and the
other associated Parts of the Standard and shall have current ratings
suitable for the appliances to be controlled.

Flexible cables for final connection to domestic appliances shall be

white in colour unless otherwise specified, and shall be circular,
sheathed, twin core with circuit protective conductor (CPC) to
IEC 60189-1:2007 and the associated parts of the standard; and
IEC 60227-1:1998 and the associated parts of the standard (PVC-
insulated) or to IEC 60245-1:2003 and the associated parts of the
standard (rubber-insulated), all with copper conductors. Twin core
cables without earth wire are only allowed for double insulated
appliances classified as Class II appliances under IEC 61140:2001.
The cores of the flexible cables shall have identification colours in
accordance with Section Table C3.7 in Section C3.

B5.1.2 Use in Bathroom and Toilet

No portable appliances shall be installed in a toilet or room

containing a fixed bath or shower. Fixed appliances installed in such
a room shall be located out of reach by a person using the bath or
shower, and the controlling switches shall be located outside the room.

This restriction does not apply to insulating cord switches, remotely

operated switches using mechanical actuators with linkages
incorporating insulating components, switches supplied from
Separated Extra Low Voltage (SELV) and shaver supply units.

Section B5 EE_GS
Page 1 of 6 2007 Edition
 B5.1.3 Engraving for Identification

The front plate of every switched socket outlet, fused connection unit
or control switch feeding a fixed domestic appliance shall be
engraved in accordance with Sub-section B1.2 to indicate correctly its
function.

B5.1.4 Earthing of Appliance

All domestic appliances except Class II equipment to IEC

61140:2001 shall be effectively earthed to the main earth via a circuit
protective conductor. Where the cables for final connection to a fixed
appliance is enclosed in a flexible conduit, effective earthing shall be
achieved by means of a separate circuit protective conductor drawn
into the flexible conduit.

B5.1.5 Appliances Requiring Exclusive Circuit

The following types of domestic appliances shall be supplied from an

exclusive final circuit:

(a) Household electric cooker

(b) Water heater other than oversink water heater
(c) Water boiler
(d) Room cooler
(e) Appliance having a normal power rating of 3 kW or above

B5.2 CEILING FAN AND CEILING-MOUNTED ROTARY FAN

B5.2.1 Method of Supply

Supply to a ceiling fan or a ceiling mounted rotary fan shall be by

means of a 2 A fused connection unit with earthing facilities and
controlled by a 5-20 A D.P. switch with pilot light for maintenance
purpose.

In concealed conduit installation, the fused connection unit shall be

circular, suitable for mounting on a circular conduit box to IEC
61035-1:1990 and the associated parts of the standard.

In surface conduit and surface wiring installation, the fused connector

box shall be square, suitable for mounting on a moulded box or
plastic pattress to IEC 60670-1:2002 and the associated parts of the
standard.

B5.2.2 Fixing of Fan

Every ceiling fan shall be suspended from a substantial hook fixed

securely to the ceiling structure.

Rotary fans shall be fixed direct to the ceiling structure.

Section B5 EE_GS
Page 2 of 6 2007 Edition
 B5.2.3 Fan Regulator

Fan regulators shall each be controlled by a 5-20 A D.P. switch with

pilot light and shall be fixed on the surface of walls.

In a concealed conduit installation, the fan regulator shall be mounted

on a back-plate over a recessed 35 mm deep box to IEC 60670-
1:2002 where the conduit shall be terminated. The back-plate shall
be made of galvanized sheet steel of 3 mm thick with suitable
grommeted hole for cable entry.

In a surface conduit installation, the fan regulator shall be mounted on

a special fabricated box of 1.5 mm thick galvanized sheet steel and
having the same size as the regulator or proprietary fabricated box by
the fan manufacturer. The conduit shall be terminated at this specially
made surface mounted box which the cables shall enter the fan
regulator.

In a surface wiring installation, the fan regulator shall be mounted on

a wooden block. Groove shall be formed at the back surface of the
wooden block to suit the cables, and holes shall be drilled to enable
the cables to enter the fan regulator from the rear.

B5.3 WALL-MOUNTED FAN

Supply to a wall mounted fan shall be by means of a 2A fused

connection unit and shall be controlled by a 5-20 A D.P. switch with
pilot light.

Wall mounted fans shall each be fixed by means of wall mounting

bracket supplied with the fan or sit on a mounting bracket or battern
made of teak wood or other material approved by the Architect.

B5.4 EXHAUST FAN

B5.4.1 Fixing of Fan

Exhaust fans shall each be installed on the structural opening by

means of a steel mounting plate. Where an exhaust fan is intended to
draw exhausted air through a fume cupboard, the fan shall be ducted
to the fume cupboard by means of a pipe made of low smoke
emission and halogen free PVC of suitable size and length.

B5.4.2 Method of Supply

Supply to a domestic type/fume cupboard exhaust fan shall be by

means of a 2 A fused connection unit similar to that for a ceiling fan,
and shall be controlled by a 5-20 A D.P. switch with pilot light.

Section B5 EE_GS
Page 3 of 6 2007 Edition
 Supply to an industrial type exhaust fan shall be by means of a fused
connection unit with suitably sized fuse and shall be controlled by a
20 A D.P. switch with pilot light.

B5.5 ELECTRIC FIRE OR HEATER

B5.5.1 Wall-mounted Radiator

Supply to wall-mounted radiators shall be obtained through a fused

connection unit with suitably sized fuse and shall be controlled by a
20 A D.P. switch with pilot light.

B5.5.2 Panel Fire

Panel fires rated at 3 kW or less shall each be supplied and controlled

by a 15 A 3-pin switched socket outlet with pilot light. The switched
socket outlet shall be installed at a height of 300 mm above finished
floor level unless otherwise specified.

B5.5.3 Tubular Heater

Tubular heaters shall be supplied and controlled by a 13 A 3-pin

switched socket outlet with pilot light. A wire guard complete with
end plates made of hot-dip galvanized steel shall be provided to
prevent falling fabric from contact with the heater tube as to create a
fire risk.

B5.6 WATER HEATER AND WATER BOILER

B5.6.1 Oversink Water Heater

Supply to an oversink water heater shall be by means of a 13A fused

connection unit controlled by a 20A D.P. switch with pilot light at a
distance not less than 2 m from any water taps. The front plate of the
fused connection unit shall have an outlet hole and the necessary
cord-grip for the flexible cable.

In a surface wiring installation, the fused connection unit and the

20 A D.P. switch shall each be mounted on a moulded box or plastic
pattress to IEC 60670-1:2002 and the associated parts of the standard.

B5.6.2 Other Type of Water Heater

Supply to a domestic thermal storage or instantaneous water heater

shall be connected to an individual final circuit. Single phase water
heater shall be controlled by a double-pole switch of adequate rating
and with pilot light. Three phase water heater shall either be
controlled by a 4-pole switch of adequate rating and with pilot light or
by a 20A double-pole switch with pilot light through a 4-pole
contactor of adequate rating.

Section B5 EE_GS
Page 4 of 6 2007 Edition
 In a concealed or surface conduit installation, the PVC insulated
cables shall be enclosed in a conduit from the control switch to a
standard circular conduit box fitted with a dome cover and then
through a flexible conduit from the dome cover to the water heater.
The dome cover and the conduit shall be fixed as near to the water
heater as practicable.

In a surface wiring installation, the control switch shall be mounted

on a moulded box or plastic pattress. Final connection to the water
heater shall be taken from the control switch via a flexible cable, twin
with CPC. The control switch shall be fixed as near to the water
heater as practicable.

B5.6.3 Water Boiler

The installation of a water boiler shall be similar to that for water

heater. The control switch shall be a double-pole switch of 30A
rating and with pilot light.

B5.7 TEA URN

Tea urns having a rating of 3 kW or less shall be supplied and controlled by a

15 A 3-pin switched socket outlet with pilot light, while those of ratings higher
than 3kW is to be supplied and controlled by fused connection unit completed
with separate DP control switch with pilot light. The switched socket outlet shall
be fixed at a height of 1350 mm above finished floor level unless otherwise
specified.

B5.8 HOUSEHOLD ELECTRIC COOKER

Supply to a household electric cooker shall be controlled by a cooker control

unit of rating not less than 45 A unless otherwise specified. The control unit
shall be installed at a height of 1350 mm above finished floor level.

In a concealed or surface conduit installation, the PVC insulated cables from the
control unit shall be enclosed in a conduit and terminated at an insulated
terminal block inside a 47 mm deep conduit box to IEC 60670-1:2002 and the
associated parts of the standard. The PVC insulated cables shall then be changed
into PVC insulated and sheathed cable twin core with CPC before connecting to
the cooker. The insulated terminal block shall be mounted on the wall at 300
mm above finished floor level. The PVC insulated and sheathed cable twin core
with CPC shall be 1.5 m to 2 m long to allow the cooker to be moved for
cleaning purpose.

In a surface wiring installation, PVC insulated and sheathed cable twin with
CPC shall be used throughout.

Section B5 EE_GS
Page 5 of 6 2007 Edition
B5.9 HAND/FACE DRYER

The supply to an electric hand/face dryer shall be by means of a fused

connection unit complete with an integrated 20A D.P. switch and pilot light. The
front plate of the fused connection unit shall have an outlet hole and the
necessary cord-grip for the flexible cable. Hand/face dryer shall be installed at
such a height so as to allow the nozzle to be 1150mm above finished floor level
in male toilet and 1100mm in female toilet.

B5.10 ROOM COOLER

B5.10.1 Method of Supply

Supply to a room cooler shall be by means of a connection unit and a

control switch, both of which shall have a current capacity of not less
than the rated value of the room cooler. The control switch shall be
D.P. with pilot light, installed at a height of 1350 mm above the
finished floor level.

B5.10.2 Position of Connection Unit

The connection unit shall be installed adjacent to the room cooler and
shall be on the same side of the room cooler as where the flexible
cable enters the room cooler. In case it is not possible to ascertain
where the flexible cable enters the room cooler, the connection unit
shall be installed on the left side of the room cooler, as viewed from
the front.

B5.11 REFRIGERATOR

Supply to a refrigerator shall be by means of a 13 A switched socket with pilot

light. For general purpose, the socket shall be mounted at a height of 1350 mm
above finished floor level.

Section B5 EE_GS
Page 6 of 6 2007 Edition
 SECTION B6

INSTALLATION OF BUSBAR TRUNKING SYSTEM

B6.1 GENERAL

Busbar trunking including accessories shall be tailor-made to suit the actual site
measurements, and working drawings shall be submitted for perusal by the
Architect. Adequate clear space shall be allowed for inspection and
maintenance of the installation.

B6.2 SITE STORAGE AND PROTECTION

B6.2.1 Busbar trunking shall be stored in a dry clean location with adequate
air circulation to prevent condensation. The storage area shall be free
from dirt, fumes, water and physical damage.

B6.2.2 Work on the busbar trunking installation shall not commence unless
the builder’s work on the accommodation for the busbar trunking has
been completed and is in a dry and clean condition with lockable door
and kerb.

B6.2.3 Busbar trunking shall be handled with great care to avoid damage to
internal components, enclosure and finish. Busbar shall not be
dragged across floor and shall not be subjected to torsion, denting,
impact or rough handling.

B6.3 BUSBAR IDENTIFICATION

Each bar shall be painted to indicate the phase to which it is connected, at each
accessible position to the busbars and in each tee-off unit.

B6.4 JOINT IN BUSBAR

Joints shall be properly clean and free from contamination before joint. Joints in
busbars shall not cause any loss in mechanical strength, electrical continuity,
current carrying capacity and short circuit capacity of the busbars compared
with an unjoined busbar.

Joints shall be properly aligned before the final tightening of all joint bolts.
Bolts shall not be over or loosely tightened. Bolt tightening shall be done either
by means of a torque wrench to a strength figure as specified by the
manufacturer or in accordance with the manufacturer’s special procedure.

Section B6 EE_GS
Page 1 of 5 2007 Edition
B6.5 EXPANSION UNIT

Expansion units shall be provided to take up the axial expansions or contractions

of the busbar trunking system under normal service conditions. In particular,
expansion units shall be provided where both ends of the busbar trunking system
are fixed and normal expansion or contraction is restricted, and where the busbar
trunking system is installed across a building expansion joint. For every 30m of
busbar trunking, an expansion unit shall also be provided or else the
manufacturer’s recommendation shall be followed.

B6.6 FEEDER UNIT

A feeder unit shall be provided for each busbar trunking system for connection
of incoming supply.

B6.7 TAP-OFF UNIT CONNECTION

Interconnecting conductors if provided between the busbars and tap-off units

shall have a current rating not less than that of the tap-off units. The
temperature rise of interconnecting conductors under normal service conditions
shall not exceed that of the busbars specified in Clause C6.4.

B6.8 FIRE BARRIER

Where busbar trunking passes through compartmentation wall or slab, a proper

fire barrier made of non-hygroscopic material having a fire-resistance period of
not less than that of the corresponding compartmentation wall or slab shall be
provided.

B6.9 BUSBAR TRUNKING ACCESSORIES

Bends, tees and intersection units shall be installed in such a way that no loss in
mechanical strength, electrical continuity, rated current and rated short-circuit
capacity shall be incurred due to insertion of bends, tees or intersection units.

B6.10 SUPPORT OF BUSBAR TRUNKING SYSTEM

Busbar trunking system shall be securely fixed to the building structure

according to manufacturer’s recommendations. For horizontal run of busbar
trunking system the hanger support shall be suitable for heavy mechanical load
as stated in IEC 60439-2:2005. All fixing bolts, nuts and screws of
hangers/brackets shall be heavily electroplated or galvanized.

The supports shall be spaced at regular intervals such that the clearance and
creepage distances be maintained under normal service and short-circuit
conditions.

Section B6 EE_GS
Page 2 of 5 2007 Edition
B6.11 EARTHING

A 25mm x 3 mm copper tape shall be fixed to and run along the full length of
the busbar trunking system to ensure earth continuity. The copper tape shall be
supported at intervals not more than 400 mm horizontally and not more than 500
mm vertically. It shall be connected to the main earthing terminal on each floor.
A warning notice bearing the words “Safety Electrical Connection - Do not
Remove” with Chinese translation shall be displayed in a conspicuous position
for every 10m horizontal run and/or one label per floor for rising main.
Provision of copper tape may be exempted if the enclosure of busbar trunking
can satisfy the second paragraph of Clause B7.7.4 that follows.

B6.12 REQUIREMENTS FOR AIR-INSULATED BUSBAR TRUNKING

SYSTEM

B6.12.1 Application

Unless otherwise specified in the Particular Specification, air-

insulated busbar trunking system shall not be used. However, if such
a system is used, then the following requirements shall be followed.

B6.12.2 Busbar Supports

(a) For vertical busbar trunking system, suspension units shall be

provided at the top of each run. A built-in thrust block and an
intermediate suspension unit shall be provided at every 30m
interval. Insulated thrust blocks or other thrust-absorbing
device shall be provided at the bottom of each run and after
each flexible joint.

(b) The busbar trunking system shall be terminated in a stop-end

unit.

B6.12.3 Tap-off

Branch circuits shall be connected to the busbars by tap-off units or

cable clamping devices. Drilling of busbars shall be permitted only if
the mechanical strength will not be impaired and the current density
of the busbars will not exceed the permissible level after drilling.

B6.12.4 Fire Barrier

At the position of the fire barrier, the busbars shall be insulated with
self-extinguishing heat shrinkable insulating sleeves of suitable
operating temperature extended to approximately 150 mm on each
side of the fire barrier.

Section B6 EE_GS
Page 3 of 5 2007 Edition
 B6.12.5 Mounting Brackets

Mounting brackets shall be provided for supporting the busbar

trunking from the building structure. The brackets shall have the
same finish as the enclosure and shall allow not less than 20 mm
adjustment clearance from the wall.

B6.13 REQUIREMENT FOR ALL INSULATED BUSBAR TRUNKING

SYSTEM

B6.13.1 Application

All insulated busbar trunking system shall be generally used for a

combination of extensive vertical and horizontal run of busbar mains
or in an environment where weather-proofing or water-proofing of
the system is required.

B6.13.2 Busbar Jointing

Two sections of the busbar trunking shall be joined by connecting the

joint-ends of the busbars in an interleaved manner. The contact
interconnection pressure shall be maintained by insulated bolts
inserted through the joint. Bolts shall be tightened up either by means
of a torque wrench to a strength figure as recommended by the
manufacturer, or in accordance with the manufacturer’s provision of
special torque-indicating tightening device.

The joint shall be covered up by metal cover plates of same type of

material and finish as the busbar casing so that the degree of
protection against ingress of dust will not be less than that of an
unjoined busbar trunking system.

B6.13.3 Expansion Unit

Expansion units shall be so constructed that any change in length on

both the conductors and the casing so caused by thermal expansion
and contraction in all direction can be absorbed easily and cause no
distortion of the busbar trunking whatsoever.

B6.13.4 Tap-off Unit

Bolt-on tap-off unit shall be properly fixed on the busbars in

accordance with the manufacturer’s design. Drilling of the busbars for
connection of cables will not be permitted.

Section B6 EE_GS
Page 4 of 5 2007 Edition
B6.13.5 Supporting Hangers and Fixing Brackets

Supports for the busbar trunking system shall be by means of hangers

and brackets supplied by the same manufacturer as the busbar
trunking system. Unless otherwise specified, the hangers shall be
spaced at intervals of not more than 2m for horizontal mounting and
3m for vertical mounting, or in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendation. In addition, for vertical mounting, the busbar
trunking system shall be supported on every floor.

Hangers and brackets shall be properly aligned with building

structure and adjusted to ensure the alignment and leveling of the
busbar trunking as required in the manufacturer’s standard and
recommendation. Additional guide brackets in the intermediate
position between two supports shall be provided, if necessary, to
balance the offset loading of the tap-off unit.

Section B6 EE_GS
Page 5 of 5 2007 Edition
 SECTION B7

INSTALLATION OF EARTHING SYSTEM

B7.1 GENERAL

All metalworks associated with an electrical installation but not forming part of
a live conductor, including exposed conductive parts and extraneous conductive
parts, shall be solidly and effectively bonded and earthed in accordance with
IEC 60364-1:2005 and the associated parts of the standard and the Code of
Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations.

B7.2 MAIN EARTHING TERMINAL

A solid copper main earthing terminal of ample size shall be provided for every
electrical installation at a position near the main incoming switch or switchboard
for the connection of:

(a) the circuit protective conductors;

(b) the main equipotential bonding conductors;
(c) the functional earthing conductors;
(d) the earthing conductors; and
(e) the lightning protective system bonding conductors.

to create the equipotential zone. The main earthing terminal shall be connected
to earth via an earthing conductor to an earth electrode or a group of electrodes.

Where an installation distributes to a number of buildings or units, a separate

main earthing terminal shall be provided for each individual building or unit at
the point of intake thereby creating a separate equipotential zone in each
building or unit.

B7.3 EARTH ELECTRODE

B7.3.1 Types of Earth Electrode

The following types of earth electrode are permitted:

(a) rod electrode;

(b) tape electrode; or
(c) plate electrode.

Unless otherwise specified in the Particular Specification or Drawings,

rod electrode shall be installed.

Metalwork of public gas or water services shall not be used as the

sole protective earth electrode.

Section B7 EE_GS
Page 1 of 9 2007 Edition
B7.3.2 Rod Electrode

Rod electrode shall be of copper with overall diameter not less than
12.5 mm or of stainless steel and galvanised steel of not less than
16mm. A hardened steel point may be fitted to the penetrating end of
the rod electrode. Additional lengths of rod, whenever required,
should each be connected together by coupling .

Rod electrode shall be driven into the ground within an earth pit.
Only approved tools e.g. electric hammer or pneumatic hammer shall
be used for this installation.

In case the earthing resistance achieved by one rod is not sufficiently

low for the purpose required, additional lengths or additional rods
shall be installed. For the latter application, additional rods shall be
driven into the ground outside the resistance area of the previously
installed rod(s). Under normal circumstances, a mutual separation of
3.5m is considered adequate.

B7.3.3 Tape Electrode

Tape electrode shall be untinned copper strip of not less than 25

mm x 3 mm in cross section. Tape electrode shall be used only if
specified by the Architect.

In case where several tapes are required for connection in parallel to

achieve a low earthing resistance, they may be installed in parallel
lines or they may radiate from a point.

B7.3.4 Plate Electrode

Plate electrode shall be of copper not less than 3 mm in thickness,

having dimensions as indicated on the Drawings or Particular
Specification subject to a maximum of 1200 mm x 1200 mm.

In case the earthing resistance achieved by one plate is not

sufficiently low for the purpose required, additional plates shall be
installed. The plates shall be installed outside the resistances area of
the previously installed plate(s).

B7.3.5 Electrode in Deep Bored Hole

As an alternative, electrode may be buried in a deep bored hole of 20

to 30m deep and of about 100 mm diameter provided by the building
contractor where the soil conditions are unfavourable. In such case, a
12.5 mm diameter copper inner core rod electrode or 16mm
galvanised or stainless steel inner core rod electrode (connected
together to form the required length) or annealed copper tape of 25
mm x 6 mm shall be inserted into the full length of the deep bored
hole. The clearance between the electrode and the surrounding of the
deep bore hole shall be filled completely by a mixture of 60%
bentonite and 40% of gypsum to 125% (by volume) mixed to give a
thick slurry, which shall be grouted into the deep bored hole and then
Section B7 EE_GS
Page 2 of 9 2007 Edition
 allowed to solidify. The grouting shall not trap any air in the deep
bored hole.

B7.3.6 Connection between Electrodes

All electrodes shall be inter-connected together to form a complete

earthing system by means of 25 mm x 3 mm annealed copper tapes or
stranded bare copper conductors of 70 mm2. The copper tapes or
conductors shall be enclosed in PVC sleeve or pipe laid at a minimum
depth of 600 mm below the ground surface. The connecting copper
tapes or conductors shall be run in direct lines between the rods.

Connections shall be brazed to achieve good and reliable joints to

withstand the anticipated fault current.

B7.4 EARTHING CONDUCTOR

B7.4.1 Conductor Material

Earthing conductor shall be copper tapes 25 mm x 3 mm in cross

section. For outdoor applications, copper tapes shall be tin plated.
Aluminium conductors shall not be used as earthing conductors.

B7.4.2 Connection to Electrodes

Earthing conductor shall be connected to the earth electrode(s) by

means of approved copper connector-clamps such that the connection
can only be disconnected by means of a tool. The connection shall be
contained within a concrete lined earth pit with a substantial
removable cover to ensure accessibility and maintainability.

B7.5 MAIN EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING CONDUCTOR

B7.5.1 Conductor Material

Unless otherwise specified, main equipotential bonding conductor

shall be of copper.

Section B7 EE_GS
Page 3 of 9 2007 Edition
 B7.5.2 Bonding Position

Main equipotential bonding conductor shall connect the extraneous

conductive parts of other services within the premises to the main
earthing terminal of the installation. Such extraneous conductive
parts shall include main water and gas pipes, other service pipes and
risers and exposed metallic parts of the building structure liable to
transmit a potential. Connection shall be made as near as practicable
to the point of entry of the non-electrical services into the premises
concerned, and shall be on the installation side of the possible breaks
in the system, such as gas meter or water meter. Where practicable,
the connection shall be made within 600 mm from the meter outlet
union or at the point of entry to the building if the meter is outside the
building.

B7.5.3 Bonding Method

Main equipotential bonding conductor shall be securely and reliably

connected to extraneous conductive parts of the non-electrical
services by means of a copper connector-clamp of an approved type
suitable for the particular application. All contact surfaces shall be
cleaned and free from non-conducting materials, such as grease or
paint, before the connector-clamp is installed.

B7.6 SUPPLEMENTARY BONDING CONDUCTOR

B7.6.1 Conductor Material

Unless otherwise specified, supplementary bonding conductor shall

be of copper.

B7.6.2 Application in Bathroom

In a room containing a fixed bath or shower, all simultaneously

accessible conductive parts (either exposed or extraneous) shall be
locally connected by means of supplementary bonding conductors.

B7.6.3 Application in Other Areas

Supplementary bonding of extraneous conductive parts shall be

required whenever such conductive parts are likely to be accessible
simultaneously with other extraneous conductive parts or exposed
conductive parts, and are not electrically connected to the main
equipotential bonding by means of permanent and reliable metal-to-
metal joints of negligible impedance.

Section B7 EE_GS
Page 4 of 9 2007 Edition
 B7.6.4 Bonding Method

Supplementary bonding conductor shall be solidly and effectively

connected to the extraneous or exposed conductive parts by means of
a copper connector-clamp of an approved type suitable for the
application. All contact surfaces shall be cleaned and free from non-
conducting materials, such as grease or paint, before the connector-
clamp is installed.

For surface steel conduit installation, the supplementary bonding

conductor shall be terminated at the nearest steel conduit or conduit
box forming an integral part of the conduit installation.

For concealed steel conduit installation the supplementary bonding

conductor shall be terminated at, via a telephone cord outlet plate, a
copper earth terminal fitted inside a metal conduit box to IEC 60670-
1:2002 and the associated parts of the standard forming an integral
part of the conduit installation. The metal conduit box shall be
located as near as possible to the bonding position and the exposed
part of the supplementary bonding conductor shall be made as short
as possible.

B7.7 CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR (CPC)

B7.7.1 General

Circuit protective conductor (CPC) may be formed by a separate

cable, the metallic sheath or armour of a cable, part of the same cable
as the associated live conductor, rigid steel conduits, trunking or
ducting, or the metal enclosure of the wiring system. Flexible
conduits and the exposed conductive parts of equipment shall not
form part of the circuit protective conductor.

B7.7.2 CPC for Socket Outlet

For every socket outlet, a separate circuit protective conductor shall

be provided connecting the earth terminal of the socket outlet and that
inside the enclosure accommodating the socket outlet.

B7.7.3 CPC for Flexible Conduit

For every length of flexible conduit, a separate circuit protective

conductor shall be provided inside the conduit to ensure the earth
continuity of the installation between the two ends of the flexible
conduit.

B7.7.4 CPC for Busbar Trunking

A copper tape, 25 mm x 3 mm in cross section shall be provided for

the entire length of a busbar trunking. The copper tape shall be
bonded to the busbar trunking at intervals not exceeding 3m and at
the position of each tape-off point.
Section B7 EE_GS
Page 5 of 9 2007 Edition
 Subject to the prior agreement of the Architect, the provision of
copper tapes for a busbar trunking may be exempted provided that the
enclosure of the busbar trunking can be proven to satisfy the full
requirements of the circuit protective conductor in accordance with
relevant regulations of IEC 60364-1:2005 and the associated parts of
the standard.

B7.7.5 CPC for Ring Final Circuit

For wiring system using PVC insulated, PVC sheathed cables, the
circuit protective conductor of every ring final circuit shall also be
run in the form of a ring having both ends connected to the earth
terminal at the origin of the circuit.

B7.8 JOINTS IN PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS

Provision shall be made in an accessible position for disconnecting a protective

conductor from the main earthing terminal or the earth electrode to permit
testing and measurements of earthing resistance. Such joints shall only be
disconnected by means of a tool, shall be mechanically strong and shall be
tinned to maintain the electrical continuity reliably.

No switching device shall be inserted in a protective conductor except for the

following:

(a) Where an installation is supplied from more than one source of energy,
one of which requires a means of earthing independent of the means of
earthing of other sources and it is necessary to ensure that not more than
one means of earthing is applied at any time, a switch may be inserted in
the connection between the neutral point and the means of earthing,
provided that the switch is a linked switch arranged to disconnect and
connect the earthing conductor for the appropriate source, at substantially
the same time as the related live conductors.

(b) Multipole linked switching or plug-in devices in which the protective

conductor circuit will not be interrupted before the live conductors are
disconnected and will be re-established not later than when the live
conductors are re-connected.

B7.9 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELLING

B7.9.1 Color Identification

All cables used as protective conductors, including earthing

conductors, main equipotential bonding conductors, supplementary
bonding conductors and circuit protective conductors shall be
identified by the color in accordance with Code of Practice for the
Electrical (Wiring) Regulation.

Section B7 EE_GS
Page 6 of 9 2007 Edition
 Bare conductor used as protective conductor shall also be made
similarly identifiable, where necessary, by the application of tapes,
sleeves or discs, or by painting with the above color combination.

B7.9.2 Label for Earthing and Bonding Connections

Every point of connection for earthing and bonding shall be provided

with a warning notice in accordance with Clause B1.2.

B7.10 SIZING OF PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR

B7.10.1 General

The cross sectional area of a protective conductor, other than an

equipotential bonding conductor, shall be determined by the Code of
Practice for the Electricty (Wiring) Regulations Clause 11K , Table
11(1) to 11(7) .

Where a protective conductor does not form part of a cable and is not
formed by or not contained in, steel conduit, trunking, ducting or
other metallic enclosure of a wiring system, the cross sectional area
shall not be less than 2.5 mm2 copper or equivalent if protection
against mechanical protection is provided (e.g. sheathed cable), and
4 mm2 copper or equivalent if mechanical protection is not provided
(e.g. non-sheathed cable). When a separate cable is used as a CPC,
the cable shall be insulated to IEC 60227-1:1998 and the associated
parts of the standard, IEC 60189-1:2007 and the associated parts of
the standard (BS 6004:2000, Table 1a) or better unless its CSA is
greater than 6 mm2.

B7.10.2 Equipotential Bonding Conductor

The cross sectional area of a main equipotential bonding conductor

shall not be less than half of the cross-sectional area of the associated
earthing conductor of the installation subject to a minimum of 6 mm2
and a maximum of 25 mm2.

The cross sectional area of a supplementary bonding conductor shall

be determined in accordance with relevant Regulation of IEC 60364-
1:2005 and the associated parts of the standard.

B7.11 EARTH FAULT LOOP IMPEDANCE

B7.11.1 Automatic Disconnection Time

For the purpose of automatic disconnection, means of protection shall

be provided at the main switch. The type and setting of the protective
devices shall be so selected that they can properly discriminate from
the Electricity Supplier’s protection.

Section B7 EE_GS
Page 7 of 9 2007 Edition
 For installation other than socket outlet circuit where protection
against indirect contact is afforded by an overcurrent protective
device, the earth fault loop impedance of a final circuit and the
characteristic of the protective device shall be so co-ordinated that the
automatic disconnection of supply shall occur within 5 seconds in
case of an earth fault of negligible impedance.

B7.11.2 Maximum Earth Loop Impedance

For installation other than the socket outlet circuit where protection
against indirect contact is afforded by overcurrent protective device,
the earth fault loop impedance of any final circuit shall not exceed the
maximum values given in the relevant tables in the Code of Practice
for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations for automatic disconnection
time of 5 seconds.

B7.11.3 Condition for Compliance

To comply with the requirement, the following formula shall be

fulfilled for each circuit:

RA Ia ≤ 50 V

where: RA is the sum of the resistances of the earth

electrode and the protective conductor(s)
connecting it to the exposed conductive part;
and

Ia is the current causing the automatic

operation of the protective device within 5
seconds. When the protective device is a
residual current device, Ia is the rated
residual operating current.

B7.12 USE OF RESIDUAL CURRENT-OPERATED CIRCUIT BREAKER

B7.12.1 General

Every socket outlet circuit shall be protected by a residual current

device. The residual current device shall have a rated residual
operating current not exceeding 30mA and an operating time not
exceeding 40ms at a residual current of 150mA as governed by IEC
61008-1:2006 and the associated parts of the standard / IEC
60755:1983.

Section B7 EE_GS
Page 8 of 9 2007 Edition
 Residual current-operated circuit breaker (RCCB) shall be installed
for any final circuit where the earth fault loop impedance is too high
to allow sufficient earth fault current to operate the overcurrent
protective device within the specified automatic disconnection time of
0.4 second or 5 seconds in accordance with Code 11B(b) (ii) & (iii) of
the Code of Practice for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations. In such
case, the product of the rated residual operating current in amperes of
the residual current-operated circuit breaker and the earth fault loop
impedance of the circuit shall not exceed 50 Ω.

Residual current-operated circuit breaker shall meet the requirements

specified in Clause C5.7.

B7.12.2 Application in Household Installation

RCCD used for protecting socket outlet circuits in a household or

similar installation shall have a rated operating residual current not
exceeding 30 mA.

B7.12.3 Equipment Outside an Equipotential Zone

For equipment used outdoors or outside an equipotential zone and

supplied via a socket outlet rated at 32 A or less or via a flexible cable
or cord having a similar current carrying capacity, protection shall be
afforded by a residual current-operated circuit breaker having a rated
residual operating current not exceeding 30 mA. Earth connection for
such socket outlet shall be isolated from the rest of the earthing
system and shall be obtained from a separate earth electrode via an
insulated earthing conductor.

Section B7 EE_GS
Page 9 of 9 2007 Edition
 SECTION B8

MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATIONS

B8.1 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

B8.1.1 Scope

This Section covers the conduit installation for the following systems:

(a) Telephone;
(b) Computer Network;
(c) Inter-communication and Public Address (PA) Systems;
(d) Staff Paging; and
(e) Broadcast Reception System.

Separate conduits shall be provided for each of these systems.

Galvanized draw-wires of adequate size shall be provided in all
empty conduits.

B8.1.2 Conduit for Telephone, Computer Network, Inter-communication and

PA Systems

Conduits shall be of steel not smaller than 20 mm in diameter, and

shall be installed in accordance with Section B2 of this Specification.

B8.1.3 Outlet Box for Telephone Point

At each telephone outlet position, the conduit shall be terminated at a

35 mm deep conduit box to IEC 60670-1:2002 and the associated
parts of the standard with a moulded blank plate labelled with the
type of installation unless otherwise specified. Outlet boxes shall be
located at 300 mm above finished floor level measured from the
bottom of the box unless otherwise as stated on the Drawing.

B8.1.4 Outlet Box for Computer Point

At each computer outlet, the conduit shall be terminated at a 35 mm

deep conduit box to IEC 60670-1:2002 and the associated parts of the
standard with moulded cover plate labelled with the type of
installation. Outlet boxes shall be fixed at positions as specified on
the Drawing.

Computer sockets will be provided and installed by others.

Section B8 EE_GS
Page 1 of 15 2007 Edition
B8.1.5 Outlet Box for Inter-communication and PA System

At each inter-communication or PA outlet position, the conduit shall

be terminated at a 35 mm deep conduit box to IEC 60670-1:2002 and
the associated parts of the standard with moulded blank plate labelled
with the type of installation. unless otherwise specified. The box
shall be fixed at positions as stated on the Drawing.

Section B8 EE_GS
Page 2 of 15 2007 Edition
 B8.1.6 Conduit for Staff Paging System

Unless otherwise specified, conduits for staff paging system shall be

not less than 20 mm in diameter and shall be installed in accordance
with Section B2 of this Specification. Sub-clause B8.1.5 shall also be
applicable to this type of installation.

B8.1.7 Conduit for Broadcast Reception System

Conduits for Broadcast Reception System shall be of steel, not

smaller than 25 mm in diameter unless otherwise specified, and shall
be installed generally in accordance with Section B2. They shall be
kept clear of power and telephone conduits and shall be arranged to
cross them at right angles whenever possible. Bends shall have an
internal radius of not less than 115 mm. Draw-in boxes shall be
provided at intervals of not exceeding 6m and at all 90° change of
direction.

B8.1.8 Outlet Box for Broadcast Reception System

At each broadcast reception outlet position, the conduit shall be

terminated in a 47 mm deep, 75 mm square steel box with galvanized
sheet metal over-lapping cover plate labelled with the type of
installation unless otherwise specified. The box shall be fixed at
skirting level or otherwise as stated on the Drawing. The metal
overlapping cover plate shall be finished as the wall color.

B8.2 BELL AND AUDIBLE WARNING SYSTEM

B8.2.1 Class-change Bell System for Schools

“Class-change” bell system shall be suitable for use on mains voltage,

and shall normally be located in the General Office of the school
unless otherwise specified. The supervisory panel of the bell system
shall be engraved with the words "Class-change" in English and
Chinese characters.

B8.2.2 Bell for Mains Voltage

Bells for operation at mains voltage shall be ironclad, weatherproof,

with approximately 150 mm diameter round gong suitable for conduit
entry.

B8.2.3 Call Bell and Door Bell Systems

Bells and buzzers shall operate at extra low voltage obtained from a
double wound transformer which shall be connected to the mains
supply through a 2A fused connection unit. Unless otherwise
specified, cables shall be 1.0 mm2 PVC insulated for conduit wiring
installation, or 0.75 mm2 PVC twin flexible cable for surface wiring
installation.

Section B8 EE_GS
Page 3 of 15 2007 Edition
B8.2.4 Bell and Buzzer for Extra Low Voltage

Bells shall be of the underdome type having a gong of approximately

75 mm diameter and shall be fixed to a substantial frame. Buzzers
shall be contained within an insulating plastic case, and shall be
approximately 75 mm square in size. Both the bells and buzzers shall
have large solid terminals and rubbing contacts.

B8.2.5 Bell Transformer

Bell transformers shall be air-cooled and double wound complying

with EN 60742:1995. One side of the secondary (extra low voltage)
winding shall be earthed. The reactance of the transformer winding
shall be of such a value that a continuous short circuit across the
terminals of the secondary winding shall not damage the transformer,
or cause dangerous overheating.

The windings, core and terminals of the transformer shall be

contained within an insulating plastic case.

B8.2.6 Call Bell Push

Call bell pushes for indoor use shall be of flush pattern with white or
ivory color front plate.

Call bell pushes for outdoor use, or for areas where they may be
subjected to rain or water, shall be weatherproof.

B8.2.7 Mounting of Call Bell Push

In conduit installations, bell pushes shall be fixed in 35 mm deep

conduit box to IEC 60670-1:2002 and the associated parts of the
standard. In surface cable installations, bell pushes shall be fixed on a
plastic pattress.

Bell pushes shall not be mounted on doors without the written

approval of the Architect.

B8.2.8 Table-type Push

Table-type pushes shall be single or multiple way as specified. They

shall have a plastic base, and a plastic or metal top plate with
adequate and approved holders for labels.

B8.2.9 Table-type Push in Concealed Conduit Installation

Table-type pushes in concealed conduit installations shall be

connected to a length of 0.75 mm2 PVC insulated and sheathed
flexible cord, comprising sufficient number of cords to suit the
number of ways in use on the push panel. The flexible cords shall be
taken to a conduit concealed in the floor slab. One end of the conduit
shall terminate underneath the desk, and the other end shall enter a
35 mm deep concealed IEC 60670 conduit box to IEC 60670-1: 2002
Section B8 EE_GS
Page 4 of 15 2007 Edition
 and the associated parts of the standard, mounted just above skirting
level on the wall. The flexible cord shall enter the conduit through a
compression gland, and shall be connected to a terminal block
mounted in the conduit box to IEC 60670-1:2002 and the associated
parts of the standard, to which the extra low voltage wiring shall be
connected. Where spare conduits are placed in floor slabs, they shall
be plugged with a metal screwed plug to keep out dirt and moisture.

The conduit box to IEC 60670-1:2002 and the associated parts of the
standard shall form part of the extra low voltage conduit system.

B8.2.10 Bell Indicator

Bell indicator shall be in a form of flashing light or indication light as

specified. The indicators shall be fixed onto a cabinet of approved
type with proper labels. Reset facilities shall be provided to resume
the normal operation after acknowledge the bell indication.

B8.2.11 Segregation of Circuits

Cables for operation at extra low voltage shall not be routed in the
same conduit where other cables are operating at higher voltages.

B8.3 INSTALLATION IN HAZARDOUS AREAS

B8.3.1 General

(a) Electrical equipment and wiring of electrical installations

exposed to potentially explosive atmospheres shall be
constructed and protected to the requirements specified for
hazardous areas in IEC 60079-0:2004 and the associated parts
of the standard and equivalent such as BS EN 50014 to 50039
and relevant FM (Factory Mutual) or UL (Underwriters
Laboratory) standards under ANSI or equivalent standard
acceptable by relevant authorities.

(b) Electrical equipment and wiring of electrical installations in

buildings and premises for the storage, manufacture or packing
of dangerous goods in Categories 1 to 10 shall comply with
the provisions of CAP 295B Dangerous Goods (General)
Regulations.

(c) Electrical equipment and wiring of electrical installations in

building and premises for Categories 2 and 5 Dangerous
Goods including those in building and premises for liquid
petroleum gas storage and for petrol filling stations shall, in
addition to the requirements in Clause 8.3.1 (a) and (b) above,
comply with the requirements specified for hazardous areas in
the Electricity Safety Code Part 1 and 15 of the Institute of
Petroleum Model Code of Safe Practice in the Petroleum
Industry or Marketing Safety Code of the Institute of
Petroleum or equivalent such as BS EN 50014 to 50039 and
Section B8 EE_GS
Page 5 of 15 2007 Edition
 relevant FM (Factory Mutual) or UL (Underwriters Laboratory)
standards under ANSI or equivalent standard acceptable by
relevant authorities.

B8.3.2 Electrical Equipment Selection

(a) Attention shall be paid to the Zone of Risk and to adopt the
most appropriate type of protection. Type of protection of
electrical equipment for achievement of safety shall be in
accordance with the zone of risk listed in Table B8.3.2(a).

Table B8.3.2(a) - Selection of Electrical Equipment and

Systems according to Zone of Risk

Zone in which
Type of Protection the protection
may be used
‘ia’ intrinsically-safe apparatus
or system 0, 1, 2
‘s’ special protection
(specifically certified for
use in Zone 0)

‘p’ Pressurized apparatus

‘d’ flammable enclosure
‘e’ increased safety
‘ib’ intrinsically-safe apparatus 1, 2
or system
‘m’ encapsulation
‘s’ special protection

‘o’ oil-immersion
‘q’ powder filling 2
’N’ non sparking

NOTES:

Zone 0 Zone in which an explosive atmosphere is

continuously present or present for long periods;

Zone 1 Zone in which an explosive atmosphere is likely to

occur in normal operation; and

Zone 2 Zone in which an explosive atmosphere is not likely

to occur in normal operation, and if it occurs it will
exist only for a short time.

(b) The maximum surface temperature of the T (Temperature)

class of an electrical equipment shall not exceed the ignition
temperature of the gases or vapours involved. Relationship

Section B8 EE_GS
Page 6 of 15 2007 Edition
 between T class and maximum surface temperature is shown
in Table B8.3.2(b).

Table B8.3.2(b) - Relationship between T Class and

Maximum Surface Temperature

T Class Maximum Surface Temperature (°C)

T1 450
T2 300
T3 200
T4 135
T5 100
T6 85

(c) The gas and vapour classification of electrical equipment

which provides guidance for the safety usage of equipment
in the type of gaseous prevalent environment shall conform
with IEC 60079-12:1978 and the associated Parts of the
Standard.

B8.3.3 Wiring System

The wiring system shall be:

(a) PVC insulated cables drawn into steel conduits complying

with Sections B2 and C2; or

(b) Flame retarding PVC outer sheathed fire retarding cable

enclosed in conduits or trunking complying with Sections B3
and C3; or

(c) Multi-core armoured cables complying with Sections B3 and

C3; or

(d) Mineral insulated copper sheathed cables with copper

conductors complying with Sections B3 and C3.

Where single core metal sheathed or armoured cables are used,

precautions shall be taken to avoid dangerous sheath voltages or
currents.

B8.3.4 Conduit Fitting, Cable Glands, Terminal Box and Enclosure

Unless otherwise specified, conduit fittings, cable glands, terminal

boxes and enclosures of apparatus (including accessories) shall be
suitable for use with Group IIA and Group IIB inflammable gases and
vapours as specified in IEC 60079-12:1978 with temperature
classification of T6 (85°C). Conduit fittings, cable glands and
terminal boxes shall carry the registered flameproof mark and
manufacturer's certificate number.

Section B8 EE_GS
Page 7 of 15 2007 Edition
B8.3.5 Screw or Bolt

Screws or bolts for securing individual components of apparatus and

luminaires shall only be removed by the using of a tubular box
spanner complying with BS 2558:1954 or a hexagon wrench key
complying with BS 2470:1973.

B8.3.6 Luminaire

Unless otherwise specified, luminaires shall comply with IEC 60079-

0:2004 and the associated parts of the standard and shall be suitable
for use in Zone 1 where gases exist is of Group IIA or Group IIB
classification as specified in IEC 60079-12:1978 with temperature
classification of T6 (85oC). Where tubular fluorescent luminaires are
specified, they shall have starterless ballasts.

B8.3.7 Conduit Pendant

At all tube pendant points, a three-way (tee) circular or rectangular

junction box shall be provided. The conduit down drop shall be fitted
direct to the threaded spout of the box. Screwed pendant covers shall
not be used.

B8.3.8 Cables or Conduits Passing through Floor, Wall or Partition

Where cables or conduit passing through a floor, wall or partition that

forms a gas or fire barrier, the hole provided for them shall be made
good with material determined as incombustible in accordance with
the method of BS 476-4:1970 to the full thickness of the floor, wall or
partition. Alternatively, cable glands or cable transits may be used
for this purpose.

Where a run of conduit, irrespective of size, passes from a hazardous

area to a non-hazardous area, a stopper box or sealing device shall be
inserted at the hazardous area boundary or, failing this, on the side
remote from the hazardous area.

B8.3.9 Precautions to Prevent Passage of Inflammables Gases or Vapours

Where trunking, ducts, pipes or trenches are used to accommodate

cables, precautions shall be taken to prevent the passage of
inflammable gases or vapours from one area to another and to prevent
the collection of inflammable gases or vapours in trenches. Such
precautions shall involve the sealing of trunking, ducts and pipes and
the adequate ventilation or sand filling of trenches.

B8.3.10 Equipotential Bonding of Conduit

The metallic portion of conduit shall be electrically bonded to the

rigid system by either a separate conductor or terminating devices.

Section B8 EE_GS
Page 8 of 15 2007 Edition
B8.4 EXTERNAL LIGHTING SYSTEM

B8.4.1 Scope

This Sub-section covers lighting installations (mainly pole mounted)

for street lighting, security lighting, floodlighting and general area
lighting.

B8.4.2 Specification and Drawing

External lighting installations shall be installed in accordance with the

Particular Specification and Drawings. Unless otherwise specified,
poles and luminaires shall comply with the Standard Drawings.

B8.4.3 Luminaire

The type of lamps and luminaires to be used shall be as specified in

the Particular Specification and Drawings. Unless otherwise
specified, the luminaires shall be securely mounted on the poles by
the method indicated on the Standard Drawings.

For those not mounted on poles, they shall be fixed on wall or hanger,
plinth or the like dedicated for the mounting of the luminaires. In
such case, the installation shall comply with Clause B4.

Where specified in the Particular Specification, a safety chain shall be

provided between the luminaire and the lamp pole to ensure that the
luminaire will not be dropped down in case the luminaire support
fails. The chain shall be galvanized steel and of adequate strength to
support at least three times the weight of the luminaire.

B8.4.4 Construction of Lamp Pole

Unless otherwise specified, lamp poles shall be constructed of mild

steel pipe of one, two or three sections of diameter and modules, all
as specified on the Standard Drawings. The lamp poles shall be hot
dipped galvanized to BS 729:1971. Material samples and working
drawings shall be submitted when requested by the Architect. The
poles shall be finished overall with at least two coats of primer and
two coats of finishing paint after erection in accordance with Clause
B1.6. The color of the finishing paint shall be as directed by the
Architect.

If lamp poles not constructed in accordance with standard drawings

are offered, the Contractor shall submit evidence to substantiate that
the lamp poles are structurally sound and are suitable for use in the
local environment, in particular under typhoon conditions at a wind
speed of up to 80 m/s. Such evidence shall be by means of
manufacturer’s calculation and certificates.

All lamp poles shall be earthed by approved means such as the

armour of the underground armoured cables.

Section B8 EE_GS
Page 9 of 15 2007 Edition
B8.4.5 Foundation of Lamp Pole

Lamp poles shall be securely bolted down in an upright position to

the foundations constructed in accordance with the Standard
Drawings. Should there be any queries on the construction of the
foundations, the Architect’s advice shall be sought.

B8.4.6 Service Box

A galvanized steel service box shall be provided on each pole at an

appropriate height above ground level to accommodate the MCB
control box. The construction of the service box and the MCB
control box shall be as shown on the Standard Drawings. For
imported lamp pole, the service box shall be provided as an integral
part of the lamp pole.

Each lamp circuit shall be protected by an MCB. Where the CSA of

the incoming/outgoing cable cores are larger than that which can be
accommodated by the terminal of the MCB, a fixed insulated
connector block of adequate rating shall be installed with a tail to the
MCB. Alternatively, a copper busbar may be used.

Where the service box serves more than one circuit, the supply to the
MCB shall be by means of a copper busbar of adequate rating. The
phase conductors of the incoming/outgoing cables shall then be
terminated to the busbar by means of cable sockets.

Each control box shall be fitted with a neutral block of adequate

rating and having sufficient number of ways for the
incoming/outgoing cable cores. It shall be securely fixed to the base
of the control box by means of a 6 mm thick paxolin block.

The service box shall be fitted with a 3 mm thick galvanized steel

cover made waterproof with a 3 mm thick soft rubber or neoprene
gasket. The cover shall be fixed by means of four M6 brass fixing
bolts and washers and shall be hinged. Provision shall be made in the
batten plate of the box for supporting and terminating up to three
numbers of incoming/outgoing XPLE or PVC/SWA & PVCS cables
by means of suitable cable glands. The cable sizes shall be as
specified in the Particular Specification or on the Drawings.

B8.4.7 Underground Cable to Pole

Underground cables for external lighting systems shall be copper

cored, XPLE or PVC insulated, steel wire armoured and PVC
sheathed cables (XPLE or PVC/SWA & PVCS) unless otherwise
specified. Cables shall enter and leave the pole below ground level
and each cable shall terminate in a gland fixed to the MCB control
box. The cable cores between the glands and the terminals shall not
be in tension.

Underground straight through joint will not be permitted without

written agreement of the Architect.
Section B8 EE_GS
Page 10 of 15 2007 Edition
 All underground cables shall be laid inside cable trenches or ducts. If
these ducts are provided by the builder, the Contractor shall ascertain
that the quantity, size and associated arrangement of the ducts are
suitable for drawing of cables in future. Draw pits of adequate sizes
shall be provided for a straight run of approximately 15m, at position
where cable route changes direction or as and where required.

B8.4.8 Cable between Service Box and Luminaire

Cables from the neutral terminal block and the MCB to the luminaires
shall be PVC insulated and PVC sheathed having CSA as specified.
Arrangements shall be made to prevent the cores from being under
tension where they are attached to terminals. All cables shall be
contained within the poles. Rubber grommets shall be installed where
cable passes through metal work.

Where sustained arc voltage of a discharge lamp exceeds 250V, the

cables used for connecting the lamp and the control-gear shall be of
600/1000V grade to IEC 60502-1:2004 and the associated parts of the
standard or as recommended by the lamp manufacturer. The length
of cables shall not exceed the limit as recommended by the
manufacturer.

Where flexible cables are recommended by manufacturer for

termination at the luminaire, PVC insulated and PVC sheathed
flexible cables shall be used. Such cables shall enter the luminaire by
means of suitable waterproof compression glands.

Where four or more floodlights are mounted on a pole, the flexible

cables shall be connected to the luminaires by means of a mild steel
connector box with waterproof hinged cover. The connector box
shall be fitted near to the top of the pole, all as shown on the Standard
Drawings.

B8.4.9 Switch Fitted to Pole

Where specified switches may be mounted on the pole for local

control. Switches mounted on the pole shall be fixed onto it by
tapped holes and brass fixing screws. The switches shall be
waterproof or contained within a waterproof type galvanized metal
case, with an external galvanized metal operating knob or handle.
Switches shall be fitted at least 2m above finished ground level.

B8.4.10 Control Gear for Discharge Lighting

Control gear for discharge lamps shall be contained within a

galvanized steel box mounted on the pole or inside the concrete gear-
cabinet provided by others as shown on the Drawings. When
mounted on the pole, the steel box shall be watertight and positioned
at a height higher than normal working level in such a way that a
ladder is needed for access. The box shall be of adequate size to
accommodate all control gear, cable and connections. The method of
construction shall be similar to the service box.
Section B8 EE_GS
Page 11 of 15 2007 Edition
 B8.4.11 Testing of Illumination Level

Testing of the illumination level and distribution of external lighting

installations shall be carried out after dark under the direction of the
Architect. All labour, instruments and materials necessary to carry
out the test shall be provided including adjustment of the luminaires
to achieve the desired illumination level and performance to the
satisfaction of the Architect.

B8.4.12 Numbering of Lamp Pole

All lamp poles shall be marked with appropriate identification

numbers. The numbers shall commence consecutively from the
source of power supply in the clockwise direction. The numbering
proposal shall be submitted with the shop drawings to the Architect
for approval.

The number shall be etched on a stainless steel plate which shall be

fixed onto the pole by tapped holes and two brass fixing screws. The
numbers shall not be less than 50 mm tall.

A framed drawing indicating the location of lamp poles and pole

numbers shall be provided in the appropriate switch room. The
framed drawing shall be fixed onto the wall in such a manner that it
can easily be removed for reference.

B8.5 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

B8.5.1 Installation of Lightning Protection System

Lightning protection systems shall be installed in accordance with the

Particular Specification and Drawings, and as directed by the
Architect.

B8.5.2 Scope

This Sub-section covers lightning protection systems applicable to

buildings and similar structures. It does not cover the protection of
overhead lines and other specialized applications. The installation
shall conform to the requirements and recommendations set out in
IEC 62305-1:2006 and the associated parts of the standard.

B8.5.3 Type of Lightning Protection System

A lightning protection system shall comprise air termination

connected by down conductors to earthing electrodes. In larger
schemes more than one of any or all of the above items may be used.
Air terminations may be interconnected by means of roof horizontal
conductors.

Section B8 EE_GS
Page 12 of 15 2007 Edition
B8.5.4 Air Termination

Air termination shall consist of vertical or horizontal conductor(s) or

combination of both.

On a reinforced concrete structure, the air termination shall be

connected to the designated reinforcing bars in the number of
positions required for down conductors.

All metallic projections on or above the main surface of the roof

which are connected, intentionally or fortuitously, to the general mass
of the earth should be bonded to, and form part of, the air termination
network.

B8.5.5 Down Conductor

The dimensions of down conductors to be used shall be either of the

following:

(a) annealed tinned copper strip 25 mm x 3 mm;

(b) annealed copper rod 12 mm diameter; or

(c) steel reinforcement bar 12 mm diameter.

Where the steel work of the structure is used as down conductor, co-
ordination with the Building Contractor is required to ensure the
continuity of the steel work. In this connection the ends of the steel
work shall be connected to the lightning protection system by a
jointing method which is suitable for bonding dissimilar metals and
approved by the Architect. A test joint shall be provided at each
connection.

When down conductors adhered on the external wall are specified,

they shall be fixed by means of suitable spacer saddles at regular
intervals of not exceeding 1m apart. The down conductor shall
follow the most direct path possible between the air termination
network and the earth termination network. When more than one
down conductors are installed, they shall be arranged as evenly as
practicable around the outside walls of the structure starting from the
corners.

Each down conductor shall be connected to an earth termination.

B8.5.6 Test Joint

Test joints shall be of phosphor bronze, gunmetal or copper. They

shall comprise a heavy circular base, to which a heavy circular cover
of the same material shall be bolted. The flat copper conductor shall
be overlapped and placed so that they are clamped between the cover
and the base by means of at least four screws or studs.

Section B8 EE_GS
Page 13 of 15 2007 Edition
 The test joints shall be positioned so that they shall not be tampered
with by unauthorized persons. In cases where this is not possible, the
earth tape/rod connector clamp shall be used as an alternative test
point in place of the test joint.

B8.5.7 Earth Termination

Unless otherwise specified, earth termination shall be of rod

electrodes complying with Clause B7.3.

Each earth termination shall have a resistance to earth not exceeding

the product given by 10Ω times the number of earth terminations to
be provided. The whole of the lightning protection system shall have
a combined resistance to earth not exceeding 10Ω. Where, due to
local conditions, it is difficult to obtain a value of less than 10Ω by
the sole use of rod electrodes, alternative or additional methods, e.g.
the use of deep bore holes, the installation of tape or plate electrodes
complying with Section B7, may be used at the discretion of the
Architect.

B8.5.8 Spacer Saddle

Spacer saddles shall be of high quality metal. For copper conductors,

brass or gunmetal shall be used.

Non-metallic spacer saddles shall only be used when down

conductors are provided with PVC sheathing.

B8.5.9 Connection to Earth Termination

Down conductors and bonding conductors shall be connected to the

earth electrode in accordance with Clause B7.4. Each connection
shall be separately clamped and shall be fitted with a warning notice
in accordance with Clause B1.2

B8.5.10 Bonding to Other Services

Lightning protection systems shall normally be kept segregated from

the metalwork of other services. Minimum isolation clearances as
given in IEC 62305-1:2006 and the associated parts of the standard.
shall be maintained. However, in certain circumstances, e.g. where
fortuitous contact with other systems cannot be avoided, earth
electrodes for lightning protection may, at the discretion of the
Architect, be bonded to other such services including the metal sheath
and armouring of low voltage cables, the consumer's low voltage
earth system, metal water pipes and steel reinforcement for the
foundation and structure. Cables and earthing systems belonging to
the Supply Authorities, the Telephone Company and other authorities
shall not be bonded except with the written permission of such
Authorities. Gas pipes shall not normally be connected to any earth
electrode.

Section B8 EE_GS
Page 14 of 15 2007 Edition
B8.5.11 Bond

Bonds for use in connecting the lightning protection system of other

metal work shall be of soft annealed copper strip of 25 x 3 mm.
Bonds connecting movable items to the lightning protection system
shall be of flexible copper strand 475/0.5 mm diameter or equivalent.
Connections to other metalwork shall be of negligible resistance,
metal to metal and mechanically sound with non-ferrous nuts, bolts
and washers using clamps where necessary.

B8.5.12 Joint in Conductors

Joints in roof conductors and/or down conductors shall be made by

double riveting or by suitable tape clamps. When clamps are used,
the tape clamps shall each be provided with at least 4 screws or bolts.
All such joints shall be tinned and shall have negligible resistance and
good mechanical strength.

Alternatively, connectors may be jointed together by means of

exothermic or thermal welding utilizing the high temperature reaction
of powdered copper oxide provided that the proper material and
equipment are used in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommended process.

B8.5.13 Testing

On completion of the installation, the lightning protection system

shall be tested for continuity between air terminations and earthing
terminations and the resistance shall be recorded. The earthing
resistance of each earthing electrode shall also be tested and recorded.
The tests shall be carried out in accordance with Part D of this
Specification and shall be submitted to the Architect for approval.

All instruments used for testing shall be properly calibrated.

Section B8 EE_GS
Page 15 of 15 2007 Edition
 SECTION B9

INSTALLATION OF ELECTRIC MOTORS AND HIGH VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT

B9.1 LOW VOLTAGE-ELECTRIC MOTORS

B9.1.1 Maintenance Access and Safety

(a) Adequate access to the motors and their associated facilities

shall be allowed such that the necessary periodical testing,
cleaning and maintenance can be carried out. The motors
shall not be installed in a position where surrounding plant or
building work may obstruct in meeting such requirements.

(b) Each electric motor, electric air heater battery or other

electrical device which is controlled from the main control
panel and is so situated that the panel is at a distance and/or
out of sight from the equipment. shall be provided with a
local 'stop-lock' control circuit switch (where there is a
separate control circuit), plus a local main power supply
circuit isolator in all such cases.

B9.1.2 Terminals

Exception for armoured cables, all other cables appearing above floor
level shall be enclosed in approved trunking, solid or flexible conduit,
with approved provision for movement of the motor. The terminal
boxes for cable connection shall be suitably arranged to make a neat
joint with the conduits or cables.

B9.1.3 Anti-Condensation Heater

The anti-condensation heater shall be controlled such that the heater

shall be de-energised when the starter is switched on and vice versa.
Heaters shall be wired from the motor control panel.

B9.1.4 Belt Drives and Pulleys

Pulleys shall be correctly aligned and any holding down bolts or

fixings shall be positioned to ensure correct alignment.

Slide rails shall be provided for all motors driving through belts.
Purpose-made adjusting devices shall be provided to adjust the belt
tension and to secure the motors.

B9.1.5 Protective Guards

The protective guards shall be rigidly constructed. It shall not be

possible to remove any guard without the aid of a tool.

Section B9 EE_GS
Page 1 of 6 2007 Edition
 B9.1.6 Warning Label

Motor arranged for automatic restart shall have a label of durable

material permanently fixed to it and in a prominent position clearly
inscribed as shown below:

DANGER
THIS MOTOR IS AUTOMATICALLY CONTROLLED AND MAY
START WITHOUT WARNING. ISOLATE BEFORE INSPECTION.
危險
此 機 乃 自 動 操 作 ， 維 修 前 請 先 關 掣

B9.2 MOTOR SWITCHGEAR, STARTER AND CONTROL PANELS

B9.2.1 General

The motor switchgear, starters and controls shall be housed in wall-

mounted local motor control panels, or floor-standing motor control
switchboard as required.

B9.2.2 Local Motor Control Panels

The local motor control panel shall be of wall-mounted type, unless

otherwise specified, to house the motor starter and switchgear.

B9.2.3 Motor Control Switchboard

(a) The motor control switchboard (hereafter called the “MC

Switchboard”) shall be a free-standing floor-mounted low
voltage switchboard to group centrally the motor starters,
controls and switchgear for the equipment.

(b) The switchboard shall be installed on a raised concrete

'housekeeping' base provided by others. Precautions shall be
taken to prevent damage or deterioration of panels during
transit and to afford physical protection on site prior to final
acceptance.

B9.3 HIGH VOLTAGE-GENERAL

B9.3.1 All the high voltage electrical installation work shall be carried out by
a Registered Electrical Contractor and Worker for Grade H electrical
work as required by the Electricity Ordinance (Cap.406). After the
completion of the electrical installation works, it shall be inspected,
tested and certified by a Registered Electrical Worker to confirm that
the requirements of the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations have been
met. The Registered Electrical Worker and Contractor shall sign the
Work Completion Certificate for the individual high voltage electrical
installation and submit to the Architect before the electrical
installation is energised.
Section B9 EE_GS
Page 2 of 6 2007 Edition
B9.4 HIGH VOLTAGE - ELECTRIC MOTORS

B9.4.1 Motor Foundation

A motor bedplate/foundation block shall be provided unless the motor

is to be mounted on the soleplate of the driving equipment such as
compressor or pump. Jacking screws shall be fitted at perpendicular
directions on the foundation block for alignment of the coupling.

B9.4.2 Provision for Cabling and Termination

(a) Cabling Provision at Bedplates

Provision shall be made in the steel bedplate where

necessary to facilitate straight run of cable to the bottom of
the motor cable terminal box.

(b) Cabling Provision at Motor Casing

The terminal leads from cable box terminals or connectors to

the windings for a distance of 150 mm beyond their point of
entry into the motor frame shall be adequately braced to
withstand the forces produced by maximum fault current.

The phase windings shall be accessible for testing. For this

purpose, neutral leads shall be brought out to a separate star-
point terminal box and shorted with an insulated copper bar
of cross-sectional area not less than the conductor of the
terminal lead.

Studs shall be so fixed as to prevent the terminal leads from

turning when the nuts are tightened down. Means shall be
provided to prevent slackening of cable connections due to
vibration.

(c) Motor Termination Boxes

The termination of motor supply cables shall be done by

bolts and nuts on to stud terminal stems, and so designed that
the motor can be removed to another location with the
termination chamber in-situ. No cable joint is permitted in
the termination chamber.

Front access detachable cover plates shall be fixed by studs

and nuts. Separate plates shall be supplied for termination
chambers.

Joints shall be machined flat and fitted with neoprene rubber

gaskets.

A shroud having a minimum breakdown voltage of 20 kV

shall be fitted over each cable terminal.

Section B9 EE_GS
Page 3 of 6 2007 Edition
B9.5 HIGH VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL SWITCHBOARD

B9.5.1 General Requirements

(a) The switchboard shall be mounted firmly on to the concrete

floor finished to the standard requirements as recommended
by the equipment manufacturer. The floor construction shall
be designed to withstand the operating weight and impact
loading of the switchboard. Individual panels shall be
erected to true plumb vertically and horizontally on suitable
guides/rails as standard accessories from the same
manufacturer.

(b) The height of the instrument panel above floor level shall not
exceed 2400 mm. All panels constituting a complete
switchboard shall be of equal height.

(c) Bolted on rear and top covers shall be designed to gain

access to individual circuits without exposing other circuits
which may be alive. Switchboards shall not be located
across floor expansion joints.

(d) Before steelworks is painted, it shall be treated and

degreased by an approved method such as grit blasting to
ISO 8502:2006 or chemical pickling and an approved anti-
rusting priming coat applied. The panels shall be externally
finished in semi-gloss stoved enamel or cellulose to a color
to be approved by the Architect.

B9.5.2 Primary Busbars and Connections

(a) At all points where connections or joints occur, the busbars

and connecting pieces shall be tinned or silver-plated. The
resistance of any length of conductor containing a joint shall
not be greater than that of an equal length without a joint.

(b) Jointing of sections of busbars shall be done by mechanical

means. Soldered, braced, welded or riveted joints shall not
be used in busbars. Jointing faces of copper conductors shall
be tinned or silver plated, or other approved treatment to
maintain effective conductivity of the joint. All necessary
busbar jointing bolts, nuts, and fixing accessories shall be
provided. The recommended torque for tightening the bolts
shall be stated in the maintenance manual.

B9.5.3 Anti-Condensation Heaters

They shall be thermostatically controlled and shall operate at black

heat and shall be shrouded and located so as not to cause injury to
personnel or damage to equipment. The heaters shall be controlled
from a double-pole miniature circuit-breaker, with a lamp to indicate
'cubicle heaters on'. The circuit-breaker and indicating lamp shall be
mounted externally at one end of the switchboard.
Section B9 EE_GS
Page 4 of 6 2007 Edition
 B9.5.4 Cables Boxes

(a) Cable boxes shall be suitable for terminating the cables

directly into the switchgear.

(b) Where cable boxes are used for three-core cables, the
sweating sockets on the two outer phases shall be so fixed to
incline towards the centre to minimise bending of the cable
cores. Where there is more than one core per phase, the
socket block shall be so fixed as to minimise bending of the
cable cores, and spacer clips shall be used.

B9.5.5 Labels and Warning Notice

(a) Labels shall be fixed by screws on the non-detachable parts

of the panel at a height of 1350 mm or above.

(b) 'Danger - H.V. Live Terminals/ 危 險 – 高 壓 帶 電 電 極 '

warning labels shall be attached to the access covers of the
air insulated cable boxes, CT chambers and busbar, and shall
be colored red with white lettering in both English &
Chinese characters.

(c) In addition to automatic screening shutters and barriers,

warning labels shall also be provided for all live parts, such
as test terminal blocks.

B9.6 HIGH VOLTAGE AUTO-TRANSFORMERS

B9.6.1 The auto-transformers shall be mounted firmly on to the concrete

floor finished to the standard requirements as recommended by the
equipment manufacturer. The floor construction shall be designed to
withstand the operating weight of the auto-transformers.

B9.6.2 The installation shall be carried out in strict accordance with the
recommendations so as to keep the noise and vibration generated by
the auto-transformers to the minimum.

B9.7 HIGH VOLTAGE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS

B9.7.1 Positioning of the power factor correction capacitors shall be done by

means of the built-in combined jacking and haulage lugs.

B9.7.2 The installation shall strictly follow the equipment manufacturer’s

recommendations.

Section B9 EE_GS
Page 5 of 6 2007 Edition
B9.8 HIGH VOLTAGE POWER CABLES

B9.8.1 No straight through cable joints shall be installed without the

approval of the Architect.

B9.8.2 For identification, the rating of the cable shall be impressed into the
outer insulation at regular intervals.

B9.8.3 The radius of each bend or change in direction in the route of a cable
shall not be less than eight times the overall diameter of the cable or
as technically recommended by the cable manufacturer whichever is
more stringent.

B9.8.4 Cable Terminations

Cables shall be terminated by approved non-ferrous mechanical

glands complete with compression devices for securing the cable
sheath. An armour clamp shall be provided for bonding to metal
sheaths as necessary. Where the cables are installed in entirely dry
situations, the gland shall be designed with a compressible gasket or
packing for securing the inner sheath and anchoring the armour. For
cables installed wholly or partly in outdoor or damp conditions,
compressible sealing and clamping features shall be provided for
securing the inner and outer sheaths and also the armour; barriers
shall be incorporated to prevent the ingress of moisture. Other types
of cable termination can be used subject to the approval of Architect.

Section B9 EE_GS
Page 6 of 6 2007 Edition
 PART C – MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION

SECTION C1

GENERAL

C1.1 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

C1.1.1 International Standards

Material and equipment shall be of high quality, and shall comply

with, where applicable, the appropriate International Standard
Specifications prepared by IEC or ISO Technical Committees
together with any amendments made thereto.

C1.1.2 Other Standard Specifications

When material or equipment complying with other standard

specifications is offered, the Contractor shall satisfy the Architect that
the quality of the equipment offered is equal to or better than that
specified in the appropriate International Standards (IEC/ISO).

C1.1.3 Service Conditions

The following service conditions shall apply:

(a) Climate: Hong Kong (tropical);

(b) Ambient temperature:

Peak -5°C to +40°C (continuously 4 hours)
Average 0°C to +35°C (over 24 hours);

(c) Altitude: up to 2000 m above sea level; and

(d) Relative humidity: 99% maximum.

C1.1.4 Selection of Equipment

Selection of equipment shall be based on this Specification, the

Particular Specification, and technical data contained on the
Drawings for a particular installation.

An assessment should be made of any characteristics of equipment

likely to have harmful effects upon other electrical equipment or other
services, or impair the supply. Those characteristics include the
following:

(a) overvoltages;
(b) undervoltages;
(c) fluctuating loads;
(d) unbalanced loads;
Section C1 EE_GS
Page 1 of 4 2007 Edition
 (e) power factor;
(f) starting currents;
(g) harmonic currents;
(h) d.c. feedback;
(i) high-frequency oscillations; and
(j) necessity for additional connection to earth.

Where items of equipment are interconnected to form an integral part

of the complete electrical installation, their characteristics of
performance and capacities shall be so matched as to give safe,
reliable, efficient and economical operation of the complete electrical
installation.

Whenever equipment are called for in the Particular Specifications or

Drawings for the electrical installation of a particular job, all these
equipment shall conform to the energy efficiency requirements as
stipulated in Codes of Practice for Energy Efficiency of Electrical
Installations and Lighting Installations issued by Electrical and
Mechanical Services Department, the Government of the HKSAR.

C1.1.5 Equipment Catalogue and Manufacturer’s Specification

Equipment catalogues and manufacturers’ specifications related to the

proposed equipment shall be in the Chinese or English language, be
specific and shall include all information necessary for the Architect
to ascertain that the equipment complies with this Specification and
Drawings. Data and sales catalogue of a general nature will not be
accepted unless prior agreement has been obtained from the Architect.

Equipment catalogues and manufacturers’ specifications must be

submitted for the examination and agreement of the Architect before
any equipment is ordered.

C1.2 VOLTAGE COVERED BY THIS SPECIFICATION

Unless otherwise specified, all apparatus, equipment, materials and wiring shall
be suitable for use with a 3-phase and neutral, 4-wire, 380/220V +6%,
50 Hz ±2% source neutral earthed system with provision of bonding to the
Electricity Supplier’s bonding terminal.

C1.3 INSULATING MATERIAL

Insulating tapes for low voltage applications shall comply with IEC 60454-3-
1:2002 pressure sensitive adhesive tape type F-PVCp/90/0/Tp (Plasticized PVC)
and have a thickness of not less than 0.22mm.

Non-impregnated paper, fabric, wood or press-hemp shall not be used for

insulating purposes. Where synthetic resin bonded insulating boards are used, all
cut edges shall be sealed with an approved varnish.

When insulating material complying with other standard specifications is

Section C1 EE_GS
Page 2 of 4 2007 Edition
 offered, the Contractor shall satisfy the Architect that the quality of the
insulating material offered is equal to or better than that specified in the
appropriate IEC Standards.

C1.4 MINIMUM SIZE OF CABLE CONDUCTOR

Cables for lighting and bell circuits shall have CSA of not less than 1.0mm², and
those for power circuits shall have CSA of not less than 2.5mm². Internal wiring
in factory made panel or equipment may comprise cables of different suitable
CSA determined by the manufacturer.

The CSA of any cable shall not be reduced at its point of termination, junction,
joints, etc.

Where cables of 1.0mm2 are to be terminated, approximately 15mm long of

cable insulation shall be removed and half the length of the bare conductor shall
be bent into the other half to form a solid part prior to the insertion into the
termination.

C1.5 USE OF PVC-INSULATED CABLE AT LOW TEMPERATURE

PVC-insulated cables shall not be installed in refrigerated space or other

situations where the temperature is consistently below 0°C.

C1.6 FIXING SCREW AND BOLT

Machine screws and nuts shall be to ISO 885:2000. Hexagon bolts, screws and
nuts shall be to BS EN 24016:1992, BS EN 24018:1992 and BS EN 24034:1992.
Wood screws shall be to BS 1210:1963 with countersunk head unless otherwise
specified. Holes for bolts, screws and other fixings shall be drilled or stamped,
and no larger than required for clearance of the bolt, screw, etc.

C1.7 SHEET METAL WORK

Sheet metal boxes, meter chambers, etc. shall be manufactured from plain steel
sheets. The thickness of steel sheet shall be as specified in the Particular
Specification and subject to a minimum of 1.0mm. Where necessary, suitable
stiffeners shall be provided to give adequate rigidity.

Protection against corrosion shall be achieved by means of hot-dip galvanisation,

anti-rust painting or enamel, or the use of stainless steel. If stainless steel sheet
is specified, it shall be to ISO 683-13:1986, Table 3 “Type of Condition and
Surface Condition of Stainless Steel Products” Symbol F9 for matt finish and
Symbol F8 for polished finish.

Section C1 EE_GS
Page 3 of 4 2007 Edition
C1.8 CABLE MARKERS IN ADDITION TO CABLE COLOR
IDENTIFICATION

Cable markers where necessary shall be provided to cables in addition to their

color identifications.

C1.8.1 Cable markers for identification purposes shall comply with BS

3858:1992.

C1.8.2 The physical dimensions of cable markers and all necessary

accessories shall suit and fit the sizes of cables. Cable markers shall
either be of closed type which have to be fitted to the cable before
physical connection of cables or of open type which can be directly
attached to the cables after connection.

C1.8.3 The materials used for the cable markers and carrier strips shall be
made from Halogen-free materials and flame resistance, having a
service temperature range between -40oC to +70oC. They shall be of
high mechanical strength , rigidity and hardness characteristics. The
material shall also be chemical resistance against sodium hydroxide,
seawater, detergent, petrol, diesel, sodium chloride solution, nitric
acid, ammonium hydroxide, etc. The color of cable markers shall be
YELLOW in accordance with the international color-code.

C1.8.4 The identification markings on the cable markers shall be printed in

BLACK color. The printed characteristics shall withstand all the
usual marker tests pertaining to resistance to smearing and scratching,
and imperious to solvents such as acetone.

Section C1 EE_GS
Page 4 of 4 2007 Edition
 SECTION C2

WIRING SYSTEM: CABLES, CONDUITS, TRUNKING AND ACCESSORIES

C2.1 CABLES IN WIRING SYSTEM

C2.1.1 General

Wiring cables shall be manufactured under a recognized quality

surveillance scheme (e.g. British Approvals Service for Cables
(BASEC) licence or the HAR scheme recognized by the European
Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization, CENELEC, etc.) and
bear the appropriate marking (e.g. BASEC mark or HAR mark, etc.)
of the quality surveillance scheme.

Cables in wiring system shall be one or a combination of the

following types.

C2.1.2 Non-sheathed Cables

Non-sheathed cables shall be to:

(a) 450/750V PVC insulated, single-core, non-sheathed copper

cables, with solid or stranded conductor for general purpose,
suitable for conductor operating temperature not exceeding
70oC – code designation 60227 IEC 01 of IEC 60227-3:1997;

(b) 450/750V PVC insulated, single-core, non-sheathed copper

cables with flexible conductor for general purpose, suitable for
conductor operating temperature not exceeding 70oC – code
designation 60227 IEC 02 of IEC 60227-3:1997;

(c) 300/500V heat resistant ethylene-vinyl acetate rubber or other

equivalent synthetic elastomer insulated, single-core, non-
sheathed copper cable, with solid conductor, suitable for
conductor operating temperature not exceeding 110oC – code
designation 60245 IEC 06 of IEC 60245-7:1994;

(d) 450/750V heat resistant ethylene-vinyl acetate rubber or other

equivalent synthetic elastomer insulated, single-core, non-
sheathed copper cable, with solid or stranded conductor,
suitable for conductor operating temperature not exceeding
110oC – code designation 60245 IEC 04 of IEC 60245-7:1994;

(e) 450/750V thermosetting insulated, single-core non-sheathed,

copper cable, with solid or stranded conductor, with low
emission of smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire,
suitable for conductor operating temperature not exceeding
90oC – code designation H07Z-U and H07Z-R of BS
7211:1998; or
(f) 450/750V, fire resistant, thermosetting insulated, single core,
non-sheathed copper cable, with solid or stranded conductor,
Section C2 EE_GS
Page 1 of 12 2007 Edition
 with low emission of smoke and corrosive gases when affected
by fire, suitable for conductor operating temperature not
exceeding 90oC. Fire resistant cable shall also comply with
the fire performance requirement specified in Clause C2.1.7.

C2.1.3 Sheathed Cables

Sheathed cables shall be to:

(a) 600/1000V PVC insulated, single-core or multi-core, PVC

sheathed, with or without armour, copper cables with solid or
stranded conductor, suitable for conductor operating
temperature not exceeding 70oC – IEC 60502-1:2004;

(b) 600/1000V PVC insulated, single-core or multi-core,

thermoplastic polyethylene (PE) sheathed, with or without
armour, copper cables with solid or stranded conductor,
suitable for conductor operating temperature not exceeding
70oC – IEC 60502-1:2004;

(c) 600/1000V cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated,

single-core or multi-core, PVC sheathed, with or without
armour, copper cables with solid or stranded conductor,
suitable for conductor operating temperature not exceeding
90oC – IEC 60502-1:2004;

(d) 600/1000V ethylene propylene rubber (EPR) insulated, single-

core or multi-core, PVC sheathed, with or without armour,
copper cables with solid or stranded conductor, suitable for
conductor operating temperature not exceeding 90oC – IEC
60502-1:2004;

(e) 300/500V light PVC insulated, multi-core, PVC sheathed

copper cable with solid or stranded conductor, suitable for
conductor operating temperature not exceeding 70oC – code
designation 60227 IEC 10 of IEC 60227-4:1997;

(f) 300/500V PVC insulated, single-core, flat twin or 3-core, PVC

sheathed copper cable with solid or stranded conductor,
suitable for conductor operating temperature not exceeding
70oC – national type (Table 7) of BS 6004:2000;

(g) 300/500V PVC insulated, single-core, flat twin or 3-core, PVC

sheathed copper cable with solid or stranded conductor and
circuit protective conductor, suitable for conductor operating
temperature not exceeding 70oC – national type (Table 8) of
BS 6004:2000;

Section C2 EE_GS
Page 2 of 12 2007 Edition
 (h) 300/500V PVC insulated, single-core or flat twin, PVC
sheathed copper cable with stranded conductor and with or
without circuit protective conductor, suitable for conductor
operating temperature not exceeding 70oC – national type
(Table 9) of BS 6004:2000;

(i) 450/750V thermosetting insulated, twin, 3-core, 4-core or 5-

core, sheathed copper cable with solid or stranded conductor,
with low emission of smoke and corrosive gases when affected
by fire, suitable for conductor operating temperature not
exceeding 90oC – national type (Table 6) of BS 7211:1998;

(j) 300/500V thermosetting insulated, single-core, flat twin or flat

3-core, sheathed copper cable with solid or stranded conductor
and circuit protective conductor, with low emission of smoke
and corrosive gases when affected by fire, suitable for
conductor operating temperature not exceeding 90oC –
national type (Table 7) of BS 7211:1998;

(k) 300/500V fire resistant, thermosetting insulated, twin, 3-core

or 4-core, sheathed copper cable with solid or stranded
conductor and un-insulated circuit protective conductor, with
low emission of smoke and corrosive gases when affected by
fire, suitable for conductor operating temperature not
exceeding 90oC – BS 7629-1:1997. Fire resistant cable shall
also comply with the fire performance requirement specified in
Clause C2.1.7;

(l) 600/1000V cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated,

single-core or multi-core, sheathed with or without armour,
copper cables with solid or stranded conductor and with low
emission of smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire,
suitable for conductor operating temperature not exceeding
90oC – IEC 60502-1:2004; or

(m) 450/750V, fire resistant, thermosetting insulated, single-core

or multi-core, sheathed with or without armour copper cables,
with solid or stranded conductor and with low emission of
smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire, suitable for
conductor operating temperature not exceeding 90oC. Fire
resistant cable shall also comply with the fire performance
requirement specified in Clause C2.1.7.

C2.1.4 Flexible Cables

Flexible cables shall be:

(a) 300/500V ordinary PVC insulated, multi-core, PVC sheathed

flexible copper cable, suitable for conductor operating
temperature not exceeding 70oC – code designation 60227
IEC 53 of IEC 60227-5:2003;

Section C2 EE_GS
Page 3 of 12 2007 Edition
(b) 300/500V ordinary tough rubber insulated, multi-core, rubber
sheathed flexible copper cable, suitable for conductor
operating temperature not exceeding 60oC – code designation
60245 IEC 53 of IEC 60245-4:2004;

(c) 450/750V rubber insulated, single-core or multi-core, heavy

polychloroprene or other equivalent synthetic elastomer
sheathed flexible copper cable, suitable for conductor
operating temperature not exceeding 60oC – code designation
60245 IEC 66 of IEC 60245-4:2004;

(d) 300/500V PVC insulated, single-core or twisted twin, non-

sheathed flexible copper cable, suitable for internal wiring and
conductor operating temperature not exceeding 70oC – code
designation H05V-K of BS 6004:2000;

(e) 300/500V PVC insulated, single-core or twisted twin, non-

sheathed heat resisting flexible copper cable, suitable for
internal wiring and conductor operating temperature not
exceeding 90oC – code designation H05V2-K of BS
6004:2000;

(f) 300/500V braided, silicone rubber insulated, single core, non-

sheathed flexible copper cable, suitable for conductor
operating temperature not exceeding 180oC – code designation
H05SJ-K of BS 6007:2006;

(g) 300/500V flexible copper cable, suitable for use with

appliance and equipment intended for domestic, office and
similar environments to BS 6500:2000;

(h) 300/500V ordinary duty rubber insulated, 3-core or 4-core,

sheathed flexible copper cable, suitable for conductor
operating temperature not exceeding 60oC – code designation
H05RR-F of BS 7919:2001;

(i) 450/750V heavy duty rubber insulated, single-core, twin, 3-

core, 4-core or 5-core, PCP or equivalent synthetic elastomer
sheathed flexible copper cable, suitable for conductor
operating temperature not exceeding 60oC – code designation
H07RN-F of BS 7919:2001;

(j) 450/750V heavy duty heat resisting ethylene propylene rubber

(EPR) or equivalent synthetic elastomer insulated, single-core,
twin, 3-core, 4-core or 5-core, and CSP or equivalent synthetic
elastomer sheathed flexible copper cable, suitable for
conductor operating temperature not exceeding 90oC – code
designation H07BN4-F of BS 7919:2001;

Section C2 EE_GS
Page 4 of 12 2007 Edition
 (k) 300/500V heat resistant, ethylene-vinyl acetate rubber or other
equivalent synthetic elastomer insulated, single-core, non-
sheathed flexible copper cable, suitable for conductor
operating temperature not exceeding 110oC – code designation
60245 IEC 07 of IEC 60245-7:1994;

(l) 450/750V heat resistant, ethylene-vinyl acetate rubber or other

equivalent synthetic elastomer insulated, single-core, non-
sheathed flexible copper cable, suitable for conductor
operating temperature not exceeding 110oC – code designation
60245 IEC 05 of IEC 60245-7:1994; or

(m) 300/500V heat resistant, silicone rubber insulated, single-core,

non-sheathed flexible copper cable, ,suitable for conductor
operating temperature not exceeding 180oC - code designation
60245 IEC 03 of IEC 60245-3:1994.

C2.1.5 Conductor

Conductors of wiring cables shall be of high-conductivity copper and

all meet the requirements of IEC 60228:2004.

The CSA of the neutral conductor shall not be less than that of the
phase conductors, unless otherwise specified.

C2.1.6 Fire Performance of Cables Having Low Emission of Smoke and

Corrosive Gases Characteristics

The materials for insulation and outer covering (oversheath), if exists,

shall be of low emission of smoke and corrosive gases characteristics
when affected by fire. The cable shall be type tested to the following
fire performance requirements:

(i) Flame propagation : IEC 60332-1-1:2004;

(ii) Smoke emission : IEC 61034-2:2005; and

(iii) Acid gas emission : IEC 60754-1:1994.

C2.1.7 Fire Performance of Fire Resistant Cables

The materials for insulation and outer covcering, if exists, of fire

resistant cable shall be of low emission of smoke and corrosive gases
characteristics when affected by fire. Fire resistant cable shall be type
tested to the following fire performance requirement:

(i) Circuit integrity : BS 6387:1994;

(ii) Flame propagation : IEC 60332-1-1:2004;

(iii) Smoke emission : IEC 61034-2:2005; and

(iv) Acid gas emission : IEC 60754-1:1994.

Section C2 EE_GS
Page 5 of 12 2007 Edition
C2.2 STEEL CONDUIT AND ACCESSORIES

C2.2.1 Steel Conduit

Steel conduits, except flexible conduits, shall be of heavy gauge,

screwed, longitudinally welded. All steel conduits shall comply with
IEC 61386-21:2002.

C2.2.2 Steel Flexible Conduit

Steel flexible conduits and solid type brass adaptors shall comply
with IEC 61386-23:2002. In addition, the steel flexible conduits shall
be metallic type with PVC oversheath. Oversheath materials of low
emission of smoke and corrosive gas characteristics shall be provided
where specified. However, neither oversheath of PVC nor materials
with low emission of smoke and corrosive gas characteristics shall be
required for installations within ventilated ceiling void.

The flexible conduit adaptor shall comprise two parts, an inner core
and an outer ferrule. The inner core screws into the bore of the
conduit together with an outer ferrule which caps off the end of the
conduit, so that the adaptor can provide an extremely strong joint.
The core shall lock against the outer ferrule and isolate any sharp cut
edges in the conduit.

C2.2.3 Steel Conduit Fitting

All steel conduit fittings shall comply with IEC 61035-1:1990 and
other associated Parts of the Standard.

Adaptable boxes complete with covers shall be of cast iron or

galvanized steel. Boxes of the preferred sizes as given in IEC 60670-
1:2002 and other associated Parts of the Standard shall be used.

Circular boxes, dome covers and hook covers shall be of galvanized

malleable cast iron complying with IEC 60670-21:2004. Ceiling
mounted boxes shall be of deep pattern type having an internal depth
of not less than 60 mm.

Bushes and tube ends shall be of brass.

Distance (spacing) saddles shall be of galvanized cast iron. The

screws for tightening and fixing the saddles shall be of brass.

Solid or inspection tee-pieces, couplers or elbows shall NOT be used

on any conduit installation.

C2.2.4 Metal Boxes for Electrical Accessories

Section C2 EE_GS
Page 6 of 12 2007 Edition
 Metal boxes complete with covers for enclosure of electrical
accessories in conduit installation shall comply with IEC 60670-
1:2002/BS 4662:2006. Boxes used to house accessories such as
domestic switches, socket outlets, spur units, etc. shall be 35 mm and
47 mm deep. The depth chosen shall be suitable for the accessories to
be housed.

C2.2.5 Class of Protection against Corrosion

Steel conduits and couplers shall be hot-dip zinc coated or sheradized

both inside and outside against corrosion and shall be tested to
comply with IEC 61386-1:1996.

Steel or ferrous conduit fittings and adaptable boxes complete with

covers shall be hot-dip zinc coated or sheradized both inside and
outside against corrosion and shall be tested to comply with
IEC 61386-1:1996.

Metal boxes complete with covers for the enclosure of electrical

accessories shall have heavy protection both inside and outside in
accordance with IEC 60670-1:2002/BS 4662:2006 (e.g. hot-dip
galvanized coating or sheradizing).

C2.2.6 Screw

Screws used for fixing boxes and spacing saddle, and for tightening
covers and spacing saddles shall have ISO metric threads. They shall
be of brass or steel and if of steel they shall be protected against
corrosion by a finish at least equal to the zinc coating specified in
BS 3382-2:1961. Electro-brass plated screws or self tapping screws
shall NOT be used.

C2.3 PLASTIC OR PVC CONDUIT AND ACCESSORIES

C2.3.1 Rigid Conduit and Conduit Fittings

Rigid plain PVC conduits shall comply with IEC 60614-2-2:1980 and
rigid plain PVC conduit fittings shall comply with IEC 61035-1:1990
and other associated Parts of the Standard. Conduits shall have
classification as below:

(a) According to mechanical properties - for heavy mechanical

stress; and

(b) According to temperature - with a permanent application

temperature range of -5°C to +60°C.

C2.3.2 Pliable Conduit

Section C2 EE_GS
Page 7 of 12 2007 Edition
 Pliable conduits shall be formed of self-extinguishing plastic
materials and shall comply with IEC 60614-2-3:1990 and pliable
conduit fittings shall comply with IEC 61035-1:1990 and other
associated Parts of the Standard. Conduits shall be suitable for
installation, storage or transport at temperature range of -5°C to
+60°C.

C2.3.3 Plastic or PVC Conduit Boxes

Plastic or PVC adaptable boxes and plastic or PVC boxes for

enclosure of electrical accessories shall be of heavy duty having
dimensions complying with IEC 60670-1:2002/BS 4662:2006
respectively. They shall be interchangeable with the steel boxes
complying with the same IEC standard. The minimum wall thickness
of boxes shall be 2 mm.

C2.3.4 Plastic Couplers

Plain, moulded slip-type couplers and expansion type couplers to

IEC 61035-1:1990 shall be used in the jointing of conduits.
Adhesive/jointing cement for jointing shall be the type recommended
by the manufacturer.

C2.4 STEEL TRUNKING AND ACCESSORIES

C2.4.1 Steel Trunking

Steel surface and raised floor trunking systems shall be compatible to

the requirements laid down in IEC 61084-1:1991. The body and
cover of the surface and raised floor trunkings shall be fabricated with
sheet steel having a minimum thickness as indicated in
Table C2.4.4-1.

Steel flush floor and underfloor trunking shall be compatible to the

requirements laid down in IEC 61084-1:1991 and IEC 61084-2-
2:2003. The body and access cover of the flush floor and underfloor
trunkings shall be subjected to external mechanical loads and
fabricated with sheet steel having a nominal thickness as indicated in
Table C2.4.4-2.

Manufacturer’s standard fittings such as tee or angle pieces,

connectors, junction boxes, end caps, modular service outlet boxes
and panels, etc. shall be used throughout the trunking system unless
prior approval has been obtained from the Architect.

Section C2 EE_GS
Page 8 of 12 2007 Edition
C2.4.2 Class of Protection against Corrosion

Steel trunking and associated fittings, except service outlet panel of

modular service outlet box, shall have class 3 protection against
corrosion in accordance with BS 4678-4:1971, i.e. hot-dip zinc
coating to BS EN 10143:1993 with a minimum coating designation of
G275. The service outlet panel of modular service outlet box shall be
epoxy coated unless otherwise specified.

C2.4.3 Construction

Steel surface and raised floor trunkings shall be of square or

rectangular cross section. One side of the trunking shall be
removable or hinged. No projection from screw or other sharp object
will be allowed inside the trunking.

Steel flush foor and underfloor trunkings shall be designed and

constructed to permit the laying of the trunking on a structural floor
without ingress of water or cement whilst the floor is screeded or is
cleaned by wet-treatment. The trunking systems shall be constructed
with a degree of protection against water at least IPX4 according to
IEC 60529:2001.

The flush floor and underfloor trunkings shall be embedded in floor

screed. The access cover surface of the flush floor trunking shall be
flushed with the finished floor level.

C2.4.4 Dimension

Unless otherwise specified, the sizes, body and cover thickness, and
preferred length of steel and raised floor trunking, are given in Table
C2.4.4-1.

Unless otherwise specified, the sizes, body and cover thickness and
preferred lengths for flush floor and underfloor trunking shall be as
given in Table C2.4.4-2.

The dimensions of the trunking for the installation shall be the same
throughout.

Trunking to special order having dimensions differing from the

Tables C2.4.4-1 and C2.4.4-2 may be used, provided that they meet
all the requirements as stated in this Specification and prior approval
has been obtained from the Architect.

Section C2 EE_GS
Page 9 of 12 2007 Edition
Table C2.4.4-1 Size, Body and Cover Thickness, and Preferred Length of Steel
Surface and Raised Floor Trunkings

External Minimum thickness Minimum thickness Minimum

dimension (mm) of body with return of body without thickness of
flange (mm) return flange (mm) cover (mm)
50 x 50 1.0 1.0 1.0
75 x 50 1.2 1.2 1.2
75 x 75 1.2 1.2 1.2
100 x 50 1.2 1.2 1.2

100 x 75 1.2 1.2 1.2

100 x 100 1.2 1.4 1.2
150 x 50 1.2 1.4 1.2
150 x 75 1.2 1.4 1.2
150 x 100 1.2 1.4 1.2

150 x 150 1.4 1.6 1.2

200 x 50 1.6 -- 1.4
200 x 75 1.6 -- 1.4
200 x 100 1.6 -- 1.4
200 x 150 1.6 -- 1.4
200 x 200 1.6 -- 1.4

300 x 50 1.6 -- 1.6

300 x 75 1.6 -- 1.6
300 x 100 1.6 -- 1.6

300 x 150 1.6 -- 1.6

300 x 300 2.0 -- 1.6

Preferred lengths: 3 m (minimum: 2 m; maximum: 3 m)

Minimum thickness of partitions or dividers: 1.0 mm.

Section C2 EE_GS
Page 10 of 12 2007 Edition
Table C2.4.4-2 Body and Cover Thickness and Preferred Lengths of Steel
Flush Floor and Underfloor Trunkings

Minimum
Minimum Minimum
thickness of
thickness of thickness of
partition
cover (mm) body (mm)
(mm)
Flush Floor Trunking

For office applications 2.5 1.5 1.5

For mechanical plant room 6 1.5 1.5

applications

Underfloor Trunking

External width (excluding

flange projections)

Up to 100 mm
1.2 1.2 1.0
Above 100 mm and up to
1.6 1.6 1.0
300 mm

Preferred length: 3 m ( minimum: 2m; maximum: 3m)

C2.4.5 Connection between Lengths of Trunking

Connection between adjacent lengths of trunkings, tee or angle pieces,

accessories, etc. shall be made by connectors. The two adjacent ends
of trunking shall be fixed so that no relative movement can occur
between them.

Electrical continuity shall be achieved by means of connecting a

continuity bonding link of adequate size across the two adjacent ends
of the trunking. The continuity bonding link shall be of such
materials to as to prevent electrolytic corrosion.

C2.4.6 Steel Surface Trunking Cover

Trunking and fittings shall have removable or hinged covers

extending over the entire length. The covers shall be of the same
material and finish as those of the trunking body.

Section C2 EE_GS
Page 11 of 12 2007 Edition
 Removable covers shall be held in position on the trunking either by
the natural elasticity of the material of the cover (e.g. spring capped
trunking) or by other approved means which hold the covers tightly
onto the trunking body and cause no damage to the cables inside.

Bends, tee junctions, etc. shall also be fitted with removable or hinged
covers of the same construction as that of the trunking.

C2.4.7 Screw

Screws used for securing a cover or connector and for fixing a

trunking shall have ISO metric threads. They shall be of brass or
steel. Steel screws shall be protected against corrosion by a finish at
least equal to the zinc coating specified in BS 3382-2:1961. Electro-
brass plated screws or self tapping screws shall NOT be used.
Projection of screws inside a trunking or a trunking fitting will not be
allowed.

C2.5 PLASTIC OR PVC TRUNKING AND ACCESSORIES

PVC trunking and fittings shall comply with IEC 61084-1:1991. The nominal
dimensions of PVC cable trunking shall be selected from any of the following
numbers in mm:
12.5, 16.0, 20.0, 25.0, 32.0, 37.5, 40.0, 50.0, 75.0, 100.0 and 150.0

Cover for trunking shall be secured either by purpose-made rivets or clip-on

mechanism to manufacturer’s standard.

Section C2 EE_GS
Page 12 of 12 2007 Edition
 SECTION C3

POWER CABLES AND ASSOCIATED CABLING FACILITIES

C3.1 GENERAL

Power cables are mainly for electricity supply and distribution. They shall be
manufactured under a recognized quality surveillance scheme (e.g. British
Approvals Service for Cables (BASEC) licence or the HAR scheme recognized
by the European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization, CENELEC,
etc.) and bear the appropriate marking (e.g. BASEC mark or HAR mark, etc.) of
the quality surveillance scheme.

Power cables shall have grading as specified in Clause C3.2 below.

Cabling facilities will include cable ducts, cable trays and cable ladder.

C3.2 TYPES OF POWER CABLES

Power cables for supply and distribution shall be one or a combination of the
following types as specified in the Particular Specification or on the Drawings:

(a) 600/1000V cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated, single-core,

two-core, three-core or four-core, PVC sheathed with armour copper
cables, with solid or stranded conductor, suitable for conductor operating
temperature not exceeding 90oC – IEC 60502-1:2004;

(b) 600/1000V cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated, single-core,

two-core, three-core or four-core, sheathed with armour copper cable,
with solid or stranded conductor, with low emission of smoke and
corrosive gases when affected by fire, suitable for conductor operating
temperature not exceeding 90oC – IEC60502-1:2004;

(c) 600/1000V fire resistant, cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated,

two-core, three-core or four-core, sheathed with armour copper cable,
with solid or stranded conductor, with low emission of smoke and
corrosive gases when affected by fire, suitable for conductor operating
temperature not exceeding 90oC - Category F2 of BS 7846:2000 . Fire
resistant cable shall also comply with the fire performance requirement
specified in Clause C2.1.7;

(d) 500V (light duty grade) mineral insulated, single-core, two-core, three-
core or four-core, copper sheathed copper cable with – IEC 60702-
1:2002 and IEC 60702-2:2002;

(e) 750V (heavy duty grade) mineral insulated, single-core, two-core, three-
core or four-core, copper sheathed copper cable – IEC 60702-1:2002 and
IEC 60702-2:2002; or

(f) 600/1000V PVC insulated, single-core, two-core, three-core or four-core,

PVC sheathed with armour copper cables, with solid or stranded
Section C3 EE_GS
Page 1 of 6 2007 Edition
 conductor, suitable for conductor operating temperature not exceeding
70oC – IEC 60502-1:2004.

C3.3 CONDUCTOR

The requirement of conductor as stated in Clause C2.1.5 shall apply.

C3.4 ARMOUR

The armour shall be of galvanised steel wire for multi-core cables. Single core
armoured cables shall be provided with non-ferrous armour. Use of steel
armour for single core cable is not accepted.

C3.5 FIRE PERFORMANCE OF CABLES HAVING LOW EMISSION OF

SMOKE AND CORROSIVE GASES CHARACTERISTICS

The requirements as stated in Clause C2.1.6 shall apply.

C3.6 FIRE PERFORMANCE OF FIRE RESISTANT CABLES

The requirements as stated in Clause C2.1.7 shall apply.

C3.7 IDENTIFICATION OF CORE

Each core of a PVC or XLPE power cable shall be identified continuously

throughout its entire length.

For a mineral-insulated cable each core shall be identifiable at its termination by

the application of sleeves or discs of appropriate colors as prescribed below.
Identification sleeves shall comply with BS 3858:1992, Type 3, where
appropriate and shall have temperature rating similar to that of the sealant.

The identification shall take the form of appropriate color or number codes in
accordance with Table C3.7, or the relevant Specifications.

Section C3 EE_GS
Page 2 of 6 2007 Edition
 Table C3.7 – Core Identification of Power Cable

Function of core Color code Number code

Phase conductor of a single Brown L

phase circuit

Phase conductor of a three- Brown or black or L1 or L2 or L3

phase circuit grey according to according to phase
phase concerned concerned

Neutral conductor Blue N

Core used as protective conductors shall have an exclusive color identification of

green-and-yellow.

C3.8 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MINERAL INSULATED (MI) CABLE

C3.8.1 Outer Covering

MI cables shall have plastic outer covering when installed under the
following conditions where:

(a) the cables are exposed to weather;

(b) the atmosphere is likely to cause corrosion;

(c) the cables are laid upon or fixed direct to a concrete or stone
surface subject to dampness;

(d) the cables are laid upon or fixed to a zinc coated surface, e.g. a
galvanised cable tray or corrugated sheeting, subject to
dampness; or

(e) the cables are buried direct in the ground.

MI cables buried in concrete brick or other building structure,

installed in refrigerated space or areas where the temperature is
persistently below 0°C shall be without plastic outer covering.

The outer covering shall be of low smoke halogen free, or low smoke
zero halogen, i.e. evolving very low content of smoke or corrosive
gases during combustion when tested to IEC 60754-1:1994 and other
associated Parts of the Standard.

C3.8.2 Restriction of Use

MI cables shall not be used in discharged lighting circuits unless

suitable precautions, approved by the Architect, have been taken to
avoid excessive voltage. MI cables shall also not be used for earthed
Section C3 EE_GS
Page 3 of 6 2007 Edition
 concentric wiring system.

C3.8.3 Cable Saddle and Clip

Saddles and clips for fixing MI cables shall be purpose-made by the

cable manufacturer for this purpose. Cables with plastic outer
covering shall be fixed by saddles or clips having also plastic
covering.

C3.9 CABLE DUCT

Cable ducts shall be formed from concrete, PVC, metal or such other materials
as may be specified by the Architect relating to a particular job.

Metallic ducting shall comply with the same requirement as metal trunking.

Ducts cast in-situ in concrete shall be so formed that the radial thickness of the
concrete or screed surrounding the cross-section of the complete ducting shall
not be less than 15 mm at every point.

C3.10 METAL CABLE TRAY

C3.10.1 Material

Metal cable trays shall be perforated, formed from plain steel sheet
complying with BS 1449-1:1991, and shall be hot-dipped galvanised
to ISO 1460:1992 and ISO 1461:1999 after perforation.

C3.10.2 Dimensions of Tray

Cable trays shall have typical dimensions as shown on Table C3.10.2.

Table C3.10.2 – Typical Dimensions

Nominal Minimum height Thickness of Minimum

Width of upstand steel sheet height of
return flange
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
100 and 150 12 1.2 --
225 and 250 12 1.5 --
300 and 350 20 1.5 12
400 and 450 20 1.5 12
500 and 550 20 2.0 12
600 and 700 20 2.0 12
800 and 1000 20 2.0 12
1200 20 2.0 12

Section C3 EE_GS
Page 4 of 6 2007 Edition
 C3.10.3 Bend Piece

Bend pieces shall be of the same material, thickness and finish as the
main body of the cable tray and shall have an inner radius of 50mm
and a straight length of 100mm at each end.

C3.10.4 Perforation on Bend

No perforation shall be made in the circular portion of all bend pieces

having a nominal width of 150mm or 100mm. Perforation may be
allowed in bend pieces having a nominal width of 225mm or above
provided that the perforation is made along a line passing through the
centre of curvature of the bend pieces and set at an angle θ to the
normal of the axis of the cable tray. The values of θ are shown in
Table C3.10.4.

Table C3.10.4 – Location of Perforation in Bend Piece of Cable Tray

Nominal width of cable tray Value of θ

225 mm to 350 mm 45°
400 mm and above 30° and 60°

C3.10.5 Tee Piece

Tee pieces shall be of the same material, thickness and finish as the
main body of the cable tray. The distance measured between the
point of inter-section and the end of the tee piece shall not be less
than 100mm.

C3.10.6 Cable Tray Accessories

Manufacturer's standard items of accessories shall be used. Site

fabrication of accessories will only be allowed upon approval of the
Architect and shall be kept to a minimum.

Where special sections are required, the material, thickness and finish
shall be as specified for the standard items.

C3.11 CABLE LADDER

C3.11.1 Material

Generally, unless otherwise specified, all cable ladder fittings and

accessories mentioned below shall be manufactured from hot rolled
steel to BS 1449-1:1991 and then hot dipped galvanised to ISO
1460:1992 and ISO 1461:1999 after fabrication.

Section C3 EE_GS
Page 5 of 6 2007 Edition
 For heavily corrosive environments where specified in the Contract,
Specification or on the Drawings, cable ladder fittings and accessories
shall be manufactured from stainless steel 316S31 to ISO 683-
13:1986.

C3.11.2 Fittings and Accessories

All fittings and accessories applied to the same cable ladder system
shall be supplied by the same manufacturer to the same finish. In
addition to straight ladders, the standard product range of the same
cable ladder system shall at least include 90° bends, equal tees, four-
way crossovers, 45° internal risers, 45° external risers, 90° internal
risers, 90° external risers, straight reducers, left-hand offset reducers,
right-hand offset reducers, various jointing couplers, various
supporting brackets and hangers, various connectors, and various bolt
and nuts.

C3.11.3 Construction of Cable Ladder

Cable ladder shall be of “heavy duty” type. The two rails shall be
90mm minimum in height with top and bottom flanges of sufficient
strength. The rungs shall be spaced at 300mm centers maximum and
shall have slots for cable fixing. The working depth (depth between
top edge of rail and top surface of rung) shall be 60mm minimum.

Section C3 EE_GS
Page 6 of 6 2007 Edition
 SECTION C4

WIRING ACCESSORIES AND MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

C4.1 WIRING ACCESSORIES - GENERAL

Wiring accessories shall meet the general requirements of BS 5733:1995.

Unless otherwise specified, they shall be white or ivory in color, uniform in
color and appearance throughout an installation.

Moulded box or pattress and steel or cast iron box for the enclosure of wiring
accessories shall comply with IEC 60670-1:2002 and other associated Parts of
the Standard and shall meet the requirements specified in this Section and
Sections B2, B4 & C2 of this Specification where appropriate.

C4.2 DOMESTIC SWITCHES

C4.2.1 General

Switch for domestic and similar purposes shall comply with

IEC 60669-1:2007.

Switch mounted outdoor, or in positions where it may be exposed to

rain or water, shall be of watertight construction with minimum IP 54
protection in accordance with IEC 60529:2001.

C4.2.2 Lighting Switch

Lighting switch shall be of the microgap type suitable for use in a.c.
circuits, and shall be of the quick make-and-break type when used in
d.c. circuits. The front plate shall be of plastic insulating material.
Suspension pear type switches shall not be used.

Lighting switch shall be single pole of rated fluorescent load not less
than 5AX or 10AX as specified in the Particular Specification or
Drawings.

C4.2.3 Double Pole Switch for Appliance

Double pole switch shall be integrated with a pilot light formed by a

neon lamp with a resistor and a red colored lens.

C4.2.4 Sparkless Switch

Sparkless switch shall be of the tilting mercury type. The contacts of

a sparkless switch shall be contained in a sealed glass capsule.

Section C4 EE_GS
Page 1 of 6 2007 Edition
 C4.2.5 Time Switch

Time switch shall be designed for 7 days, 24-hour operation and shall
be driven by a quartz oscillator synchronous motor or an electronic
operated clock. Time setting shall be accomplished by plugging in
setting pins and a minimum setting period of 15 minutes shall be
achievable. All component parts shall be of robust design,
constructed from durable materials and capable of maintaining proper
functions and high accuracy and not subject to easy wear and tear
during normal operation. The whole unit shall be encompassed in a
metal or moulded box with ingress protection not less than IP53 to
IEC 60529:2001. The box shall be suitable for wall mounting and
entry of a 20 mm conduit. An inspection glass window and quick
action fastener shall be fitted on the front lid of the box.

Time switch shall incorporate the following features:

(a) The clock shall be of direct reading type with minute

adjustable knob to set time precisely to the minute. Accuracy
of the clock shall be within ± 15 sec per month;

(b) A “long life” cassette type alkaline battery back-up device

shall be incorporated to provide 360 hours continuous
operation upon power failure;

(c) The switch shall consists of single pole, single throw silver
contacts capable of accommodating a minimum load of 20A at
250V a.c. resistive, 7.5A inductive at 0.7 power factor or 10A
incandescent lamps. The contacts shall be capable of being
isolated for external circuit connection;

(d) A changeover switch shall be provided for selecting the

ON/AUTO/OFF mode of operation; and

(e) Rated power consumption of the whole unit shall not exceed
2.5W.

C4.3 SOCKET OUTLETS

C4.3.1 General

Socket outlet and plug rated at 5A or 15A for general application

shall comply with BS 546:1950. Socket outlet and plug rated at 13A
shall comply with BS 1363-2:1995. All socket outlets shall be of 3-
pin and shall be of the shuttered type. 5A socket outlets may be
unshuttered provided they are installed on ceiling or at high level and
are not normally accessible.

Section C4 EE_GS
Page 2 of 6 2007 Edition
 Socket outlet used for supplying appliance mounted at high level shall
be unswitched, otherwise it shall be fitted with an integral switch.
The integral switch shall be of single pole, forming part of the same
front plate as the socket outlet, and with clear indication of the
ON/OFF switching position.

Weatherproof type socket outlet shall comply with IEC 60309-2:2005

and be provided with a push-on cap and cap retaining ring or a screw-
on cap with rubber gasket. The socket outlet shall have ingress
protection of at least IPX4 to IEC 60529:2001.

C4.3.2 Shaver Supply Unit

Electric shaver supply unit shall comply with IEC 61558-1:2005 and
shall be all insulated, suitable for both flush and surface mounting.
Each unit shall comprise two outlets, one for 110V and the other for
220V, obtained from tappings of a double wound transformer to
IEC 61558-2-5:1997 and with unearthed secondary windings.

C4.3.3 Plug

Unless otherwise specified, plug for 13A socket outlet shall be fitted
with a fuse to IEC 60269-1:2006, rated at 13A.

Each plug shall be fitted with a cord grip which is so designed that no
stress will be exerted on the conductors of the flexible cable
connected to it at the terminals.

C4.4 CONNECTION UNITS

C4.4.1 Blank

C4.4.2 Switched or Unswitched Fused Connection Unit

The connection unit is intended for final connection to a fixed

equipment or appliance which has a full load current not exceeding
13A. It shall be of double pole type with neon/LED indicator
meeting the requirements of BS 1363-1:1995. It shall incorporate a
fuse link to IEC 60269-1:2006 rated to suit the appliance to be
connected in the pole connecting to the phase conductor. An earth
terminal shall also be provided for the connection of the circuit
protective conductor to the appliance.

C4.5 INSULATED TERMINAL BLOCK

The rated voltage of a terminal block shall not be less than 435V between
terminals and 250V to earth.

Terminal block shall comprise copper connectors with screw connections, all
contained within a moulded block suitable for working temperature up to 100°C.

Section C4 EE_GS
Page 3 of 6 2007 Edition
 Terminals shall be designed to clamp the conductors to the metal surface with
sufficient contact pressure but without damaging the conductors. With the
largest recommended conductor in position, and tightly clamped, there shall be
at least two full threads of the screw engaging in the connector.

C4.6 LIGHTING SYSTEM

C4.6.1 Luminaire Track System

Luminaire track system shall comply with IEC 60570:2003. It shall

be designed for ordinary interior use for mounting on, or suspended
from wall or ceiling. The track shall be of two or four-pole with
provision for earthing, with a rated voltage not exceeding 250V a.c. to
earth and a rated current not exceeding 32A per conductor for
distribution to luminaires.

C4.6.2 Photocell Device

Photocell device shall comply with BS 667:2005 and shall have good
tolerances in physical dimensions and with no moving parts. An
additional circuitry shall be provided to achieve a delay of at least
30 seconds so as to eliminate switching due to lightning or other short
period changes in illumination.

C4.6.3 Ceiling Rose

Ceiling rose of maximum rating of 6A at 250V shall comply with BS

67:1987 and shall be ivory or white moulding with outside diameter
not less than 63mm and 50.8mm fixing centres, 3-plate pillar type
with earth terminal and with integral cord-grip.

C4.6.4 Lampholder

Batten lampholder shall be of bayonet type complying with IEC

61184:1997 or Edison screw type complying with IEC 60238:2004.
The lampholder shall be manufactured from moulded hard white or
ivory color plastic material which shall be unaffected by the heat
from the lamp.

Lampholder for weatherproof luminaire shall be porcelain and

comply with IEC 61184:1997.

Lampholder for use with tubular fluorescent lamp shall be of bi-pin

type, complying with IEC 61184:1997, IEC 60061-1:2005 and IEC
60061-2:2005. It shall be made of moulded white plastic material and
designed to hold the tube in position without the need for additional
clip.

Section C4 EE_GS
Page 4 of 6 2007 Edition
C4.7 MEASURING INSTRUMENT

C4.7.1 Watt-hour Meter

Watt-hour meter shall comply with IEC 62053-11:2003. The register

shall be of drum type and the principal unit in which the register
records shall be in kilowatt-hours (kWh). The casing shall be of
black phenolic moulding with an inspection glass window.

Watt-hour meter shall have Class 2 accuracy calibrated at the normal

working voltage and frequency.

C4.7.2 Ammeter and Voltmeter

Ammeter and voltmeter shall be of moving iron type, moving magnet

type or moving coil with transducer type complying with IEC 60051-
1:1997 to IEC 60051-9:1988. The accuracy class shall be "2.5" or
better in accordance with IEC 60051-1:1997 to IEC 60051-9:1988.
The dial shall have a nominal diameter of 100 mm and shall have a
total scale deflection of 240° for ammeter and 120° for voltmeter.

An ammeter for any circuit of rating up to 60A may be connected

directly in series with the circuit, so that the full circuit current passes
through the instrument. For a circuit of rating exceeding 60A, the
ammeter shall be fed through the secondary winding of a current
transformer, and shall give a full scale deflection with a secondary
current of 5A.

C4.7.3 Current Transformer

Current transformer for use with measuring instrument shall comply

with IEC 60044-1:2003 having rated secondary current of 5A and
rated output suitably matched with the loading of the measuring
instrument. The accuracy class shall be "1" in accordance with
IEC 60044-1:2003.

C4.7.4 Selector Switch for Ammeter

Where a single ammeter is used to measure the current in each phase

or the neutral of a three phase circuit, the ammeter shall be connected
to a selector switch which shall enable the ammeter to be inserted in
series with each phase and the neutral in turn. When the ammeter is
connected to the secondary windings of the measuring current
transformers, the selector switch shall have facilities to prevent the
current transformers from being open circuited during change-over
and at "OFF" position.

Section C4 EE_GS
Page 5 of 6 2007 Edition
C4.7.5 Selector Switch for Voltmeter

In a three phase circuit in which a single voltmeter is used to measure

the various voltages, the voltmeter shall be provided with a selector
switch to enable the following voltages to be measured:

(a) voltage between each phase to neutral; and

(b) voltage between any two phases.

The selector switch shall also have an "OFF" position.

C4.7.6 Meter Chamber

Meter chamber for housing watt-hour meter shall be made from

galvanized steel of not less than 1.6 mm thick and shall be of ample
size to accommodate the required number of watt-hour meters and
meter cables. Provision shall be made to enable the watt-hour meters
to be fixed inside the chamber without removing the chamber from
the wall or other supports. Meter fixing screws shall not project
through the back of the chamber.

When a meter chamber is installed indoor, it shall be fitted with a

hinged metal front cover. Meter chamber installed outdoor shall be
waterproof, with screw-on type front cover. The ingress protection
for the outdoor type shall be at least IP 54 in accordance with IEC
60529:2001.

A glass window of adequate size shall be provided on the front cover

of the meter chamber to enable the registers and serial numbers of the
watt-hour meters to be read easily.

Section C4 EE_GS
Page 6 of 6 2007 Edition
 SECTION C5

SWITCHGEAR AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT

C5.1 GENERAL

C5.1.1 Scope

This Section specifies the general requirements of switchgear and

associated equipment operating at low voltages, which may be
assembled on site from individual items of components. The
switchgear and associated equipment shall be manufactured to the
relevant current International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
Standards as indicated below:

IEC 60947-1:2007 : Low voltage switchgear and control gear

Part 1: General rules

IEC 60439-1:2004 : Type-tested and partially type-tested

assemblies

Other requirements as specified in Clauses C5.1.2 to C5.1.8, both

inclusive, shall also apply to all items of switchgear and associated
equipment where applicable unless explicitly mentioned elsewhere.

Additional and specific requirements for type-tested low-voltage

switchgear and controlgear assemblies (TTA) as described in IEC
60439-1:2004 shall be given in Section C11 of this Specification, the
Particular Specifications, the Drawings and other documents issued
by the Architect.

The component equipment covered in this Section shall include the

following:

(a) Switches, disconnectors (isolators), fuse-switches and switch-

fuses;

(b) Circuit-breakers including air circuit-breakers (ACB),

moulded case circuit-breakers (MCCB), miniature circuit-
breakers (MCB), residual current-operated circuit breakers
without integral overcurrent protection (RCCB) and residual
current-operated circuit breakers with integral overcurrent
protection (RCBO);

(c) Fuses;

(d) Busbar chambers and distribution boards; and

(e) Electromechanical contactors, motor starters and automatic

changeover switches.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 1 of 58 2007 Edition
C5.1.2 Service Condition

The following service conditions shall apply:

(a) Ambient temperature - peak from minus 5°C to plus 40°C for
4-hours continuously with an average from 0°C to plus 35°C
over only 24 hours period;

(b) Altitude - up to 2000 m above sea level;

(c) Relative humidity - up to 99%;

(d) Pollution Degree 3 - Conductive pollution occurs, or dry, non-

conductive pollution occurs which becomes conductive due to
condensation; and

(e) Climatic condition – Tropical (Hong Kong).

C5.1.3 Short-circuit Rating and Continuous Current Rating

Switchgear shall be suitably rated for the specified prospective short-

circuit current which can occur at the point of its installation. It shall
also be rated for uninterrupted duty when carrying continuously the
specified full load current. For non-automatic switching devices, the
rated short-time withstanding current shall be at least 12 times of the
maximum rated operational current for 1 second.

Where equipment components are installed in enclosures, they shall

be suitable for operation at the actual maximum temperatures which
will be reached within the enclosures under normal loaded conditions
when the ambient temperature is 40°C.

C5.1.4 Voltage Rating

Same as specified in Clause C1.2.

C5.1.5 Degree of Protection for Enclosure

Enclosures for switchgear and associated equipment shall be of

totally enclosed type. For indoor applications, the enclosure shall
have an ingress protection (IP), in accordance with IEC 60529:2003,
of at least IP 41 for the top surface and IP 31 for the other surfaces of
the enclosure. For outdoor applications, the enclosure shall be of at
least IP 54.

C5.1.6 Material

Unless otherwise specified, switchgear and associated equipment

except MCCB and MCB shall be of metalclad. All ferrous metal
parts shall be galvanised or chrome plated unless the final finish has
been painted or enamelled in the manufacturer's factory.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 2 of 58 2007 Edition
 All extraneous conductive parts shall be electrically continuous.

C5.1.7 ON and OFF Indication

The design of a switching device shall incorporate positive means to

indicate clearly and reliably the ON (or CLOSE) and the OFF (or
OPEN) positions of the contacts. Indication of either position shall
only occur when the ON or OFF position on every pole has been
attained. Such indication shall be provided on the outside of the
device and shall be prominently visible to an operator when the
device is installed in the normal manner.

When the switching device is also used for isolation purpose, then an
indication of the OFF position shall occur only when all contacts are
also in the OFF position and the isolating distance between contacts
in every pole has attained a clearance not less than those specified for
disconnectors according to IEC 60947-3:2005.

C5.1.8 Identification of Circuit

Labels or other means of identification shall be provided for every

item of switchgear and associated equipment to indicate the purpose
of the item. The labels shall either be fixed at the front cover of the
equipment or at the inside surface of the hinged front cover.

C5.2 SWITCH, DISCONNECTOR, FUSE-SWITCH AND SWITCH-FUSE

C5.2.1 Scope of Switch

All reference to switches in this and subsequent Clauses shall include

also fuse-switches or switch-fuses.

C5.2.2 General

Switches, disconnectors, fuse-switches and switch-fuses shall comply

with and be tested to IEC 60947-3:2005 and shall have air-break type
contacts which are designed for uninterrupted duties. They shall be
either three pole with switched neutral (four-pole), triple-pole with
neutral link, double-pole, or single pole with neutral link as specified,
and shall each be fitted with earthing facilities. All live parts shall be
efficiently shrouded with insulating materials. Cam switches or
disconnectors shall not be used for circuits of 50A or above.

Each switch shall be supplied in complete unit consisting of a basic

unit contained within an enclosure. Adequate space shall be provided
in the enclosure for proper cable termination, otherwise cable boxes
shall be provided. Fuse carriers, when required, shall be included.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 3 of 58 2007 Edition
C5.2.3 Operating Mechanism

Switches and disconnectors shall be of the quick-make and quick

break type. The switching mechanism shall be of independent manual
operation with suitable means such as accelerating springs.

For switches and isolators with switched neutral, the neutral pole
shall open after the phase pole contacts and shall close before or at
the same time as the phase pole contacts.

C5.2.4 Construction

The enclosure shall be of totally enclosed type, made up of heavy

gauge sheet metal, adequately rust and dust protected, and finished in
enamel. An earthing terminal shall be provided. The enclosure shall
be suitable for conduit, trunking and armoured cable entries and also
for connection to busbar chamber from top or bottom. Frame sizes
for the range of switches shall be kept to a minimum.

Switches and isolators shall be constructed with an interlocked front

cover to prevent access to the interior parts of the equipment when the
contacts are in the CLOSE position, and to prevent the contacts from
being switched to close when the front cover is opened. However,
facilities shall be provided to allow the checking of the contact
alignments. The fastening devices for the front cover shall be of
captive type.

Insulation material used shall be of non-hygroscopic and non-

ignitable type. The contacts shall be self-aligning so that contact
pressure can be maintained at all times. All live parts shall be
adequately shielded from the front of the unit but easily accessible for
maintenance by using a tool.

C5.2.5 Operating Performance

The operating performance of the switches and disconnectors shall be

tested in accordance with IEC 60947-3:2005. The number of
operating cycles corresponding to the rated operational current shall
not be less than the values given in Table IV of IEC 60947-3:2005.

C5.2.6 Utilization Category

Switches shall be to utilization categories of AC-22A or AC-22B for

general applications and AC-23A or AC-23B for electrical motor
circuits; unless otherwise specified.

C5.2.7 Padlocking Facility

Switches and disconnectors shall be fitted with padlocking facilities

so that they can be padlocked in either ON or OFF position.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 4 of 58 2007 Edition
C5.3 CIRCUIT BREAKER - GENERAL

C5.3.1 Scope of Circuit Breaker

This Clause covers the general requirements of ACB, MCCB, MCB,

and RCCB and RCBO. Additional requirements relevant to a
particular type of circuit breakers shall be given in Clauses C5.4 to
C5.7, both inclusive.

C5.3.2 Number of Poles

Circuit breakers shall be of triple-pole with switched neutral (four-

pole), three-pole, double-pole or single-pole, as specified, and shall
have air-break contacts. All poles, except the neutral poles, shall be
designed to have their contacts open or close simultaneously.

C5.3.3 Operating Mechanism

The operating mechanism of a circuit breaker shall be trip-free.

When a MCCB, MCB, RCCB or RCBO trips and opens its contacts,
the operating toggle shall automatically resume the OFF or TRIPPED
position.

C5.3.4 Casing

The casing of an ACB shall be metalclad.

The casing of a MCCB, MCB, RCCB or RCBO shall be formed from

insulating material. The construction shall be capable of withstanding
the appropriate rated short circuit current and reasonably rough use
without fracture or distortion.

C5.3.5 Current Rating

The rated current of a circuit breaker shall be taken as that rated

continuous current when the circuit breaker is installed in the
enclosure together with other equipment if any under normal
operating conditions as specified in the Particular Specification.

C5.4 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER (ACB)

C5.4.1 General

All circuit breakers shall not be of moulded case type. The neutral
pole shall have cross-sectional areas not less than that of respective
phase pole.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 5 of 58 2007 Edition
 ACB shall be of triple-pole with switched neutral (four pole) or triple-
pole with bolted neutral, as specified, fully metalclad with earth
terminals. It shall be of horizontally withdrawable type having spring
assisted closing and, where specified, motorised spring charger and
push-button electrical control.

ACB shall comply with and be type tested to IEC 60947-2:2006.

Unless otherwise specified, ACB shall have built-in overload

protection with IDMT characteristics and instantaneous short circuit
interruption. Where an ACB is used as the main incomer, the IDMT
characteristics shall be compatible with those of the Electricity
Supplier.

C5.4.2 Performance Characteristic

ACB shall be certified, in accordance with IEC 60947-2:2006, to

have the following performance characteristics:

(a) Rated short-circuit breaking capacity - not less than 50 kA;

(b) Rated short-circuit making capacity - not less than 105 kA;
and

(c) Rated short-time withstanding current - not less than 50 kA

for 1 second.

C5.4.3 Closing and Tripping Operation

Unless otherwise specified, ACB shall be suitable for independent

manual operation utilizing energy stored in a spring. For automatic
closing ACB, the spring mechanism shall be wound by a universal
motor fitted with limiting switches. In addition, the spring
mechanism shall have manual charging facilities for emergency use.

Unless otherwise specified, trip coil of 24V or 30V d.c. shall be fitted
for local, remote or relay tripping.

"Trip" push buttons shall be provided on the front plate of each ACB.
These buttons shall be direct acting mechanically.

When automatic closing is specified, the control circuit of the ACB

shall be fitted with suitable anti-pumping devices.

C5.4.4 Racking Gear

The enclosure shall be fitted with a set of racking gear which shall
lock the ACB to the runner rails in three distinct positions, i.e.
CONNECTED, TEST and ISOLATED. The ACB can only be closed
fully when it is in the CONNECTED position. In the TEST position,
it shall be possible to operate the ACB to close and test the secondary
and auxiliary contacts, but not the main isolating contacts.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 6 of 58 2007 Edition
 The racking gear shall consist of rollers fitted to the ACB frame. All
parts shall be accurately aligned and adjusted so that the ACB can be
moved freely along the runner rails within the enclosure between the
two extreme positions, i.e. CONNECTED and ISOLATED. Facilities
shall be provided to padlock the ACB in its CONNECTED, TEST or
ISOLATED position.

Position indicators and breaker-condition indicators shall be provided.

These indicators shall be arranged so as to be prominently visible
when the ACB is in its normally installed position.

C5.4.5 Interlocking Facility

Suitable interlocking facilities shall be provided such that:

(a) the ACB cannot be plugged in or withdrawn when it has been

closed;

(b) the ACB cannot be closed until it is fully engaged in either the
CONNECTED or the TEST position;

(c) the ACB cannot be slowly closed except in the TEST or

ISOLATED position;

(d) it shall not be possible to initiate the closing action of the

energy stored spring mechanism until the spring has been fully
charged; and

(e) Where key interlocking is employed, tripping of a closed ACB

shall occur if an attempt is made to remove the trapped key
from the mechanism.

C5.4.6 Main Isolating Contacts and Safety Shutter

The main isolating contacts shall be self-aligning and shall be

protected by insulated barriers forming the safety shutter.

2 sets of safety shutters shall be provided for every ACB, one for the
incoming terminals of the main isolating contacts and the other for
the outgoing terminals. Each set shall be capable of being operated
individually.

When the ACB is not in the CONNECTED position, the safety

shutters shall close automatically, screening off the main isolating
contacts. When the ACB is being racked into the CONNECTED
position, the safety shutters shall automatically open the insulating
barrier, thereby allowing the entry of the movable isolating contacts
but without lowering the degree of protection.

Safety shutters shall be fitted with properly designed and securely

fixed warning labels. In addition, facilities shall be provided to
padlock the safety shutters after the ACB has been withdrawn from
the enclosure.
Section C5 EE_GS
Page 7 of 58 2007 Edition
 C5.4.7 Contact

All contacts shall be self-aligning, provided with spring accelerated

opening mechanism.

Main contacts shall be fitted with detachable arc chutes for each pole.
Sufficient auxiliary contacts shall be provided for connection of
secondary wiring. These auxiliary contacts shall remain engaged
when the ACB is in the TEST or CONNECTED position and shall be
disengaged when the ACB is in the ISOLATED position.

All ACB shall be fitted with the maximum number of auxiliary

contacts as the manufacturer's standard provision. In any event, not
less than two pairs of normally-closed auxiliary switches and two
pairs of normally-open auxiliary switches shall be provided. All
auxiliary contacts and switches shall be wired to an easily accessible
terminal strip for external connection.

Terminals for external connections of the secondary/auxiliary

contacts and switches shall be of clamping yoke type for wires of
minimum CSA of 1.0mm². All terminals shall be clearly labelled to
identify the function of the circuits connected to the terminals.

Terminals for each ACB for secondary/auxiliary contacts shall be

separated from all other terminals by means of a spacer of 20 mm
width.

C5.5 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER (MCCB)

C5.5.1 General

MCCB shall be of four-pole, triple-pole or double-pole as specified.

It shall comply with and be type-tested to IEC 60947-2:2006. It shall
be totally enclosed in a moulded casing formed from an insulating
material. The construction of the casing shall be capable of
withstanding the appropriate rated short circuit current and reasonably
rough use without fracture or distortion. The moulded casing shall
have an ingress of protection not less than IP 30. Utilization category
for those MCCB with built-in protection and rated at 400A or above
shall be class B, unless otherwise specified in the Particular
Specification or on Drawings or the Contractor can substantiate with
calculations to the satisfaction of the Architect that class A MCCBs
are suitable for ensuring discrimination under overload and short
circuit conditions for the circuits concerned.

MCCB shall incorporate overcurrent and earth fault protection as

specified with shunt trip coil operated by protection relays, and shall
be suitable for use as an isolator.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 8 of 58 2007 Edition
C5.5.2 Operating Characteristic

MCCB with built-in protection shall have thermal-magnetic or solid

state tripping device which features a fixed, stable, inverse time-
current characteristic. The operating characteristic shall be such that:

(a) the time delay on overload tripping shall be inversely

proportional to the overcurrents up to a threshold value of
approximately 7 times the rated current; and

(b) there shall be no intentional time-delay on overcurrent tripping

due to short-circuit or heavy overcurrent exceeding the
threshold value (i.e. approximately 7 times the rated current).

The operating characteristics shall be calibrated at 40°C.

When MCCB is specified to be completed with earth leakage tripping

device, the tripping current shall be as specified in the Particular
Specification or on the Drawings. The earth leakage relay and the
zero-sequence current transformer, if any, shall comply with the IEC
60255-6:1988 & IEC 60755:1992 and IEC 60044-1:2003 respectively.

C5.5.3 Performance Characteristic

MCCB shall be certified, according to IEC 60947-2:2006, to have the

following performance characteristics:

Rated short circuit breaking capacity - not less than the values given
in the Table C5.5.3.

Table C5.5.3 - Rated Short Circuit Breaking Capacity of MCCB

Frame Tested short-circuit Tested at power factor of:

size breaking capacity
100A 23 kA not exceeding 0.30 lagging
225A 23 kA not exceeding 0.25 lagging
400A 23 kA not exceeding 0.25 lagging
> 400A 40 kA not exceeding 0.25 lagging

C5.5.4 Shunt Trip Release

Where shunt trip release is specified, this shall operate correctly at all
values of supply voltage between 70% and 110% of the nominal
supply voltage under all operating conditions of the MCCB up to the
rated short-circuit breaking capacity of this MCCB. MCCB
incorporating shunt release shall be provided with block terminals
and shunt release lead cables.

C5.5.5 Locking Facility

MCCB shall be provided with facility for padlocking in either the

"ON" or "OFF" position.
Section C5 EE_GS
Page 9 of 58 2007 Edition
C5.6 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER (MCB)

C5.6.1 General

MCB shall be of four-pole, triple-pole, double-pole or single-pole as

specified. It shall comply with and be type tested to IEC 60898-
1:2003. It shall be totally enclosed in a moulded insulating case for
safe use by unskilled people and also designed to be maintenance free.
Overall dimensions and fixing centres for the same range of MCB
shall be identical and suitable for fixing individually to a metal back
plate or directly mounted inside a manufacturer's designed
distribution metal box.

Cable terminals of the MCB shall be at top and bottom of the units
with access from front, and suitable for terminating the size of solid
or stranded conductor in accordance with Table 5 of IEC 60898-
1:2003.

MCB with current carrying contacts of plug-in type shall not be

accepted.

Contacts of the MCB shall be of non-weld type.

C5.6.2 Operating Characteristic

The operating mechanism of a MCB shall be thermal-magnetic,

designed to give a fixed, stable, inverse time-current characteristic in
accordance with Table 7 of IEC 60898-1:2003. The calibration
temperature shall be 30°C. The classification according to rated
instantaneous tripping current shall be Type B, except for motor
circuit application where Type C shall be provided and 6A circuits in
which either Type B or Type C may be acceptable.

C5.6.3 Short Circuit Breaking Capacity

The rated short circuit breaking capacity shall be certified, in

accordance with IEC 60898-1:2003, to have at least 6000A of rated
short circuit capacity. In addition, energy limiting class of MCB shall
be of class 3 in accordance with table ZA1 and ZA2 of IEC 60898-
1:2003. MCB shall be capable of being connected in cascade with
fuse to IEC 60269-1:2006 or BS 88:1994 up to a rating of 160A in
situation where the prospective short circuit current at the supply side
is up to 22 kA.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 10 of 58 2007 Edition
C5.7 RESIDUAL CURRENT-OPERATED CIRCUIT BREAKER WITHOUT
INTEGRAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (RCCB) AND RESIDUAL
CURRENT-OPERATED CIRCUIT BREAKER WITH INTEGRAL
OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (RCBO)

C5.7.1 RCCB - General

Residual Current-operated Circuit Breaker without Integral

Overcurrent Protection (RCCB) shall be double-pole or four-pole as
specified, type tested to IEC 61008-1:2006. The casing of RCCB
shall be constructed of totally enclosed moulded-case insulating
material to withstand the fault level as certified to IEC 61008-1:2006.

The RCCB shall be suitable for use at ambient temperature between

-5oC and +40oC. It shall be designed to the rail mounting method
inside the distribution board with the other protective devices side by
side.

C5.7.2 RCCB - Electrical and Operating Characteristics

The nominal rated current of RCCB shall be 10A, 13A, 16A, 20A,
25A, 32A, 40A, 63A and 80A as shown on the Particular
Specification or Drawings. Unless otherwise specified, the rated
residual operating current shall be 30mA.

RCCB shall have minimum conditional short circuit making and

breaking capacity of 3000A with rated residual making and breaking
capacity to be ten (10) times the rated current of RCCB or 500A,
whichever is the greater.

Tripping operation of RCCB shall not involve amplification of

operating residual current and shall be independent of the line voltage.

Operating characteristic of RCCB shall be of Type AC as specified in

IEC 61008-1:2006 for which tripping is ensured for residual
sinusoidal alternating current, whether suddenly applied or slowly
rising. Type A RCCB shall be provided as specified in case of
residual currents with d.c. components.

RCCB shall be instantaneous tripping type without time delay

function.

Multi-pole RCCB shall be interlocked internally such that an earth

leakage current through any one phase shall trip all the poles of the
RCCB simultaneously.

C5.7.3 RCCB - Test Device

An integral test device shall be provided on the front of every RCCB

to enable automatic tripping operation be tested. Operation of the test
device shall create “out-of-balance” condition simulating an earth
fault.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 11 of 58 2007 Edition
 C5.7.4 RCBO – General

Residual current operated circuit-breaker with integral overcurrent

protection (RCBO) shall be single-pole, double-pole or four-pole
current operated circuit breaker as specified and housed in a totally
enclosed moulded-case type tested to IEC 61009:2006. The RCBO
shall be suitable for use at ambient temperature between -5oC and
+40oC. It shall be designed to the rail mounting method inside the
distribution board.

C5.7.5 RCBO – Electrical and Operating Characteristics

Technical requirement of RCBO shall refer to Clause C5.7.2

“RCCB – Electrical and Operating Characteristic”, in addition to the
overcurrent requirement as detailed in this Clause.

RCBO shall have minimum short circuit making and breaking

capacity of 6000A with rated residual making and breaking capacity
to be ten (10) times the rated current of RCBO or 500A, whichever is
the greater. In addition, energy limiting class shall be of class 3 in
accordance with table ZD1 and ZD2 of IEC 61009-1:2006.

Unless otherwise specified, RCBO shall have instantaneous tripping

characteristic of type B, except for application of motor circuit or
high inrush current situation where type C shall be provided. The
calibration temperature shall be 30°C.

Multi-pole RCBO shall be interlocked internally such that an earth

leakage current through any one phase shall trip all the poles of the
RCBO simultaneously.

C5.7.6 RCBO - Test Device

An integral test device shall be provided on the front of every RCBO

to enable automatic tripping operation be tested. Operation of the test
device shall create “out-of-balance” condition simulating an earth
fault.

C5.8 FUSE

C5.8.1 Scope of Fuse

All references to fuses shall include fuses forming part of a fuse-

switch, or a switch-fuse.

C5.8.2 General

Fuse shall comply with, and be type tested to IEC 60269-1:2006 -

Low-voltage fuses.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 12 of 58 2007 Edition
 C5.8.3 Fuse Carrier and Holder

Fuse carrier and fuse holder shall be constructed of ceramic porcelain

or thermoplastic. Plastic units shall be unaffected by heat generated
by an overloaded fuse or by a blown fuse. Fuse carrier shall be so
designed that there is no risk of touching live parts when the fuse is
being withdrawn.

The maximum rating of a fuse inserted in a fuse holder shall not be

greater than the rating for which the holder is designed.

C5.8.4 Blank

C5.8.5 Fuse Ratings and Dimensions

Cartridge fuses to IEC 60269-1:2006 shall have a rated breaking

capacity of 50kA at rated voltage and the Utilisation Category shall
be of "gG" unless otherwise specified. All dimensions shall be
standardized in accordance with Figure 1 of IEC 60269-2-1:2004.

C5.9 BUSBAR CHAMBER

C5.9.1 General

Busbar chambers shall comply with, and be type tested to IEC 60439-
1:2004 and IEC 60439-2:2005.

Busbar chambers with rated operational currents above 400A shall be

typed tested to a short time current capacity equivalent at least to that
of the incoming switchgear and type tested to the rated operational
current.

C5.9.2 Construction

A busbar chamber shall contain 4 sets of fully sized, hard drawn, high
conductivity, solid electro-tinned copper busbars and supported on
epoxy resin or other approved insulators. The busbar chamber shall
be totally enclosed and manufactured from sheet steel suitably rust-
proofed and painted or hot-dip galvanised. The thickness of sheet
steel shall not be less than 1.5 mm for current rating not exceeding
500A, and not less than 2 mm for current rating of 500A and above.
The front cover and end plates shall be removable and normally held
in position by non-ferrous metal screws.

C5.9.3 Color Identification of Busbar

Each busbar shall be colored to indicate the phase to which it is

connected. Coloring shall comprise a band of paint on the busbar at
intervals of not more than 600 mm, but the busbar shall not be painted
throughout its length.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 13 of 58 2007 Edition
 C5.9.4 Interconnection to Other Equipment

Items of switchgear or associated equipment shall be connected or

jointed to a busbar chamber by means of properly designed
connection flanges having similar material and finish of the busbar
chamber, or by means of conduit couplers and bushes complying with
Section B2.

Interconnection cables between a busbar chamber and other items of

switchgear or associated equipment shall be of copper conductors and
shall be sized in accordance with IEC 60439-1:2004 and IEC 60439-
2:2005 or IEC 60364:2005.

C5.10 DISTRIBUTION BOARD - GENERAL

C5.10.1 Scope of Distribution Board

This Clause covers the general requirements of MCCB distribution

boards and MCB distribution boards. Additional requirements
relevant to a particular type of distribution board shall be given in
Clauses C5.11 and C5.12 inclusive.

C5.10.2 Construction of Enclosure

The enclosure of a distribution board shall be constructed from sheet

steel, rust proofed and epoxy powder painted or baked enamelled
finish to a color approved by the Architect. Conduit knock-outs shall
be provided on the top and bottom.

The construction shall be of robust design, capable of withstanding

the mechanical, electrical and thermal stresses under all working
conditions, including fault conditions.

C5.10.3 Arrangement of Component Parts

Distribution board shall include all necessary components and

accessories to form a complete assembly. Components and
accessories shall be firmly fixed in position in the distribution board,
and shall be assembled in such a way that it shall be possible to
remove or replace any component parts and to carry out cable
connection from the front. Ample space shall be allowed for cabling.
MCCB, MCB, RCCB, RCBO or fuses shall be arranged neatly in a
row or rows. All components shall be totally concealed. Only the
toggles of the MCCB, MCB, RCCB or RCBO shall protrude through
the cover plate of the distribution board.

C5.10.4 Busbar

All busbar shall be of hard drawn copper having ratings as specified,

and shall be electro-tinned. Neutral busbars shall have CSA not
smaller than that of the phase busbars, and shall have adequate
number of terminals for all outgoing circuits including spare ways.
Section C5 EE_GS
Page 14 of 58 2007 Edition
 C5.10.5 Earthing Terminal

Every distribution board shall be provided with an external earthing

terminal. In addition, a multi-terminal connector shall be provided
within the distribution board for connection of protective conductors
of all outgoing circuits including spare ways.

Both the external earthing terminal and the multi-terminal connector

for protective conductor shall be of hard drawn, electro-tinned copper
and shall be labelled in accordance with the requirement of IEC
60439-1:2004.

C5.10.6 Provision of Spare Ways

Each distribution board shall be provided with spare ways for future
expansion. For new installations, the number of spare ways shall not
be less than 20% of the total number of outgoing ways in the
distribution boards. Each spare way shall be blanked off with a
suitable blanking plate having a finish comparable to that of the
distribution board.

C5.10.7 Shrouding of Live Part

All conductive parts shall be properly shrouded against accidental

contact by means of rigid barriers, partitions of insulating materials
such that accidental contact can be prevented during operation of
component replacement or cable connection.

All conductive structural parts of the distribution boards shall comply

with the protective circuit requirements of IEC 60439-1:2004.

C5.11 MCCB DISTRIBUTION BOARD

C5.11.1 General

The enclosure of an MCCB distribution board shall be constructed

from sheet steel having a thickness of not less than 1.5 mm, and shall
be designed for general commercial and light industrial applications.
The enclosure shall be designed with ingress protection not less than
IP 41.

The design, construction and testing specifications of the distribution

board shall comply with IEC 60439-1:2004 and IEC 60439-3:2001.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 15 of 58 2007 Edition
 C5.11.2 Type of MCCB Distribution Board

MCCB distribution board shall be of two types, viz. Type A and Type
B. Type A MCCB distribution board shall be suitable for
accommodating, in any combination, the double-pole and triple-pole
MCCB of 100A and 250A frame size respectively. Type B MCCB
distribution board shall be suitable for accommodating triple-pole
MCCB of 250A frame size.

MCCB distribution board shall each be provided with a moulded-case

isolating switch having a current rating not less than that of the supply
side protective device. Moulded-case isolating switch shall meet the
relevant requirements of Clauses C5.1 and C5.2.

C5.11.3 Busbar

MCCB distribution board shall be provided with vertical triple-pole

and neutral copper busbars of rating not less than that of the supply
side protective device subject to a minimum of 250A. The
configuration of the busbars, busbar supports and busbar mounting
arrangement shall be type tested to a short-time withstand current in
accordance with Table C5.11.3 at a voltage of not less than 380V.

Table C5.11.3 - Busbar Short-time Withstand Current for MCCB

Distribution Board

Type of No. of outgoing Busbar rated Busbar rated S.C.

board circuits current withstand current
A up to 12 250 A 23 kA for 0.2s
A up to 36 400 A 23 kA for 0.2s
B up to 12 400 A 23 kA for 0.2s
B up to 36 630 A 43 kA for 0.2s

Outgoing MCCB shall be mounted horizontally on both sides of the

vertical busbars. The connection between the MCCB and the phase
busbars shall be by means of copper tapes and bolted joints.

C5.12 MCB DISTRIBUTION BOARD

C5.12.1 General

The enclosure of a MCB distribution board shall be constructed from

sheet steel having a thickness of not less than 1.2 mm, and shall be
designed for general commercial and light industrial applications.
The ingress protection for the enclosure with the functional units and
blanking plates fitted shall be at least IP 41. The design and
construction of MCB distribution boards shall comply with and be
type tested to IEC 60439-3:2001.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 16 of 58 2007 Edition
 C5.12.2 Construction

The moulded back plate assembly shall be of substantial thickness

and attached to the back of the enclosure for mounting of MCB,

RCCB, RCBO and double pole or triple pole all insulated switch as
specified.

MCB distribution board shall be provided with a moulded-case, all-

insulated, double-pole or three-pole incoming switch-disconnector
(isolating switch) having a current rating of not less than that of the
supply side protective device. This incoming switch-disconnector
shall meet the relevant requirements of Clauses C5.1 and C5.2 with a
Utilization Category of AC-22A. However, switch-disconnector of
Category AC23A shall be provided in event of any one of the
outgoing circuits being fed for motor circuit.

Ferrules shall be provided for wires, including earthing, phase and

neutral conductors, throughout the distribution board internally for
circuit identification.

The metal front plate shall be screwed onto the metal box, making the
assembly suitable for surface or flush mounting, and shall be supplied
with a hinged cover to conceal all operating handles of the circuit
breakers and isolating switch. The front plate shall be affixed with
phase color labels and circuit identification chart, and shall be
supplied with moulded single way blanking plates.

MCB distribution board shall be provided with phase, neutral and

earthing terminals for the incoming cables. There shall be one neutral
and one earthing terminal for each outgoing MCB circuit and spare
ways.

C5.12.3 Method of Mounting

MCB distribution board shall be suitable for flush or surface

mounting as specified. Flush mounting shall be so arranged that the
assembly is flush with the surface of the wall and shall not cause any
adverse effect to the heat dissipation of internal devices.

C5.13 BLANK

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 17 of 58 2007 Edition
C5.14 ELECTROMECHANICAL CONTACTORS

C5.14.1 General

Electromechanical contactor shall comply with and be type tested to

IEC 60947-4-1:2005. Each shall be of double air-break type with
four pole, triple-pole, double-pole or single pole contacts as specified.

Both the main and auxiliary contacts shall be rated for uninterrupted
and intermittent duty. The main contact of a contactor shall be silver
or silver-faced.

Contactor shall have utilization category suitable for the particular

application as shown in Table I of IEC 60947-4-1:2005.

C5.14.2 Performance Requirements

Contactor shall each be capable of making and breaking currents

without failure under the conditions stated in Table VII and VIII of
IEC 60947-4-1:2005 for the required Utilization Categories and the
number of operation cycle indicated.

C5.14.3 Co-ordination with Short-circuit Protective Devices

Contactor shall comply with the requirements for performance under

short-circuit conditions stipulated in IEC 60947-4-1:2005. Type of
co-ordination shall be Type “1” unless otherwise specified.

C5.14.4 Control Circuit

Rated control circuit voltage of a contactor shall be the same as that

of the main circuit; otherwise, it shall be 24V, 30V or 110V d.c. as
specified.

C5.15 AUTOMATIC CHANGEOVER SWITCH

Changeover switch shall be electromagnetically controlled at mains voltage,

double air-break, four-pole type and tested to IEC 60947-4-1:2005.

Changeover switch shall be rated in Utilization Categories AC-3 and capable of

making, breaking and carrying continuously the rated current and making on
fault without overheating, damage or deterioration.

Changeover switch shall be electrically and mechanically interlocked in

operation. Unless specified otherwise, the changeover action shall be automatic
in response to the failure or resumption of supply mains.

Illuminated indicator for “Mains On” and “Essential Supply On” shall be
provided at the cover of the compartment housing a changeover switch.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 18 of 58 2007 Edition
C5.16 ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTER

C5.16.1 General Requirements

(a) Active harmonic filter (hereinafter referred to as “AHF”) shall

be used to eliminate harmonic currents circulating across the
installation so that the Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) may
be limited to a given percentage as specified in the Code of
Practice for Energy Efficiency of Electrical Installations or
Particular Specification.

(b) AHF shall be installed in parallel with the distribution system,

i.e. shunt connected, wherever attenuation of harmonic current
is needed. Preferably, AHF shall be located close to those
loads generating harmonic currents in order to avoid
circulation of the harmonic currents along the cables.

(c) AHF shall conform to IEC 61000-4-2:2001, IEC 61000-4-

3:2006, IEC 61000-4-4:2004 and IEC 61000-4-5:2005 or other
similar recognised international standards on Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) compliance for industrial or commercial
applications and shall be manufactured to ISO 9001:2000.
Certificate of compliance shall be issued for each standard
rating of AHF after being fully tested at the manufacturing
facility.

(d) AHF shall be manufactured by a reputable manufacturer which

has continuously manufactured AHF for at least 5 years and
their manufacturing facility shall have a local agent to provide
full technical support which includes adequate spares holding
and technical expertise in testing, commissioning and trouble-
shooting. Training shall be provided by the manufacturer’s
representatives for government staff on operation and
maintenance aspects including essential trouble-shooting
techniques.

(e) Full technical details of the AHF as submitted by the

manufacturer shall be provided for the Architect’s approval
and shall cover the following:

(i) technical guide on its applications;

(ii) schematic and wiring drawings down to circuit board

level released by the manufacturer;

(iii) shop drawings and as-fitted drawings;

(iv) operation manuals with commissioning guide;

(v) maintenance manuals with trouble-shooting guide; and

(vi) parts list and recommended spare parts with price.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 19 of 58 2007 Edition
 (f) Unless otherwise specified, the rated operational voltage and
services condition shall be as specified in Clause C1.2 and
Clause C1.1.3. The following technical requirements shall
also apply:

(i) No. of phases : 3-phase without/with

neutral, 3/4 wires as
specified in the
Particular
Specification;

(ii) Unit capacity : as specified in the

Particular
Specification;

(iii) Harmonic orders : 2nd order to 25th order

or more compensation;

(iv) Filtering efficiency : 85% or more;

(v) Power factor correction : up to 0.98 lagging or

more;

(vi) Steady state response : 40 ms or less;

(vii) Ventilation : Forced air cooled;

(viii) Noise level : 65 dBA or less; and

(ix) Heat losses : 8% of rated capacity or

less.

C5.16.2 Performance Requirements

(a) The operating principle of AHF shall be based upon the

injection of a harmonic current with appropriate phase shift
corresponding to the harmonic current drawn by the load
which shall be analysed by the AHF continuously.
Consequently, the current supplied by the source shall remain
sinusoidal under the effective operating range of the AHF.

(b) AHF shall be compatible with any type of load, and shall
guarantee efficient compensation, even when changes are
made to the installation. The AHF shall also be capable of
delivering its rated output harmonic current to the point of
connection irrespective of load condition.

(c) If the compensation of neutral harmonic current is required, in

the neutral conductor, the AHF shall be capable of
compensating the harmonic current three times greater than the
phase current, particularly to compensate harmonic current of
order 3 and its multiples.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 20 of 58 2007 Edition
 (d) Start-up and shut down of AHF shall be initiated by control
push buttons or other means as specified in the Particular
Specification. After a main power break-down, start-up of
AHF shall be automatic.

(e) Should the AHF be overloaded during transient operation of

certain loads or permanently, this should not affect the
reliability of its operation. Under such circumstance, the AHF
shall operate in a current limiting mode and still deliver to the
network its rated harmonic current.

(f) For better adaptation to any installation, AHF shall be capable

of operating in association with other harmonic reduction
systems. For ease of expansion, it shall be modular type or be
possible to associate 2 or more AHF’s in parallel to increase
the compensation capacity and to enhance dependability, i.e.
redundant operation.

(g) To compensate the harmonics at different levels in the

distribution network, it shall be possible to connect the AHF at
any point in the distribution network, or to connect several
AHF’s at different points in the installation for maximum
effectiveness.

C5.16.3 Construction

(a) AHF shall use an isolated gate bipolar transistor (IGBT)

bridge or other similar technique to inject the proper harmonic
current on the network, and will be controlled by a
microprocessor based system.

(b) AHF shall be housed in an industrial grade cabinet constructed

from high quality steel sheet of minimum 1.2 mm thick side
and back plate and 1.5 mm thick hinged front door with key
lock. Protection class of the cabinet shall be not less than IP44
for indoor and IP55 for outdoor application. The entire
surface shall be applied with chemical rust inhibitor, rust
resisting primer coat and topcoat to give maximum corrosion
protection.

(c) The dimension of AHF shall be as small as possible.

Particularly, it will be preferable to have the AHF fitted in low
voltage cubicle switchboard or in motor control centre.

(d) AHF shall at least include the following kinds of protection:

(i) thermal overload protection;

(ii) internal short circuit protection; and

(iii) invertor bridge abnormal operation protection.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 21 of 58 2007 Edition
 A three or four poles circuit breaker shall be installed close to
the point of the connection to the system to protect the
connection cables. It shall be selected according to general
selection practice for circuit breakers and the manufacturer
recommendation.

(e) As a minimum the AHF shall include the following read-out:

(i) an indicator for each phase of the incoming power

supply;

(ii) an indicator for normal operating condition;

(iii) an indicator for AHF shut down; and

(iv) an indicator for fault condition.

Also a diagnostics panel shall be accessible from the front of

the unit to help the operator to identify the origin of abnormal
situation and control push buttons will be provided for
ON/OFF operation and alarm reset.

(f) AHF shall be equipped with built-in RS 485/232 serial

communication ports for control, programming and
monitoring of the AHF by PC or other user interface.

C5.17 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE

C5.17.1 General Requirements

(a) Unless otherwise specified, surge protection device shall be

suitable for the rated operational voltage as specified in Clause
C1.2.

(b) The operation of surge protection device shall base on the use
of metal oxide varistor or other similar technique to effectively
limit over-voltage under surge conditions and to safely divert
the excessive surge energy to ground.

(c) Surge protection device shall be manufactured by a reputable

manufacturer which has been continuously manufacturing
surge protection products preferably for at least 5 years and the
manufacturer shall have a local agent to provide full technical
support and after sales services.

(d) Type test certificate for the surge protection device shall be
submitted for approval by the Architect. The certificate shall,
unless otherwise specified, demonstrate that the equipment can
fulfill the requirements stipulated in IEC 61643-1:2005 with
the following performance:

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 22 of 58 2007 Edition
 (i) Surge protection device at the main LV switchboard
shall be able to perform under a standard test wave of
20kV 1.2/50μs voltage impulse and 10 kA 8/20μs
current impulse;

(ii) Surge protection device at the electrical distribution

system shall be able to perform under a standard test
wave of 6kV 1.2/50μs voltage impulse and 3kA 8/20μs
current impulse. It shall limit the transient voltage to
below equipment susceptibility levels; and

(iii) Surge protection device at sub-main distribution board

shall be able to perform under a standard test wave of
6kV 1.2/50μs voltage impulse and 0.5kA 8/20μs
current impulse.

(e) Surge protection device shall be shunt or series connected to

the concerned electrical installation to achieve maximum
protection as recommended by the manufacturer. It shall be
installed in strict compliance with manufacturer’s installation
instructions and relevant safety standards and regulations.

(f) Except for the panel mounted surge protection device, all
components and circuits of the surge protection device shall be
contained in a metal enclosure suitable for wall mounting.
The enclosure shall be electrically earthed. In case of floor
mounting is required because of its size and weight, the device
shall be installed and mounted on concrete plinth provided for
this purpose.

(g) Detailed installation instructions and manuals from the surge

protection device manufacturer shall be submitted to the
Architect for approval.

C5.17.2 Performance Requirements

(a) The device shall be able to give protective performance in all

modes, including Phase and Neutral, Phase and Earth, and
Neutral and Earth.

(b) The device shall be designed in such a way that its

performance shall not be easily affected by field wiring
practice.

(c) The let-through voltage, i.e. the transient overvoltage which is

allowed through a surge protection device, shall be clearly
specified for the acceptance by the Architect. Unless
otherwise specified, the let through voltage shall not exceed
the impulse withstand voltage of the equipment to be protected
specified in IEC 60364-4-44:2006. The reaction time between
the start of the surge and the time the surge protection device
initiates the protective action shall be less than 1 nanosecond.
Section C5 EE_GS
Page 23 of 58 2007 Edition
 (d) Surge protection device shall be able to withstand repeated
electrical surges appeared in the electrical system without
undue degradation of its surge protection performance under
healthy condition.

C5.17.3 Construction

(a) Surge protection device shall incorporate both high energy

clamping devices and special filtering circuitry to reduce any
electrical surge appearing in the connected electrical system to
an acceptable level without causing any damage to the
connected electrical and electronic equipment.

(b) For panel mounting, the installation method and construction

of the surge protection device shall refer to the manufactruer’s
instruction and recommendation. For wall mounting and floor
mounting, surge protection device shall be housed in an
industrial grade cabinet with hinged and lockable front door
made of high quality 1.5 mm thick steel sheet. The device and
the enclosure shall be electrically earthed. The entire cabinet
shall also conform to the requirement of the manufacturer of
the surge protection device.

(c) Surge protection device shall be equipped with monitoring

facilities so that whenever its surge protection performance is
reduced to a pre-determined level below its original rating
after a number of incident surges it has been subjected to, an
audible and visual alarm shall be given off to indicate that the
device requires servicing or replacement. The audible and
visual alarm may be given through a build-in facility inside the
device or by activating an electrical dry contact to which an
indicator and an alarm bell are connected. As an option, a
surge counter shall be required if specified in the Particular
Specification.

C5.18 SOLID STATE SOFT MOTOR STARTER

C5.18.1 General Requirements

(a) The solid state soft motor starter (hereinafter referred to as

“softstarter”) shall be of the power electronic type motor
starting device. It shall control the voltage applied to the
motor smoothly by varying the conduction angle of the solid
stage AC switches which can be triacs, reverse parallel
connected SCR-diode circuit or reverse parallel connected
SCR-SCR circuit, etc. or using other similar technique.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 24 of 58 2007 Edition
(b) Softstarter shall be manufactured to conform to the following
relevant standards or other similar recognized international
standards:

(i) IEC 60068-2-6:1995 for vibration resistance;

(ii) IEC 60068-2-27:1987 for shock resistance;

(iii) IEC 61000-4-2:2001 for electrostatic

discharge immunity test;

(iv) IEC 61000-4-3:2006 for radiated, radio-

frequency,
electromagnetic field
immunity test;

(v) IEC 61000-4-4:2004 for electrical fast

transient/ burst
immunity test; and

(vi) IEC 61000-4-5:2005 for surge immunity test

(c) The softstarter shall be manufactured by a reputable

manufacturer which has continuously manufactured softstarter
for at least 5 years and their manufacturing facility shall have a
local agent to provide full technical support, including
adequate spares holding and technical expertise in testing,
commissioning and trouble-shooting. Training shall be
provided by the manufacturer’s representatives for government
staff on operational and maintenance aspects including
essential trouble-shooting techniques.

(d) Full technical details of the softstarter provided by the

manufacturer shall be submitted and shall cover at least the
following:

(i) technical guide on its applications;

(ii) schematic and wiring drawings down to circuit board

level;

(iii) shop drawings and as-fitted drawings;

(iv) operation manuals with commissioning guide;

(v) Maintenance manuals with trouble-shooting guide; and

(vi) parts list and recommended spare parts with price.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 25 of 58 2007 Edition
 (e) Degree of Protection of Enclosure

The softstarter shall be protected to at least IP44 for indoor

and IP55 for outdoor application by a single front-access
enclosure and shall be suitable for operation without derating
under ambient temperature of up to 40oC and relative humidity
of up to 99%.

(f) Unless other specified, the rated operational voltage shall be as

specified in Clause C1.2. The rated power and quantities of
the softstarters shall be as specified in the Particular
Specification or the Drawings.

C5.18.2 Performance Requirements

(a) Mode of Operation

Softstarter shall provide the following modes of operation and
shall be transitionless without causing any current inrush and
torque surges during operation:

(i) Voltage ramp - The motor voltage shall begin initially

at a preset ‘start voltage’ and increase to line voltage at
a preset ‘ramp rate’. The acceleration ramp time shall
be adjustable up to 30 seconds;

(ii) Current limitation - It shall be capable of limiting the

maximum starting current which shall be adjustable to
at least 4 times of rated current;

(iii) Soft stop - A deceleration voltage ramp shall be applied

to the motor for applications which require an extended
coast to rest. The voltage ramp down time shall be
adjustable to 30 seconds or above;

(iv) Kickstart - A current pulse shall be provided in the

softstarter to develop additional torque when started for
loads which may need a boost to get started;

(v) Energy saving – If specified in the Particular

Specification, when the motor is lightly loaded or
unloaded for long periods of time, it shall automatically
decrease motor power losses by controlling the motor
terminal voltage; and

(vi) Apart from the above, other modes of operation such as

voltage pedestal starting, full voltage starting, DC
injection braking, etc. shall also be required when
specified in the Particular Specification.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 26 of 58 2007 Edition
 (b) Protection

Softstarter shall have internal protection to the motor and

softstarter and LED diagnostics to aid in set-up and
troubleshooting. The protection shall includes:

(i) thermal overload protection of the motor and softstarter;

(ii) mains supply protection for phase failure and phase

unbalance;

(iii) internal fault protection; and

(iv) stalled motor protection.

(c) Auxiliary Contact

The softstarter shall provide auxiliary contacts for end of

starting (by-pass) and fault condition. The output relay contact
shall be suitable for 220V AC operation in category AC11 and
DC operation in category DC11.

C5.18.3 Selection of Softstarter and Operating Precautions

(a) The starting current-speed transition curve of the selected

softstarter shall closely match with the starting torque-speed
characteristics of the motor and loading. The ratings of the
softstarter shall base on ‘hot start’ operation i.e. the motor is
re-started immediately after operating at maximum rating for a
period of time.

(b) The motor associated with the softstarter shall be capable of

starting the driven load when is supplied at reduced voltage
and current. In case of severe duty, checking with the motor
manufacturer shall be carried out that its derating is
compatible with the operating cycle and the starting times.

(c) The heat sink of the softstarter shall be of good quality

aluminium construction and shall provide sufficient thermal
inertia to permit successful starting of the motor without
exceeding the permitted junction temperature of the solid state
AC switches.

(d) The softstarter shall be capable of continuously delivering

rated output voltage (or reduced output voltage under energy
saving mode) at any load. When using a by-pass contactor,
the order to close and open the contactor shall be controlled by
the built-in signal of the softstarter.

(e) The softstarter shall have the possibility to accept DC input

from external device such as Programmable Logic Controller
(PLC) for controlling the start and stop of the unit.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 27 of 58 2007 Edition
 (f) Semiconductor fuses shall be available as an option and have
the characteristics suitable to protect the softstarter.

(g) The solid stage AC switches shall have a blocking voltage of

at least 1400V for 415V system with a rate of rise of reapplied
voltage tolerance of at least 1000V per microsecond. However,
an isolation contactor or isolator shall be available as an option
to isolate the supply in the ‘Off’ stage to the softstarter for the
safety of the operator.

(h) UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES shall the power factor

correction equipment be connected between the softstarter and
the motor. If power factor correction equipment is employed,
it shall be connected to the supply side of the softstarter.

C5.19 VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES FOR CENTRIFUGAL FANS AND PUMPS

C5.19.1 General Requirements

(a) Variable speed drive (hereinafter referred to as “VSD”) shall

be a solid-state converter to convert three phase mains supply
of 380V+6% and 50Hz+2% to an adjustable voltage and
frequency output at its rated throughout power. VSD shall
conform to IEC 61000-4-2:2001, IEC 61000-4-3:2006, IEC
61000-4-4:2004, IEC 61000-4-5:2005 and BS EN 61800-
3:2005 or other similar recognised international standards on
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) compliance for
industrial or commercial applications and shall be
manufactured to ISO 9001. Certificate of compliance shall be
issued for each standard rating of VSD used in the Contract
after being fully tested at the manufacturing facility.

(b) VSD shall be manufactured by a reputable manufacturer which

has continuously manufactured VSD’s for at least 5 years and
their manufacturing facility shall have a local agent to provide
full technical support which includes adequate spares holding
and technical expertise in testing, commissioning and trouble-
shooting. Training shall be provided by the manufacturer’s
representatives for client on operational and maintenance
aspects including essential trouble-shooting techniques.

(c) Full technical details of the VSD shall be submitted by the

manufacturer through the Contractor and shall cover the
following:

(i) technical guide on its applications;

(ii) schematic and wiring drawings down to circuit board

level;

(iii) shop drawings and as-fitted drawings;

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 28 of 58 2007 Edition
 (iv) operation manuals with commissioning guide;

(v) maintenance manuals with trouble-shooting guide; and

(vi) parts list and recommended spare parts with price.

(d) VSD shall be capable of continuously delivering rated output

voltage even when the mains supply voltage is down by 6% of
its nominal value and shall be able to control 3-phase squirrel
cage induction motor of class B insulation over a speed range
of 20% to 100% continuously and smoothly without the need
to derate the motor kW rating and to provide total power factor
of not less than 0.9 lagging, without external chokes or power
factor correction capacitors, at full load within the speed range.
The inrush current shall be zero and during starting, the
current shall start from zero and rises as the load accelerates
with no danger of exceeding full load current.

(e) VSD shall allow up to 100 meters of cables to be used between

the VSD and the motor.

(f) VSD shall allow unlimited switching of the motor circuit, at

any load and within the controlled speed range without
damage and without the need of auxiliary control switching.
The VSD shall be capable of automatically reconnecting to a
spinning fan and run without tripping, following mains
interruption and on transfer from backup source. The VSD
shall be capable of running with no motor connected during
functional testing. The VSD shall have voltage/frequency (V/f)
ratio suitable for centrifugal pumps and fans control.
Selectable V/f ratios shall be provided and it shall not be
possible to set a constant V/f ratio, to prevent damage to
connected equipment and to optimise energy usage.

C5.19.2 Performance Requirements

(a) VSD shall be fully rated to provide the performance as follows:

(i) minimum efficiency of 95% at 100% load and not less

than 90% at any other operating loads;

(ii) output torque shall be limited to 105% of full load

torque;

(iii) no facility for reversing the motor rotation shall be

incorporated;

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 29 of 58 2007 Edition
 (iv) the limit of total odd harmonic current distortion
produced by the equipment shall not exceed the
following limits for installation supplied at 380/220V;

Circuit current at rated load Maximum total odd

condition (I) at 380V/220V harmonic distortion
I < 30A 20%
30A < I < 300A 15%
300A < I < 600A 12%
600A < I < 1500A 8%
I > 1500A 5%
The total even harmonic distortion shall not exceed
25% of the total odd harmonic distortion.

(v) comply with the Code of Practice for Energy Efficiency

of Air Conditioning Installation; and

(vi) VSD shall have a maximum capacity as specified in the

Particular Specification.

(b) The following minimum features shall be incorporated in the

VSD unit complete with an integral control panel:

(i) it shall accept digital and analogue 0-10V, 4-20mA

control signals;

(ii) integral measurement and selectable alpha-numeric

display of:

- output current;
- output voltage;
- output frequency;
- output speed; and
- output power;

(iii) alpha-numeric display in English for warning / fault /

alarm status;

(iv) information can be transmitted on the RS485/232

output for remote interrogating and reprogramming;

(v) it shall have 1 programmable relay output (250V 2A)

and 1 programmable analogue output of 4-20mA or 0-
10V d.c.;

(vi) 10 programmable preset speeds (including at least 2

skip frequencies of adjustable bandwidth to overcome
mechanical or air system resonance);

(vii) selectable local or remote control;

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 30 of 58 2007 Edition
 (viii) hardware lock to prevent unauthorised parameter
adjustment;

(ix) it shall have the following integral protection against:

- loss of mains and motor phase;

- motor short circuit;
- motor circuit earth fault;
- motor overheat (without the use of motor winding
thermistors);
- overvoltage;
- VSD overheat;
- under voltage;
- input transients;
- VSD and motor overload; and
- mains input accidentally couples to motor output
terminals;

(x) it shall have a digital electronic equivalent of a motor

operated potentiometer control or similar device for
open loop operation;
(xi) it shall have an integral full 3-term PID control to
provide close loop control direct from a signal
transmitter without need for external signal
conditioning; and

(xii) it shall have a facility for controlling motor anti-

condensation heater for heater operation when the
motor is idle.

C5.19.3 Construction

(a) VSD shall incorporate a minimum 6-pulse full-wave

uncontrolled diode bridge, fixed voltage-fed d.c. link with
inductors and capacitors to form a filter, a mains filter for
EMC compliance, a pulse width modulation (PWM) inverter
bridge utilising insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBTs) and
output inductors in the motor lines. The inverter bridge shall
be controlled by a microprocessor to produce a pulse width
modulation (PWM) waveform or similar technique which
would result in full motor voltage and sinusoidal current mains
supply in the motor circuit. The VSD shall be equipped with
built-in RS485/232 serial communication ports.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 31 of 58 2007 Edition
 (b) The complete VSD unit shall be housed in a single front-
access enclosure designed and built as an integral part of the
VSD. The VSD shall be protected to at least IP44 for indoor
and IP55 for outdoor application, without having to use a
secondary enclosure. Unless otherwise specified, it shall be
suitable for continuous operation without derating under
ambient temperature of up to 40oC and relative humidity of up
to 95%. The equipment shall be fully tested including motor
loading at manufacturer’s facility or by an approved testing
authority to certify that the equipment conforms to the
aforesaid standard. Certificate of compliance shall be issued
for each standard rating of VSD used after being fully tested at
the manufacturing facility or by the testing authority.

C5.20 DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTION POWER METER

C5.20.1 General Requirements

(a) The microprocessor based Digital Multifunction Power Meter

shall measure the electrical parameters including current,
voltage, power factor, active and reactive power and frequency
by means of microprocessor technology. The meter shall be
able to communicate with PC-based Building Management
System via a common network protocol (e.g. RS232/RS485)
by means of plugging in communication module and without
further modification of the basic unit.

(b) Digital Multifunction Power Meter shall be housed in a single

front access industrial grade enclosure designed and built as an
integral part of the meter by the original manufacturer. The
meter shall then be panel mounted in the L.V. switchboard
cubicles. Alternatively, the meter can be configurated for DIN
rail mounting. The display shall either be L.E.D. or L.C.D.
with backlight, with auto blinking function for prolonging the
life of the display.

(c) The meter shall be so arranged that the replacement of meter

shall not require the switching off of the respective switchgear.
All wiring shall be routed to allow easy removal of the cable
connectors in the event that the meter requires replacement.
Current transformers shorting block shall be provided such
that current inputs can be disconnected without open circuiting
the current transformers. The shorting block shall be wired so
as not to affect the operation of protective relays.

(d) Manufacturer’s calibration certificate shall be issued for every

meter.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 32 of 58 2007 Edition
C5.20.2 Technical Requirements

(a) Digital Multifunction Power Meter shall comply with the

following technical requirements:

(i) Voltage input

- Minimum : 380V a.c. between phase;

direct voltage

(ii) Current input (In) : On current transformers, In /

5A (secondary);

(iii) Measurement : - True RMS value of line

current for each phase and
neutral current
- True RMS value of phase-
neutral voltage for each
phase
- True RMS value of line
voltage for each phase
- Active power, kW
- Reactive power, kVAr
- Apparent power, kVA
- Frequency, Hz
- Power factor
- Energy, kWh;

(iv) Accuracy

- Voltage : +0.5%
- Current : +0.5%
- Power : +1%
- Power factor : +2%
- Frequency : +1%
- Energy : +1%;

(v) Service condition

- Temperature : 0° to 50°C
- Relative : Up to 80%; and
humidity

(vi) Communication

- Numeric : Series link RS-232 or RS-485

: 4-20 mA output
Analog communication can be
regarded as an optional feature.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 33 of 58 2007 Edition
 (b) Digital Multifunction Power Meter shall store in memory the
maximum and minimum values of the each parameter
measured by the unit. The values in memory shall be recalled
and displayed upon pressing of a switch on the meter. Either
using lithium battery or non volatile flash memory for data
storage shall be adopted on condition that the memory shall be
backup not less than 3 years.

C5.21 CHARGER AND BATTERY SET

C5.21.1 General Requirements

(a) Battery charger set shall be a solid state secondary d.c. power
supply unit operating in parallel with a battery bank. The
maximum rated capacity referred to herein this specification
shall be 3kVA. The exact rated capacity shall be designed by
the Contractor to supply a constant voltage current for the
combined standing load and alarm / switch tripping load , if
applicable, or not less than 15 Amperes or as specified in the
Particular Specification, as well as recharging and restoring
the battery bank back to its constant potential voltage setting
within the specified time limit after fully discharge.

(b) The charger unit shall consist of a rectifier bridge which has
the a.c. mains input supplied via the isolation transformer and
has the ripples of its d.c. output smoothed by a d.c. filter
before supplying connected load under normal operation or the
battery after discharging in a.c. mains failure. The rectifier
shall be equipped with two voltage levels output, trickle
charge and high rate charge (hereinafter called boost charge)
which shall be fully automatically controlled and switched by
a control logic unit comprising the printed circuit boards
(hereinafter called PCB).

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 34 of 58 2007 Edition
(c) Battery charger set shall be manufactured to conform to the
currently-in-forced editions of the relevant standards as
indicated below:

BS EN Specification for Performance

61204:1995 Characteristics and Safety Requirements
of Low-voltage Power Supply Devices,
d.c. Output;

Specification for Stabilized Power

Supplies, d.c.110 Output;

IEC 60478- Terms and Definitions;

1:1974

IEC 61204 Rating and Performance;

:2001

BS 7430:1998 Code of Practice for Earthing; and

IEC 60950- Specification for Safety of IT

1:2005 Equipments, including Electrical
Business Equipment.

(d) the unit shall be able to recharge and restoring the battery bank
back to its constant potential voltage setting in not more than
twenty-four (24) hours unless otherwise specified after fully
discharged.

(e) The battery bank shall have sufficient voltage and rated
capacity in ampere-hour rating to maintain the connected load
at the rated output capacity for the duration specified below.
The Contractor shall submit calculation to demonstrate that the
offered capacity of the battery and charger unit is able to cope
with the power demand of the whole system. In any case, the
ampere-hour rating shall be not less than 10 ampere-hour if it
is not specified in the Particular Specification. The battery
shall be sealed, high rate maintenance free nickel-metal
hydride type, or a type of better functions and performance
and approved by the Architect and shall have a proven life
expectancy of at least 4 years. It shall not have any memory
effect to affect its usable life or performance. The nickel-metal
hydride battery shall comply with IEC 61951-2: 2003 where
applicable.

(f) Battery charger set shall be designed and manufactured by a

reputable manufacturer which has continuously manufactured
battery set to work in conjunction with a wide range of
applications for at least 5 years and their manufacturing
facility shall have a local agent to provide full technical
support which includes adequate spare holding and technical
expertise in testing, commissioning and trouble-shooting.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 35 of 58 2007 Edition
 (g) The following technical information shall be submitted to the
Architect for approval prior to ordering of equipment:

(i) Technical catalogues and specification, calculation

sheet for charger and battery capacity;

(ii) Power supply unit circuit diagram;

(iii) Circuit diagram of control and battery disconnected;

(iv) Printed circuit board diagram;

(v) Power supply unit front plate layout; and

(vi) Power supply unit console detail.

C5.21.2 Technical Requirements

The following technical requirements shall apply:

(a) Input voltage : 220V a.c. +10%;

(b) Frequency : 50 Hz +5%;

(c) Output ripple voltage : +5% of d.c. output;

(d) Output voltage : 12V/24V/30V/48V (+1%) or to suit

application;

(e) Overcurrent : Mains fuse, charger fuse, battery

protection fuse against overload and short
circuit conditions;

(f) Control : Manual boost charge, automatic

trickle charge and boost charge;

(g) Indication : Mains and charger healthy;

Charger short-circuit;
Battery connected;
Battery low-volt; and
Boost charge;

(h) Voltage-free contact : Voltage-free contacts for “load on

battery” and “battery low voltage”
should be provided if specified in
Particular Specification for remote
monitoring; and

(i) Input connection : 13 A fused a.c. supply.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 36 of 58 2007 Edition
C5.21.3 Construction

(a) The charger and battery set shall be housed in an industrial

grade cabinet constructed from high quality steel sheet of
minimum 1.2mm thick side and back plate and 1.5mm thick
hinged front door with key lock. Protection class of the
cabinet shall be not less than IP31 for indoor and IP55 for
outdoor application as specified in BS EN 60529:1992. The
entire enclosure surface shall be applied with chemical rust
inhibitor, rust resisting primer coat and top coat to give
maximum corrosion protection.

(b) The logic PCB, together with the isolation transformer and
fused mains input terminals, shall be factory assembled on a
plate located at the rear of the case. The power transistors are
mounted on heatsinks, separately from the PCB, on the back
plate. The instruments and LED indicators are mounted on the
front door of the cabinet. A lower ventilated compartment
inside the cabinet provides adequate space for accommodation
of the storage battery bank and ventilation.

(c) The cabinet shall be suitable for wall-mount or installation

inside a switch cubicle where appropriate.

C5.21.4 Selection Criteria

(a) The rated kVA capacity, voltage, current of the rectifier

charger and the storage capacity, terminal voltage, ampere-
hour rating of the battery bank shall be designed by the
manufacturer and selected by the Contractor that it is suitable
to work in conjunction with a range of application in switch
tripping / fire alarm and protection system / gas detection
system / security system / PA and audio system.

(b) For the switch tripping of cubicle switchboards, the selected

charger and battery set shall satisfy the following criteria:

(i) Output voltage : 24V, 30V, 48V or operating

voltage of tripping coil as specified
in the Particular Specification;
(ii) Output current : 15A or 20 times operating current
and re-charge of tripping coil for air circuit
time breaker and upon mains restoration,
adequate to re-charge the battery
from fully discharge to fully charge
within 24 hours as specified in the
Particular Specification; and

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 37 of 58 2007 Edition
 (iii) Ampere-hour : 10 Amp-hour or Upon mains
rating failure, adequate to discharge the
tripping current of the associated
air circuit breaker(s) consecutively
at least 20 times up to twenty air
circuit breaker(s) simultaneously or
as specified in the Particular
Specification.

(c) When used in conjunction with in fire alarm and protection

system / gas detection system, the selected charger and battery
set shall satisfy the following criteria:

(i) Output voltage : 24V;

(ii) Output current : 15A or output current for combined

and re-charge standing load at normal condition
time and alarm load at maximum alarm
condition and upon mains
restoration, adequate to re-charge
the battery from discharge to fully
charge within 24 hours or as
specified in the Particular
Specification; and

(iii) Ampere-hour : 10 Amp-hour or Upon mains

rating failure, adequate to discharge the
operating current for the connected
standing load at normal condition
for 24 hours and then the connected
alarm load at maximum alarm
condition for at least 60 minutes or
as specified in the Particular
Specification. If the fire alarm
control system is connected by an
alternative standby supply such as
an automatically started emergency
generator approved by the FSD, the
capacity of the battery and charger
unit may be reduced to that capable
of maintaining the system in
normal operation for eighteen (18)
hours and thereafter capable of
operating in maximum alarm
condition for at least thirty (30)
minutes and/or capable of actuating
the fire service installation as
required.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 38 of 58 2007 Edition
 (d) When used in conjunction with in security system / PA and
audio system, the selected charger and battery set shall satisfy
the following criteria:

(i) Output voltage : 12V or 24V or as specified in the

Particular Specification;

(ii) Output current : 15A or output current for combined

and re-charge standing load at normal condition
time and alarm load at maximum alarm
condition and upon mains
restoration, adequate to re-charge
the battery from discharge to fully
charge within 24 hours or as
specified in the Particular
Specification; and

(iii) Ampere-hour : 10 Amp-hour or Upon mains

rating failure, adequate to discharge the
operating current for the connected
standing load at normal condition
for 24 hours and then the connected
alarm load at maximum alarm
condition for at least 60 minutes or
as specified in the Particular
Specification.

C5.22 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION EQUIPMENT

C5.22.1 General Requirements

The power factor correction equipment (hereafter referred to as “the

equipment” in this section) shall include capacitors, protective
devices, contactors, control relays, current transformers, cabinet,
cables, cable glands, trunkings, control wirings, necessary accessories,
etc. For capacitors to be installed in system where the 5th, 7th, 11th ...
harmonics are anticipated, the normal de-tuning factor is around 7%
which will tune the resonance frequency fLC to 189 Hz. For
capacitors to be installed in system where 3rd harmonic is also
present, the normal de-tuning factor is around 12.5% which will tune
the resonance frequency fLC to 141 Hz. The de-tuning reactor shall
be rated to handle 110% of the capacitor fundamental current
continuously to compensate for capacitor tolerance and aging. The
overall power factor at the main switchboard and motor control
switchboard shall be improved to not less than 0.9.

Additional and specific requirements for the equipment shall be given

in the Particular Specifications, the Drawings or other documents
issued by the Architect.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 39 of 58 2007 Edition
C5.22.2 Requirements of the Components

(a) Capacitor Units

The capacitors shall be of low loss dry-type, metallized

polypropylene (MPP) film type with self-healing properties
and fitted in a sheet steel plate enclosure filled with non-
inflammable medium. The capacitor units shall be
hermetically sealed and manufactured from continuous metal
foil and low loss high quality dielectric material. The total
capacitor losses shall not exceed 0.5 Watt per kVAr. The
capacitors shall comply with the requirement of IEC 60931-
1:1996 and BS EN 60831-2:1996. Oil type capacitors shall be
rejected.

The capacitors shall be provided with directly connected

discharge resistors which shall reduce the residual voltage
from the rated peak alternating voltage to 75V or less
measured at the capacitor bank terminals within 3 minutes
after disconnection from the source of supply. The discharge
resistors shall be protected by an insulating cover.

The capacitor shall have the following characteristics:

(i) Rated voltage : 380 V;

(ii) Frequency : 50 Hz;
(iii) Insulation level : 3 kV rms/15 kV crest;
(iv) Dielectric : Polypropylene;
(v) Discharge resistors : Fitted;
(vi) Total capacitor losses : < 0.5 W/kVAr;
(vii) Maximum voltage Overload : 1.1 times rated
voltage;
(viii) Maximum current Overload : 1.3 times rated
current;
(ix) Power tolerance : - 5/+10 %; and
(x) Residual voltage at : < 10% of rated voltage.
Energization

(b) Protection Units

The capacitor units shall be fed by fuse-switch or MCCB for

protection against high fault currents. Besides, an
overpressure disconnection device for protection against low
fault currents shall be provided.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 40 of 58 2007 Edition
(c) Control Relays

The capacitors in each bank shall be controlled by an

automatic multi-step capacitor control relay capable of
switching the appropriate amount of capacitors “IN” or “OUT”
so as to achieve the best average power factor. A no-volt
resetting feature shall be incorporated to ensure that, in the
event of power interruption lasting for a period over 50ms, all
capacitors involved shall be disconnected from the L.V.
installation and re-connected in accordance with the
aforementioned arrangement upon supply resumption.

The relay shall be commanded by a microprocessor which

measures the reactive power of an installation and gives the
necessary instructions to the relay for connecting or
disconnecting the capacitors in order to maintain the desired
power factor. The microprocessor shall be capable to ensure
an uniform aging of contactors and capacitors by using a
circular connection sequence which takes into account the time
that each capacitor has been switched on (First-In-First-Out
(FIFO) System). The control relay shall include a fully
operational alarm system which shall operate in case the
equipment cannot reach the required power factor. LED/LCD
indicator shall be provided to show which step the capacitors
are connected.

The control relay shall have the following characteristics:

(i) Dual voltage : 220 or 380 V;

(ii) Control current : Can be connected without any

additional adaptor to C.T. 2500/5A
burden 5VA min. Class 1;

(iii) Contacts for : Control relay capable of

contactor withstanding 2500V a.c., 5 A and
switching 1200VA;

(iv) Test voltage : Supply connecting cable and

contactor connecting cable: 1500V,
50 Hz; C.T. Contactor: 500V
50Hz;

(v) Harmonics : A filter shall be incorporated to

filtering avoid falsified measuring results.
Not to be confused with the filter
circuits for the equipment;

(vi) Response : Adjustable from 0.05 to 1A;

current
(C/K setting
range)

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 41 of 58 2007 Edition
 (vii) C/K setting : Manual or Automatic;

(viii) Power factor : Adjustable from 0.85 lagging to 1

reversal and prevent leading P.F. during
point light load condition;

(ix) Power factor : 0.85 inductance to 0.95

setting capacitance;

(x) Switching time : Adjustable from 10s to 3 minutes

from one step to according to reactive load;
another

(xi) Indicator for : LED/LCD;

operating and
steps

(xii) No-voltage : If voltage fails, the no-voltage

release release operates automatically due
to drop-out of control relay;

(xiii) Alarm relay : Yes;

(xiv) Manual : Two push-buttons for manual

switching operation, suitable to check
functioning of relay;

(xv) Connection : Plug-in connector; and

(xvi) Mounting : With angle brackets and threaded

bolts.

(d) Contactors

The equipment shall be equipped with special contactors for

limiting over-current on itself from high inrush current at
capacitor switching. The contactors are characterized for
having auxiliary contacts equipped with pre-charge resistors.
These auxiliary contacts shall be closed before the power
contacts such that the connection peak is strongly limited by
the effect of the resistors.

Contactors shall be adequately rated to make and break the

capacitive current at low power factor. This current limitation
increases the life of all the components of the equipment, in
particular that of the protective devices and capacitors. The
contactors shall comply with the requirement of BS EN
60947-4-1:2001.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 42 of 58 2007 Edition
 The contactor shall have the following characteristics:

(i) Prospective peak current at : 100 times rated current;

Switch-on
Maximum operating rate : 150 operations/hour;
(iii) Electrical life at rated load : 100,000 – 200,000
operations; and
(iv) Utilization category : AC6b.

(e) Cabinet

The equipment shall be of cabinet type of at least IP31 (Indoor)

and contained in a separate cubicle with control switchgear
and all other necessary accessories and shall comprise multiple
identical capacitor units connected and easily dismountable for
its replacement. Integrated cubicle with the LV Switchboard
installation is not acceptable. The equipment shall be installed
in separate compartment segregated from the rest of the LV
Switchboard such that failure of the equipment will not affect
the operation of the LV Switchboard. The equipment shall be
housed in a front-access industrial grade enclosure with epoxy
powder coating.

All exposed ferrous metal surfaces of the capacitor bank where

applicable shall be treated with rust-inhibiting primer paint,
undercoat and finished to a colour approved by the Arhitect.

(f) Blocking Filter or De-tuning Reactor

Each power factor correction capacitor bank/step shall be

equipped with series connected blocking filter or de-tuning
reactors if specified in the Particular Specification to suppress
harmonic and inrush currents to the equipment. The equipment
here refers to the power factor correction equipment. The
reactors shall be constructed to IEC 62271-200:2003 and shall
be rated to handle 110% of the capacitor fundamental current
continuously to compensate for capacitor tolerance and aging.
The reactor shall be rated to handle 5th harmonic current of a
magnitude equal to 15% of the capacitor current rating. The
nameplate on the de-tuning capacitor bank shall indicate the
rated fundamental and harmonic currents and frequencies. The
reactors shall be copper wounded with class H (180 ° C)
insulation system and shall be suitable for an ambient
temperature of 40°C and a maximum temperature rise of 100°C.
Power loss of the reactor shall be less than 1% of the capacitor
kVAr rating. Reactors shall be manufactured in flat or round
copper wire technology. They shall be dried and impregnated
in a vacuum, which ensures they can withstand high voltages
and maintain a long operating life.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 43 of 58 2007 Edition
C5.23 DIGITAL PROTECTION RELAY

C5.23.1 General Requirements

(a) This digital protection relay is used as standalone type. The

microprocessor-based digital protection relay shall accept
three-phase inputs from industrial standard current
transformers with nominal secondary current of 1 or 5
Amperes and shall sense the true RMS current values.

(b) The digital relay shall provide time delayed three-phase

overcurrent protection and earth fault protection and shall
allow a variety of selectable time-current IDMT characteristic
curves according to IEC 60255-26:2004 and associated
requirements.

(c) The digital relay shall have remote operation feature and shall
be able to communicate with PC-based Building Management
System via a common network protocol such as
Modbus/Lonworks via RS232/RS485/Ethernet communication
link by means of plugging in communication module and
without further modification of the basic unit.

(d) The digital relay shall be suitable for protection at main

incoming circuit breaker in low voltage electrical system and
the tripping characteristics of the relay shall match with the
power supply companies' breaker/fuse tripping characteristics
for discrimination. The protection scheme and tripping
characteristics of the digital relay shall be approved by the
power supply companies in Hong Kong.

(e) The digital relay shall have continuous self-supervision feature

to monitor the control circuit. Fault recording function shall be
triggered upon fault detection or tripping operation for
diagnostic use. The monitoring information and relay setting
shall be recallable and programmable by means of front panel
keypad or remote access by software. The digital relay shall
have security password feature to protect access to relay
parameter settings and remote tripping.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 44 of 58 2007 Edition
 (f) The digital relay shall be type tested for Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) and other relevant requirements in
accordance with the following international standards:

IEC 60255-22-2:1996 Electrostatic discharge tests;

IEC 60255-22-3:2007 Radiated electromagnetic field

disturbance test;

IEC 60255-22-4:2002 Electrical fast transient/burst

immunity test;

IEC 60255-22-5:2002 Surge immunity test;

IEC 60255-25:2000 Electromagnetic emission tests;

IEC 60255-21-1:1988 Vibration tests; and

IEC 60255-21-2:1988 Shock and bump test.

Manufacturer’s calibration certificate shall be issued for every

digital relay.

C5.23.2 Technical Requirements

(a) The digital protection relay shall comply with the following
technical requirements:

Current input : 1A or 5A via standard protection

current transformer;

Overcurrent setting : 50% to 200% in step of 5% of

nominal current In;

Earth fault setting : 10% to 40% in step of 5% of In;

Time multiple setting : 0.1 to 1.0 in step of 0.05;

AC burden (maximum) : 0.25VA at In = 1A

0.50VA at In = 5A; and

Service condition : Temperature range: 0° to 40°C

Relative humidity: Up to 95%.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 45 of 58 2007 Edition
 (b) The monitoring and fault records of the digital relay shall be
stored in nonvolatile memory and retained in the event of
control power interruption. Either using lithium battery or non
volatile flash memory for data storage shall be adopted on
condition that the memory shall be backup not less than 3
years. Each fault/event record shall include at least the type of
faults/alarms, current values, date & time of tripping, etc. The
memory shall be capable of storing minimum 5 fault records.

(c) The digital relay shall be accommodated in a dust-proof case

to IP51 and shall be draw-out type flush mounted on the front
panel of switchboard cubicle. Facility shall be provided for
automatic short-circuiting the associated current transformers
upon withdrawal of the module.

(d) The digital relay shall be able to receive auxiliary d.c. power
supply at 30V or 48V for control operation. A battery set and
charger shall be provided for digital relay operation.

(e) The digital relay shall provide at least 4 auxiliary contacts for
the input/output of other functions such as remote tripping,
alarms, blocking logic, watchdog, etc.

(f) Trip indicators shall be provided for identification of the type

of fault condition.

C5.24 DIGITAL POWER ANALYZER

C5.24.1 General Requirements

(a) The microprocessor based digital power analyzer shall

measure and monitor the electrical parameters including
current, voltage, power factor, energy, frequency and power
quality parameters by means of microprocessor technology.
The digital power analyzer shall be able to communicate with
PC-based Building Management System via a common
network protocol such as Modbus/Lonworks via
RS232/RS485/Ethernet communication link by means of
plugging in communication module and without further
modification of the basic unit.

(b) The digital power analyzer shall continuously monitor the

power system and trigger alarm/event logging for power
monitoring and analysis. The stored and instantaneous
measurement data shall be recalled and displayed on the front
panel upon pressing of keypad on the digital power analyzer
and alternatively monitored by PC-based application software
supplied together with the analyzer.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 46 of 58 2007 Edition
 (c) The digital power analyzer shall have waveform capture
capability which shall be either initiated from the software or
by the power analyzer as a user defined response to an alarm
condition. The captured waveform samples shall be able to
transmit over the network to PC-based workstation for display,
archival and analysis.

(d) The digital power analyzer shall comply with the

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) requirements in
accordance with the following international standards:

IEC 61000-4-2:2001 Electrostatic discharge immunity test;

IEC 61000-4-4:2004 Electrical fast tansient/burst immunity

test;

IEC 61000-4-5:2005 Surge immunity test; and

IEC 61000-3-2:2005 Limits for harmonic current emissions.

Manufacturer’s calibration certificate shall be issued for every

digital power analyzer.

C5.24.2 Technical Requirements

(a) The digital power analyzer shall comply with the following
technical requirements:

(i) Voltage input

- Maximum : 600V a.c. between phase
direct voltage

- Other voltages : Through potential transformers;

(ii) Current input (In) : On current transformer, In / 5A

(secondary); and

(iii) Measurement : - True RMS value of line

current for each phase
- Neutral current
- % current unbalance
- True RMS value of phase-
neutral voltage for each phase
- True RMS value of line
voltage for each phase
- % voltage unbalance
- Active power, kW for each
phase and three-phase total

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 47 of 58 2007 Edition
 - Reactive power, kVAr for
each phase and three-phase
total
- Apparent power, kVA for
each phase and three-phase
total
- Frequency, Hz
- Power factor
- Active energy, kWh for three-
phase total with instantaneous
and accumulated values
- Demand current for each
phase and three-phase average
- Demand active power, three-
phase total
- Demand apparent power,
three-phase total
- Harmonic distortion for
voltage and current, up to 30th
harmonic orders
- Total harmonic distortion for
voltage and current;

(iv) Accuracy
- Voltage : ± 0.5%
- Current : ± 0.5%
- Power : ± 0.5%
- Power factor : ± 0.5%
- Frequency : ± 0.5%
- Energy : ± 0.5%
- Harmonic : ± 1.0%;

(v) Services Condition

- Temperature : 0° to 40°C
- Relative : Up to 95%
humidity; and

(vi) Communication
- Digital : Serial link RS-232 or RS-485
- Analog : 4 – 20mA output.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 48 of 58 2007 Edition
 (b) The digital power analyzer shall provide date and time
stamped event log. The type of alarm events and size of the
event log shall be user definable. The following classes of
events shall be available as alarm events:

(i) Over /under voltage;

(ii) Over /under current;

(iii) Current or voltage unbalance;

(iv) Phase loss, voltage or current;

(v) Over /under frequency;

(vi) Overall/total kVA, kW or kVAr into /out of load;

(vii) Under power factor, true or displacement;

(viii) Over THD;

(ix) Over demand, current or power;

(x) Phase reversal; and

(xi) Voltage or current sag /swell.

(c) All setup parameters required by the digital power analyzer

shall be stored in nonvolatile memory and retained in the event
of control power interruption. The memory shall maintain the
maximum and minimum values of each parameter measured
by the unit. Either using lithium battery or non volatile flash
memory for data storage shall be adopted on condition that the
memory shall be backup not less than 3 years.

C5.25 ELECTRIC MOTORS

C5.25.1 General

All electric motors shall be of the high efficiency squirrel-cage

induction totally enclosed fan-cooled type and comply with IEC
60034-1:2004 and other associated Parts of the Standard.

The motors shall be insulated to IEC 60085:2004 with Class F as the

minimum insulation, unless otherwise specified.

Motor enclosures shall be in accordance with IEC 60034-5:2006 and

the 'degree of protection' shall be appropriate to the location in which
the motors are operating and the environment indicated. Unless
otherwise specified, motors shall be protected with enclosures to at
least IP 44 for indoor and IP 55 for outdoor application.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 49 of 58 2007 Edition
 Motors of 2.2 kW output or above shall be suitable for operation from
three-phase supply.

The synchronous speed of the motor shall not exceed 25 rev/s unless
otherwise approved.

C5.25.2 Insulation Test

All low voltage motors shall have a minimum insulation resistance of

1 megaohm between phases and to earth when tested with an
approved 500V DC insulation tester.

C5.25.3 Starting Torque and Current

Motors shall have starting torque characteristics to suit the connected
load and the type of starting.

Starting current conditions shall conform to the requirements as

stipulated in the latest edition of the Supply Rules of the power utility
companies. Unless otherwise approved in writing by the power
utility company, maximum starting current shall be in accordance
with Table C5.25.3 below:

Table C5.25.3 - Maximum Starting Current

Motor Size Maximum Starting

Supply (M) No. of Current (in
Arrangement in Phases Multiple of Full
Kilowatts Load Current)
From Power Utility M < 1.5 1-phase 6
Company’s Overhead 1.5 < M < 3.8 3-phase 6
Line System 3.8 < M < 11 3-phase 2.5
From Power Utility M < 2.2 1-phase 6
Company’s Non- 2.2 < M < 11 3-phase 6
overhead Line System 11 < M < 55 3-phase 2.5

C5.25.4 Maintenance Access and Safety

The electrical and mechanical arrangements of all motors shall be

such that the necessary periodical testing, cleaning and maintenance
can be carried out in a minimum of time with economy of labour.

C5.25.5 Noise and Vibration

All motor rotors shall be dynamically balanced. The vibration and

noise level generated by the motors shall not exceed the
recommended limits as stipulated in IEC 60034-9:2007 and IEC
60034-14:2007 respectively. The Architect will reject motors that
operate with unacceptable noise and vibration.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 50 of 58 2007 Edition
C5.25.6 Minimum Motor Efficiency

Unless otherwise specified, all motors shall have the minimum

efficiency in Table C5.25.6 below:

Table C5.25.6 - Minimum Motor Efficiency at Full Load

Rated output Min. efficiency (%) Rated output Min. efficiency (%)
power (kW) 2-pole 4-pole power (kW) 2-pole 4-pole
motor motor motor motor
1.1 ≤ P < 1.5 82.8 83.8 18.5≤ P < 22 91.8 92.2
1.5 ≤ P < 2.0 84.1 85.0 22 ≤ P < 30 92.2 92.6
2.2 ≤ P < 3.0 85.6 86.4 30 ≤ P < 37 92.9 93.2
3.0 ≤ P < 4.0 86.7 87.4 37 ≤ P < 45 93.3 93.6
4.0 ≤ P < 5.5 87.6 88.3 45 ≤ P < 55 93.7 93.9
5.5 ≤ P < 7.5 88.6 89.2 55 ≤ P < 75 94.0 94.2
7.5 ≤ P < 11.0 89.5 90.1 75 ≤ P < 90 94.6 94.7
11.0 ≤ P < 15.0 90.5 91.0 P ≥ 90 95.0 95.0
15.0 ≤ P < 18.5 91.3 91.8

C5.25.7 Continuous Rating

The motors shall be continuously rated to IEC 60034-1:2004. They

shall be adequately rated to meet the service demands of driven units
connected thereto under normal conditions without overload. The
continuous rating of the motors shall cover the full specified range of
duty plus a further 5% margin for compressors, 15% margin for fans
and 10% for pumps.

C5.25.8 Tachometers

In all cases of direct drive (except hermetic), an application point

shall be provided for speed checking by a tachometer.

C5.25.8 Terminals

One large terminal box of approved design shall be provided,

mounted on the stator casing only. Each end of each stator phase
must be brought out to a terminal in the box. For motors rated 10 kW
and above, adequate clearance between termination shall be allowed
for the use of cable lugs.

C5.25.10 Anti-condensation Heater

Anti-condensation heater shall be provided in damp environment such

as sea water pump motors located inside water-front pump chambers,
or motors above 30 kW.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 51 of 58 2007 Edition
C5.25.11 Belt Drives and Pulleys

Belt drives shall comply with BS 3790:2006 and be capable of

transmitting at least the rated power output of the driving motor with
one belt removed. A minimum of two belts per drive shall be used
and all multi-belt drives shall use matched sets.

Slide rails shall be provided for all motors driving through belts.
Purpose-made adjusting devices shall be provided to enable belt
tension to be altered and motors to be secured.

Belt driven machinery such as fans shall be fitted with pulleys

suitable for the belt drive used. Pulleys may use split taper bushings
for drives up to 30 kW. Alternatively, and in any case for output
above 30 kW, pulleys shall be secured to the fan and motor shafts by
keys fitted into machined keyways. Keys shall be easily accessible so
that they can be withdrawn or tightened. Where gib head keys are
used they shall not protrude beyond the end of the shaft. For keys
without gib heads, they shall be drilled and tapped to accept an
extractor bolt.

C5.25.12 Protective Guards

Protective fixed guards shall be provided at all forms of open power

transmission systems including belt drives and drive couplings, and to
dangerous parts of machinery to prevent inadvertent access or contact.
The guards shall comply with the safety requirements stipulated by
the Labour Department.

For belt drives, the guards shall be of galvanized steel wire of not less
than 2.5 mm diameter attached to a rigid galvanized steel rod or angle
framework. The mesh size and the location of the guard shall prevent
finger contact with any enclosed danger point. Alternatively guards
may be constructed from galvanized sheet steel of not less than 0.8
mm thick stiffened to ensure a rigid enclosure. Removable access
panels shall be provided in guards to allow tachometer readings to be
taken on both driving and driven shafts and also belt tension to be
tested. The sizes of guards including the dimensions and locations of
access panels shall also allow the size and position of the motor.

C5.25.13 Motor Fed by Converter

As converter drive can generate repetitive voltage overshoots at the

terminals of a motor connected by cables, which can reduce the life of
a motor winding insulation system if these repetitive voltage
overshoots exceed the repetitive voltage stress withstand capability of
the motor winding insulation system, the motor winding insulation
shall have the pulse withstand capability at least equal that depicted
by Curve A (for motors upto 500V AC) of Figure 17 of IEC TS
60034-25:2007.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 52 of 58 2007 Edition
 In order to avoid damage by bearing currents in converter fed
operation, motor of frame size 225 or larger shall be fitted with
isolated bearing at the non-drive end.

C5.26 MOTOR SWITCHGEAR, STARTERS AND CONTROL PANEL

C5.26.1 General

Motor switchgear, starters and controls shall be supplied and installed

to perform the operation and control of the equipment to be provided.
The control panels or switchboards shall incorporate all control
devices, timers, accessories and wiring necessary for proper operation.

C5.26.2 Local Motor Control Panels

The local motor control panel shall be of wall-mounted factory built

assemblies of low voltage switchboard housing the motor starter and
switchgear.

The panel shall be Partially Type-Tested Assemblies (PTTA) as

defined in IEC 60439-1:2001 and constructed generally to Form 2.

The panel shall be of steel construction, self supporting, with modular

top, side and back panels and doors of sheet steel built up on
substantial framing with all necessary stiffeners, supports and return
edges to provide a rigid construction and clear accessibility to all
internal components within the panel. The thickness of the sheet steel
shall be at least 1.6 mm.

The panel enclosure shall be of degree of protection of IP 44 for

indoor application to IEC 60529:2001. All doors shall have hinges
and be provided with dust-excluding gasket.

All panels shall, but not be limited to, include the following
operational features:

- Local Auto/On/Off switch for each equipment;

- A starter for each motor;
- Fuse switch or circuit breaker for each equipment;
- Isolating switch for each main incoming supply and for each
motor starter;
- Protective, control and auxiliary relays;
- Current transformer;
- Current ammeter for each equipment with phase selection
switch for each motor;
- Voltmeter for panel with power supply of 60A or above;
- Hour run meter;
- Indicating lamps, push buttons, selectors and control switches;
- Emergency stop push buttons; and
- Labelling.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 53 of 58 2007 Edition
 Unless otherwise specified, the components above shall comply with
the requirements stipulated in the respective sections of this
Specification.

C5.26.3 Motor Control Switchboard

The motor control switchboard (hereafter called the “MC

Switchboard”) shall be a free-standing floor-mounted low voltage
switchboard to group centrally the motor starters, controls and
switchgear for the air-conditioning and ventilation equipment etc.

The MC Switchboard shall, but not be limited to, include the

following provisions:

- Local Auto/On/Off switch for each equipment;

- Air circuit breaker, fuse switch and/or moulded case circuit
breaker;
- Busbars;
- Isolating switch for each main incoming supply and for each
motor starter;
- A starter for each motor;
- Protective, control and auxiliary relays;
- Current transformer;
- Current ammeter for each equipment with phase selection
switch for each motor;
- Voltmeter for panel with power supply of 60 A or above;
- Hour run meter;
- Indicating lamps, push buttons, selector and control switches;
- Emergency stop push buttons; and
- Labelling.

Unless otherwise specified, the MC Switchboard and associated

components above shall comply with the requirements stipulated in
the respective sections of this Specification.

C5.26.4 Motor Starters

(a) General Requirements

(i) Motor starters shall generally comply with the

requirements of the IEC 60947-4-1:2005 or IEC
60470:2000.

(ii) The duty of the starters shall be suitable for the

mechanical and electrical duties imposed by the motors
being switched and in particular, the starting torque,
current, starting time and frequency of operation.

(iii) Motor of more than 0.5 kW rating shall be provided

with a starter designed to perform the following
functions efficiently and safely:

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 54 of 58 2007 Edition
 - To start the motor without damage to the drive or
driven equipment whilst regulating the starting
current to the satisfaction of the power supply
company and ensuring that at all stages of starting,
the motor will develop sufficient torque to
accelerate the load;

- To stop the motor;

- To prevent damage to the motor due to overload,

under voltage, disconnection of one phase;

- To prevent damage to reduced voltage started

motors and danger to personnel due to resumption
of the electricity supply following a failure;

- To limit the damage to the motor due to stalling

or internal electrical or mechanical faults by
quickly disconnecting the supply; and

- To prevent damage to the motor or the starter

itself due to improper unskilled or hesitant
operation or failure to complete a starting
sequence once it is connected.

(iv) Motor starters shall comply with the Supply Rules of

the power utility companies.

(v) Each motor starter assembly shall comprise fused

switchgear, contactors, protection relays, main and
auxiliary contacts, and associated accessories. For
starter to be installed in motor control switchboard, the
whole unit shall be enclosed in the switchboard from
which no access can be gained to adjoining sections of
the switchboard. Both the main and auxiliary contacts
shall be rated for uninterrupted and intermittent duty.

(vi) All starters shall be of the electrically held-on pattern

and shall not release until the voltage falls below 75%
of nominal value.

(vii) All starters shall be of the air-break triple-pole electro-

magnetic type and shall comply with IEC 60947-4-
1:2005 or IEC 60470:2000, with utilisation category
suitable for the particular application as shown in Table
I of IEC 60947-4-1:2005. The starter shall be capable
of making and breaking currents without failure under
the conditions stated in Table VII and Table VIII of
IEC 60947-4-1:2005 for the required utilisation
categories and the number of operation cycle indicated.
The duty rating of the contactors shall not be less than
intermittent duty class 0.1 60% on-load factor. Where
specified in the Contract Document, the solid state soft
Section C5 EE_GS
Page 55 of 58 2007 Edition
 motor starter can be used to start motors over 2kW.

(viii) The starter shall comply with the requirements for

performance under short-circuit conditions stipulated in
IEC 60947-4-1:2005, and type of coordination shall be
Type “1” unless otherwise specified.

(ix) Overload relay for a starter shall be of thermal type

unless otherwise specified. The trip class of starters
shall be according to the classification of Table II of
IEC 60947-4-1:2005. Overload relay shall be able to
operate at an ambient air temperature of 40oC and have
a setting range of 50% to 150% rated operational
current.

(x) For an assisted start starter, timer shall be of solid state

plug-in type with 0 to 15 seconds setting. For star/delta
and reversing starter, mechanical and electrical
interlocks shall be fitted with the contactor.

(xi) Control circuits shall be operated on main supply

derived from the control panel or switchboard, and
protected by fuse to IEC 60269-1:2006.

(xii) Where duplicate equipment is provided, the starter for

each equipment shall be housed in a separate panel.
Unless otherwise indicated, where an equipment is
provided with duplicate motors, two starters shall be
supplied; a single starter with a local changeover switch
will not be accepted.

(b) Direct-on-line (DOL) Starters

(i) Unless otherwise specified in the General Specification

or Particular Specification for the specific type of
installations, motors rated below 11kW shall be direct-
on-line provided that the maximum starting current
does not exceed six times the rated motor full load
current, otherwise star-delta starters shall be provided.

(ii) The starters shall, but not be limited to, include the
following:

- Fused switchgear;

- Triple pole air break contactor;

- A triple pole motor protection unit incorporating

over-current and single-phasing protection with
manual reset facilities;

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 56 of 58 2007 Edition
 - Under-volt release protection device. Unless
otherwise specified, it shall be arranged to
provide automatic restart on restoration of mains
voltage;

- Current transformers with suitable ratio, output

and accuracy for motor protection;

- Local/off/remote control selector switch lockable

in each position;

- Start and stop push buttons;

- Indicating lamps for motor running, off and

tripped on fault;

- Dry contacts wired to terminals for remote

indication of motor running, off, tripped on fault
and summary alarm to supervisory control panels;

- Terminals wired to provide for connection to

emergency stop push button and remote start/stop
of the motor;

- Hour run meter; and

- Lamp test button.

(c) Star-delta Starters

(i) Unless otherwise specified in the General Specification

or Particular Specification for the specific type of
installations, motors rated at and above 11kW and up
to 55kW shall be star-delta started to limit the
maximum starting current to within 2.5 times the rated
motor full load current.

(ii) Star-delta starters shall be equipped as per DOL starters

specified above, with the following additional
provisions:

- Triple pole air break contactors with electrical

and mechanical interlock arranged for automatic
star-delta transition;

- Calibrated and adjustable solid state timer for

automatic star-delta transition; and

- A triple pole motor protection unit incorporating

over-current, single-phasing and earth leakage
protection with manual reset facilities. The earth
leakage protection unit shall be selected to isolate
the motor circuit with a maximum fault
Section C5 EE_GS
Page 57 of 58 2007 Edition
 disconnection time of 5 seconds in case of earth
leakage without causing nuisance tripping of the
motor circuit due to motor starting and transient
current transformer saturation.

(d) Auto-transformer Starters

(i) Unless otherwise specified in the General Specification

or Particular Specification for the specific type of
installations, motors rated above 55kW shall be reduced
voltage started by means of auto-transformer to limit
the maximum starting current to within 2.5 times the
rated motor full load current.

(ii) Reduced voltage starters shall be equipped as per star-

delta starters specified above, with the following
additional provisions:

- Triple pole air break contactor with electrical and

mechanical interlock arranged for automatic
reduced voltage transition;

- Air-cooled copper winding auto-transformer with

Class F insulation enclosed in an earthed metal
casing suitably ventilated by splash proof louvres.
Suitable tappings shall be arranged for closed
transition reduced voltage motor starting; and

- Calibrated and adjustable solid state timers for

switching over from reduced voltage to full
voltage connection.

Section C5 EE_GS
Page 58 of 58 2007 Edition
 SECTION C6

BUSBAR TRUNKING SYSTEM

C6.1 GENERAL

Busbar trunking system shall be designed to operate on 220/380V 3 phase

4 busbar at 50 Hz system and shall be manufactured and type tested to
IEC 60439-2:2005. Busbar trunking systems manufactured to other standards
(such as National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) of USA and
UL listed) with insulation voltage of 415V may be considered as acceptable
provided that the standard of manufacture is not inferior to the relevant IEC
standard and that the busbar trunking system meets all the requirements of this
Section. All material, components and accessories (such as bends, joints, tees,
feeder units, tap-off units, etc.) used for the busbar trunking shall be of the same
origin of manufacture. Busbar trunking system shall be certified by testing
laboratories or organizations as stated in the Code of Practice for the Electricity
(Wiring) Regulations.

In case where busbar trunkings are manufactured under license from the
Principal Company, a letter shall be produced by the Principal Company to
guarantee that the products manufactured by the licensee will be equivalent in
every respect to the type-tested standard products.

C6.2 BUSBAR TRUNKING CONSTRUCTION

The busbar trunking system shall be of the totally enclosed type with ingress of
protection not less than IP54 of IEC 60529:2001 for indoor erection in non-
sprinklered areas, IP55 of IEC 60529:2001 for indoor erection in sprinklered
areas and mechanical plantrooms and IP66 of IEC 60529;2001 for outdoor
erection. It shall be constructed to withstand heavy mechanical loads as stated
in IEC 60439-2:2005. The casing shall be finished in enamel paint to a grey
color or the nearest manufacturer’s color of standard production.

Adjacent lengths of the busbar casing shall be butt-jointed and the joint shall be
mechanically and electrically continuous. The mechanical strength of the joint
shall not be less than that of the busbar casing.

Color circles indicating the phrasal arrangement of the busbars shall be painted
on the casing of the terminal units and at any physical compartment. Removal
of the cover for access facility shall necessitate the use of tools.

For long busbar run, phase transposition of busbar shall be incorporated in

accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation.

Section C6 EE_GS
Page 1 of 7 2007 Edition
C6.3 BUSBAR INSULATION

The busbars shall be insulated from the busbar casing to maintain a clearance
and creepage distance as specified in Clause 7.1.2.3.5 of IEC 60439-1:2004 with
Pollution Degree 3. The insulation material shall be of heat resistant, self-
extinguishing, non-hygroscopic, high electrical and mechanical strength to
withstand the stresses under all normal and short-circuit conditions.

C6.4 BUSBAR

Busbars shall be three phase and full rated neutral made of hard drawn, high
conductivity solid copper bars to BS EN 13601:2002.

The busbar including all electrical contact surfaces shall be silver or tin plated.
The busbars shall be of adequate size to carry the rated current continuously at
mean ambient temperature of 35 oC and shall not exceed the temperature rise in
accordance with Clause 7.3 of IEC 60439-1:2004.

Each bar shall be painted to indicate the phase to which it is connected. Painting
shall comprise a band of color at each accessible position to the busbars.

C6.5 FEEDER UNIT

Feeder unit shall be of manufacturer’s proprietary product. The rated current

and rated short-time withstand current of the feeder unit shall not be less than
that of the busbar trunking system to which it is connected.

C6.6 TAP-OFF UNITS

Tap-off units shall be used for branch circuits taken off from the busbars.
MCCB to IEC 60947-2:2006 or H.R.C. fuses to IEC 60269-1:2006 and other
associated Parts of the Standard of appropriate current ratings and short-circuit
breaking capacities shall be provided as near as practically possible to the
tapping position for protection of the branch circuits.

Plug-in tap-off units shall be attached on the busbar casing and held in position
by means of wing nuts or other quick fastening and quick releasing device.

Tap-off units shall make positive earth connection and shall be equipped with
internal barriers to prevent direct contact.

Mechanical interlock shall be incorporated such that the tap-off unit cannot be
inserted or removed from the busbar trunking unless it is in the switch OFF
position.

Section C6 EE_GS
Page 2 of 7 2007 Edition
C6.7 BUSBAR EXPANSION UNIT

The busbar expansion unit shall be of a single pole laminated copper strip design
of appropriate current rating and shall be arranged to take up the axial expansion
or contraction of the busbar trunking system under normal service conditions.
The expansion unit shall be prevented from short-circuit from adjacent bar either
by ample space between phases or alternatively by segregation between phases.

C6.8 FIRE BARRIER IN BUSBAR TRUNKING SYSTEM

Fire barrier shall be made of non-hygroscopic material having a fire-resistant

period of not less than that of the corresponding compartmentation wall or slab
at where it is installed. Factory fabricated internal barrier shall be used.

C6.9 BUSBAR TRUNKING ACCESSORIES

Bends, tees and intersection units shall be specifically designed and

manufactured for the particular type of busbar system with which it is to be used.
The casing of the accessories shall be of same material and finish as the busbar
casing and shall have a cross-sectional area not less than that of the busbar
casing. No loss in mechanical strength, electrical continuity, rated current and
rated short-circuit capacity shall be incurred due to insertion of bends or tees.

C6.10 REQUIREMENT FOR AIR-INSULATED BUSBAR TRUNKING

SYSTEM

C6.10.1 Busbar Enclosure

Enclosure of the busbar trunking shall be of steel construction, made

of sheet steel of not less than l.2 mm thick for busbar trunking's width
or height of casing not exceeding 100 mm and not less than 1.5 mm
thick for a width or height exceeding 100 mm, formed in such a way
as to give a rigid structure of sufficient strength. Both the main
portion of the enclosure and cover shall be flanged at the side edges.

The cover shall be fixed onto the body of the busbar trunking at the
front by means of heavily electroplated hexagonal head screws and
nuts, one of which shall be firmly fixed onto the trunking assembly.
The cover shall be removable except where the busbar trunking
passes through the floor slab.

Steel work shall be treated to prohibit corrosion by hot-dip

galvanizing or electrolytically coated with zinc. The inside and
outside surfaces of the enclosure shall then be coated with two layers
of stoved enamel finish paint with contrasting colors or one layer of
stoved epoxy powder paint.

Section C6 EE_GS
Page 3 of 7 2007 Edition
C6.10.2 Busbar Supports

Busbars shall be supported on insulated racks or blocks to

IEC 60667-1:1980 and other associated Parts of the Standard and
shall comply with Clause 7.1.2.3 of IEC 60439-1:2004:

(a) At each location of the busbar support insulator, the busbar

shall be insulated with self-extinguishing heat shrinkable
insulating sleeve of suitable operating temperature extended to
50 mm on each side of the busbar support insulator; and

(b) The busbar supports shall be mechanically strong enough to

withstand the force between busbars produced by a short
circuit of negligible impedance between two or more busbars.

C6.10.3 Busbar Jointing

Jointing of sections of busbars shall be made by clamps tightened by

bolts and nuts. Soldered, welded or riveted joints shall not be used.

Bolts for jointing busbars shall be of steel either hot dip galvanized or
heavily electroplated with zinc or cadmium to guard against corrosion.

C6.10.4 Suspension Unit, Flexible Joint and Stop-end Unit

Suspension unit and flexible joint shall be capable of taking up the

busbar movements due to axial expansion and contraction. The
flexible joint shall be insulated with self-extinguishing heat
shrinkable insulating sleeves of suitable operation temperature.

Stop-end unit and built-in thrust block shall be of the same material
and finish as the busbar casing. The unit shall contain an insulated
support to enable the ends of the busbars to be properly supported.

C6.10.5 Tap-off Unit

Proper tap off devices in the form of tap-off clamps and cable lugs
where necessary shall be provided for tap-off cables and such devices
shall not reduce the effective size or rating of the busbars. Slots
through enclosures for tap-off cables shall be sealed with phenolic
resin bonded paper laminated sheet.

C6.10.6 Testing and Certification

Busbar trunking shall be type tested in accordance with Clause 8.1.1

of IEC 60439-2:2005. The verification of short-circuit strength shall
be carried out by Short Circuit Testing authorities internationally
recognized as having equal standing as ASTA.

Short-circuit test on the phase and neutral busbars shall be carried out
in accordance with Clause 8.2.3 of IEC 60439-1:2004 to the value of
short-circuit current specified below:

Section C6 EE_GS
Page 4 of 7 2007 Edition
 Busbar Rating Test Current

(a) Under 800A : Fused* short-time withstand

current of 40kA minimum;

(b) 800A to 1600A inclusive : Short-time withstand current of

40kA minimum for one second;
and

(c) Above 1600A : Short-time withstand current of

50kA for one second.

* IEC 60269-1:2006 and other associated Parts of the Standard

The busbar insulation shall be tested in accordance with Clause 8.2.2

of IEC 60439-1:2004. All test certificates shall be submitted for
endorsement prior to ordering.

C6.11 REQUIREMENT FOR ALL INSULATED BUSBAR TRUNKING

SYSTEM

C6.11.1 Busbar Enclosure

The enclosure of the busbar trunking shall be rigidly constructed from

galvanized sheet steel of not less than 1.5 mm thick or aluminium of
minimum 2.5mm thick clamped on rigid casing side steel channels.
Where a combination of sheets of these two materials is used as the
assembly, no apparent visible stress shall be observed during
operation when the busbar trunking are properly supported. However,
the thickness of the metal sheets employed shall, in no cases, be less
than 1.5 mm each.

Steel work shall be treated to prohibit from rusting and corrosion by

hot-dip galvanizing or electrolytically coated with zinc. The inside
and outside surfaces of the enclosure shall then be coated with two
layers of stoved enamel finish paint, or one layer of stoved epoxy
powder paint.

Sheet metal shield or appropriate protective cover with neoprene

gasket shall be provided to prevent contamination of busbar trunking
if it is for outdoor use or it is running near any services water pipe.

C6.11.2 Busbar Insulation

Busbar shall be insulated over their entire length except at joints and
plug-in contact surfaces and the insulation material shall be of at least
Class B (130°C) rating.

The temperature rise at any point in the busbar trunking shall not
exceed 55°C rise above ambient temperature when operating at rated
load current.

Section C6 EE_GS
Page 5 of 7 2007 Edition
C6.11.3 Tap-off Units

Tap-off unit shall be equipped with internal barriers to prevent

accidental contact of draw wire and conductors with the live parts at
the terminals of the outgoing protective device during the time of
conductor fixing.

Bolt-in tap-off unit enclosure shall be provided with sufficient

spacing for cable connection to other sub-circuit devices.

Plug-in tap-off unit shall be polarized to prevent incorrect insertion

and be mechanically interlocked with the busbar trunking housing to
prevent insertion or removal of the plug-in unit while the protective
device is in the ON position and shall be equipped with an operating
handle which always remains in control of the switching mechanism.
The protective device shall be fusible switch type with visible blade
quick-make and break mechanism unless otherwise specified. Plug-
in unit enclosures shall make positive ground connection with the
earthing conductors before the jaws make contact with the phase
busbars.

C6.11.4 Joint in Busbar Trunking System

Joints shall be of removable type with through-bolts that can be

checked for tightness without de-energizing the system. It shall be
possible to make up a joint from one side in the event the busbar
trumking is installed against a wall or ceiling. The joint shall be so
designed as to allow removal of any length without disturbing
adjacent lengths. All bolts shall be tightened up either by means of a
torque wrench to a strength figure as recommended by the
manufacturer, or in accordance with the manufacturer’s provision of
special torque-indicating tightening device.

C6.11.5 Testing and Certification

Busbar trunking shall be type tested in accordance with Clause 8.1.1

of IEC 60439-2:2005. The verification of short-circuit strength shall
be carried out by Short Circuit Testing authorities internationally
recognized as having equal standing as ASTA.

Section C6 EE_GS
Page 6 of 7 2007 Edition
Short-circuit test on the phase and neutral busbar shall be carried out
in accordance with Clause 8.2.3 of IEC 60439-1:2004 to the value of
short-circuit current specified below:

Busbar Rating Test Current

(a) Under 500A : Fused* short-time withstand

current of 40kA minimum;

(b) 500A to 1600A inclusive : Short-time withstand current of

40kA minimum for one second;
and
(c) Above 1600A : Short-time withstand current of
50kA for one second.

* IEC 60269-1:2006 and other associated Parts of the Standard

The busbar insulation shall be tested in accordance with Clause 8.2.2

of IEC 60439-1:2004. All test certificates shall be submitted for
endorsement prior to ordering.

Section C6 EE_GS
Page 7 of 7 2007 Edition
 SECTION C7

FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRE AND LAMP

C7.1 GENERAL

C7.1.1 The luminaires, including the control gear, shall be suitable for
operation at 220V ±6%, 50 Hz ±2%, single phase, a.c. supply.

C7.1.2 The luminaires shall comply both in manufacturing and testing with
the following international standards and their manufacturing process
shall conform to the relevant quality standard of ISO 9000:2005:

Luminaires : IEC 60598-1:2006 for general

requirements and tests; and IEC 60598-
2-1:1979 for general purpose
luminaires or IEC 60598-2-2:1997 for
recessed luminaires;

Ballast : IEC 60920:1990 and/or IEC

60921 :2006 as applicable;

Electronic ballast : IEC 61347-2-3:2004 and/or IEC

60929:2006 as applicable;

Capacitor : IEC 61048:2006 and/or IEC

61049:1992 as applicable;

Starter, glow type : IEC 60155:2006;

Starter, electronic type : IEC 61347-1:2007, IEC 61347-2-

1:2006 and/or IEC 60927:2007 as
applicable;

Lampholder : IEC 60400:2004;

Lamp IEC 60081:2005 and/or IEC

60901:2004 as applicable; and

Internal cable : Internal wiring shall be made with

conductors of a suitable size and type
to handle the power occurring during
normal use. The insulation of the
wiring shall be made of a material
capable of withstanding the voltage and
the maximum temperature to which it is
subjected, without affecting the safety
when properly installed and connected
to the mains.

Section C7 EE_GS
Page 1 of 13 2007 Edition
 C7.1.3 The luminaires excluding the fluorescent lamp shall be supplied in
complete set comprising control gear, lampholders, cable terminal
block, etc.

C7.1.4 The lamp circuit power factor for luminaire employing

electromagnetic ballast shall not be less than 0.85, whilst that for
luminaire employing electronic ballast shall be higher than 0.95.

C7.1.5 Type test certificate shall be provided and the luminaires shall be
marked in accordance with the requirements of IEC 60598-2-1:1979
for general purpose luminaires or IEC 60598-2-2:1997 for recessed
luminaires.

In execeptional cases like tailor-made luminaires having been

specified where type test certificate for the luminaire is not available,
compliance of individual components to the respective interational
standards as stipulated in this Section to ensure safety in use shall be
demonstrated to the approval of the Architect.

C7.2 TYPE OF LUMINAIRES

Group 1

This group includes all recessed modular luminaires and surface mounted batten
luminaires and the combination of different reflectors or diffusers.

Group 2

This group covers special luminaires including glass fibre, garage pit and flame-
proof luminaires.

Group 3

This group covers self-contained emergency fluorescent luminaire.

C7.3 GROUP 1 LUMINAIRES

(Recessed modular luminaires and surface mounted batten luminaires and the
combination of different reflectors or diffusers)

C7.3.1 Unless otherwise specified, the starting arrangement for these

luminaires shall be electronic start, and the position of the starter shall
be readily accessible. Starter is not required if electronic ballast is
used.

C7.3.2 Unless otherwise specified, the basic batten shall be made of sheet
steel of minimum 0.5 mm thickness and finished in white stove
enamel/stove miracryl enamel/stove miracoat enamel to IEC 60598-
1:2006 Class I. The ingress protection shall be at least IP2X to IEC
60529:2001.

Section C7 EE_GS
Page 2 of 13 2007 Edition
C7.3.3 The basic batten shall be suitable for 20 mm diameter conduit
suspension and/or direct-on-ceiling mounting. Two 20 mm diameter
clearance holes shall be provided at 610 mm fixing centres on 1200
and 1500 mm long luminaires, but only one clearance hole at central
position on 600 mm long luminaire. All clearance holes shall be
surrounded by four number 50.8 mm Pitch Circle Diameter (P.C.D.)
holes for circular conduit box fixing.

C7.3.4 The basic batten shall have a 20 mm diameter knockout at the centre
(except for 600 mm long luminaire) and in each end face for back or
end cable entry. Where the end face of the basic batten is made of
non-metallic material, additional means shall be provided to ensure
the continuity of earthing when the luminaire is used for surface
conduit installation.

C7.3.5 For back entry installation, if the basic batten cannot fully cover the
circular conduit box, a pattress block cover made of 0.5 mm thick
mild steel, finished in white stoved enamel shall be supplied with
each basic batten to shield the conduit box outlet.

C7.3.6 The basic batten shall be capable to accept the metal cover plate and
different reflectors or diffusers.

C7.3.7 The metal cover plate, open-end metal angle reflector, and open-end
metal trough reflector shall be manufactured and finished to the same
specification as the basic batten, and shall be suitable for direct fixing
to a basic batten of the appropriate length. The luminaires of this
group include:

(a) Batten luminaire with metal cover plate

Luminaire composed of basic batten and metal cover plate;

(b) Batten luminaire with metal angle reflector

Luminaire composed of basic batten and open-end metal angle
reflector;

(c) Batten luminaire with metal trough reflector

Luminaire composed of basic batten and open-end metal
trough reflector; and

(d) Batten luminaire with plastic diffuser

Luminaire composed of basic batten, metal cover plate and
plastic prismatic diffuser.

C7.3.8 The plastic prismatic diffuser with clip-on-end-plates shall be

manufactured from extruded plastics with external reeding suitable
for fixing to a basic batten with metal cover plate. The plastic clip-
on-end-plate shall be simply fitted to the basic batten thus enabling
the diffuser to be quickly and easily removed for cleaning and general
maintenance.

Section C7 EE_GS
Page 3 of 13 2007 Edition
C7.4 GROUP 2 - SPECIAL LUMINAIRES

C7.4.1 Luminaires of this group are categorized as follows:

Cat. A: Glass-fibre luminaires;

Cat. B: Garage pit luminaires; and

Cat. C: Flameproof luminaires.

C7.4.2 Cat. A: Glass-fibre luminaires

(a) Unless otherwise specified, the starting arrangement shall be

of electronic start, and the control gear components shall be
fixed in a removable tray. The construction of the luminaire
shall be suitable for chemically corrosive atmosphere and
complying with IEC 60598-1:2006, Class I or II, but
preference will be given to Class II. The ingress protection
shall be at least IP55 to IEC 60529:2001.

(b) The luminaire shall comprise glass fibre reinforced polyester

base canopy and high impact resistant polycarbonate diffuser
with internal prisms held together by corrosion resistant clips.
Wide seamless polyurethane gasket shall be fitted between
diffuser and canopy.

(c) The luminaire shall be suitable for 20 mm diameter conduit

suspension and direct-on-ceiling mounting. Two 20 mm
diameter clearance holes shall be provided at 610 mm centres,
surrounded by four number 50.8 mm Pitch Circle Diameter
(P.C.D.) holes for circular conduit box fixing. One number.
20 mm diameter knockout shall also be provided in one end
face of the fitting.

C7.4.3 Cat. B: Garage pit luminaires

(a) Unless otherwise specified, the starting arrangement shall be

of electronic start. The construction of the luminaire shall
comply with IEC 60598-1:2006, Class II and suitable for use
in Zone 2 hazardous area as defined by IEC 60079-10:2002.
The ingress protection shall be at least IP65 to IEC
60529:2001.

(b) The luminaire shall be made of sheet steel and finished in

white stove enamel internally and grey externally. The
luminaire shall have a removable opal polycarbonate front
cover which shall be clamped securely into a soft rubber
gasket by means of quick release fasteners. Fixing holes shall
be provided in the front flange together with 20 mm diameter
knockout at each end.

Section C7 EE_GS
Page 4 of 13 2007 Edition
C7.4.4 Cat. C: Flameproof luminaires

(a) The luminaires shall be designed and constructed in

accordance with IEC 60079-1:2003, flameproof enclosure
Ex‘d’ and certified flameproof by an approved independent
testing authorities, such as the British Approval Services for
Electrical Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres (BASEEFA).
The luminaire shall be suitable for installation in Zone 1
hazardous area as classified in IEC 60079-10:2002. The
enclosure of the luminaire shall comply with the requirements
for temperature classification T6, i.e. maximum surface
temperature does not exceed 85°C, as stated in IEC 60079-
0:2004 and Gas Group IIB as stated in IEC 60079-12:1978.
The ingress protection shall be at least IP66 to IEC
60529:2001.

(b) The body casting, control gear housing and end covers shall be
constructed with cast aluminium at least to ISO 3522:2006 Al-
Si5Cu3 or grade LM4 of BS 1490:1988 and with suitable
coating for increased protection against corrosion. The
fluorescent lamp shall be housed in a cylinder of borosilicate
glass and flamesealed at the end of the casing.

(c) Unless otherwise specified, the starting arrangement shall be

electronic start and the control gear components shall be
installed on a removable metal tray enclosed in a separate
housing which shall be provided with at least 20 mm conduit
entries for through connections.

(d) The luminaire shall be suitable for either 20 mm diameter

conduit suspension or direct-on-ceiling mounting by hook
brackets with locking screw which mates with catch bracket.
The luminaire shall also be suitable for wall mounting without
diminution of performance.

(e) The incoming terminal chamber shall be an integral part of the

body casting complete with phase, neutral and earth terminal
blocks. The cover of chamber shall be provided with
weatherproof gasket and with at least 20 mm conduit entries
fitted with hexagonal headed flameproof plug.

Section C7 EE_GS
Page 5 of 13 2007 Edition
C7.5 GROUP 3 - SELF-CONTAINED EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT
LUMINAIRES

C7.5.1 General

The specified type of self-contained emergency fluorescent

luminaires shall be of the following types:

Type I : 14W T5 550mm or 18W T8 600 mm long, single

fluorescent lamp;

Type II : 28W T5 1150mm or 36W T8 1200 mm long, single

fluorescent lamp; and

Type III : 35W T5 1450mm or 58W T8 1500 mm long, single

fluorescent lamp.

C7.5.2 Standards

In addition to Clause C7.1.2, the luminaire shall comply with the

following standards:

Luminaire : IEC 60598-2-22:2002; and

Inverter assembly : IEC 61347-2-7:2000.

C7.5.3 Functional Requirements

(a) Emergency luminaire shall be of maintained type. Under

normal supply, a sealed nickel-metal hydride battery unit
complying to IEC 61951-2:2003 where applicable shall be
charged to maintain in a fully charged state ready to supply
power as required and lamp should be operated by the mains
supply through a separate circuit. When a failure of mains
supply occurs, the unit shall automatically switch to battery-
powered operation. Upon restoration of the mains supply, the
lamp should be switched back to mains supply operation and
the batteries shall be re-charged again. The whole operation
shall be performed automatically.

(b) Battery cells shall be capable of continuous operation at cell

wall temperature up to 60°C. The battery shall have ample
capacity to maintain the output of the fluorescent lamp upon
mains supply failure as specified below for up to a period of
2 hours. The life time of the battery cells shall be not less than
4 years.

(c) Charging system shall be capable of recharging the battery to

full capacity in 24 hours after a total discharge of the battery.
Facilities shall be provided to prevent the battery from
over-charging.

Section C7 EE_GS
Page 6 of 13 2007 Edition
 (d) Circuit of the fitting shall be so designed such that a lighting
switch can be installed to control the lamp in the ON or OFF
position under the mains-powered operation. Upon mains
supply failure, the lamp shall be switched on under battery
power irrespective of whether the lighting switch is in the ON
or OFF position.

(e) Light output throughout the average mid-tube life when using
4000K fluorescent tube shall be not less than:

(i) When in normal operation mode

Type I : 1,200 lumen (T5) or 1,350 lumen (T8);

Type II : 2,600 lumen (T5) or 3,350 lumen (T8); and
Type III : 3,300 lumen (T5) or 5,200 lumen (T8);

(ii) Throughout the 2-hour discharging period when mains

fails

Light output shall not be less than 50% of the nominal

light output under the maintained mode.

C7.5.4 Construction

(a) The luminaire shall be supplied complete with the following

component parts integrated in the interior of the fitting:

(i) A battery charger/inverter unit complete with a main

power failure detector, an automatic change-over
switch, capable of changing over within 8 ms from
mains supply to battery supply, a low voltage “cut-out”
battery protective device and a battery over-charging
protective device;

(ii) A sealed, rechargeable, maintenance free, nickel-metal

hydride battery;

(iii) Electronic ballast;

(iv) Capacitors and radio interference suppressors;

(v) Indications that the mains supply is normal or that the

battery is discharging;

(vi) A test button for checking battery condition; and

(vii) Fluorescent tube.

(b) The basic spine of the fitting shall be manufactured from sheet
steel to form a complete enclosure, and finished in white
stoved enamel.

Section C7 EE_GS
Page 7 of 13 2007 Edition
 (c) The luminaire shall be suitable for conduit, rod chain or
conduit box mounting at normal suspension centres.
Alternative mains entry shall also be provided in the centre
back of the spines or by a knock-out in each end plate.

(d) A fused terminal block fitted with cartridge fuses of

appropriate rating shall be provided separately for both the
charger and the maintained circuit.

C7.6 BLANK

C7.7 FLUORESCENT LAMPS

C7.7.1 Lamp Features

Lamps shall have, but not limited to, the following features:

(a) Superb Color Rendering Index (CRI) with values not less than:

Values of
Areas served
CRI
Car parking spaces or similar 70
Office areas or similar 80
Hospitals or other clinical functional areas 90

(b) Energy saving;

(c) Compatible to the type of lamp circuit; and
(d) Tubular shape with preheated cathode and suitable for
operation in ambient temperature up to 40°C and 100%
relative humidity.

C7.7.2 All fluorescent lamps shall have lumen output not less than those
listed in Tables C7.7.2-1 to C7.7.2-7 at an ambient temperature of
25oC.

Table C7.7.2 – 1 - Lumen Output for 26 mm Diameter (T8) Tubular

Fluorescent Lamps (LBS ref. (LM) T26)

Rated power Min. Lumen output

of lamp(W)
3000°K 4000°K 6000°K &
– Cap G13
Above
18 1350 1350 1300
36 3350 3350 3250
58 5200 5200 5000

Section C7 EE_GS
Page 8 of 13 2007 Edition
Table C7.7.2 – 2 - Lumen Output for 16 mm Diameter (T5) Tubular
Fluorescent Lamps (LBS ref. (LM) T16)

Rated power Min. Lumen output (35oC/25 oC)

of lamp (W)
3000°K 4000°K 6000°K&
- Cap G5
Above
14 1200/1350 1200/1350 1100/1250
21 1900/2100 1900/2100 1750/1950
28 2600/2900 2600/2900 2400/2700
35 3300/3650 3300/3650 3050/3400
24 1750/2000 1750/2000 1600/1900
39 3100/3500 3100/3500 2850/3325
49 4300/4900 4300/4900 4100/4650
54 4450/5000 4450/5000 4050/4750
80 6150/7000 6150/7000 5700/6650

Table C7.7.2 – 3 - Lumen Output for Compact Fluorescent, Single-

ended, 4 Pin Base Lamps (LBS ref. (LM) TC-L)

Rated power Min. Lumen output

of lamp (W)/
2700°K 3000°K 4000°K 5400°K
Cap type
5 / 2G7 265 -- 265 --
7/ 2G7 400 -- 400 --
9 / 2G7 600 600 600 --
11/ 2G7 900 900 900 900
18 / 2G11 1200 1200 1200 1170
24 / 2G11 1800 1800 1800 1560
36 / 2G11 2900 2900 2900 2750
40 / 2G11 3500 3500 3500 3325
55 / 2G11 4800 4800 4800 4550

Table C7.7.2 – 4 - Lumen Output for Compact Fluorescent, Single-

ended, 2 Pin Base Lamps (LBS ref. (LM) TC-
SEL)

Rated power Min. Lumen output

of lamp (W)
2700°K 3000°K 4000°K 5400°K
- Cap G23
5 250 250 250 --
7 400 400 400 375
9 600 600 600 565
11 900 900 900 850

Section C7 EE_GS
Page 9 of 13 2007 Edition
 Table C7.7.2 – 5 - Lumen Output for Compact Fluorescent, Twin
Independent Single-ended, 2 Pin Base Lamps
(LBS ref. (LM) TC-DEL)

Rated power Min. Lumen output

of lamp (W) 2700°K 3000°K 4000°K
- Cap G24d
10 600 600 600
13 900 900 900
18 1200 1200 1200
26 1710 1710 1710

Table C7.7.2 – 6 - Lumen Output for Compact Fluorescent, Triple

Independent Single-ended, 2 Pin Base Lamps
(LBS ref. (LM) TC-T)

Rated power Min. Lumen output

of lamp (W) 2700°K 3000°K 4000°K
- Cap GX24d
13 900 900 900
18 1200 1200 1200
26 1710 1710 1710

Table C7.7.2 – 7 - Lumen Output for Compact Fluorescent, Triple

Independent Single-ended, 4 Pin Base Lamps
(LBS ref. (LM) TC-TEL)

Rated power Min. Lumen output

of lamp (W) 2700°K 3000°K 4000°K
- Cap GX24q
13 900 900 900
18 1200 1200 1200
26 1710 1710 1710
32 2400 2400 2400
42 3200 3200 3200

C7.7.3 All fluorescent lamps shall have average rated life not less than those
listed below at 50% failure:

Table C7.7.3 - Average Rate Life for Fluorescent Lamp

Average Rated Life

Fluorescent Lamp Type
(Hour)
T8 fluorescent lamp 15000
T5 fluorescent lamp 20000
Compact fluorescent lamp 8000

Section C7 EE_GS
Page 10 of 13 2007 Edition
C7.8 ELECTRONIC BALLASTS

C7.8.1 General

The electronic ballast for both fixed output and dimmable types shall
be a solid-state converter to convert single phase mains supply of
220V + 6% and 50Hz +1Hz to a high frequency voltage output at its
rated throughout power to suit the lamp(s) connected. The electronic
ballast shall conform to the following international standards:

(a) IEC 61347-2-3:2004:

AC-supplied electronic ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps -
General & safety requirements;
(b) IEC 60929:2006:
AC-supplied electronic ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps -
Performance requirements;

(c) IEC 61000-3-2:2005:

Limits for harmonic current emission
(equipment input current < 16A per phase);

(d) EN 55015:2006:
Limit and method of measurement of radio disturbance
characteristics of lighting and similar equipment; and

(e) IEC 61547:2000:

Equipment for general lighting purposes - EMC immunity
requirements.

Certificates of compliance with the above standards shall be issued by

a recognised test laboratory for each standard rating of electronic
ballast to be used in the Contract.

C7.8.2 Construction

The electronic ballast shall incorporate a low-pass filter for limitation

of harmonic distortion, radio interference, inrush current and high
mains voltage peak, a full diode bridge rectifier, a power factor
correction part, a high frequency oscillator and an internal control
circuit.

C7.8.3 Performance Requirements

The maximum power loss of the electronic ballast shall not be more
than those listed in Table C7.8.3:

Section C7 EE_GS
Page 11 of 13 2007 Edition
Table C7.8.3 – Maximum Allowable Power Loss of Electronic
Ballast
Maximum allowable power loss in
Lamp Type Rated lamp rating Wattage
operated at high
frequency
T8 linear 16W 3
fluorescent 24W 4
lamp 32W 4
50W 5
60W 8
T5 linear 14W 3
fluorescent 21W 3
lamp 24W 3
28W 4
35W 4
39W 4
49W 6
54W 6
80W 8
Compact 4.5W 2.2
fluorescent 6.5W 2.5
lamp – 2 8W 3
tubes 10W 4
16W 3
22W 3
32W 4
40W 5
55W 6
Compact 9.5W 1.5
fluorescent 12.5W 1.5
lamp – 4 16.5W 2.5
tubes 24W 3
Compact 16.5W 2.5
fluorescent 24W 3
lamp – 6 32W 4
tubes 42W 5
Circular 19W 3
fluorescent 22W 4
lamp 40W 4
55W 5

For the fluorescent lamp(s) operated by electronic ballast, the

regulated light output shall be less than +2% over a supply voltage
range of 220V + 10% to the electronic ballast.

The Ballast Lumen Factor of the electronic ballast shall not be lower
than 0.95 or higher than 1.05 with reference to a standard
conventional ballast.

The electronic ballast shall be rapid or preheat start and the lamp
operating frequency shall be above 30kHz.

Section C7 EE_GS
Page 12 of 13 2007 Edition
 The Total Power Factor (TPF) of the luminaire employing electronic
ballast shall be higher than 0.95 and its maximum Total Harmonic
Distortion (THD) shall be less than 15% when tested on a pure
sinusoidal mains supply.

The complete electronic ballast shall be housed in a single front-

access enclosure with appropriate terminal blocks for easy connection
of wiring. The electronic ballast shall be suitable to operate at an
ambient temperature range from 0oC to 50oC and at a maximum
relative humidity of 95%. The maximum case temperature of the
electronic ballast shall be 70oC.

The electronic ballast shall go into a shutdown or low power stand-by

state when defective lamps are connected or when overload occurs in
the lamp circuit.

The maximum inrush current of the electronic ballast shall not exceed
15A peak at starting and shall not last longer than 0.5 ms.

The rated life of the electronic ballast shall not be less than 50,000
hours at the test point of 70oC.

The failure rate of the electronic ballast shall be less than 1% per
4000 hours operation at the maximum case temperature.

C7.8.4 Additional Requirements for Dimmable Electronic Ballasts

Electronic ballasts with dimmable function shall meet the following

additional requirements:

(a) high energy efficient dimming system providing continuous

dimming range of 5% – 100%;

(b) unless otherwise specified, the electronic ballast shall be

compatible with voltage control with the voltage range of
0-10V d.c. or power line voltage of 220V;

(c) complatiable with the wide variety of 0-10V d.c. control

devices, including daylight sensors, building
automation/lighting management systems, local user’s wall
mounted dimmer unit;

(d) the dimming performance shall follow logarithmic

characteristics that is optimised according to the sensitivity of
human eye; and

(e) provide flicker-free dimming operation throughout the

complete operation temperature range.

Section C7 EE_GS
Page 13 of 13 2007 Edition
 SECTION C8

HIGH PRESSURE DISCHARGE LAMP AND LUMINAIRE

C8.1 GENERAL

This Section covers the requirements for the following high pressure discharge
lamps.

Tubular sodium vapour discharge lamps (SON-T or LBS : HST)

Elliptical sodium vapour discharge lamps (SON-E or LBS : HSE)

Elliptical mercury vapour discharge lamp (MBF or LBS : HME)

Linear metal halide (MBIL) or LBS: HIT-DE / linear high pressure sodium lamp
(SON-TD) or LBS: HST-DE

The lamp, in connection with the control gear, shall be suitable for operation at
220V ± 6%, 50Hz ± 2%, single phase, a.c. supply.

The lamp shall be compatible with the luminaire and the control gear of the
luminaire.

C8.2 HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM VAPOUR DISCHARGE LAMP (SON-T

AND SON-E OR LBS : HST AND HSE)

The lamp shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IEC 60662:2002.

The lamp shall consist of a high pressure sodium discharge operating within a
sintered alumina arc tube. The arc tube shall be mounted in a clear glass bulb
completed with an E40 lamp cap.

The lamp shall have a universal operating position and shall be suitable for use
with external ignitor.

The correlated color temperature of the lamp shall be in the order of 2000°K.
The light output of the lamp shall be constant and shall not be less than the
following figures for the respective wattage type in the initial 2000 hours:

Nominal Lamp Wattage Initial Light Output

150W 16500 lumens
250W 28000 lumens
400W 48000 lumens

The rated average life of the lamp shall not be less than 24000 hours at 50%
failure.

Section C8 EE_GS
Page 1 of 4 2007 Edition
C8.3 ELLIPTICAL HIGH PRESSURE MERCURY VAPOUR DISCHARGE
LAMP (MBF OR LBS : HME)

The lamp shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IEC 60188:2001.

The lamp shall consist of a high pressure mercury discharge operating within a
quartz arc tube. The arc tube shall be mounted in an elliptical glass bulb coated
with a fluorescent phosphor and complete with a cap of the type compatible with
the respective lamp wattage type.

The correlated color temperature of the lamp shall be in the range of 3400°K to
4000°K with respective to the selected nominal lamp wattage.

The lamp shall have a universal operation position.

The light output of the lamp shall be constant and shall not be less than the
following figures for the respective wattage type in the initial 2000 hours:

Nominal Lamp Wattage Initial Light Output

50W 2500 lumens
80W 4000 lumens
125W 6500 lumens
250W 13750 lumens
400W 22000 lumens

The rated average life of the lamp shall not be less than 16000 hours or
24000 hours with respective to the selected nominal lamp wattage at 50% failure.

C8.4 LINEAR METAL HALIDE/LINEAR HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM LAMP

This Sub-section covers the following lamps:

(a) 750W/1500W linear metal halide (MBIL or LBS : HIT-DE); and

(b) 400W linear high pressure sodium (SON-TD or LBS : HST-DE)

MBIL (or LBS : HIT-DE) linear metal halide lamp shall be manufactured and
tested according to IEC 61167:1992. The lamp consists of an arc burning
between tungsten electrodes in an atmosphere of mercury and additional metal
halides enclosed in a double-ended quartz arc tube. The halides shall be chosen
to have a high efficiency light output of good color rendering and correlated
color temperature of 5200°K. The lamp shall be 750/1500W as specified. The
rated average life of the lamp shall not be less than 6000 hours at 50% failure.

The luminous efficacy of the MBIL lamp shall not be less than the following
figures for the respective wattage type in the initial 2000 hours:

Nominal Lamp Wattage (L) Initial Light Output

750W 63750 1umen
1500W 127500 1umen
Section C8 EE_GS
Page 2 of 4 2007 Edition
 SON-TD (or LBS : HST-DE) linear high pressure sodium lamp shall be
manufactured and tested according to IEC 60662:2002. The lamp shall be
tubular, double ended in construction and shall consist of an arc tube made of
sintered aluminium oxide and mounted in a clear tubular quartz outer bulb
having a single contact ceramic cap at each end. The lamp shall be rated at
400W and have a correlated color temperature of 2100°K. The rated average
life of the lamp shall not be less than 24000 hours at 50% failure.

The luminous efficacy of the SON-TD lamp shall not be less than the following
figures for the respective wattage type in the initial 2000 hours:

Nominal Lamp Wattage (L) Initial Light Output

400W 34000 1umen

C8.5 LUMINAIRE FOR FLOODLIGHTING

C8.5.1 General

The floodlighting luminaires shall be manufactured and tested in

accordance with IEC 60598-1:2006 and IEC 60598-2-5:1998.

The floodlighting luminaires shall have a degree of protection of not

less than IP54 to IEC 60529:2001 and they shall be constructed from
corrosion resistant materials.

The floodlighting luminaires shall be suitable of continuous outdoor

operation at an ambient temperature of 35°C without unduly affecting
the life and performance of the floodlighting luminaires, the control
gear and the lamps.

The floodlighting luminaires shall be supplied in complete set

including the main body, reflectors, front glass, lampholder
assemblies, terminal box, internal wirings, control gear, control gear
box and mounting facilities as specified and as required.

C8.5.2 Construction

The main body shall be manufactured from die cast aluminium,

which is fixed to two aluminium alloy end castings. The luminaire
should also incorporate removable drain plugs for use in humid
conditions.

Internal reflectors consisting of the main body and two end cheeks
and the two optional reflectors, baffled and faceted, are to be
constructed from highly specular aluminium. The metal reflector
shall be polished, anodized and shall be designed to give an
asymmetrical light distribution of beam angle to 1/10 peak to
approximately the following requirements:

Section C8 EE_GS
Page 3 of 4 2007 Edition
 (a) for 750/1500W MBIL (or LBS : HIT-DE) lamp
Horizontal 90°
Vertical 9° above peak, 41° below peak; and

(b) for 400W SON-TD (or LBS : HST : DE) lamp

Horizontal 84°
Vertical 4° above peak, 19° below peak

The heat resistant toughened glass shall be fitted to a non-ferrous

metal front frame with corrosion resistant hinges and four swivel
bolts (stainless steel) for securing to the main body and provided with
weatherproofing silicon rubber gasket between the main body and
toughened front glass.

The lampholder assembly shall be suitable for accepting the lamp as

specified. They shall be incorporated with appropriate heat sinks if
necessary to avoid overheating.

Weatherproof wiring terminal box shall be mounted at the rear side of

the main body suitable for housing a two-way terminal block, each
terminal suitable for 1x10 mm2 cable. Cable entry is provided via a
combined cable gland/cord grip. Earthing stud/terminal shall be
provided. Internal wiring shall be of heat resistant type to the
appropriate IEC Standard.

The control gear shall be suitable for operation of the lamp as

specified, and shall consist of a ballast, ignitor, transformer and
power factor correction capacitor(s) as appropriate, to enable the
whole assembly to operate at the specified voltage with an overall
power factor not less than 0.85.

Control gear shall be provided with facilities for easy and securely
fixing to a metal back plate or gear box. Control gear shall be
suitable for continuous operation under an ambient temperature of
35°C.

The floodlighting luminaires shall be complete with the stirrup

arrangement which permits the floodlighting luminaires to be rotated
in azimuth and adjusted in elevation. An aiming stop shall be
provided on the floodlighting luminaires to ensure that the aiming
angle remains undisturbed even if the floodlighting luminaires are
removed from the stirrup for servicing.

C8.5.3 Lamps

All types of lamps suitable for fixing to the specified luminaire shall
have a high efficiency and a fairly constant output and be constructed
with appropriate lamp caps.

Section C8 EE_GS
Page 4 of 4 2007 Edition
 SECTION C9

TUNGSTEN HALOGEN LAMP

C9.1 GENERAL

Tungsten halogen lamps shall meet the safety requirements as specified in IEC
60432-2:2005. The manufacturing process shall comply with the relevant
quality standard of ISO 9000:2005 and other associated Parts of the Standard.

The color temperature of the lamp shall be within the range between 2800°K
and 3200°K. The color rendering index shall not be less than 90.

The rated average life of the lamp shall not be less than 2000 hours at 10%
failure. The light output of the lamp shall not be diminished by more than 5%
throughout the guaranteed life.

C9.2 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MAINS VOLTAGE (220V) LAMP

The lamps shall comply with IEC 60357:2002 suitable for operation at 220V ±
6% and 50 Hz ± 2%, single phase a.c.

The luminous efficacy of the lamp shall not be less than the following figures
for the respective wattage type:

Nominal Lamp Wattage (L) Luminous Efficacy (lumen/Watt)

L < 20W 12 lumen/W
20W ≤ L ≤ 100W 15 lumen/W
100W < L ≤ 500W 16 lumen/W
500W < L < 1000W 19 lumen/W
L ≥ 1000W 22 lumen/W

C9.3 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EXTRA-LOW VOLTAGE (ELV)

LAMP

C9.3.1 General

The lamp shall be suitable for operation at 12V single phase a.c.
through a compact electronic step-down transformer suitable for
operation at an input supply of 220V ± 6%, 50 Hz ± 2%, single phase
a.c. The output shall be 12V a.c.

C9.3.2 The Transformer

The transformer shall be supplied together with the 12V lamp as an

integral package by the same manufacturer or supplier.

Section C9 EE_GS
Page 1 of 2 2007 Edition
The general and safety requirements shall comply with IEC
61046:1995 which shall at least cover:

(a) General requirements:

(i) tests;
(ii) classification; and
(iii) marking.

(b) Safety requirements:

(i) terminals;
(ii) earthing;
(iii) construction;
(iv) creepage distances and clearances;
(v) protection against contact with live parts;
(vi) moisture resistance and insulation;
(vii) electric strength;
(viii) transformer heating;
(ix) abnormal conditions (such as, but not limited to, no
lamp inserted, lamp resistance reduced, output
terminals short-circuited, etc.);
(x) fault conditions;
(xi) screws, current-carrying parts and connections;
(xii) resistance to heat and fire; and
(xiii) resistance to corrosion.

The performance requirements shall comply with IEC 61047:2004

which shall at least cover:

(i) tests;
(ii) classification;
(iii) marking;
(iv) output voltage and current;
(v) total circuit power;
(vi) circuit power factor;
(vii) supply current;
(viii) impedance at audio-frequencies;
(ix) mains transient over voltages;
(x) abnormal conditions (such as, but not limited to, no
lamp inserted, lamp resistance reduced, output
terminals short-circuited, etc.); and
(xi) endurance.

The harmonics of the output current shall comply with IEC 61000-3-
2:2005 as stipulated in IEC 61047:2004.

The radio interference suppression shall comply with EN 55015:2006

Section C9 EE_GS
Page 2 of 2 2007 Edition
 SECTION C10

DOMESTIC APPLIANCES

C10.1 GENERAL

C10.1.1 Compliance with Regulation

Domestic appliances together with their electric components and

cabling shall comply with the currently-in-forced edition of

(a) Electrical Products (Safety) Regulation, CAP 406G, Laws of

Hong Kong; and

(b) IEC 60335-1:2006 Household and similar electrical

appliances – Safety – Part 1 : General requirements.

C10.1.2 General Requirements

(a) Unless otherwise specified, the domestic appliances shall be

designed for operation on 220V + 10%, 50 Hz +2%, single
phase, a.c. supply.

(b) Unless otherwise specified, the domestic appliances shall be

suitable in all respects for operation in ambient air condition of
temperature range between 0°C and 40°C, and relative
humidity range between 0% and 99% with condensation due
to temperature changes.

(c) Unless otherwise classified, all accessible metal parts of the

domestic appliances that may become live in the event of
electric fault shall be effectively and suitably bonded to earth
via to a common earthing terminal provided within the
domestic appliances.

(d) Twin core cables without earth wire are only allowed for
double insulated appliances classified as Class II appliances
under the specified IEC or equivalent standards.

(e) Where specified, 3-core flexible cord connected to the

domestic appliances shall conform to BS 6500:2000. The size
of the cable shall not be less than that specified and shall be
compatible with the rating of the respective domestic
appliance. Twin core cables without earth wire are only
allowed for double insulated appliances.

(f) Where specified, 13 A plug connected to the flexible cord

shall conform to BS 1363-1:1995. The fuse of the plug shall be
of a rating compatible with the rating of the respective
domestic appliance.

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 1 of 46 2007 Edition
 (g) Unless otherwise specified, domestic appliances and office
equipment shall be incorporated with the associated Energy
Label if relevant scheme is available under the Hong Kong
Voluntary Energy Efficiency Labelling Scheme from
Electrical and Mechanical Services Department.

C10.1.3 Technical Literature

The following technical literatures in Chinese and/or English shall be

provided, where applicable:

(a) Certificate of safety compliance;

(b) Product catalogue;

(c) Assembly drawings with dimensions;

(d) Electrical circuit diagram;

(e) Installation, operation and service manuals;

(f) Trouble-shooting guide; and

(g) Spare part list with itemized price.

C10.2 900mm, 1200mm AND 1400mm CEILING FAN

C10.2.1 General Requirements

(a) The fan shall be fully balanced after assembly to ensure that
the fan shall not oscillate/vibrate due to out-of-balance forces
or whatsoever during operation.

(b) The fan shall conform to the latest edition of the following
standards:

(i) IEC 60879:1986 Performance and construction of

electric circulating fans and regulators; and

(ii) IEC 60335-2-80:2004 Household and similar electrical

appliances – Part 2-80 : Particular requirements for fans.

C10.2.2 Performance Requirements

(a) The sweep diameter of the fans shall be:

Size of Fan Sweep Diameter

900 mm 900 mm ± 5%
1200 mm 1200 mm ± 5%
1400 mm 1400 mm ± 5%

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 2 of 46 2007 Edition
 (b) The air delivery rate of the fans shall be:

Size of Fan Air Delivery Rate

900 mm not less than 2.2 m³/s
1200 mm not less than 4.0 m³/s
1400 mm not less than 4.5 m³/s

(c) The power factors of the fans shall not be less than 0.85 at any
speed.

C10.2.3 Construction

(a) Fan unit

(i) Fan motor

The motor shall be a totally enclosed, capacitor run

induction motor with internal stator and external
squirrel-cage rotor.

The rotor shall be mounted on sealed-for-life grease

lubricated ball bearings.

(ii) Fan blades

The fan shall be fitted with two or more well balanced

blades so as to be reasonably free from vibration.

The blade assemblies shall consist of blades

manufactured from heavy gauge aluminium riveted to
steel blade carriers.

The blade carriers shall be manufactured from mild

steel plate of not less than 40 mm width at the
narrowest point, pressed to shape.

Where the blade carriers are twisted to give the

required angle of incidence to the blades, there shall be
large radius bends to prevent stress concentrations in
the blade carriers.

The blade carriers shall be securely fastened to the

frame of the motor by machine screws and spring
washers, the whole designed to ensure that there is no
possibility of a blade becoming detached during
operation.

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 3 of 46 2007 Edition
(b) Connecting piece (capacitor housing)

(i) The plastic terminal block and capacitor shall be

mounted in a ferrous metal connecting piece located
between the fan and the down-rod assembly. The leads
from the stator windings shall be connected to the
terminal block. An earthing terminal, consisting of a
round head brass screw and washer, shall be provided
on the connecting piece. All exposed metal parts of the
fan shall be connected to this earthing terminal.

(ii) The bottom portion of the connecting piece shall be

screwed on the shaft of the motor. The connecting
piece shall be tightened on to a shoulder formed on the
motor shaft. A 4 mm minimum thickness steel
hexagonal lock-nut with lock bracket underneath shall
then be fitted and tightened in position as shown on the
BSB Standard Drawings. The connecting piece shall
be secured in the fully tightened position by two (2)
hardened steel grub screws. These screws shall engage
in shallow depressions drilled in the shaft after the
connecting piece has been tightened in place to ensure
positive locking.

(c) Down-rod assembly

(i) The down-rod assembly shall consist of a steel down-

rod complete with shackle and hard rubber roller for
suspension of the fan as generally shown on the BSB
Standard Drawings. The down-rod shall be supplied in
lengths of 200 mm, 300 mm, 450 mm, 600 mm,
750 mm, 900 mm and 1200 mm as specified in the
Particular Specification.

(ii) Cable of such a length as to suit the down-rod shall be

provided. The down-rod shall be manufactured from
steel tube to BS EN 10255:2007, having an outside
diameter of approximately 21 mm, with minimum wall
thickness of not less than 3 mm as specified in Table 5
of BS EN 10255:2007. It shall be accurately threaded
at one end and shall be screwed into the top portion of
the fan connecting piece (capacitor housing) from
which it shall protrude by a minimum of 2 mm. The
minimum wall thickness of the threaded portion,
measured from the minor diameter of the thread to the
internal diameter of the tube, shall be not less than
1.8 mm.

(iii) The down-rod shall be locked in position by two (2)

hexagonal steel lock nuts, having a minimum thickness
of 6 mm, tightened on to the upper machined surface of
the fan connecting piece.

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 4 of 46 2007 Edition
 (iv) The down-rod shall also be locked to the fan
connecting piece by means of a steel split-pin, of not
less than 5 mm diameter, passing through both the fan
connecting piece and the down-rod.

(v) The split-pin holes in the fan connecting piece shall be

of such diameter that the split-pin is a light push-fit
there in. The matching split-pin holes in the down-rod
shall be just sufficiently large so that the split-pin shall
be a light push-fit, when the hole is in its worst position
relative to the threading. All burrs and sharp edges
shall be removed from the split-pin holes in both the
fan connecting piece and the down-rod.

(vi) The steel suspension shackle shall be welded to the

down-rod. Welding shall be of good quality. The
rubber roller shall be mounted on an 8 mm diameter
steel clevis pin secured by a split-pin.

(vii) The ends of the down-rod shall rounded off and free
from burrs. There shall be no sharp edges which could
cause damage to the insulation of the wiring.

(viii) Suspension joints and threaded parts:

Joints along the suspension rod must be of double-

locking design, i.e. at least two independent positive
locking devices must be employed to prevent a joint
from loosening itself.

All factory-assembled threaded components which

form part of a suspension joint must be bonded with
glue as approved by the Architect.

The maximum clearance between threaded mating parts

must not exceed 1% of their mean diameter.

The direction of rotation of the fan shall be such that all

screwed joints tend to be tightened when the fan is in
operation.

(ix) Two (2) canopies manufactured from plastic or pressed

steel sheet and fitted over the upper and lower ends of
the down-rod shall be provided. They shall be fixed to
the down-rod by grub screws.

(d) Surface finish

The whole fan shall be finished in high quality stove enamel in

white or ivory colour.

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 5 of 46 2007 Edition
 (e) Speed regulator

(i) A speed regulator shall be supplied with each fan.

(ii) The speed regulator shall be of robust construction and

built on a flame-retardant moulded plastic or insulated
steel base and enclosed by a flame-retardant moulded
plastic cover or metal cover. Plastic cover shall be in
white or ivory colour to match the fan. Metal cover
shall be of stainless steel or metalclad finish.

(iii) The speed regulator shall be equipped with at least

three (3) speed controls and an “OFF” position.

(iv) The rotary switch of the speed regulator shall be

designed for smooth and easy movement by hand
between different speed positions.

(v) For choke type regulator, an earth terminal shall be

provided on the base with an earth wire permanently
connected to the steel core of the choke unit.

C10.3 400mm SWEEP AUTO CYCLE/OSCILLATING FAN

C10.3.1 General Requirements

(a) The fan shall be provided with cable entries, conduit opening
or glands for permanent connection to fixed wiring.
Connection terminal shall be provided and secured by means
of screws, nuts or equally effective devices.

(b) The power factor of the fan shall not be less than 0.8.

(c) The fan shall comply with the latest edition of safety standards
for household electric fans and regulators as follows:

(i) IEC 60335-2-80:2004; and

(ii) JIS C 9601:1990 issued by Japan Standards
Association.

C10.3.2 Performance Requirements

(a) The fan blades shall have a sweep diameter ranging from 385
to 415 mm.

(b) The air delivery rate of the fan shall be not less than 1 m³/s.

(c) The noise level of the fan at all operating speeds shall not
exceed 58 dBA measured at 1 m from the fan.

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 6 of 46 2007 Edition
 (d) The fan shall be provided with double oscillating mounting of
not less than 360° (i.e. the direction of the axis of the air flow
is changed automatically and continuously in more than one
plane).

C10.3.3 Construction

(a) The fan shall be designed for ceiling-mounted application.

(b) The fan motor shall have sealed-for-life roller bearings or

bushes.

(c) The fan shall have adequate mechanical strength and be so

constructed as to withstand such rough usage as may be
expected in normal use.

(d) The material of the fan shall be fire-resistant and non-flame

propagating.

(e) The fan shall be of domestic type with smooth, safe edges and
‘easy-to-disassemble’ design for cleaning.

(f) The fan blades shall be enclosed in a chromed and closely

meshed metal guard. The gap of the guard slots shall not be
greater than 13 mm.

(g) The fan shall equip with a thermal cut-out device to protect the
fan from abnormal operation.

(h) The fan shall include a separate fan regulator which shall
comprise of three speed settings and a switching-off function.

(i) The fan shall equip with a control device for adjustment of its
angle of oscillation.

(j) The fan shall be designed with shock-proof device for quiet
operation.

(k) The fan shall be finished to manufacturer’s standard light

colour to be approved by the Architect.

(l) The construction of the fan shall be so designed that end-user

does not need any tools to assemble/disassemble the fan guard
and fan blade for cleaning.

(m) The fan shall be subject to function test for not less than 72
hours of continuous running and shall show no abnormal
conditions such as overheat, failing to oscillate and, etc. during
the testing period.

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 7 of 46 2007 Edition
C10.4 400mm SWEEP WALL FAN

C10.4.1 General Requirements

(a) The fan shall be fitted with a 0.75 mm² 3-core PVC insulated
and sheathed flexible cord of approximately 1.5 m in length;
and a suitably fused 13 A plug.

(b) The power factor of the fan shall be not less than 0.8.

(c) The fan shall comply with the latest edition of safety standards
for household electric fans and regulators as follows:

(i) IEC 60335-2-80:2004; and

(ii) JIS C 9601:1990 issued by Japan Standards
Association.

C10.4.2 Performance Requirements

(a) The fan blades of the fan shall have a sweep diameter ranging
from 385 to 415 mm.

(b) The air delivery rate of the fan shall not be less than 1 m³/s.

(c) The noise level of the fan at all operating speeds shall not
exceed 58 dBA measured at 1 m from the fan.

C10.4.3 Construction

(a) The fan shall be designed for wall-mounted application. Fans

converted from desk type fan will NOT be accepted.

(b) The fan motor shall have sealed-for-life roller bearings or

bushes.

(c) The fan shall have adequate mechanical strength and be so

constructed as to withstand such rough usage as may be
expected in normal use.

(d) The material of the fan shall be fire-resistant and non-flame

propagating.

(e) The fan shall be of domestic type with smooth, safe edges and
‘easy-to-disassemble’ design for cleaning.

(f) The fan blades shall be enclosed in a chromed and closely

meshed metal guard. The gap of the guard slots shall be not
greater than 13 mm.

(g) The fan shall equip with a thermal cut-out device to protect the
fan from abnormal operation.

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 8 of 46 2007 Edition
 (h) The fan shall equip with an integral regulator comprising three
speed settings and a switching-off function.

(i) The fan regulator shall be of push-cord type.

(j) The fan shall be provided with oscillating and tilting

mechanism for horizontal swing and vertical adjustment
respectively.

(k) The fan head shall be capable of being clamped or locked at

any desired position within a range of tilting angle.

(l) The tilting mechanism shall be of robust and durable

construction. If plastic stand is used, a U-shape sheet steel of
suitable thickness shall be inserted into the pivot spring
chamber as a reinforcement of supporting strength of the
tilting mechanism, otherwise the design of the tilting
mechanism shall be approved by the Architect.

(m) The oscillating mechanism shall have a reinforced and reliable

clutch that will slip or disengage the steering-gear of the
oscillating mechanism if the fan meets an obstruction as it
swings. The oscillating mechanism shall be easily disengaged
when not required.

(n) An oscillation switch for controlling of ‘oscillation’ and ‘not

oscillating’, must be provided in a hand-touch position and
easily accessible by the operator at floor level.

(o) The fan shall be finished to manufacturer’s standard light

colour approved by the Architect.

(p) The construction of the fan shall be designed that end-user

does not need any tools to assemble/disassemble the fan guard
and fan blade for cleaning.

(q) The fan shall be subject to function test for not less than 72
hours of continuous running and shall show no abnormal
conditions such as overheat, failing to oscillate and, etc. during
the testing period.

C10.5 400mm SWEEP DESK FAN

C10.5.1 General Requirements

(a) The fan shall be fitted with a 0.75 mm² 3-core PVC insulated
and sheathed flexible cord of approximately 1.5 m in length;
and a suitably fused 13 A plug.

(b) The power factor of the fan shall be not less than 0.8.

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 9 of 46 2007 Edition
 (c) The fan shall comply with the latest edition of safety standards
for household electric fans and regulators as follows:

(i) IEC 60335-2-80:2004; and

(ii) JIS C 9601:1990 issued by Japan Standards
Association; or other equivalent standards.

C10.5.2 Performance Requirements

(a) The fan blades of the fan shall have a sweep diameter ranging
from 385 to 415 mm.

(b) The air delivery rate of the fan shall not be less than 1 m³/s.

(c) The noise level of the fan at all operating speeds shall not
exceed 58 dBA measured at 1 m from the fan.

C10.5.3 Construction

(a) The fan shall be free-standing type and portable.

(b) The fan motor shall have sealed-for-life roller bearings or

bushes.

(c) The fan shall have adequate mechanical strength and be so

constructed as to withstand such rough usage as may be
expected in normal use.

(d) The material of the fan shall be fire-resistant and non-flame

propagating.

(e) The fan shall be of domestic type with smooth, safe edges and
‘easy-to-disassemble’ design for cleaning.

(f) The fan blades shall be enclosed in a chromed and closely

meshed metal guard. The gap of the guard slots shall be not
greater than 13 mm.

(g) The fan shall equip with a thermal cut-out device to protect the
fan from abnormal operation.

(h) The fan regulator shall comprise three speed settings and shall
provide a switching-off function, complete with a timer switch
for controlling of continuous operation and at least providing
of time setting of 1 hour.

(i) The fan shall be provided with oscillating and tilting

mechanism for horizontal swing and vertical adjustment
respectively.

(j) The fan head shall be capable of being clamped or locked at

any desired position within a range of tilting angle.

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 10 of 46 2007 Edition
 (k) The construction of the tilting mechanism shall be of robust
and durable construction.

(l) The oscillating mechanism shall be easily disengaged when

not required.

(m) The oscillating mechanism shall have a reinforced and reliable

clutch which will slip or disengage for avoiding overturning
when meeting an obstruction, otherwise a mechanism shall be
incorporated into the fan which can automatically swing to
opposite direction when the fan meets an obstruction.

(n) The fan shall have sufficient degree of mechanical stability

that it shall not overturn during operation in any normal
position on a plane inclined at an angle of 10° to the horizontal.

(o) The fan shall be finished to manufacturer’s standard light

colour approved by the Architect.

(p) The construction of the fan shall be so designed that end-user

does not need any tools to assemble/disassemble the fan guard
and fan blade for cleaning.

(q) The fan shall be subject to function test for not less than 72
hours of continuous running and shall show no abnormal
conditions such as overheat, failing to oscillate and, etc. during
the testing period.

C10.6 400mm SWEEP PEDESTAL FAN

C10.6.1 General Requirements

(a) The fan shall be fitted with a 0.75 mm² 3-core PVC insulated
and sheathed flexible cord of approximately 1.5 m in length;
and a suitably fused 13 A plug.

(b) The power factor of the fan shall be not less than 0.8.

(c) The fan shall comply with the latest edition of safety standards
for household electric fans and regulators as follows:

(i) IEC 60335-2-80:2004; and

(ii) JIS C 9601:1990 issued by Japan Standards
Association; or other equivalent standards.

C10.6.2 Performance Requirements

(a) The fan blades shall have a sweep diameter ranging from 385
to 415 mm.

(b) The air delivery rate of the fan shall not be less than 1 m³/s.

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 11 of 46 2007 Edition
 (c) The noise level of the fan at all operating speeds shall not
exceed 58 dBA measured at 1 m from the fan.

C10.6.3 Construction

(a) The fan shall be of free-standing type complete with a vertical

supporting rod of adjustable working height.

(b) The maximum working height of the fan shall be 1.5 m ± 10%
above the floor.

(c) The fan motor shall have sealed-for-life roller bearings or

bushes.

(d) The fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced and shall
not have abnormal vibration or creeping on the floor during
operation.

(e) The fan shall have adequate mechanical strength and be so

constructed as to withstand such rough usage as may be
expected in normal use.

(f) The material of the fan shall be fire-resistant and non-flame

propagating.

(g) The fan shall be of domestic type with smooth, safe edges and
‘easy-to-disassemble’ design for cleaning.

(h) The fan blades shall be enclosed in a chromed and closely

meshed metal guard. The gap of the guard slots shall be not
greater than 13 mm.

(i) The fan shall equip with a thermal cut-out device to protect the
fan from abnormal operation.

(j) The fan regulator shall comprise three speed settings and shall
provide a switching-off function, complete with a timer switch
for controlling of continuous operation and at least providing
of time setting of 1 hour.

(k) The fan shall be provided with oscillating and tilting

mechanism for horizontal swing and vertical adjustment
respectively.

(l) The fan head shall be capable of being clamped or locked at

any desired position within a range of tilting angle.

(m) The construction of the tilting mechanism shall be of robust

and durable construction.

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 12 of 46 2007 Edition
 (n) The oscillating mechanism shall have a reinforced and reliable
clutch that will slip or disengage for avoiding overturning
when meeting an obstruction, otherwise a mechanism shall be
incorporated into the fan which can automatically swing to
opposite direction when the fan meets an obstruction.

(o) The fan shall be fitted with adjustable height pedestal with
positive locking arrangement. The extended part of the
pedestal shall be chromium-plated and incorporated with a
stopper at the end. The base weight shall be sufficiently heavy
to hold the fan in a stable manner when the fan is extended to
its maximum height of approximately 1.5 m above the floor.
At the maximum working height the fan shall not overturn
when operated in any normal position on a plane inclined at an
angle of 10° to the horizontal.

(p) The fan shall be finished to manufacturer’s standard light

colour to be approved by the Architect.

(q) The construction of the fan shall be so designed that end-user

does not need any tools to assemble/dissemble the fan guard
and fan blade for cleaning.

(r) The fan shall be subject to function test for not less than 72
hours of continuous running and shall show no abnormal
conditions such as overheat, failing to oscillate and, etc. during
the testing period.

C10.7 DOMESTIC EXHAUST FAN

C10.7.1 General Requirements

(a) The design, construction, and testing of the fan shall be in

compliance with the requirements of IEC 60335-2-80:2004.

(b) All electrical components, parts and accessories shall be

manufactured conforming to the relevant IEC standards.

(c) The fan shall be fitted with a 0.75 mm² 3-core PVC insulated
and sheathed flexible cord of approximately 2 m in length.
2-core cord is allowed only for double insulated appliances
classified as Class II.

(d) The power factor of the fan shall not be less than 0.8.

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 13 of 46 2007 Edition
C10.7.2 Performance Requirements

(a) The fan diameters of the respectively exhaust fans shall be:

Fan Size (mm) Fan Diameters (mm)

150 150 ± 5%
230 230 ± 5%
300 300 ± 5%

(b) The exhaust fans shall be capable of providing the following

air extraction rate:

Fan Size (mm) Air Extraction Rate (m³/s)

150 0.08 to 0.1 at 1,250 rpm
230 0.21 to 0.23 at 1,200 rpm
300 0.47 to 0.5 at 1,200 rpm

(c) The noise level of the fan during operation shall not exceed
65 dBA measured at 1 m from the fan.

(d) Maximum overall height and width:

Fan Size
Maximum Height (mm) Maximum Width (mm)
(mm)
150 232 230
230 323 305
300 413 391

C10.7.3 Construction

(a) The exhaust fan shall be designed of robust construction. The

exhaust fan shall be suitable for mounting on windows and
partitions which shall have a opening of the following
diameter:

Fan Size (mm) Diameter of Opening (mm)

150 175 to 185
230 250 to 260
300 315 to 325

(b) The impeller, fan duct, outlet grille and shutter assembly shall
be constructed of high quality flame retardant plastic material.

(c) The motor winding shall have Class B insulation and protected
by a thermal cut-out. The fan motor shall be totally enclosed
in an aluminium alloy casing.

(d) Motor bearings shall be of self-aligning, oil impregnated

porous bronze brushes.

(e) The exhaust fan shall comprise an electrically operated back

draught shutter assembly.
Section C10 EE_GS
Page 14 of 46 2007 Edition
 (f) The inner and outer clamp plate/grille assembly shall have
rubber gasket.

(g) The exhaust fan impeller shall be fully balanced to avoid

vibration during operation.

(h) The exhaust fan shall be designed for easy

assembling/dismantling to facilitate servicing and maintenance
work.

C10.8 PROPELLER FAN – RING MOUNTED TYPE

C10.8.1 General Requirements

(a) The fan shall be rated for continuous operation under ambient
temperature up to 50°C.

(b) The motor shall have Class E insulation to IEC 60085:2004.

The power factor of the fan motor shall not be less than 0.85
under any operating condition.

(c) The fan shall be fitted with a 0.75 mm² 3-core PVC insulated
and sheathed flexible cord of approximately 2 m in length.
2-core cord is allowed only for double insulated appliances
classified as Class II.

C10.8.2 Performance Requirements

(a) The fan diameters of the respectively propeller fans shall be:

Fan Size (mm) Fan Diameters (mm)

241 241 ± 5%
305 305 ± 5%
381 381 ± 5%
457 457 ± 5%
610 610 ± 5%

(b) The air flow rate of the propeller fan of respective sizes shall
be not less than the following:

Fan Diameter Fan Speed Air Flow Rate

(mm) (rpm) (m³/min) (cfm)
241 1300 12 440
305 900 19 700
381 900 39 1350
457 900 70 2500
610 700 129 4600

(c) The sound pressure level emitted by the fan shall not exceed
65 dBA measured at 1 m from the fan outlet.
Section C10 EE_GS
Page 15 of 46 2007 Edition
C10.8.3 Construction

(a) The fan impeller shall be mounted on the same shaft as the
driving motor and constructed of heavy gauge pressed steel
blades fitted to cast aluminium alloy hubs, fully balanced after
assembly.

(b) The motor shall be of squirrel cage induction type, with

capacitor start and run, and of totally enclosed construction
with dust seals.

(c) Ball or roller bearings shall be provided and shall be filled

with lithium based grease suitable for operating temperature
between -30°C and 120°C.

(d) The fan and motor assembly shall have heavy duty and robust
steel mounting arms.

(e) The mounting arms shall be fixed to the mounting ring through
a rubber or neoprene resilient cushion to reduce the
transmission of vibration to the fixing surface.

(f) The mounting rings shall be constructed of steel pressing and

have sufficient flexibility to prevent fracture when fixed to
slightly uneven surfaces.

(g) The fan shall be suitable for both vertical and horizontal
mounting.

(h) The fan shall be supplied for air discharge away from the
motor.

(i) The fan assembly shall be protected with corrosion resistant

resin based paints. All bolts and nuts and washers shall be hot
dip galvanized. The finishing coat shall be in grey colour
unless otherwise specified.

(j) All exposed metal parts shall be effectively bonded together

and connected to a common earthing terminal.

(k) If screws and nuts are fitted onto the fan blades for balancing
purpose, spring washer should be provided to avoid loosening.
Other securing mechanism such as welding shall be subject to
the approval of the Architect.

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 16 of 46 2007 Edition
C10.9 FUME CUPBOARD EXHAUST FAN

C10.9.1 General Requirements

(a) The equipment shall be of axial flow design composed of

durable materials and quiet in operation.

(b) Duct connector, cupboard adaptor, clamp ring, Jubilee clips

shall be provided. All of them shall be highly resistant to
corrosive gases and chemical fumes emitted during chemical
reactions as resulted from laboratory experiments and shall be
capable of handling gases and fumes of from 0°C to 40°C.

C10.9.2 Performance Requirements

(a) The fan shall cover the range from 240 to 300 mm in nominal
diameter.

(b) The revolution speed of the fan shall be not less than 2700 rpm.

(c) The air volume flow rate shall be not less than 0.35 m³/s in
static pressure of 100 N/m².

(d) The noise level of the fan at all operating speeds shall not
exceed 58 dBA measured at 1 m from the fan.

C10.9.3 Construction

(a) Motor

(i) The fan shall be driven by a totally enclosed but

externally cooled single phase induction motor of
metric design to the latest edition of IEC 60034-
1:2004.

(ii) Insulation shall be not lower than Class E as defined

in IEC 60085:2004.

(iii) The motor shall be rated for continuous running at

ambient temperature of up to 40°C.

(iv) The motor shall be protected by a sealing coat of

polyurethane compound or equivalent material.

(b) The impellers shall be moulded in phenolic resin or equivalent

material.

(c) Circular fan casing shall be made from rigid PVC or

galvanized steel coated with epoxy resin or equivalent material.
Ends of the casing shall be spigotted for attachment of duct
and fume cupboard connectors respectively.

(d) Terminal box

Section C10 EE_GS
Page 17 of 46 2007 Edition
 (i) Terminal box shall be made of the same material as
the casing and shall be located outside air stream and
affixed to the casing.

(ii) Terminal box shall be suitable for reception of a 2 m

long, 3-core 1.25 mm² flexible cable to BS
6500:2000. The cable shall be fitted with the fan. 2-
core cord is allowed only for double insulated
appliances classified as Class II.

(iii) Duct/cupboard connectors and accessories shall be

made from corrosion resistant material such as
neoprene, epoxy resin or other approved material.

(iv) The fan shall be suitable for mounting vertically,

horizontally or at an inclined angle. Normally, the
duct/cupboard connectors will support the fan when
fitted to the duct work. Extra supporting facilities in
the form of two extended ribs shall be provided on
the casing and shall be drilled for fixing supporting
brackets.

C10.10 1 kW ELECTRIC FIRE, WALL MOUNTED TYPE

C10.10.1 General Requirements

(a) The electric fire shall comply with IEC 60335-2-30:2004.

(b) The electric fire shall be fitted with a 1.25 mm² 3-core PVC
insulated and sheathed flexible cord of approximately 1.5 m in
length.

C10.10.2 Performance Requirements

The electric fire shall be fitted with one replaceable infra-red heating
element of 1 kW rating.

C10.10.3 Construction

(a) The electric fire shall be of wall mounted type.

(b) The electric fire shall be of all metal construction

incorporating an attractive chromium plated reflector which
can be swiveled for directional adjustment of the reflected heat
beam.

(c) A close mesh chromium plated fire guard shall be provided

over the entire length of the heating element and over the
major portion of the reflector. The gap of the guard slots shall
be not greater than 13 mm.

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 18 of 46 2007 Edition
 (d) The electric fire shall have adequate mechanical strength and
stability to withstand rough handling as may be expected in
normal use.

(e) The electric fire shall be fitted with a pull cord “ON/OFF”
switch.

C10.11 2 kW CONVECTOR FIRE

C10.11.1 General Requirements

(a) The convector fire shall comply with IEC 60335-2-30:2004.

(b) The convector fire shall be fitted with a 1.25 mm² 3-core PVC
insulated and sheathed flexible cord of approximately 3m in
length; and a suitably fused 13 A plug.

C10.11.2 Performance Requirements

The power rating shall range from 2 kW to 2.5 kW.

C10.11.3 Construction

(a) The convector fire shall be of vertical floor-standing type.

(b) The convector fire shall be of robust and all steel construction
with no sharp edges, non-marking feet if applicable and
suitably finished and protected with corrosion and heat
resistant paints of approved type.

(c) The convector fire shall have an on-off switch incorporating

an indicating lamp showing that power is available.

(d) The convector fire shall have an adjustable thermostat for

room temperature control.

(e) The convector fire shall be fitted with a close mesh chromium
plated front grille. The gap of the grille slots shall be not
greater than 13 mm.

C10.12 2 kW OIL-FILLED ELECTRIC RADIATOR

C10.12.1 General Requirements

(a) The radiator shall comply with IEC 60335-2-30:2004.

(b) The radiator shall be fitted with a 1.25 mm² 3-core PVC
insulated and sheathed flexible cord of approximately 3m in
length; and a suitably fused 13 A plug.

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 19 of 46 2007 Edition
 C10.12.2 Performance Requirements

The power rating shall range from 2 kW to 2.5 kW.

C10.12.3 Construction

(a) The radiator shall be of vertical floor-standing type.

(b) The casing of the radiator shall be constructed of sheet steel, or

equivalent. The casing shall be leak-proof and robust in
construction and complete with castor wheels.

(c) The external of casing shall be finished with white or grey

stove enamel paints.

(d) All fins shall be rounded and free from sharp edges.

(e) The radiator shall have a selector switch providing at least 2

stages of heating.

(f) The radiator shall have an on-off switch incorporating an

indicating lamp showing that power is available.

(g) The radiator shall have an adjustable thermostat for room

temperature control.

(h) The heating element shall be totally immersed in non

flammable oil.

C10.13 300mm AND 1200mm SINGLE TUBULAR HEATER COMPLETE WITH

WIRE GUARD

C10.13.1 General Requirements

(a) The design and the construction of the heater shall comply
with IEC 60335-1:2006 and IEC 60335-2-30:2004.

(b) The heater shall be designed for use as wardrobe heater.

(c) The heater shall be of robust construction, durable and

maintenance free under normal operating condition.

(d) The hottest accessible part of the heater shall not exceed 80°C.

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 20 of 46 2007 Edition
C10.13.2 Performance Requirements

The maximum power rating of the heaters shall be:

Size (mm) Maximum Power Rating (W)

300 60
1200 240

C10.13.3 Construction

(a) The heating element shall be totally enclosed in an enclosure

of such material that must be heat resistant, non-combustible
and non-corrosive.

(b) A built-in automatic on/off thermostat of preset temperature

80°C shall be fitted.

(c) Wiring terminal shall be made of heat-resistance terminal

block, preferably in porcelain, capable of withstanding the
design working temperature.

(d) The heater shall be provided with mounting brackets.

(e) The heater shall be protected from causing heat-burns to

persons.

(f) The heater shall be free from any potential fire hazards.

(g) The diameter of the heater enclosure shall not exceed 50 mm.

(h) The heater shall be fitted with a 0.75 mm² 3-core PVC
insulated and sheathed flexible cord of approximately 3 m in
length; and a 13 A plug fused at 5 A or less.

(i) The heater shall be effectively bonded to earth through the

flexible cord.

(j) An adhesive label of safety instruction in both English (in

letter not less than 3 mm) and Chinese (in letter not less than
5 mm) written as below: “Do not use without fitting the wire
guard. Do not cover.”

(k) A recommended installation instruction sheet with diagram

shall be provided with each heater.

(l) The galvanized wire guard shall be constructed as detailed in

the BSB Standard Drawings No. EE-DAP-100.

(m) The wire guard shall consist of a frame of 1mm thick steel
sheet or equivalent material to which an 1mm thick 12 x
12 mm wire mesh is welded.

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 21 of 46 2007 Edition
 (n) The wire guard complete with the end plate and accessories
shall be hot-dip galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461:1999 or
constructed of equivalent material.

(o) The clearance between the heater and the wire guard shall be
not less than 20 mm.

C10.14 10-Litre OPEN-OUTLET TYPE, ELECTRIC SINK WATER HEATER

C10.14.1 General Requirements

(a) The hot water capacity shall not be less than 10 litres.

(b) The sink water heater shall be suitable for installing above the
water sink.

(c) The sink water heater shall be of wall-mounted type.

(d) The sink water heater shall comply with IEC 60335-2-21:2004.

C10.14.2 Performance Requirements

(a) The sink water heater shall be capable of maintaining water

temperature in the container between 55°C and 78°C
irrespective of the water inlet temperature and ambient air
conditions.

(b) The water container shall be suitable for connection to a mains

water supply having a pressure of not less than 205 kPa. A
pressure test certificate shall be provided for each sink water
heater quoting the manufacturer’s serial number and
confirming that a pressure test to manufacturer’s standard or
50 kPa, whichever is greater, has been successfully applied.

(c) The nominal power rating of the sink water heater shall be
3 kW.

C10.14.3 Construction

(a) The sink water heater shall be provided with an adjustable

thermostat with ample current rating to maintain water
temperature from 55°C to 78°C.

(b) The sink water heater shall be provided with a non-resettable

thermal cut-out to protect the water temperature inside the
container from exceeding 90°C in order to provide additional
safety protection.

(c) Earthing terminal shall be provided.

(d) The inner hot water container shall be suitable for local
installation.
Section C10 EE_GS
Page 22 of 46 2007 Edition
 (e) The construction material of the inner hot water container shall
be designed and chosen by the combined merits on
expandability, thermal conductivity, susceptibility to surface
fouling, reaction to water acidity and alkalinity on boiler
applications, such as tinned copper, or equivalent.

(f) The outer casing shall be drip-proof and constructed from

heavy gauge sheet steel properly treated to prevent corrosion
or equivalent material.

(g) The outer casing shall be in white colour.

(h) The thermal insulating material shall be of non-combustible

and non-CFC type.

(i) A swivel spout at outlet of 300 mm approx. in radius shall be

provided.

(j) The sink water heater shall be provided with a permanent

warning label in English and Chinese characters as follows:
“The outlet from the water heater must not be blocked or
connected to any form of fitting with an isolating valve”.

(k) The following pipe fittings shall be provided at inlet side:

(i) A water control valve

(ii) A non-return valve

(iii) A water strainer

C10.15 90-Litre AND 135-Litre THERMAL STORAGE ELECTRIC WATER

HEATER

C10.15.1 General Requirements

(a) The water heater shall comply with the relevant requirements
of Electrical Products (Safety) Regulation, CAP 406G, Laws
of Hong Kong.

(b) The water heater shall comply with the relevant requirements
of Waterworks Ordinance, CAP 102, Laws of Hong Kong.

(c) The water heater shall comply with Code of Practice for the
Electricity (Wiring) Regulations issued by the Electrical and
Mechanical Services Department, the Government of HKSAR.
(d) The water heater shall comply with the relevant requirements
of Boilers and Pressure Vessels Ordinance, CAP 56, Laws of
Hong Kong.

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 23 of 46 2007 Edition
 (e) The power rating of the product shall range from 2.5 kW to
3 kW.

(f) The water heater shall comply with the latest edition of the
following standards:

(i) For unvented thermal storage type electric water heater

- IEC 60335-2-21:2004 Household and similar

electrical appliances – Safety – Part 2-21 : Particular
requirements for storage water heaters; and

- BS 7206:1990 Specification for unvented hot water

storage units and packages;

(ii) For thermal cut out

BS EN 60730-2-15:2007 Specification for electrical

controls for household and similar general purposes;
and

(iii) For temperature and pressure relief valve

BS 6283-2:1991 Safety and control devices for use in

hot water systems. Specification for temperature relief
valves for pressures from 1 bar to 10 bar.

(g) The water heater shall have obtained Energy Label Grade 1 or
2 of the Energy Efficiency Office (EEO) of Electrical and
Mechanical Services Department.

C10.15.2 Performance Requirements

(a) The hot water cylinder shall be suitable for a working pressure
of 10 bar or below. A test certificate shall be provided for
each water heater quoting the manufacturer’s serial number
and confirming that a pressure test to manufacturer’s standard
or 1.5 times the working pressure, whichever is greater, has
been successfully applied.

(b) The hot water storage capacity shall be:

Size of water heater (litres) Hot Water Storage Capacity

(litres)
90 From 90 litres to 100 litres
135 From 135 litres to 155 litres

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 24 of 46 2007 Edition
C10.15.3 Specific Safety Requirements

(a) The safety standard to which the product conforms and the
storage capacity in litres (l) should be clearly and permanently
marked on the body of the product in additional to the marking
requirements stipulated in the essential safety requirements for
electrical products in Electrical Products (Safety) Regulation,
CAP 406G, Laws of Hong Kong.

(b) Manufacturer’s installation instructions including

recommendations and warnings to users and installers, etc.,
should also be provided and clearly marked.

(c) The construction material of the hot water cylinder shall be

corrosion resistance, such as copper, stainless steel or other
equivalent material. The cylinder shall be capable of
withstanding 1.5 times the working pressure.

(d) The water heater shall be fitted with a thermostat (with a

maximum setting temperature of 80°C) to control the heating
of the stored water.

(e) The water heater shall be fitted with a thermal cut-out

(complying with BS EN 60730-2-15:2007 and with a
temperature setting of 85°C) to cut off the supply of electricity
if the stored water is heated above the temperature setting of
the thermostat and before the operation of the temperature and
pressure relief valve is initiated. The thermal cut-out should
be connected in series with the thermostat and should be reset
manually after dismantling of the enclosure of the product.

(f) The water heater shall be fitted with

EITHER

(i) a non-resettable temperature relief valve (complying

with BS 6283-2:1991), having a setting of 90°C, and
complete with manual test easing gear; AND
a pressure relief valve (complying with BS 6283-
2:1991), having a set pressure of not greater than the
maximum design pressure of the water heater or 10 bar,
and complete with manual test easing gear;
OR

(ii) a non-resettable temperature and pressure relief valve

complying with the requirements of BS 6283-2:1991,
having a set temperature of 90°C and a set pressure of
the water heater or 10 bar, and complete with manual
test easing gear.

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 25 of 46 2007 Edition
 C10.15.4 Construction

(a) The hot water cylinder shall be suitable for local installation.

(b) The water heater shall be provided with an anti-vacuum valve

complying with BS 6282-1:1982 or other relevant Parts to
prevent heated water from being siphoned back to supply pipe
during water shortage period.

(c) A draining device shall be provided to discharge water and

shall be arranged so as to be clear of all the electrical
connections and terminals.

(d) The outer casing shall be drip-proof and constructed from

heavy gauge sheet steel properly treated to prevent corrosion
or equivalent material.

(e) The outer casing shall be in white colour.

(f) The thermal insulating material shall be of non-combustible

and non-CFC type.

(g) The water heater shall be suitable for vertical floor or wall
mounting. It shall be completed with water inlet and outlet
suitable for connection to standard water pipe. The inlet and
outlet pipes shall be clearly marked on the product and the
British Standard Pipe (BSP) sizes shall be clearly stated in
installation instructions.

(h) Material used in the connection to the hot water cylinder shall
be of corrosion resistant type, especially on the water side.

(i) The electric terminal box with cover and suitable for fitting
with waterproof metallic flexible conduit shall be provided.

C10.16 ELECTRIC TEA URN

C10.16.1 General Requirements

(a) The tea urn shall be suitable for providing boiling water for tea.

(b) The tea urn shall comply with the standard IEC 60335-2-
63:1990.

(c) All electrical components shall comply with the relevant IEC
Standards, or of fully equivalent quality and capacity.

C10.16.2 Performance Requirements

(a) The capacity of the tea urn shall be 14-20 litres.

(b) The power rating shall range from 2.5 kW to 2.8 kW.
Section C10 EE_GS
Page 26 of 46 2007 Edition
 C10.16.3 Construction

(a) The water container of the tea urn shall be constructed from
stainless sheet steel or material of equivalent quality.

(b) The tea urn shall be of circular table standing model complete
with a full size detachable top cover and two heat-insulated
handles.

(c) The tea urn shall be provided with either a simmerstat

temperature control or 3 heat rotary switch.

(d) The tea urn shall be provided with a self-resettable thermal

cut-out against failure due to boiling dry.

(e) The tea urn shall be provided with rapid draw off tap with
heat-insulated handle.

(f) The tea urn shall be fitted with a flexible power supply cable
and a suitably fused 13 A plug complying with the Electrical
Products (Safety) Regulation, CAP 406G, Laws of Hong Kong.
The minimum length of the flexible cable shall be 1.5 m.

(g) Internal wiring of the tea urn shall be suitable for high
temperature operation.

C10.17 ELECTRIC KETTLE 3.5-4.5 Litres

C10.17.1 General Requirements

(a) The kettle shall comply with the latest edition of IEC 60335-2-
15:2005.

(b) The kettle shall be fitted with a 0.75 mm² 3-core PVC
insulated and sheathed flexible cord of approximately 1.5 m in
length complete with an “appliance connector” and a suitably
fused 13 A plug.

C10.17.2 Performance Requirements

(a) The water capacity of the kettle shall be ranged from 3.5 to 4.5
litres.

(b) The electrical power capacity of the kettle shall range from
2 kW to 2.6 kW.

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 27 of 46 2007 Edition
 C10.17.3 Construction

(a) The kettle shall be designed for providing boiling water for
drinking.

(b) The construction material shall be made from heavy gauge

chromium plated copper; or high quality heavy gauge polished
aluminium; or stainless steel.

(c) The kettle shall be fitted with a safety cut-out to keep the kettle
from boiling dry.

C10.18 MAINS-SUPPLY DRINKING WATER DISPENSER FOR “COLD”

WATER

C10.18.1 General Requirements

(a) The water dispenser shall be suitable for local installation and
must comply with the statutory requirements of the
Waterworks Regulation 24, CAP 102A , Laws of Hong Kong.

(b) The water dispenser shall comply with the Telecommunication

(Control of Interference) Regulations, CAP 106B, Laws of
Hong Kong.

(c) The water dispenser shall comply with the latest edition of
IEC 60335-2-24:2005.

C10.18.2 Performance Requirements

The water dispenser shall provide not less than 45.5 litres per hour of
chilled drinking water at a temperature of between 10°C and 13°C
from a water inlet temperature of 27°C under ambient air conditions
of 32°C and 85% relative humidity.

C10.18.3 Construction

(a) The water dispenser shall be designed to receive water supply

from the standard premises water mains and shall be provided
with a single ½ inch BSP male threaded connection located at
the back and protruding by not more than 25 mm.

(b) The water dispenser shall be designed for heavy duty

application.

(c) The water dispenser shall be provided with an automatic

thermostat to control the “cold” water delivery at the above
specified temperatures, irrespective of water inlet temperature
and ambient air conditions, within the range specified above.

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 28 of 46 2007 Edition
(d) The cabinet shall be constructed, of brushed finished stainless
steel, of minimum 1 mm thickness to ensure complete rigidity
and to resist “in-use” denting, or equivalent.

(e) The drip pan below the tap(s) shall be of a suitable grade of
stainless steel to ensure that no rusting will occur during the
expected service life of the unit. It shall be connected to a
drain pipe terminating at the back of the unit and shall have a
1” BSP male thread for connection to the premises drainage
system.

(f) The cold water reservoir shall be manufactured from a suitable

grade of stainless steel or copper, fitted with an external
copper pipe refrigerant coil and foamed in place with high
efficiency insulation of appropriate thickness.

(g) The base plate shall be at least 20 mm above the ground level.

(h) The faucet(s) shall be manufactured from polypropylene or

chromium plated steel, and either the push-button or swivel
type, self-closing, easy to operate and suitably positioned for
filling cups, glasses, etc.

(i) The refrigeration system shall be of the hermetically sealed

type, suitably rated to meet the above specified duty. The
condenser shall be air cooled with either natural, or, forced
circulation.

(j) The refrigerant used shall be non-toxic, non-explosive,

odourless and non-CFC type.

(k) The water dispenser shall be fitted with the following devices:

(i) A “power ON” indicator light; and

(ii) An indicator light for the refrigeration unit to indicate

its operation.

(l) The water dispenser shall be fitted with a 3-core PVC

insulated and sheathed flexible cable conforming to BS
6500:2000 or equivalent standards, and complete with a
suitably fused 13 A plug conforming to the Electrical Products
(Safety) Regulation, CAP 406G, Laws of Hong Kong. The
supply cable shall be approx. 2 m long.

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 29 of 46 2007 Edition
C10.19 DOMESTIC ELECTRIC COOKER (TABLE MODEL)

C10.19.1 General Requirements

(a) The cooker shall be designed for table top use.

(b) The cooker shall have two radiant rings, grill and oven.

(c) The cooker shall comply with IEC 60335-2-6:2005.

(d) The overall dimensions of the cooker shall be 390 mm (height)

x 470 mm (width) x 420 mm (depth) approximately.

C10.19.2 Performance Requirements

The total electrical loading shall be made up with the components

having the ratings as below:

(a) Radiant rings (total) : not less than 2 kW;

(b) Grill : not less than 1 kW; and

(c) Oven : not less than 1 kW.

C10.19.3 Construction

(a) The diameter of the two radiant rings shall be as follows:

(i) one radiant ring of diameter 145 mm approximately;

and

(ii) one radiant ring of diameter 170 mm approximately.

(b) The dimensions of the grille shall be 310 mm (width) x

155 mm (depth) approximately.

(c) The dimensions of the oven shall be 200 mm (height) x

380 mm (width) x 290 mm (depth) approximately and the
volume of the oven shall be 20 litres approximately.

(d) All radiant rings, grill, and oven shall be simmerstat controlled
with power-on and oven indicator lamps.

(e) All screws, nuts and bolts shall be rust-proof or manufactured

from non-ferrous metal.

(f) The main terminals shall be mounted on the base at the back
and accessible for mains connections by removing the exterior
back panel.

(g) The cooker shall have adequate mechanical strength and be so

constructed as to withstand such rough usage as may be
expected in normal use.
Section C10 EE_GS
Page 30 of 46 2007 Edition
 (h) Radiant rings and oven shall be easily removable to facilitate
cleaning.

(i) The cooker shall be finished in white or cream vitreous enamel

paint.

(j) Internal wiring of the cooker shall be suitable for high

temperature operation.

(k) The cooker shall be fitted with a 3-core, 2 m long

approximately power supply cable conformed to BS
6500:2000; and controlled by a 20 A D.P. switch.

(l) The cooker shall be fitted with overload protection switch.

C10.20 DOMESTIC ELECTRIC COOKER (FOUR RADIANT PLATES TYPE)

C10.20.1 General Requirements

The cooker shall comply IEC 60335-2-6:2005.

C10.20.2 Performance Requirements

The total electrical loading shall be made up with the components

having the ratings as below:

(a) Radiant Plates (total) : not less than 5.8 kW;

(b) Grilling Compartment : not less than 2.5 kW; and

(c) Oven : not less than 2.5 kW.

C10.20.3 Construction

(a) The overall dimensions shall be:

(i) Total Height : approximately 1300 mm;

(ii) Height to Hob : approximately 900 mm;

(iii) Width : approximately 550 mm; and

(iv) Depth : approximately 600 mm.

(b) The capacity shall be:

(i) Grilling Compartment

Grilling Usable Area : not less than 850 cm²; and

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 31 of 46 2007 Edition
 (ii) Oven Compartment

Oven Volume : not less than 55 litres.

(c) The cooker shall consist of four radiant plates on the hob, an
oven compartment and an individual grille compartment.

(d) The cooker shall be constructed basically from mild steel or

material of equivalent strength and quality, and shall be
finished externally white with vitreous enamel paint.

(e) The oven components shall be removable to facilitate cleaning.

All screws, nuts and bolts in the oven compartment and
grilling compartment shall be rust-proof or manufactured from
non-ferrous metal.

(f) Each radiant plate and the grilling compartment shall be

equipped with an adjustable control to obtain variable heat
output.

(g) The radiant plate shall not be of the sealed plate type.

(h) The hob could be lifted up for replacement of the radiant

plates and cleaning purpose. When the hob is raised, a
supporting device shall be provided to prevent the falling
down of the hob.

(i) The temperature inside the oven compartment shall be

thermostatically controlled with adjusting knobs on the front
panel.

(j) The heater of the oven shall be suitably guarded off so as to

protect the user from heat burn.

(k) The oven door shall be of glass pull out type hinged at the
bottom.

(l) The oven shall be provided with an interior light.

(m) Internal wiring of the cooker shall be suitable for high

temperature operation.

(n) The supply cable of the cooker shall conform to BS 6500:2000

or other equivalent standards and the cooker shall be
controlled by a 60 A D.P. cooker control unit.

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 32 of 46 2007 Edition
C10.21 ELECTRIC HOT PLATE

C10.21.1 General Requirements

The hot plate shall comply with IEC 60335-2-6:2005.

C10.21.2 Performance Requirements

The capacity shall range from 2 kW to 2.6 kW.

C10.21.3 Construction

(a) The hot plate shall be designed for use on the table top.

(b) The heating element shall be metal sheathed.

(c) The diameter of the heating surface shall range from 180 mm
to 200 mm approximately.

(d) The top plate shall be constructed of steel plate of minimum

thickness 3 mm, or equivalent material.

(e) The top plate shall be protected with heat resisting coating to
prevent thermal oxidation of the steel plate during operation.

(f) The level of top plate shall range from 120 to 130 mm above
the table top.

(g) The casing/stand of the hot plate shall be constructed of

chrome plated sheet or stoved with heat resisting enamel.

(h) The hot plate shall have integral power and temperature
control switch which shall have at least 3 temperature settings.

(i) All bare metal conductors except the top plate shall properly
be heat insulated.

(j) Internal wiring of the hot plate shall be suitable for high
temperature operation.

(k) The hot plate shall be provided with a 3-core flexible power
supply cable of approximately 1.5 m in length complete with a
suitably fused 13 A plug.

C10.22 10-PERSONS AND 15-PERSONS ELECTRIC RICE COOKER

C10.22.1 General Requirements

(a) The rice cooker shall comply with IEC-60335-2-15:2005.

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 33 of 46 2007 Edition
 (b) The rice cooker shall be provided with a detachable 0.75 mm²
3-core circular cotton braided, rubber sheathed or PVC
insulated and sheathed flexible cord of approximately 1 m in
length and complete with an “appliance connector” and a
suitably fused 13 A plug.

(c) The rice cooker shall have obtained Recognition Type Energy
Label of the Energy Efficiency Office (EEO) of Electrical and
Mechanical Services Department.

C10.22.2 Performance Requirements

The capacities of the rice cookers shall be:

Size (Persons) Capacity (Persons)

10 From 7 to 10 persons
15 From 11 to 16 persons

C10.22.3 Construction

(a) The rice cooker shall be finished with heat resisting paint in
white or a manufacturer’s standard colour approved by the
Architect.

(b) The rice cooker shall be fitted with automatic heat

preservation mechanism and overheating protection.

(c) Internal wiring of the rice cooker shall be suitable for high
temperature operation.

C10.23 2 kW ELECTRIC TOASTER

C10.23.1 General Requirements

The toaster shall comply with IEC 60335-2-9:2006 .

C10.23.2 Performance Requirements

The total power rating of the heating elements shall not exceed 2 kW.

C10.23.3 Construction

(a) The toaster shall have two separate chambers for toasting two
slices of bread simultaneously.

(b) The toaster shall have an automatic pop-up mechanism that

shall be controlled by a damper to eliminate excessive shock
and vibration during operation of the mechanism.

(c) A selector switch shall be provided for selection of the degree

of toasting.
Section C10 EE_GS
Page 34 of 46 2007 Edition
 (d) The casing shall be constructed of stainless steel or chromium
plated steel.

(e) The toaster shall be designed for easy operation and

maintenance.

(f) The supply cable shall conform to BS 6500:2000 and complete

with a suitably fused 13 A plug conforming to the Electrical
Products (Safety) Regulation, CAP 406G, Laws of Hong Kong.
The length of the supply cable shall be not less than 1.5 m.

C10.24 ELECTRIC HAND/FACE DRYER

C10.24.1 General Requirements

(a) The hand/face dryer shall comply with IEC 60335-2-23:2003.

(b) The hand/face dryer shall be designed of wall-mounting type.

(c) The hand/face dryer shall be provided with a detachable

1.25 mm² 3-core PVC insulated and sheathed flexible cord of
approximately 1 m in length.

C10.24.2 Performance Requirements

(a) The front cover shall withstand a static force of not less than
111 N for 1 minute and an impact of not less than 6.8 J for 1
minute.

(b) The power rating of the heating element shall not be less than
2 kW.

C10.24.3 Construction

(a) The front cover shall be manufactured from a fully developing

one piece metal or approved high strength plastic.

(b) The thickness of the front cover shall not be less than 3 mm.

(c) The starting method of the dryer shall be any of the following
as specified in the Particular Specification:

(i) capacitive touch switch;

(ii) insulated metal push button; and
(iii) automatic sensing device.

(d) Metallic covers shall be finished with acid resistant porcelain

enamel or equivalent.

(e) The front cover shall be firmly secured to the base of the
product by recessed Allen head or similar type bolts.
Section C10 EE_GS
Page 35 of 46 2007 Edition
 (f) The base shall be designed so that it can be secured to the wall
by at least three mounting bolts.

(g) The air inlet shall be at the bottom and protected by metal
vanes inside.

(h) The air outlet shall be similarly protected by metal vanes

inside the nozzle.

(i) The air outlet shall be fixed with downward air discharge for
hand dryer, but shall be movable to an upward direction when
used as face dryer.

(j) All metal parts shall be made of corrosion resistant materials

such as stainless steel or equivalent.

(k) The hand/face dryer shall be suitable for back and side cable
entry with an insulated bushing.

(l) The hand/face dryer shall be completed with internal electrical

overload protection for the fan motor and thermal cut-out
protection for the heater unit.

(m) The hand/face dryer shall be marked with the symbol for drip-
proof or splash-proof construction.

C10.25 BLANK

C10.26 WALL CLOCK BATTERY-OPERATED

C10.26.1 General Requirements

The clock shall be accompanied with the necessary battery adequate

for operating the clock for at least 1 month.

C10.26.2 Performance Requirements

(a) The clock shall be tropicalised and dust-proof.

(b) The accuracy of timekeeping shall not exceed ±20 sec/month

at room temperature (25°C).

C10.26.3 Construction

(a) The clock-face shall either be round or square in shape as

specified in the Particular Specification.

(b) For round clock-face clock, the nominal clock-face diameter

shall range between 300 mm and 350 mm.

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 36 of 46 2007 Edition
 (c) For square clock-face clock, the nominal clock-face side
length shall range between 300 mm and 350 mm.

(d) The clock shall be flush mounted design on the wall and is to
be free of any projections on the rear surface.

(e) The clock dial shall be white with large Arabic Numerals in
black and graduated in minutes. Alternative colour and design
shall be subject to the approval of the Architect.

(f) The hour, minute and second full sweep hands shall be of
distinct colour.

(g) The clock shall be completed with a clear glass or plastic front
cover.

(h) The voltage rating of the battery powering the product shall
not exceed 1.5 V.

C10.27 ELECTRIC DRY IRON

C10.27.1 General Requirements

(a) The dry iron shall be designed for household and domestic
application.

(b) The dry iron shall comply with IEC 60335-2-3:2005.

(c) The dry iron shall have adequate mechanical strength and
stability to withstand rough handling as may be expected in
normal use.

(d) The dry iron shall be fitted with a 1.25 mm² 3-core PVC
insulated and sheathed flexible cord of approximately 2 m in
length and a suitably fused 13 A plug.

C10.27.2 Performance Requirements

The rated input power of the dry iron shall be 1000 W.

C10.27.3 Construction

(a) The dry iron shall have an adjustable, self-resetting thermostat

control complete with indication lamp for power ON/OFF
indication.

(b) The power cord shall be connected to the iron body in such a
manner that no part of the power cord or any accessories
associated thereto shall be in contact with the hand of the
operator during the normal ironing operation.

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 37 of 46 2007 Edition
 (c) The non-stick coated plate of the dry iron shall be constructed
of chromium plated or heat resistant aluminium alloy.

(d) The dry iron shall have the appropriate degree of protection
against moisture.

C10.28 VACUUM CLEANER

C10.28.1 General Requirements

(a) The vacuum cleaner shall comply with IEC 60335-2-2:2006.

(b) The vacuum cleaner shall be suppressed against radio

interference in compliance with the Telecommunication
(Control of Interference) Regulations, CAP 106B, Laws of
Hong Kong.

(c) The vacuum cleaner shall be designed of domestic type and for
dry load.

(d) The vacuum cleaner shall be fitted with a 1.25 mm² 3-core
PVC insulated and sheathed flexible cord of approximately
5 m in length; and a suitably fused 13 A plug.

C10.28.2 Performance Requirements

(a) The minimum dust capacity shall be 3.4 litres.

(b) The suction capacity shall be not less than 13.7 kPa.

(c) The minimum air flow rate shall be 1.8 m³/min.

(d) The operating noise level shall not exceed 80 dBA measured at
one (1) m from the vacuum cleaner under a background noise
level of 55 dBA.

C10.28.3 Construction

(a) The vacuum cleaner shall be a double insulated product (Class

II appliance) and shall have the symbol for Class II
construction marked on its body.

(b) The following accessories shall be supplied with the vacuum

cleaner as standard fittings:

(i) Joint pipe;

(ii) Flexible hose;

(iii) Curved joint pipe;

(iv) Extension pipes;

Section C10 EE_GS
Page 38 of 46 2007 Edition
 (v) Combination rug and floor tool;

(vi) Crevice nozzle;

(vii) Dusting brush; and

(viii) Fabric nozzle.

C10.29 FLOOR POLISHER

C10.29.1 General Requirements

(a) The floor polisher shall comply with IEC 60335-2-40:2006.

(b) The floor polisher shall be suppressed against radio

interference in compliance with the Telecommunication
(Control of Interference) Regulations, CAP 106B, Laws of
Hong Kong.

(c) The floor polisher shall be fitted with a 1.25 mm² 3-core PVC
insulated and sheathed flexible cord of approximately 6 m in
length; and a suitably fused 13 A plug.

C10.29.2 Performance Requirements

(a) The power rating shall not be less than 400 watts.

(b) The dust bag volume shall not be less than 2.7 litres.

C10.29.3 Construction

(a) The floor polisher shall be a double insulated product (Class II

appliance) and shall have the symbol for Class II construction
marked on its body.

(b) The floor polisher shall be of the suction type with

interchangeable 3 sets of brush of three pieces each,
comprising 3 hard texture brushes, 3 soft brushes and 3 felt
pads, suitable for household and similar purposes.

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 39 of 46 2007 Edition
C10.30 7-Litres AND 9-Litres DEHUMIDIFIER

C10.30.1 General Requirements

(a) The dehumidifier shall comply with IEC 60335-2-40:2006.

(b) The dehumidifier shall be fitted with a 1.25 mm² 3-core PVC
insulated and sheathed flexible cord of approximately 2 m in
length; and a suitably fused 13 A plug.

(c) The dehumidifier shall have obtained Recognition Type

Energy Label of the Energy Efficiency Office (EEO) of
Electrical and Mechanical Services Department.

C10.30.2 Performance Requirements

(a) The moisture removal capacity, when measured under the

operating conditions at 27°C, 60% R.H. shall be as follows:

Size (litres) Minimum Moisture Removal Capacity

7 7 litres per 24 hours
9 9 litres per 24 hours

(b) The power factor of the dehumidifier shall be not less than
0.85.

(c) The noise level generated whilst in operation shall not exceed
60 dBA measured at 1.5 m from the product under a
background noise level of not exceeding 50 dBA.

C10.30.3 Construction

No “Controlled Refrigerant”, as defined under the Ozone Layer

Protection (Controlled Refrigerants) Regulation, CAP 403B, Laws of
Hong Kong, shall be used.

C10.31 ROOM COOLER

C10.31.1 Type of Room Cooler

(a) 12 types of room cooler are under this specification, their

Schedule of References are:

Schedule Reference
‘C’ Type ‘R’ Type
C26 R26
C29 R29
C32 R32
C40 R40
C49 R49
C58 R58
Section C10 EE_GS
Page 40 of 46 2007 Edition
 (b) The Schedule Reference composes of three characters.

(i) The first character is an alphabet of either “C” or “R”,

where:

C - Room cooler provides cooling air only; and

R - Room cooler provides cooling with reversed cycle
heating

(ii) The last two characters are numerals indicate the

cooling capacity of the room cooler with details shown
below:

Last Two Cooling Capacity

Characters
Watt Btu/hr
26 2638 – 2931 9000 – 9999
29 2931 – 3224 10000 – 10999
32 3224 – 3517 11000 – 11999
40 4103 – 4396 14000 – 14999
49 4982 – 5275 17000 – 17999
58 5861 – 6154 20000 – 20999

C10.31.2 General Requirements

(a) The room air cooler supplied shall conform to the safety
standard IEC 60335-2-40:2006, in accordance with Electrical
Products (Safety) Regulation, CAP 406G, Laws of Hong Kong.

(b) The room cooler shall be supplied with appropriate radio

interference suppression device to meet the requirements
prescribed in Telecommunications (Control of Interference)
Regulations of the Telecommunications Ordinance (CAP 106).

(c) The room cooler shall have obtained Energy Label Grade 1 or
2 of the Energy Efficiency Office (EEO) of Electrical and
Mechanical Services Department.

(d) The room cooler shall be fitted with a 3-core PVC insulated
and sheathed flexible cord of approximately 2 m in length
which shall be connected to a connection unit and controlled
by a D.P. switch with pilot light. Size of the 3-core flexible
cord shall have current carrying capacity not less than that of
the circuit breaker protecting the room cooler.

C10.31.3 Performance Requirements

(a) All room coolers shall have a power factor of not less than
0.85 at full load.

(b) All room coolers shall achieve the ratings as stated above.

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 41 of 46 2007 Edition
 (c) The capacity of rating shall be proved by the production of
printed manufacturer’s rating sheets showing also the test
condition.

(d) All the ratings quoted shall conform to ISO 5151:1994.

(e) The maximum noise level generated by the room coolers

operating at high cool and high fan setting shall be in
accordance with the table below. The noise level shall be
measured at a distance of 1.5 m from the cool air discharge
and at 1.2 m above the ground under a background noise level
of less than 50 dBA.

Schedule Reference Noise Level

C26, R26, Not exceeding 60 dBA
C29, R29,
C32, R32,
C40, R40,
C49, R49, Not exceeding 65 dBA
C58, R58.

C10.31.4 Construction

(a) The refrigerant used in the room coolers shall be of non-CFC

type.

(b) An adjustable thermostat control shall be provided for each

room cooler. The thermostat shall be built into the case of the
unit and not fixed on the outside. Only the adjusting knob or
dial is to protrude.

C10.32 REFRIGERATOR

C10.32.1 Type of Refrigerator

6 types of refrigerator are under this specification, they are:

Type Description

1 170 litres
2 170 litres, not exceeding 1600 mm in height
3 270 litres
4 270 litres, not exceeding 1600 mm in height
5 345 litres
6 345 litres, not exceeding 1600 mm in height

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 42 of 46 2007 Edition
C10.32.2 General Requirements

(a) The refrigerator shall comply with the safety standard

IEC 60335-2-24:2005 Household and similar electrical
appliances – Safety – Part 2-24 : Particular requirements for
refrigerators and food freezers.

(b) All the ratings quoted, characteristics and test methods shall
conform to ISO 8187:1991.

(c) The overall dimensions of the refrigerators shall comply with

the following requirements:

Maximum depth Maximum width Maximum height

Type
(mm) (mm) (mm)
1 660 620 N/A
2 660 620 1600
3 720 700 N/A
4 720 700 1600
5 750 750 N/A
6 750 750 1600

(d) The corresponding food storage capacities shall be:

Minimum Total Storage Capacity of Frozen Food

Type Storage Capacity Storage Compartment
(litres) (litres)
1
170 35 to 70
2
3
270 50 to 85
4
5
345 70 to 110
6

(e) The refrigerator shall at least comprise two separate

compartments, i.e. Fresh Food Storage Compartment and
Frozen Food Storage Compartment.

(f) For Types 3 to 6, the Fresh Food Storage Compartment shall

have a chiller compartment (chilled room) with transparent
front opening door.

(g) The refrigerator shall be of the ‘Frost-free’ or ‘Automatic

defrost’ type.

(h) The refrigerator shall be fitted with a 0.75 mm² 3-core PVC
insulated and sheathed flexible cord of approximately 2 m in
length; and a suitably fused 13 A plug.

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 43 of 46 2007 Edition
 (i) The refrigerator shall have obtained Energy Label Grade 1 or 2
of the Energy Efficiency Labelling Scheme (EELS) for
Household Refrigeration Appliances of Energy Efficiency
Office (EEO) of the Electrical and Mechanical Services
Department, the Government of the HKSAR.

C10.32.3 Performance Requirements

(a) The refrigerator shall be completely suitable for operation

under sub-tropical climate class. The range of ambient
temperatures in which the equipment are intended to be used,
and for which the required storage temperatures shall be
fulfilled is between 18°C to 38°C. No condensation shall be
present on the exterior of the refrigerator at all times.

(b) The Fresh Food Storage Compartment and Frozen Food

Storage Compartment shall be equipped with separate
temperature control.

(i) Fresh Food Storage Compartment

The refrigeration system shall be designed to maintain
the temperature between 0°C to 10°C and the mean
temperature shall be 5°C within the compartment at all
operating conditions.

(ii) Frozen Food Storage Compartment

The storage temperature of the Frozen Food Storage
Compartment shall be maintained at a temperature not
warmer than -18°C at all operating conditions. The
Compartment shall be labeled with a “***” mark as
defined in ISO 8187:1991.

C10.32.4 Construction

(a) The cabinet shall be of all steel construction designed for

maximum rigidity and robustness to form an assembly
sufficiently rigid to prevent distortion during handling,
transportation, etc. In addition, concealed adjustable feet shall
be fitted to ensure that the cabinet will stand firm on uneven
floor. High quality steel panel work treated with a suitable
rust preventive primer and anti-corrosion undercoat and
finished with white hard finish material giving maximum
resistance to abrasion and corrosion.

(b) Doors:

(i) The refrigerator shall be fitted with flush-fitting door(s).

The door shall be fitted with chromium plated/
matching coloured fasteners and semi-concealed door
hinges. The interior of the door shall be complete with
bottle racks, cheese and butter storage section;

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 44 of 46 2007 Edition
 (ii) The design and construction of the door shall withstand
heavy usage and suitably braced or otherwise
constructed to prevent distortion in usage;

(iii) The plastic door liner must be of uniform thickness

(gauge) throughout particularly in relation to all inner
radiused corners and be sufficiently rigid to prevent
sagging when fully loaded with bottles, etc. The bottle
retainer strips shall be robustly constructed and secured;
and

(iv) If the refrigerator is designed with only one door, the

Fresh Food Storage Compartment and the Frozen Food
Storage Compartment shall be separated well
according to appropriate temperatures.

(c) Insulation Material:

No “Controlled Product”, as defined under the Ozone Layer

Protection (Products Containing Scheduled Substances)
(Import Banning) Regulation, CAP 403C, Laws of Hong Kong,
shall be used as insulation material in the refrigerator.

(d) Internal Lighting:

The Fresh Food Storage Compartment of the refrigerators shall

be supplied with an interior light of sufficient capacity to
illuminate the entire interior. This light complete with air-tight
flame retardant lamp guard shall be activated by a door
operated switch. The light and switch shall be protected from
condensate drip.

(e) Refrigeration Unit:

(i) The refrigeration unit shall be hermetically sealed in a

steel housing and fitted with an automatic self-resetting
motor overload device; and

(ii) The refrigeration unit shall be designed to be free from

radio or TV reception interference or if necessary shall
be fitted with an appropriate suppression system as laid
down in the Telecommunication (Control of
Interference) Regulations, CAP 106B, Laws of Hong
Kong.

(f) Door Gasket:

(i) The door gasket shall be robust and manufactured from

a rubber base material;

(ii) It shall contain a fungoid inhibitor to prevent fungoid

growth and discolouration; and

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 45 of 46 2007 Edition
 (iii) In the case of a magnetic gasket, the magnetic ceramic
insert must be full length on all sides so fitted, with
absence of gaps at the corners.

(g) Shelves and Internal Fittings:

(i) The shelves made of either wire or bar shall be

adequately protected against rusting and corrosion and
must be sufficiently rigid to prevent distortion under
full load conditions. The mesh of the wires shall be
closely enough to prevent small based containers from
toppling and spilling their contents; and

(ii) Shelves shall preferably be supported from full height

adjustable supports, all must be of ample strength,
easily adjustable and designed to prevent the accidental
tilting or release, of one end of a shelf.

(h) Refrigerant:

No “Controlled Refrigerant”, as defined under the Ozone

Layer Protection (Controlled Refrigerants) Regulation, CAP
403B, Laws of Hong Kong, shall be used.

(i) Accessories:

The refrigerator shall be supplied with all manufacturer’s

standard accessories which shall include the following:

Quantity
Description of Accessories
(No.)
Shelves in refrigerator compartment 3
Large full-width egg racks 1
or half-width egg racks 2
Ice cube trays 2
Butter tray plastic crisper with see through 1
plastic cover

(j) Labelling:

The refrigerator shall bear a label showing serial number,

power consumption, voltage, amperes and frequency. The
label shall be fixed rigidly at a conspicuous position on the
equipment.

Section C10 EE_GS

Page 46 of 46 2007 Edition
 SECTION C11

LOW VOLTAGE CUBICLE SWITCHBOARD

C11.1 GENERAL

This Section covers the design, supply and installation of type-tested switchgear
and controlgear assembly (TTA) of Low Voltage Cubicle Switchboard
(hereafter called the Switchboard).

C11.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

Unless otherwise specified, the scope of work shall include the design of the
Switchboard and selection of equipment and components including due
consideration of other components of the Electrical and other Installations to
ensure that the Switchboard conforms to the specified performance requirements.

All design works including relevant information, data and calculations shall be
submitted to the Architect for approval.

C11.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

The Switchboard shall comply with IEC 60439-1:2004.

All materials and workmanship shall comply, where applicable, with all relevant
IEC, B.S. or EN Standards and all relevant sections of this Specification.

The Switchboard shall comply with the electromagnetic compatibility

requirement of IEC 60439-1:2004. Immunity and emission tests shall be carried
out for the switchboard assemblies in accordance with the testing requirements
in IEC 60439-1:2004 unless the exemption conditions stipulated in Clause
7.10.2 of IEC 60439-1:2004 are satisfied.

The Works shall be carried out in a manner consistent with good practice in
Hong Kong.

The Switchboard shall be of multi-cubicle type assembled from compartments

housing the busbars, switches, etc. as shown on the Drawings, suitable for
service conditions detailed in Clause C11.6 of this Specification and complying
where relevant, with the appropriate Standards and Codes of Practice listed in
this Specification. Where an alternative standard is proposed, the tenderer shall
prove by means of adequate supporting documents that the alternative standard
meets the requirements of the relevant Standard.

Section C11 EE_GS

Page 1 of 11 2007 Edition
 The Switchboard comprising a combination of one or more low-voltage
switching devices together with associated control, measuring, signalling,
protective, regulating equipment, etc., shall be completely assembled with all
the internal electrical and mechanical interconnection and structural parts. The
Switchboard shall conform to an established type without deviations likely to
significantly influence the performance from the typical Switchboard verified to
be in accordance with IEC 60439-1:2004 by a competent and independent
internationally recognised testing authority. Appropriate technical information
and literature in English language and copies of type-test certificate and
drawings must be available for examination.

C11.4 CONSTRUCTION AND FINISH

The Switchboard shall be constructed from steel, self supporting, so formed as

to give a rigid and robust construction without cross-struts, and shall be
structurally, mechanically and electrically sound, with cubicle top, panels and
doors of sheet steel or the equivalent metal, not less than 2 mm. Alternatively, if
the Switchboard thickness is less than 2 mm, the design and the whole
construction shall satisfy all the following structural requirements as type tested
and certified by a competent and independent internationally recognized testing
authority:

Test Standard Severity

Shock IEC 60068-2- Equivalent peak acceleration of 15 g for a
27:1987 duration of 11 ms.
Bump IEC 60068-2- Equivalent acceleration of 10 g for a duration
29 :1987 of 16 ms, and 1000 Nos. of bump in each
mutually perpendicular direction.
Random IEC 60068-2- Total r.m.s. acceleration of 0.26 g for a
Vibration 64 :1993 frequency range from 10 Hz to 150 Hz.

Appropriate technical information and literature in English language and copies

of the type test certificate and drawings must be available for examination.

The Switchboard shall have clear accessibility to all internal components within
it. Steel work shall be treated to prevent corrosion before being painted. Steel
parts, normally left bright, shall be corrosion resistance plated.

The bottom of the Switchboard shall be closed and made to vermin-proof by

means of non-magnetic, fire-proof barrier plates cut away where required to suit
the cables as specified. In general, the Switchboard shall be suitable for indoor
use to IP 31 as specified in IEC 60529:2001. In the event that top entry cabling
facilities are required, the top of the Switchboard shall also be constructed in
like manner.

Detachable panels at the back of the Switchboard shall each be provided with a
pair of handles for easy fixing/removal of the panels.

The Switchboard shall be of uniform height and uniform depth front-to-back,

throughout its length and shall present a neat and tidy appearance.

Section C11 EE_GS

Page 2 of 11 2007 Edition
Unless otherwise specified, the Switchboard shall be constructed generally to
Form 3b of IEC 60439-1:2004.

The switch/control units in each cubicle shall be arranged to form a multi-tier

arrangement.
The compartment for housing the incoming/outgoing terminals for external
conductors shall be of ample dimensions for accommodating the external
conductors, including space for spreading of the cores. Suitable mounting
brackets or cable supports shall be provided to prevent the terminals or cables
being subjected to stresses which may reduce their normal life or performance.

All switches shall be provided with mechanical interlocks so that their doors,
covers, and the like can only be opened when the switches are in the off position
and it shall not be possible to close the switches while the doors, covers and the
like are opened, except by overriding the interlock or using a tool. The interlock
shall automatically be restored on reclosing the doors, covers and the like.

The exterior of each Switchboard shall be finished to a light grey or the

manufacturer’s nearest standard colour. The end plates shall be of non-
corrosive type and finished to match with the color of the switchboard whereas
the external fixing bolts and set screws shall be of chrome-plated finish or
equivalent anti-corrosion treatment.

The "space" provision for future outgoing circuits shall comprise blank panels,
undrilled, and provision for accommodating fuseswitches and/or circuit breakers.
Busbars shall be extended as necessary and drilled for future connection of
conductors. The spaces scheduled or shown on the Drawings are indicative of
minimum requirements and may be varied to suit the arrangement offered,
subject to approval.

Insulators, including busbar supports, shall be non-hygroscopic and non-

deteriorating. The use of fibrous materials, linseed oil, varnish, etc. is prohibited.

The Switchboard shall be provided with one or more plates, marked in a durable
manner and located in a place such that they are visible and legible when the
Switchboard is installed. The following information shall be given on the
nameplates:

(a) The manufacturer’s name or trade mark;

(b) Type designation or identification number or other means of

identification making it possible to obtain relevant information from the
manufacturer;

(c) IEC 60439-1:2004;

(d) Type of current;

(e) Rated operation voltage (and frequency in case of a.c.);

(f) Rated insulation voltage;

(g) Short-circuit withstand strength;

Section C11 EE_GS
Page 3 of 11 2007 Edition
 (h) Degree of protection; and

(i) Rating of main busbars.

Other information as required under Clause 5.1 of IEC 60439-1:2004 shall be

provided in the relevant documents, the circuit diagrams or in the
manufacturer’s list or catalogues.

C11.5 ELECTRICITY CHARACTERISTICS OF THE SWITCHBOARD

The electrical characteristics of the Switchboard shall be as follows unless

otherwise specified:

(a) Rated operational : 380/220V + 6%, 3-phase, 4-wire, 50

voltage Hz., + 2%, a.c.;

(b) Neutral earthing : Solid at transformer;

(c) Rated short-time current : 50 kA for 1 second withstanding current;

and

(d) Power factor : Incoming 0.25 lagging.

C11.6 SERVICE CONDITIONS

The service conditions stipulated in Clause C5.1.2 of this Specification shall be

applicable.

The Switchboard shall only be provided with the built-in natural cooling
facilities as furnished in accordance with the recommendations endorsed by the
licenser to suit the service conditions specified.

C11.7 BUSBARS, WIRING AND EARTHING

The busbar chamber shall contain triple phase and neutral busbars of equal
cross-sectional areas rated as shown on the Drawings or specified elsewhere.
The configuration of the busbar assembly contained in the Switchboard shall be
the same as shown on the type test drawings. Any change in the configuration
will require separate type test certificates unless substantiation otherwise
submitted by the Contractor is approved by the Architect.

The whole busbars, including the conductors connecting the busbars to each
outgoing circuit, shall be arranged to withstand short circuit at any point. All
conductors between the main busbars/droppers and the outgoing protective
devices not short-circuit type tested to a fault current of 50 kA for 1 second at
0.25 lagging power factor shall be insulated by approved means to comply with
the requirement that "an internal short-circuit between phases and/or between
phases and earth is only a remote possibility" as stipulated in Clause 7.5.5.1.2 of
IEC 60439-1:2004.
Section C11 EE_GS
Page 4 of 11 2007 Edition
All busbars shall be made of hard drawn high conductivity copper to BS EN
13601:2002 and shall be electro-tinned. Construction, marking and arrangement
of the busbars, connections and auxiliary wiring shall be to IEC 60439-1:2004.

External busbars for connection to the Switchboard shall be fully insulated and
arranged in such a manner that they will not obstruct access to other equipment.

All neutral conductors shall have cross-sectional areas not less than that of the
respective phase conductors and shall be distinguished by the color blue or by
the initial letter N.

Whenever a vertical section of the Switchboard contains more than one outgoing
circuit, busbar risers or droppers to which the outgoing circuits are connected
shall be provided and shall be arranged in such manner that an internal short-
circuit is not to be expected under normal operating conditions.

All auxiliary circuit wiring shall be PVC-insulated with designated conductor

temperature of 90oC to BS 6231:2006. They shall, wherever possible, be
grouped and placed together in a neat manner. Different insulant colours shall
be provided to distinguish the various circuits at different voltage. All wires
shall also have at both ends a coded ferrule of insulating materials permanently
marked with suitable characters and codes. Each connection shall terminate at
an approved type of terminal block, which shall also be suitably labelled.

Cable for auxiliary circuits shall be run inside cable compartments or special
cable ways designed to provide adequate protection against mechanical damage.
They shall also be bunched neatly and be identifiable throughout their length of
run.

Wiring from the fixed part of the Switchboard to the movable part, such as
hinged door, shall be enclosed by a flexible PVC tubing. If apparatus with a
voltage exceeding the limits of extra-low voltage are attached to lid, door, etc.,
the continuity of the protective circuits shall be ensured in accordance with
Clause 7.4.3.1.5 of IEC 60439-1:2004.

Connectors or soldered joints are not permitted in the auxiliary circuit wiring.

Exposed live terminals shall be suitably shrouded or covered.

A continuous tinned copper earthing bar of adequate rating per Clause 7.4.3.1.7
of IEC 60439-1:2004 shall be fixed at the rear interior, bottom portion
throughout the length of the switchboard, bonding the framework of all modular
sections. An earthing terminal shall be provided at the external portion of the
Switchboard suitable for the connection of 25 x 3 mm copper tape. The position
of the earthing terminal shall be subject to the approval of the Architect.

Section C11 EE_GS

Page 5 of 11 2007 Edition
C11.8 CIRCUIT BREAKERS, FUSESWITCHES AND AUTOMATIC
CHANGEOVER SWITCHES

Unless otherwise specified, circuit breakers (including ACB, MCCB),

fuseswitches (including switchfuses), and automatic changeover switches shall
comply with the requirements stipulated in Section C5 of this Specification.

Circuit breakers shall have the breaking capacity to withstand the prospective
fault level at the switchboard.

C11.9 METERING, PROTECTIVE RELAYS AND INDICATING LAMPS

For every incoming circuit, facilities shall be provided to measure or indicate the
following:

(a) current;

(b) voltage;

(c) power factor; and

(d) supply healthy.

Wiring from the measuring devices shall be brought out and be terminated in
approved type of rail-mounted termination/feed through blocks housed inside
separate compartments accessible from the front. Test plugs shall also be
provided at each termination points to measure the voltages and/or currents
flowing in that particular measuring circuit by external testing instruments.

Instruments, meters and relays shall be of the flush mounted pattern, with bezels
black finished, positioned on the front of the Switchboard. All terminals shall
be suitably insulated and potential circuits shall be suitably fused, using H.R.C.
fuses.

Indicating instruments shall be to IEC 60051:1997, of moving iron spring

controlled type or moving coil with transducer type with 100 mm nominal
diameter, 240o scale dials and external zero adjustment. Integrating meters shall
be to IEC 62053:2003. The accuracy class shall be "2.5" for indicating
instruments and "2" for integrating meters, or better. Selector switches shall be
provided such that voltmeters can read voltages between phase and phase and
between phase and neutral, and that ammeters can read all phase and neutral
currents.

Power factor meters shall be suitable for 3-phase, 4 wire, balanced or

unbalanced loads, having a four-quadrant 360o scale to indicate both leading and
lagging power factors.

Alternatively, Digital Multifunction Power Meter complying with Clause C5.20

of this Specification can also be used.

Section C11 EE_GS

Page 6 of 11 2007 Edition
Separate current transformers (CT) in compliance with IEC 60044-1:2003 shall
be used for measuring and protection applications. Current transformers shall
have accuracy Class of "3" or better for use with ammeters, "1" or better for use
with Watt-hour meters and "10P" or better for protection applications. The
product of rated accuracy limit factor and rated output of the protection CT shall
not be less than 10 times the total rated burden of the trip circuit including the
relays, connection leads and overcurrent release where applicable.

Current transformers shall be mounted without reduction of area of busbars or

connections and be arranged for easy removal.

Protective relays shall be to IEC 60255:1988 and of the type as shown on the
Drawings or as specified. Where a protective relay consists of multi-elements,
suitable labels shall be provided to indicate the phases to which the
corresponding elements are connected.

Indicating lamps shall be of long life, operating on 6V through a built-in

transformer.

All air circuit breakers other than those used for controlling the incoming supply
and unless specified, shall have overcurrent tripping facilities to give time delay
overload current protection and instantaneous short circuit interruption. The
time-current characteristics shall be submitted for inspection. Shunt trip coils
operated by power supply from the mains shall not be used.

For air circuit breakers controlling the incoming supply to the Switchboard, the
circuit protection shall be provided by the following devices:

(a) Electromechanical Type I.D.M.T. Overcurrent Protection Relay:

This relay shall have triple elements with current setting ranging from
50% to 200% in 25% tappings and with time setting from 0 to 1.3
seconds in variable steps. The relay shall be of draw-out-case type flush
mounted on the front panel. The characteristic of the relay shall match
with that of the Supply Company;

(b) Electromechanical Type I.D.M.T. Earth Fault Relay:

One single pole earth fault relay with current setting from 10% to 40% in
5% tappings and with time setting from 0 to 1.3 seconds. The relay shall
be of draw-out-case type, flush mounted on the front panel. The
characteristic of the relay shall match with that of the Supply Company;
and

(c) Shunt-Trip Release:

It shall be operated by a d.c. supply of 24V or 30V++ obtained from the

secondary batteries complete with battery charger, etc. of suitable rating.
++
Note: Other voltages may be specified to suit particular project.

Section C11 EE_GS

Page 7 of 11 2007 Edition
 Alternatively, Digital Protection Relay complying with Clause C5.23 of this
Specification can also be used.

Unless otherwise specified, Digital Power Analyzer to be used shall comply

with the requirements stipulated in Clause C5.24 of this Specification.

C11.10 SUPPLY COMPANY METERING

Provision shall be made, where specified and/or shown on the Drawings, for the
accommodation of the Supply Company's metering equipment upon the
Switchboard. The metering equipment will be supplied and mounted by the
Supply Company on Site. The metering compartment shall be complete with a
hinged glazed door for meter viewing.

The accommodation for the Supply Company's metering equipment shall

include a suitable insulating panel for mounting the meters and suitable fuses to
protect the voltage coil circuits to each meter. The "mains" side of the
fuseholders shall be wired to the incoming supply mains. Fuses shall be of the
H.R.C. type rated at 6A, with provision for sealing to prevent unauthorised
removal.

The Switchboard shall also be provided with suitable provisions of C.T.

Chambers for mounting the Supply Company's current transformers (C.T.s) in
accessible positions.

Wiring between the current transformers and the meters will be carried out by
the Supply Company on Site, but adequate and appropriate cabling facilities for
installing the said wiring shall be provided in the Switchboard.

C11.11 LABELS

Laminated self-colored material labels of ample sizes shall be provided for each
of the units both at the front and in the cabling compartment on the Switchboard,
engraved in English and Chinese characters. A means of fixing these labels shall
be provided other than by adhesives.

During the progress of manufacture of the Switchboard, a schedule of labels

shall be submitted for approval before engraving is carried out.

Warning labels shall be affixed to the rear panels and shall be colored red with
white lettering in both English and Chinese characters denoting ‘DANGER-
LIVE BUSBARS INSIDE/ 危險 – 內有帶電匯流排’.

Similar warning labels shall be affixed at the front and in the cabling
compartment for each automatic/remote closing or changeover switching
denoting Beware-automatic closing/注意 – 自動接合 in English and Chinese
characters.

In addition to automatic screening shutters and barriers, warning labels shall

also be provided for all live parts, such as test terminal blocks.
Section C11 EE_GS
Page 8 of 11 2007 Edition
C11.12 CABLE ARRANGEMENTS

The Switchboard shall be provided with all necessary cable lugs, etc., fixed in
positions on mounting plates and straps, to suit the types and directions of entry
of the cables as shown on the Drawings or as specified.

Cable conductors for all circuits within the Switchboard shall be arranged in a
tidy manner and mechanically secured at regular intervals such that any
movement occurring to the conductors, either under normal operation conditions
(e.g. thermal expansion, vibration, etc.) or due to short circuit in any one of the
circuits, shall not cause any damage or short circuit to any healthy bare live parts
in the Switchboard.

C11.13 AUTOMATIC INTERLOCKING FACILITY

When automatic interlocking facility is specified or shown on the Drawings, the

design shall be that it is safe, reliable and well proven. Unless otherwise
approved by the Architect, the mechanical part of the automatic interlocking
facility shall be of rod-type design to ensure a safe and reliable interlocking
system. For locally assembly switchboard containing automatic interlocking
facility, the interlocking design shall be endorsed by the respective licenser.

C11.14 ANCILLARY EQUIPMENT

The Switchboard shall be supplied complete with one hydraulic operated

handling truck in the main switchroom suitable for handling all sizes of air
circuit breakers on the Switchboard, and one set of portable earthing equipment
for each main incoming air circuit breaker. Portable earthing leads will not be
accepted as an alternative to the earthing equipment.

The battery charger/battery sets shall comply with the requirements of Clause
C5.21 of this Specification unless otherwise specified below. The battery
charger and batteries shall be housed in separate enclosures from the
Switchboard and shall be the same type of enclosures as the Switchboard. All
secondary batteries to be supplied with the Switchboard shall be of the nickel-
metal-hydride type, sealed or ventilated, requiring little or no maintenance and
having long life. The capacity of the batteries, with charger disconnected, shall
be adequate to trip the associated air circuit breaker(s) consecutively at least 20
times. In case there are more than one air circuits breakers being tripped by the
same bank of batteries, the batteries shall be capable of tripping at least two air
circuit breakers simultaneously.

Site tests shall be carried out for the charger and battery set after completion of
the installation and the connection of the permanent supply according to the
manufacturer’s instruction in the presence of the Architect’s inspectorate staff
and in accordance with Section D1 of this Specification.

The Switchboard shall be supplied complete with all operating handles, jigs, etc.
required for the normal charging, closing, opening, racking in and out operations
of all circuit breakers of the Switchboard and shall be properly fixed in a neat
manner on a wooden board with brass hooks inside the main switch room where
Section C11 EE_GS
Page 9 of 11 2007 Edition
 the Switchboard is installed.

The Switchboard shall be provided with two rubber mats of ribbed surface,
complying with BS 921:1976, laid in front of and at the rear of the Switchboard.
The rubber mats shall be continuous sheets of minimum thickness of 10 mm,
each of same length as the Switchboard and minimum width of not less than
1000 mm or the width of the space between the front or back of the Switchboard
to the adjacent wall.

The Switchboard shall be provided with one complete spare set of fuses equal in
number for each rating of fuses in all switch-fuses and fuse-switches and fitted
in a conveniently accessible position on wooden board(s) in the relevant Main
Switchroom. The spare fuses should be appropriately covered to prevent the
contacts from rusting due to corrosion.

C11.15 OPERATION INSTRUCTION/DRAWING AT THE MAIN SWITCH

ROOM

For each Switchboard a schematic wiring diagram contained in a framed,

transparent perspex at a conspicuous position adjacent to the Switchboard shall
be provided. In case that the Switchboard has more than one incoming air
circuit breakers with interlocking facility, a brief operation instruction listing out
all the relevant switching steps and interlocks for
commissioning/decommissioning of part or whole of the Switchboard shall also
be provided in a similar manner to the schematic diagram.

C11.16 INSPECTION AND TESTING FOR LOW VOLTAGE CUBICLE

SWITCHBOARD INSTALLATION

(a) Testing before Connection of Power Supply

These tests shall be carried out after completion of installation of the

Switchboard and before the connection of the incoming supply cable.

(i) Dielectric Test This shall be carried out at power frequency

as defined in IEC 60439-1:2004;
(ii) Insulation Test This shall be carried out by means of a 1000V
"Megger" tester or similar instrument;
(iii) Secondary This shall be carried out using a.c. and shall
Injection Test check (approximately) that protection relays
or devices function in accordance with their
performance curves by a test at the lowest
setting and two further tests of current and
timing;
(iv) Primary This shall be carried out to prove the correct
Injection Test operation of protective devices or system
when set at the agreed setting;
(v) Polarity Check This shall be carried out to ensure that all CTs
for CT are correctly connected;

Section C11 EE_GS

Page 10 of 11 2007 Edition
 (vi) Functional This shall be carried out to ensure that all
Test devices operate properly as intended;
(vii) Contact This shall be carried out by means of
Resistance "Ductor" tester or similar instrument to ensure
Test that contacts and joints for switchgears,
cables, busbars as well as the contacts and
joints for outgoing cables and busbars are
maintained in good condition; and
(viii) Temperature This shall be carried out as defined in IEC
Rise Limits 60439-1:2004.
Test

Note: Tests (i) to (vii) must be carried out on site and test (viii) can be
carried out in factory.

(b) Testing after Connection of Supply

The following tests shall be carried out after the incoming supply cables
are connected and the “Switchboard” successfully commissioned on no
load:

(i) Phase-to-phase voltage test;

(ii) Phase-to-neutral voltage test;

(iii) Phase-to-earth voltage test;

(iv) Neutral-to-earth voltage test; and

(v) Phase sequence test on each and every outgoing circuit.

All tests shall be witnessed by and carried out to the satisfaction of the Architect
and all test results must be submitted in quadruplicate to the Architect for record
purposes.

C11.17 REQUIREMENTS DURING MAINTENANCE PERIOD

Requirements during maintenance period are specified in Section E3 of this

Specification.

Section C11 EE_GS

Page 11 of 11 2007 Edition
 SECTION C12

DIESEL GENERATING SET INSTALLATION

C12.1 REQUIREMENTS OF DIESEL GENERATING SETS

C12.1.1 Generating Set Rating

Each diesel generating set shall be of 3 phase, 4 wire output and rated
at 50 Hertz, 380V, 0.8 power factor lagging.

Each generating set shall comply with ISO 8528:2005 and shall be of
Prime Power (PRP) rating for the transient as well as the steady state
power requirements of the connected essential loads. Offers based on
standby rating will not be considered. The actual rating of each
generating set shall be clearly indicated on the name plate fixed on the
generating set.

C12.1.2 General Requirements of Diesel Engine

(a) The engine shall be a fresh water-cooled, four stroke, direct

injection, naturally aspirated or pressure charged, diesel engine
of industrial type complying with the requirements of all parts
of ISO 8528:2005 and continuously rated to meet the load
requirements under site conditions at a crank shaft speed not
exceeding 1500 rpm, and suitable for running on "Ultra Low
Sulphur Diesel” (ULSD) fuel to BS EN 590:2004.

(b) The engine shall be complete with the following equipment -

(i) Engine mounted instrument panel, incorporating

lubrication oil pressure gauge, lubrication oil
temperature gauge, cooling water outlet temperature
gauge, tachometer and hour-meter. The tachometer
shall sense the actual engine speed. Frequency sensing
type is not acceptable. Ammeter indicating the charging
rate of the engine driven dynamo shall also be provided;

(ii) Protective screens for flywheel, and coupling (if

exposed) and other exposed moving parts;

(iii) Engine cooling system incorporating engine driven

water circulating pump, thermostatically controlled
water temperature regulating device, and engine driven
tropicalized radiator with mechanically driven fan;

(iv) Air cleaner of the dry type or 'oil bath' type

incorporating replaceable element;

(v) Lubricating oil system (full flow, replaceable element

type filter);

Section C12 EE_GS

Page 1 of 31 2007 Edition
 (vi) Fuel oil system comprising filter, fuel transfer pump,
injection pump and injectors;

(vii) Governor with manual adjustment of + 5% of normal

speed. The governing accuracy shall comply with
performance Class G3 in ISO 8528-2:2005
"Specification for Reciprocating Internal Combustion
Engines, Performance - Speed governing". Governor
shall sense the actual engine rotation. Governor
designed for sensing the frequency of generator output
voltage is not acceptable;

(viii) Fuel control solenoid (electrically operated) together

with an emergency fuel shut off valve (manually
operated);

(ix) Two stage engine protective devices for high cooling

water temperature and low lubricating oil pressure.
Engine protective device for engine over-speed shall
also be provided, the engine over-speed sensor shall
sense the actual engine rotating speed and shall be free
from harmonic interference;

(x) All wiring of the control and protection systems,

carried out in suitable heat and oil resisting cable, shall
be wired out to a suitable cable termination block; and

(xi) Earth terminal for bonding the engine and alternator to

the earthing system.

(c) In accordance with ISO 8528:2005, an additional engine

power of 10% of the rated power of the generating set shall be
provided for governing purpose only (e.g. transient load
conditions and suddenly applied loads).

(d) The difference in height between the generator set and the
daily service tank shall not exceed the maximum value
recommended by the generator set manufacturer.

The equipment and accessories to be installed and the details

of the fuel oil supply system shall be subject to the approval of
the Architect.

(e) If an underground fuel oil storage-tank is installed, the

associated piping, fittings and accessories shall be installed as
required to complete the fuel oil system of the generator set.
The underground fuel oil storage tank shall be complete with
float control and other necessary accessories. A solenoid
control valve energised by the starting circuit shall be installed
in the fuel oil pipe from the daily service tank to the storage
tank.

Section C12 EE_GS

Page 2 of 31 2007 Edition
C12.1.3 General Requirements of Alternator

(a) The alternator shall be of self-exciting, self regulating and

brushless type, complete with permanent magnet exciter and
shall comply generally with the requirements of ISO 8528-
3:2005.

(b) The voltage regulation of the alternator apart from satisfying

the requirements of the electrical loads as specified in terms of
steady state and transient conditions shall be of three phase
sensing type.

The steady state and transient behaviour shall comply with

performance Class G3 in ISO 8528-5:2005 The maximum
percentage of voltage dip shall not exceed 20% of the rated
value under all loading conditions including step load
application. In case that electronic equipment and computers
form a substantial amount of supply loads, the maximum
voltage dip shall not exceed 10%.

(c) The machine shall be constructed with the type of enclosure to

IP 21 as specified in IEC 60529:2001. Anti-condensation
heating elements bounded to the winding of the alternator and
suitable for connection to the mains electricity supply (220V)
shall be fitted to the alternator. The anti-condensation heaters
should be thermostatically controlled and arranged to cut off
when the alternator is in operation. They shall be easily
accessible for maintenance and replacement.

(d) A termination box shall be provided suitable for

accommodating and terminating cables or busbar trunking
entering from the bottom, sides or top. If busbar trunking is
used for power-feeder between the alternator and switchboard,
special provision shall be made to prevent the vibration of the
diesel generating set affecting the tightness of the terminations.
Due to site condition, cable termination may only be made at a
particular side of the alternator.

(e) The rating assigned to the alternator by the manufacturer shall

be of maximum continuous rating.

(f) The alternator shall be provided with winding insulation of

class H, but it shall be designed to operate continuously at
temperature class F rating in accordance with IEC 60085:2004.

Section C12 EE_GS

Page 3 of 31 2007 Edition
C12.1.4 Starting System

Electrical battery starting system for each diesel generating set with a
set of 24V electric starting equipment comprising starter motor,
battery charger, starting battery and all necessary wiring and
switchgear shall be provided. The battery shall be of the nickel
cadmium type, with clear plastic cases complete with a hardwood
floor stand with hardwood cover suitable for installation adjacent to
the starter motor. The battery shall be rated to give six engine
cranking cycles each of six seconds within a 60 second period. The
battery shall also be capable of providing adequate power to supply
the control circuit and to trip the main MCCB/ACB. Separate
batteries shall be provided for engine starting and the shunt trip coil if
their operating voltages are different. The connection bars of the
batteries shall be protected with corrosion resistant petroleum jelly. A
suitable double pole switch should be provided to isolate the supply
from the battery to the engine starter unit.

The battery charger shall be of 2 rate charging and of constant voltage

type installed in the control cubicle, and arranged to maintain the
batteries in fully charged condition. In addition, when the engine is
running, the batteries shall be charged by an engine driven dynamo
controlled by an AVR and cut out.

The battery charger shall be capable of charging up to 75% battery

capacity specified in the previous paragraph in 6 hours. Current
limiting device shall be provided to limit the charging current with the
limit recommended by the battery manufacturer.

C12.1.5 Electrical Loads

The electrical loads to be connected to the diesel generating set will

be of continuous duty-type. Motor loads will be designated as S1 in
accordance with IEC 60034-1:2004.

Thyristor controlled lifts and other thyristor loading such as

uninterrupted power supply (UPS), variable voltage variable
frequency speed controller (VVVF) etc. will be connected to some of
the generators. High current harmonics are generated by these
thyristor loading which could have adverse effects on the diesel
generating sets on voltage distortion, system instability, overheating
of buffer windings, etc. The generator design shall take necessary
precautions (including the provision of engine overspeed sensing
device free from harmonic interference, etc.) to guard against the
occurrence of the above adverse effects caused by the harmonics.

In addition, the generator sets shall be able to tolerate a reasonable

amount of lift regenerative power. The generator set shall be suitably
sized to cater for the possible regenerative power. Appropriate
dummy loads and associated accessories shall be provided, if
necessary, for the absorption of the excessive regenerative power.

Section C12 EE_GS

Page 4 of 31 2007 Edition
C12.1.6 Suitability for Cold Starting and Step Load Acceptance

The generating set shall be suitable for cold starting and for the
acceptance of step loads immediately after attaining normal voltage
and frequency.

C12.1.7 Radio Interference Suppression

The alternator shall be fully equipped for radio interference

suppression to BS EN 55014:1997.

C12.1.8 Painting

All exposed ferrous metal surfaces of the machines, under-frame and

auxiliary equipment shall, where applicable, be treated with rust-
inhibiting primer paint, undercoat and finishing coat. Hot face parts
shall be coated with heat resisting paint work which can tolerate high
temperature up to 650oC without deterioration.

C12.1.9 Baseframe Assembly

The generating set shall comprise a diesel engine directly coupled to

an alternator and mounted in line on a steel section baseframe. This
diesel alternator baseframe shall be provided with anti-vibration
mountings complete with holding down of adequate strength bolts and
nuts for installation onto a concrete plinth. The complete assembly
shall be equipped with four lifting eyes to facilitate lifting and
transporting.

Grouting shall not be carried out until the final agreement from the
Architect. Grout shall be composed of equal parts of cement and fine
granular sand mixed with fresh water.

C12.1.10 Welding

All welding shall be carried out only by welders of the recognized

proficiency. The welding electrodes, equipment and process shall also
be in accordance with BS EN 1011-2:2004, BS 1821:1982 and BS
2640:1982 for arc welding or oxy-acetylene welding respectively.

Welding shall not be carried out under unfavorable conditions. All

welded surfaces shall be clean and dry before any welding is to be
done.

C12.1.11 Structural Steel

Structural steel used shall comply with BS 7668:2004 Grade

S345J0WPH. All forms of steel used shall be of standard section with
dimensions, tolerances and properties complying with BS 4:2005.
Supplier of structural steel work shall provide certificates of the
material.

Section C12 EE_GS

Page 5 of 31 2007 Edition
 All exposed edges shall be ground to produce a chamfer not less than
2 mm in width to ensure proper adherence of paint.

C12.2 CONSTRUCTION OF CONTROL CUBICLE

C12.2.1 The control cubicle shall be of totally enclosed type and meet the
requirements of IP 44 as specified in IEC 60529:2001 enclosures. The
cubicle shall be painted against corrosion after completion of all
drilling and operation.

C12.2.2 All control cubicles shall have labels made from laminated self-
coloured materials and engraved with descriptions in both English and
Chinese to be agreed by Architect's Representative. Fixing of labels
shall be by mechanical means.

C12.2.3 The contactors, switch fuses, relays and all other necessary items shall
be housed in the appropriate control panel which shall be arranged
with front access for maintenance. It shall also be lockable to prevent
unauthorised access and malicious damage to the equipment inside.

C12.2.4 Each relay shall be labelled appropriately to its service either by

function or by code, in which case a code index shall be securely
attached to the panel for easy and positive identification.

C12.2.5 A control cubicle shall be installed for each diesel generating set.

C12.2.6 All circuits shall be accommodated in accordance with IEC 60439-

1:2004.

C12.2.7 The cubicle shall be equipped with anti-condensation heater which

shall be thermostatically controlled.

C12.2.8 The cubicle shall have adequate space mountings for cable terminal
box or boxes suitable for armoured cables or busbar entering and
leaving both at the top and the bottom of the control cubicle, for
connection of mains feeders.

C12.2.9 Terminal blocks and provision for conduit termination shall be

provided for small outgoing wiring. All small wiring shall be
appropriately ferruled and coded for identification.

C12.2.10 The cubicle shall be so partitioned to allow maintenance of the panel

in a safe manner without interrupting the power supply from the mains
to the external loads.

C12.2.11 The cubicle shall be constructed to Form 3b of IEC 60439-1:2004.

Section C12 EE_GS

Page 6 of 31 2007 Edition
 C12.2.12 The cubicle shall be provided with two rubber mats of ribbed surface,
complying to BS 921:1976 or other technically equivalent national or
international standards, laid in front of and at the rear of the cubicle.
The rubber mats shall be continuous sheets of minimum thickness of
10 mm, each of same length as the cubicle and minimum width of not
less than 1000 mm or the width of the space between the front or back
of the cubicle to the adjacent wall.

C12.3 OPERATION REQUIREMENT

C12.3.1 Automatic Operation

Unless otherwise specified, the generating set shall be arranged for

automatic start, automatic full load transfer and automatic stop. All
automatic operations shall be provided with manual override facilities.

(a) Failure of one or more phases of the mains supply, or a

reduction in voltage to less than 80% normal, shall initiate a
timing device adjustable in the range of 0 to 5 seconds. If the
failure persists at the expiry of this pre-set time delay, the
engine start sequence shall be initiated.

(b) On receipt of the start signal the set shall run up to speed and
accept the essential loads automatically as soon as possible
and within a maximum period of 12 seconds. The automatic
load transfer shall be by means of the change-over switch or
remote opening/closing of A.C.B. at the main L.V.
switchboard.

(c) On restoration of the mains supply the set will continue to run
and supply essential loads for an adjustable period of 0 to 10
minutes. Thereafter automatic transfer of essential load to
mains supply shall take place as soon as the adjusted period
expired.

(d) At the end of the adjustable period in (c) the set shall continue
to run on no load for an adjustable period of 0-15 minutes.

(e) If the mains power fails again for a duration exceeding 0.5
second during the adjustable period specified in (c), the control
timer setting of the adjustable period (0-10 minutes) shall be
cancelled and when the mains power is restored again, the
operating sequence will start again from (c).

(f) If the mains fails again during the adjustable period specified
in (d) the essential loads will be connected immediately and
automatically back to the set and the operating sequence will
continue as if the connection had been made in the manner as
described in (b).

Section C12 EE_GS

Page 7 of 31 2007 Edition
 (g) In the event of failure of the engine to start the set shall, after a
pre-determined time delay, make a second attempt to start. A
third attempt may be initiated. Eventually, if it fails to start,
the starting circuits shall be lock-out, and a visible and audible
alarm given which shall remain until reset.

(h) Both electrical and mechanical interlocking devices shall be

provided to prevent starting engagement when the engine is in
motion.

(i) In the event of electrical failure such as over-current, short

circuits or earth fault during the operation of the generator set,
the ACB/MCCB connecting the generating set and the L.V.
Switchboard shall be tripped, the engine shall be shut down
and both visual and audible warning signal shall be given.

(j) Provision shall be made for manual control of the set for
testing purpose, including one "auto-off-manual" selector
switch, "start" and "stop" push-buttons, and a "simulate mains
failure" key switch.

(k) Restoration of normal mains supply during the starting period

shall not interrupt the starting sequence but shall prevent the
load transfer to the alternator. Therefore the operating
sequence will follow the mode as described in (d).

(l) As ACB is used for the protection/ isolation of the generator,

ACB lifting truck shall be provided.

C12.3.2 Protection

Protective devices are required to guard against mechanical and

electrical failure and any continuous running may result in severe
damage of the generating set. In the event of a fault the devices shall
shut down the engine and to initiate both audible and visible alarms.
The audible alarm shall be cancelled by an acknowledge push button.
The setting for each of the system being monitored shall be specified
by the engine manufacturer.

Following are the general requirements for protection of the

generating set.

(a) Protection of Engine

Suitable protection against engine over-speed, coolant

temperature and low oil pressure shall be provided.

(b) Protection of Alternator

Suitable protection against electrical short circuit, overload,

earth fault of the stator and rotor windings, over/under-voltage
and over/under-frequency, loss of excitation, under-speed and
rotation failure of the alternator shall be provided
Section C12 EE_GS
Page 8 of 31 2007 Edition
C12.4 CONTROL REQUIREMENT

C12.4.1 Instruments and functions for control cubicle

(a) Voltmeter and selector switch and fuse 0-500V range.

(b) Ammeter, current transformers and selector switch.

(c) Frequency meter in 45 to 55 Hz range.

(d) Hour-meter.

(e) 4 Poles withdrawable air circuit breaker or 4 Poles MCCB

complete with d.c. shunt trip facility and protection against
overload and short circuit and earth fault by means of over-
current and earth fault protection relay.

(f) 3-phase mains voltage sensing unit.

(g) Auto/off/manual selector switch.

(h) "Start", "Stop" push buttons for manual operation.

(i) "Simulate main failure" key switch.

(j) Diesel generating set anti-condensation element "On-off"

switch.

(k) Automatic 2-rate battery charging equipment complete with

voltmeter and charging rate ammeter.

(l) Automatic voltage regulation unit and excitation controls.

(m) "Engine Fault" automatic shut-down indication lamps, alarm,

and reset buttons.

(n) "Failure to start" indicating lamp, alarm and reset button.

(o) "Diesel generating set Supply Available" indication lamp.

(p) "Mains Available" indication lamp.

(q) "Diesel generating set on Load" indication lamp.

(r) "Mains on Load" indication lamp.

(s) Diesel generating set output under-voltage and over-voltage

protection device. The devices shall be capable of monitoring
the three phase supply and with an adjustable range.

(t) Lamp test push button.

Section C12 EE_GS

Page 9 of 31 2007 Edition
(u) Any other function controls to meet the requirements of
"Clause 3: Operation Requirements".

(v) Cable terminal box or boxes suitable for armoured cables or

busbar trunking entering from the bottom or top of the control
cubicle as appropriate for each site, for connection of mains
cables.

(w) Clean contacts shall be provided in the Control Cubicle for the
following alarms/indications to enable them to be connected
for remote indications:

Alarms/Indications Location

(i) Generator on load Fire control main panel

(ii) Generator fails to start - ditto –

(iii) Auto/off/manual selector - ditto –

switch in manual position

(iv) Generator Engine Fault - ditto –

(v) Generator running - ditto –

(vi) Essential Power Supply Lift Machine

ON/OFF Room

(vii) Essential Power Supply - ditto -

NORMAL/TRIP

(x) The fuel oil tank shall be fitted with two stages fuel capacity
limiting control to alert building management and shut down
non-FSI essential services when the remaining fuel capacity
falls to 7 hours and 6.5 hours continuous running of the
emergency generator respectively.

(y) Contacts shall be provided for controlling each of the

generator room air supply and exhaust fans, remote radiator
fans, cooling water booster pump etc. which shall be ON
automatically when the diesel generating set is started. All
indication lamps shall be operated at a voltage not greater than
50V.

Section C12 EE_GS

Page 10 of 31 2007 Edition
 C12.4.2 Interfacing with CCMS System

(a) All necessary contactors, relays, micro switches, transducers,

transformers, signal and control cables, conduits and other
necessary accessories to facilitate the monitoring by the
Central Control and Monitoring System (also referred to as the
Direct Digital Control System, CCMS or DDC) shall be
provided. These provisions shall include termination works at
dedicated terminal strips in individual control panels of
equipment for connection to an interfacing panel in the
Emergency Generator room of the Building.

(b) The parameters of diesel generating sets system such as engine

oil pressure, coolant temperature, engine rpm, system DC volts,
engine running hours, generator AC volts, generator AC amps,
generator frequency, low oil pressure, high coolant
temperature, over-speed, over-crane, emergency stop, fault
shutdown, fuel oil pump fault and Underground tank/Daily
services oil tank low level alarms shall be all repeated and can
be retrieved in the CCMS for remote monitoring and recording.

(c) The interfacing panel shall be constructed from 1.6 mm thick

stainless steel, with front lockable hinged door.

C12.5 INSTALLATION OF DIESEL GENERATING SETS

C12.5.1 Position

Special attention shall be paid for the construction dimensions and

location of the air intake/outlet louvers and shall ensure that the
capacity of the radiator fan is sufficient for the air requirements of the
generator set. Air discharge restriction of the radiator fan and the air
intake restriction of the generator set shall be selected with
appropriate noise attenuators.

The diesel generating sets shall be properly erected and aligned onto
the concrete plinth and the vibration generated by the set shall be
isolated from the generator room.

C12.5.2 Guards and Insulations

All moving parts, bare exhaust manifolds, pipes and pressure charger
(if any) shall be properly and completely guarded and or insulated in
accordance with the relevant regulations. The guards shall be of such
design that will guard against the serviceman from coming into
contact with any part which is likely to cause injury to personnel. All
guards shall be detachable.

Section C12 EE_GS

Page 11 of 31 2007 Edition
C12.5.3 Air-ducts

An exhaust air duct from the radiator to the louvers mounted in the
wall shall be of 1 mm galvanised M.S. sheet and shall be properly
supported near the radiator end. It shall then be connected to the
radiator flanges through a flexible joint to isolate the vibrations
generated by the diesel generating set. An inspection panel shall be
provided for the ease of future maintenance.

C12.5.4 Engine Exhaust System

(a) The engine exhaust system shall comprise silencer, bellows,

hangers, piping, clamps, flange couplings, heat resisting
jointing. All installation works shall be carried out to suit
actual site requirements.

(b) The silencer shall be capable to attenuate the noise generated

from the exhaust air to a level to cope with the Environment
Protection Department’s requirement.

(c) The complete exhaust from the exhaust manifold to the end of
the exhaust pipe including the silencers, flexible joint and
pressure charger (if any) shall be coated with heat resisting
paint, lagged with non-combustible insulating material and
enclosed with aluminium cladding. Asbestos shall not be used
for insulation. The exposed portion of exhaust pipe outside the
generator room shall be of stainless steel, grade 316.

(d) The exhaust system shall not create a back-pressure exceeding

the amount recommended by the engine manufacturer, and
shall be sufficiently flexibly installed in order to allow for
reasonable amount of expansion and contraction.

(e) The engine exhaust pipe hangers shall incorporate anti-

vibration spring mechanism.

(f) Suitable water draining device shall be provided for the

exhaust system so that no fluid could enter to the diesel
generating set through the exhaust outlet.

(g) The installation of the exhaust outlet shall comply with all
requirements of the Environment Protection Department.

C12.5.5 Electrical Works

(a) (i) Independent earthing system shall be provided for each

of the neutral connection and earthing of the diesel
generating set. The installation of diesel generating set
shall be solidly and effectively earthed in accordance
with the latest edition of the code of practice for the
electricity (wiring) regulations.

Section C12 EE_GS

Page 12 of 31 2007 Edition
 (ii) An earth fault protection relay and the necessary
accessories shall be provided to complete the earth
protection system.

(iii) Joints in copper earth bar shall be brazed together using

pan head riveted and sweated.

(iv) When the plant is subject to vibration, or where

circumstances necessitate, the earthing connections
shall be made of flexible copper conductor having PVC
sheath.

(v) The exposed conductive part of all equipment shall be

earthed into separate earthing terminal.

(b) Sufficient of clean contacts shall be provided in the control

cubicle for each Air Circuit Breaker of the L.V. Main
switchboard for the remote open/close operation of the
respective Air Circuit Breaker.

(c) The control cubicle shall have clean contacts and related
transducers for indications of alarms and status at the Central
Control and Monitoring System (CCMS).

C12.6 ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM USING REMOTE RADIATOR

C12.6.1 General

If remote radiator cooling is required, the following specification in

this section shall be complied with.

C12.6.2 Remote Radiators

(a) The remote radiator shall be suitable for outdoor installation

with ample capacity to comply with the cooling requirement of
the diesel engine. The radiator shall be a forced draft design
with cooling core and fans.

(b) The core shall be encased in a galvanised steel frame and

covered with a removal guard of zinc plated or galvanised
steel wire. The core shall be bolted to a heavy gauge
galvanised steel structure which supports it all points and is
capable of withstanding wind loads to 45 metre/sec. Core
shall consist of the non-ferrous cooling coil tube mechanically
expanded into aluminium plate fins for a permanent bond.
Vents and drains shall be provided in the core.

(c) The fan shall be of the propeller type with aluminium blades.
The fan motor shall be of totally enclosed type, class B
insulated. Zinc plated, close mesh steel wire fan guard shall be
provided. Weatherproof push lock turn reset emergency stop
switch shall be provided to stop the fan in case of emergency.
Section C12 EE_GS
Page 13 of 31 2007 Edition
 (d) The radiator shall be designed so that the overall sound
pressure level shall not exceed the value specified by the
Environmental Protection Department.

C12.6.3 Heat Exchangers

(a) Heat exchanger shall be of the horizontal shell and tube pattern
with the coolant from engine flowing inside the tubes which
shall be straight.

(b) The shell shall consist of either a seamless steel or brass pipe
or a fusion welded steel cylinder with the necessary parts and
flange welded in place.

(c) The tubes may be externally finned or grooved to increase

exchange surface and shall be expanded into grooved holes in
the tube plates and the ends belled. Welding of the tubes to
the tube plate shall not be accepted.

(d) The tubes shall be made of either copper or brass. The tube
plates and supports shall be of stainless steel.

C12.6.4 Water Circulating Pumps

(a) Two water circulating pumps (one duty and 1 standby) shall be
provided for each diesel generating set. The two pumps shall
work automatically and alternatively as duty and standby or
controlled manually by a selector switch on the control panel.

(b) The pump shall be centrifugal type and direct driven through
flexible coupling by electric motor fixed on a common bed
plate.

(c) The pumps shall be constructed to meet the following

requirement:

Pump casing : Cast Iron;

Impeller : Leaded Gunmetal;
Shaft : Stainless Steel Grade 316;
Bearing : Ball or Ball and Roller;
Seals : Mechanical; and
Bolt and Nuts : Stainless Steel.

(d) The pump motor shall be Class B insulation suitable for 380V
50 Hz 3 phase supply. The speed of the motor shall not
exceed 1500 rpm.

Section C12 EE_GS

Page 14 of 31 2007 Edition
C12.6.5 Expansion Tank

(a) An expansion tank of suitably capacity for each water

circulating system with ballcock, valve, overflow, drain and all
necessary accessories shall be provided to meet the local
regulations and the operational requirement.

(b) The tank shall be fabricated from mild steel plates of 3mm
thickness welded onto a mild steel frame. To stiffen the tank,
mild steel flat bars are to be intermittently welded on the
inside of the tank.

(c) All steel work, mild steel angle stand including the surfaces of
the tank shall be painted with one coat of best quality primer
and two coats of best quality paint. Colour of the tank shall be
directed by the Architect or his Representative.

C12.6.6 Pipework and Valve

All pipework shall be R250 copper pipe to BS EN 1057:1996.

Jointing method for pipe size 65 mm and above shall be of the flanged
brazing or bronze welded type.

All pipes shall be properly pitched and supported with strong hangers,
brackets and saddles. The support system shall be designed to take
into account the size of the pipelines, their content and materials of
construction, the vibration isolation components, the amount and
direction of movement, the location of the pipeline in relation to the
building fabric and other services and the need for access. Adequate
provision shall be provided for free expansion and contraction of the
pipeline.

Gate valves shall be flanged cast iron body with bronze trim, cast iron
wedge, bronze rising stem. Globe valves shall be flanged cast iron
body, renewable bronze disc and seat, outside screw and bronze rising
stem.

Disconnecting flanges shall be installed at valves and at suitable

locations for cleaning and removal of piping. Where pipes pass
through walls or slabs, pipe sleeves shall be provided.

Pipes and valves shall be painted in colours with directional arrow

indication.

C12.6.7 Hydraulic Test

(a) Water system and circuits shall be hydraulically tested.

(b) Test pressure for water circuits and components shall be 2

times working pressure, or 1.5 working pressure plus 3.5 bar
whichever is lower.

Section C12 EE_GS

Page 15 of 31 2007 Edition
 C12.6.8 Power Supply and Control System

(a) Power supply to the remote radiator and the pump shall be fed
from the control cubicle. All cables shall be PVC insulated to
IEC 60189-2:1981 and run in steel conduits or PVC armoured
cable as appropriate.

(b) Control panel housing fuseswitch, the starter and control

circuit for the remote radiator and the water pump shall be
provided. They shall be automatically started and stopped in
line with the operation of the diesel generating set.

C12.7 FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM.

C12.7.1 Underground Horizontal Fuel Storage Tank

(a) Construction

(i) The construction of the underground fuel storage tank

shall comply with BS 2594:1975 or other technically
equivalent national or international standards.

(ii) All joints in the tank shell and dished ends shall comply
with EN 1011-1:1998 and BS EN 499:1995.

(iii) Tank shells shall be made of rings and each ring shall
be formed from a single plate or from not more than
two plates welded together, rolled into a true circle. No
longitudinal weld in any ring shall lie within the bottom
third of the tank circumference in accordance with BS
2594:1975 or other technically equivalent national or
international standards. Longitudinal seam welds in
adjoining rings of plate shall be staggered from one
another by a minimum of 45 degrees. Joints or seams
shall not be placed in the positions of the cradles. All
openings in the tank shall be located clear of the
welding seams.

(iv) An end plate made up from two smaller plates is

acceptable. The welded joint between them shall be
horizontal and above the centre of the tank end.

(v) The inside surfaces of the tank shall be smooth and free
from any obstruction apart from essential pipe
connections. No internal bracing or gusset plates will
be permitted inside the tanks.

(vi) Tank-hole covers and all flanges and pads associated

with each manhole cover shall be provided and
complete with bolts, washers and joint rings as shown
on the Drawings.

Section C12 EE_GS

Page 16 of 31 2007 Edition
 (vii) After the construction has been completed, the tank
shall be thoroughly cleaned and all loose debris
removed. It shall than be tested hydraulically at a
pressure of 70 kPa, measured at the top of the tank. The
pressure shall be maintained for a period of 2 hours to
ensure that the tank is sound and shows no leaks or
undue distortion. The test shall be carried out in the
presence of and to the satisfaction of the Architect or
his Representative.

The pressure gauge employed for the test shall be tested

and calibrated by approved laboratory before use.
Pressure gauge with full-scale deflection readings more
than 3 times the test pressure shall not be used.

(viii) Immediately after hydraulic test of the tank, the tank

shall be drained and dried out and a thick coat of
linseed oil shall be applied on the interior surfaces of
the tank to prevent rusting.

(b) Protection of Tank

All parts of the exterior surfaces of the tank shall be

thoroughly cleaned by mechanical means to remove all rust,
mill scale, grease and other foreign matters to achieve a bright,
rust free and dry surface. The painting procedures shall
comply with ISO 12944:1998.

(c) Calibration

(i) The tank shall be calibrated after it has been installed in

the tank chamber, by dipstick. The measuring device
shall be calibrated.

(ii) The dipstick shall be made from 20 mm diameter brass

pipe. When the tank has been calibrated, the dipstick
shall be marked on all faces by clearly scribed lines of
100 litres intervals for the tanks up to 10000 litre in
capacity and of 250 litres interval for those above
10000 litre, and have the volume in figures stamped on
two opposite faces at interval of 1000 litres.

(iii) After calibration, the tank shall be thoroughly dried out

and applied with a thick coat of linseed oil on the
interior surface to prevent rusting.

(iv) The results of calibration shall be tabulated and

submitted for record purpose.

Section C12 EE_GS

Page 17 of 31 2007 Edition
C12.7.2 Daily Service Fuel Tank

(a) Construction of the Daily Service Fuel Tank

The daily service tank shall be fabricated from mild steel

plates welded onto a mild steel frame. To stiffen the tank, mild
steel flat bars are to be intermittently welded on the inside of
the tank.

(b) Accessories of Daily Service Fuel Tank

The tank shall be fitted with the following standard accessories:

(i) A tapped filling socket connection on top of the tank

complete with all the necessary fittings and union
coupling for connection to the filling pipe.

(ii) A tapped overflow socket connection close to the top

and on the side of the tank complete with all the
necessary fittings and union coupling for connection to
the overflow pipe or plugged with a brass screw cap if
it is not used.

(iii) A tapped outlet socket connection close to the bottom

and on the side of strainers, and union coupling for
connection to the delivery pipe strainer must be
submitted for approval before installation.

(iv) A tapped drain socket connection at the bottom of the

tank complete with all the necessary fittings connection
to and including the 20 mm gate valve.

(v) A tapped return socket connection on the top of tank

complete with all the necessary fittings and union
coupling for the connection to the return pipe; or
plugged with a brass screw cap if it is not used.

(vi) A tapped vent socket connection on the top of tank

complete with all the necessary fittings and union
coupling for the connection to the vent pipe.

(vii) One quick closing valve installed on the delivery pipe

complete with all necessary linkage for operation from
outside the building. If steel wire linkage and pulleys
are used, the wire must be properly adjusted in length
and protected; and the pulleys securely anchored.

Section C12 EE_GS

Page 18 of 31 2007 Edition
 (viii) The tank shall be fitted with an approved content gauge
unit. Provide an accurate measuring device for the
calibration of the content gauge and a supporting stand
which shall be fabricated form angle iron complete with
strut and tie members as may be deemed necessary.
They shall be designed in such a way that it will be
possible to remove the tank without first lifting it. A
mild steel oil drip tray welded to the angle bracket or
stand shall also be included. Exact height of the frame
shall be determined to suit site requirement.

(c) Painting of the Daily Service Fuel Tank

All parts of the exterior surfaces of the tank shall be

thoroughly cleaned by mechanical means to remove all rust,
mill scale, grease and other foreign matters to achieve a bright,
rust free and dry surface and then painted with one coat of zinc
rich primer, one coat of epoxy based under coat and two
finishing coats of approved paint.

The interior surface of the tank shall be thoroughly dried out

and applied with a thick coat of linseed oil to prevent rusting.

C12.7.3 Fuel Transfer Pumping System

(a) Electrical Fuel Transfer Pumps

Rotary fuel transfer pumps complete with all necessary

accessories including strainers, check valves, gate valves etc.
shall be provided.

(i) The pumps shall be positive displacement type, with

high quality cast iron body, high tensile steel shafts and
built in internal relief valve.

(ii) Each pump shall be capable of delivering 'ultra low

sulphur' diesel fuel oil at 300 kPa 950 rpm maximum
with capacity. For each pair of pumps a manual switch
shall be provided to select the pump running mode as
"duty" or "standby" respectively.

(iii) The coupling motor shall be flame proof 3 phase, 50 Hz,

380V with no volt release and overload protection. It
shall have a manual/auto/off switch with connections
for remote start/stop operation by the level switch at the
daily service tank. The duty pump shall be actuated
when the fuel level in the daily service tank fall below
30% of the tank capacity, cut off automatically when
the tank is 90% full. The pumps shall also be
inoperative when the fuel level in the underground
storage tank falls below a pre-set level.

Section C12 EE_GS

Page 19 of 31 2007 Edition
 (iv) Audible alarm shall be given off under the following
conditions:

- underground storage tank fuel level low; and

- pump fail to start.

(v) A composite pump control cubicle in the pump room

incorporating the starters, safety and protection devices,
all necessary wiring work, relays, fuel level control and
alarm, push button and indication lights shall be
provided. The cubicle shall be of wall-mounted type,
type of protection EEx d flameproof enclosures for
operation in Zone 1 hazardous area as classified
IPMCSP and IP 66 enclosure to IEC 60529:2001. The
drawings and the official certificate issued by
BASEEFA (British Approvals Services for Electrical
Equipment in Flame Atmosphere) of the cubicle shall
be submitted.

(b) Control Equipment

The following controls and indicator lights shall be

incorporated on the control cubicle:

(i) A suitably rated main supply door-interlocked isolator

with "Supply On" indicator light;

(ii) An "Automatic/Off/Manual" selector switch;

(iii) Push button manual "star/stop" of each of the pump set,

and the corresponding indicator lights;

(iv) Indicator lights showing "pump running";

(v) Selector switch to select duty pump;

(vi) Clean contacts for connection to CCMS for the status

monitoring of the pumps;

(vii) Engraved labels in both English and Chinese for all

control operations shall be incorporated on the
composite control cubicle; and

(viii) Indicator lights showing the remaining fuel capacity

falls to 7 hours and 6.5 hours continuous running of the
emergency generator respectively.

(c) Hand Pump

A semi-rotary double acting hand pump shall be provided for

each daily service tank and consist of 25 mm diameter inlet
and outlet and a 25 mm diameter flexible oil resistant inlet
pipe of adequate length to suit site condition.
Section C12 EE_GS
Page 20 of 31 2007 Edition
C12.7.4 Pipeworks and Fittings

(a) General

(i) Supply and install all necessary fittings and pipework

of approved design as required by the emergency
generating plants and as generally shown on the
Drawings. However exact dimension of piping shall be
determined on site and any modification of pipe route
indicated on Drawings requires prior approval from the
Architect.

(ii) All pipes up to 80 mm diameter shall confirm with ISO

65:1981 heavy quality and pipes 80 mm diameter and
above with BS 1600:1991 or other technically
equivalent national or international standards.

(iii) Flanges shall be slip-on-welding type in accordance

with ISO 7005-1:1992 Class 150. Screwed fittings
shall be made of malleable iron and threads shall
comply with ISO 7-1:1994.

(iv) All screwed joints shall be cleaned, threaded and pulled

up tightly. All jointing materials shall be diesel resistant.
Gaskets made of rubber or compressed asbestos fibre
shall not be used.

(v) Particular care shall be taken to ensure that all pipes

and fittings are carefully reamed to ensure that the full
bore of the pipe is maintained and where necessary
cleaned out before erection.

(vi) Square elbows shall not be used, where practicable,

long sweep bends shall be used in preference to round
elbows.

(vii) Valves shall be of 'fully way' type to allow free flow of

fuel. A sample valve shall be submitted to the Architect
for approval before installation. Valves shall be made
of bronze.

(viii) Round piping supports and anchors as necessary to be

suitably placed to the instruction of the Architect, in
order to provide rigidity to reduce stresses due to
unstable ground.

(ix) Jointing materials shall be diesel resistant.

(x) A return diesel pipe shall also be provided from the

generator back to the daily service tank.

Section C12 EE_GS

Page 21 of 31 2007 Edition
 (b) Protection of Buried Pipe

The procedures for protection of the buried pipes shall be as

follows:

(i) Clean the outer surface of the pipe to remove all rust,
mill scale, grease and other foreign matters to achieve
a rust free and dry surface;

(ii) apply one layer of petrolatum compound primer paste

or approved equivalent as primer to give a thin
continuous coating over the area to be protected;

(iii) apply petrolatum compound tape or approved

equivalent spiral on the pipe with minimum 55%
overlap. Care should be taken to ensure the tape is in
contact with the underlying surface of the pipe and to
smooth out any wrinkles or air pockets; and

(iv) apply bitumen fabric-reinforced tape or approved

equivalent on the pipe with minimum 55% overlap as
an outerwrap.

(c) Painting of Pipework

All pipework, other than the buried pipes, shall be painted with
one coat of zinc rich primer before installation and painted
immediately after installation with one coat of epoxy based
under coat and two finishing coats of best quality paint.

C12.7.5 Diesel Fuel Level Switches

(a) General

(i) The level switches shall be manufactured to

- IEC 60079-0:2004 Electrical Apparatus for

Explosive Gas Atmospheres; and
- IP Model Code of Safe Practice (Electrical) of the
Institute of Petroleum Code of Great British
(IPMCSP).

(b) Classification

(i) The level switch shall be of Group IIA and

Temperature Class T1 in accordance with IEC 60079-
0:2004.

(ii) The electrical components of the level switch installed

in the vapour space above fuel and inside the fuel
tank(s) shall be of the type of protection of EEx ia
which is suitable for installation in Zone 0 Hazardous
Area as classified in IPMCSP.
Section C12 EE_GS
Page 22 of 31 2007 Edition
 (iii) The electrical components of the level switch installed
outside of the fuel tank shall be of the type of
protection of

- EEx ib or
- EEx d or
- EEx P which are all suitable for installation in
Zone 1 Hazardous Area as classified in IPMCSP.

(c) Performance Requirements

Unless otherwise stated, the level switch (in general

accompanied with a controller) shall be capable to control
on/off operation of a remote system when a preset level of the
diesel fuel in the storage tank is reached. Details of the
operation and the exact control level settings shall be as stated
in the Specification. The level switch shall be suitable for on-
site calibration of the level settings.

Sufficient of level settings are required for fuel capacity

limiting control to alert building management and shut down
non-FSI essential services when the remaining fuel capacity
falls to 7 hours and 6.5 hours continuous running of the
emergency generator respectively.

(d) General Construction

(i) The level switch shall consist of two major components

- a level sensor and a switch unit, both of which shall
meet the classification as specified in Sub-section
C12.7.5(b). Where applicable, the level switch shall be
accompanied with a controller to perform the function
as stated in Sub-section C12.7.5(c).

(ii) The level sensing element shall be installed in a tube of

stainless steel and places inside the fuel storage tank. It
shall be mounted horizontally or vertically depending
on the principle of operation.

(iii) The switch unit shall be mounted on the tank and with
the level sensor to form an integral set. The unit shall
be housed inside a casing made of cast iron or
aluminium alloy. It shall be capable of detecting the
signal from the sensor and transmitting it (in general
through a controller) to control the on/off operation of a
remote system.

Section C12 EE_GS

Page 23 of 31 2007 Edition
 (e) Certification

A copy of certificate to prove the apparatus rating shall be

submitted. Certificate issued by authorities other than
BASEEFA (British Approvals Services for Electrical
Equipment in Flame Atmosphere) shall be furnished with
details of relevant standard.

(f) Technical Information

A full descriptive technical brochure giving details of the

equipment offered, including construction, dimensions,
method of installation etc. shall be submitted.

C12.8. ACOUSTIC TREATMENT INSTALLATION

C12.8.1 Performance Requirements

(a) The acoustic treatment package shall be designed to ensure

that when the generator set is running under full load the
generated noise complies with the "Noise from Places other
than Domestic Premises, Public Places or Construction Sites"
under the Noise Control Ordinance.

(b) For Commissioning and Testing purposes, the proposed points

at which measurements have to be carried out according to the
method set out in the "Technical Memorandum for The
Assessment Of Noise From Places Other Than Domestic
Premises, Public Places or Construction Sites".

C12.8.2 Scope of work

The scope of work shall include but not limit to the followings:

(a) Pipework acoustic sleeving.

(b) Duct Silencer for all air passage including air inlet louvre, air
discharge outlet louvres, ventilation fan and coupled radiator.

(c) Mufflers/silencer for the engine exhaust air system including

exhaust flues.

(d) Acoustic wall and ceiling lining inside Generator Room.

(e) Acoustic enclosures including silencer and acoustic lining for

the remote radiator, if required.

(f) Other acoustic treatments required.

(g) Measurement of Noise level at the specified point.

Section C12 EE_GS

Page 24 of 31 2007 Edition
 All vibration and noise suppression equipment shall be sound
workmanship and robust design and shall be supplied by
manufacturers experienced in the design and construction of
similar equipment and who have made equipment and
materials for similar duties for at least 5 years.

C12.8.3 Installation of the Acoustic Treatment System

(a) Pipework Acoustic Sleeving

Wherever necessary to maintain acoustic integrity of the

system acoustic seal sleeving to all pipes penetrating the
building structure shall be provided.

Pipework sleeves shall consist of an inner pipe lined with

mineral wool and clamping end plates with neoprene seals.
Pipe in situ shall be fitted with split clamping rings. Pipe
temperatures above 115 oC shall have silicon fibre seals.

Pipes shall be resiliently supported on either side of the

penetration by resilient hangers.

Seals shall comply with FSD requirements wherever

appropriate.

(b) Duct Silencers for All Air Passage

The duct silencers shall consist of an outer casing fabricated

from galvanised steel sheet not less than 1.6 mm thick and a
number of splitters made from 0.8 mm perforated galvanised
steel sheets which divide the silencer into separate longitudinal
airways. Sound shall be attenuated by the sound absorptive fill
in the splitter as air passes through those airways.

The sound absorbent material shall be non-combustible

inorganic glassfibre or mineral wool or other approved and
equivalent material and shall have a glass fibre mat facing.
The material shall be fitted in the splitters with at least 10%
compactness. The material shall also be non-hygroscopic,
resistant to attack by moulds and insects. The material should
be supported so that it does not shake down but remains intact
during the life of the plant. Bird screen made of galvanized
wire mesh shall be provided with all intake silencers.

The acoustic fill shall be suitable for continuous exposure up

to 260oC with the galvanised steel sheet having a temperature
limit of 400oC. A polyester membrane shall be used to line up
the silencer to prevent ingress of dust and/or water into the
sound absorptive fill. The absorptive fill in the splitters shall
be firmly secured as to be free from erosion for channel
velocity up to 30 m/s.

Section C12 EE_GS

Page 25 of 31 2007 Edition
 The shape of the splitters shall be designed for maximum
possible sound attenuation with the minimum possible
resistance to air flow. Maximum allowance pressure drop is
50 Pa. The minimum sound insertion loss (dB) of the silencer,
tested in accordance with or other technically equivalent
national or international standards, shall be as follows:

Octave Band Centre Frequency (Hz)

Frequency (Hz) 63 125 250 500 1k 2k 4k

Minimum
8 18 24 40 45 46 41
Insertion Loss
(dB)

The silencer shall have fully welded seams or duct sealer to

ensure air tightness. All weld affected parts shall be touched
up with an zinc rich paint and all exposed ferrous parts
including the frame shall be protected from corrosion by
applying rust-inhibiting primer paint, an undercoat and
finishing coat of colour as determined by the Architect on Site.
All such primer and paint shall be resistant to heat up to the
working temperature of 260oC.

(c) Mufflers for Engine Exhaust

Exhaust gas muffler (or mufflers) of low noise level type shall
be provided for each engine such that the noise level standard/
requirement can be achieved.

In case that the above standard cannot be achieved with the

installation of exhaust gas mufflers, suitable acoustic enclosure
shall be provided at the engine exhaust pipe outlet to attenuate
the noise before the hot exhaust air is discharged. The
acoustic enclosure shall be capable to withstand the hot engine
exhaust air which may be up to 650oC.

(d) Acoustic Wall/Ceiling Lining Inside Generator Room

Acoustic treatment to the generator room walls, doors and

ceiling wherever else necessary in order to reduce the room
reverberant noise level and time is required.

Acoustic wall/ceiling lining shall be fabricated from sound

absorptive material firmly hold in position by G.I. channels
and protected by perforated galvanised sheet steel.

Section C12 EE_GS

Page 26 of 31 2007 Edition
 The material shall be in form of the high density rigid section
fibreglass or rock-wood slabs or other similar approved
material having a minimum thickness of 50 mm and a density
around 48 kg/m3. The acoustic fills shall be of Class 1 or 2
rate of surface flame spread as laid down in BS 476-7:1997 or
other technically equivalent national or international standards.

The minimum random incidence absorption coefficient of

material when fixed as specified shall be as follows:

Frequency (Hz) 125 250 500 1000 2000

Absorption
0.26 0.78 1.11 1.10 1.04
Coefficient

Material shall be selected of suitable random incidence

absorption coefficient to suit the site condition and equipment
offered.

A polyester membrane shall be lined between the glass fibre

and perforated sheet for better protection against dust and
water.

The fixing GI channels shall be 25 x 50 x 1.0 mm thick and

shall be fixed by fastener onto the wall surfaces at an intervals
of 600 mm approximately.

The protective perforated steel sheet shall be fabricated from

galvanised sheet of not less than 0.8mm thick and shall be
secured by self tapping screws to the G.I. channels. The holes
shall be 2.4mm diameter with 4.8mm centre to centre distance.
The perforated metal sheet shall be removable to enable future
maintenance.

The acoustic lining shall not pack down or settle after

installation. All metal surfaces shall be undercoated and
finished with 2 coats white gloss paint.

Samples and recognised test certificates for the absorption

material shall be submitted to the Architect for approval.

(e) Acoustic Enclosure for Remote Radiators if Required

A complete acoustic treatment to the remote radiator shall be

provided to achieve the standard specified in the previous
section which include the whole remote radiators with opening
for air intake and discharge. Duct silencer shall be installed for
every air passage. The sound absorptive material for the duct
silence shall be capable to withstand high temperature
generated from the remote radiator.

Section C12 EE_GS

Page 27 of 31 2007 Edition
 The whole acoustic enclosure shall be designed to facilitate
easy access to the remote radiator for maintenance.

C12.9 EXHAUST FAN FOR EMERGENCY GENERATOR ROOM

Ventilation of the generator room is achieved by an axial flow

exhaust fan with air duct silencer and other accessories. The air flow
capacity of the fan shall have a minimum value of 10 air change/hour.

The design, material and workmanship of the axial fan, duct work and
silencer of the ventilation system shall comply, with all relevant
sections of the "General Specification for Air-conditioning,
Refrigeration, Ventilation and Central Monitoring and Control
System Installation in Government Building, Hong Kong" published
by Architectural Services Department, the government of the Special
Administrative Region.

C12.10 LIFTING HOIST

C12.10.1 One manual lifting hoist complete with trolley shall be supplied and
installed for each diesel generating set. The hoist shall be chain driven
for maintenance and relocation purposes.

C12.10.2 The load chain shall be of malleable quality, electrically welded,

pitched and of calibrated steel complying with ISO 1834:1999,
1835 :1980, 3075:1980, 3076:1984, 3077:2001 and proof tested to
twice the safe working load specified for the hoist and trolley.

C12.10.3 The hooks shall comply fully with EN 1677-5:2001 or other

technically equivalent national or international standards. They shall
be able to rotate upon ball or roller bearings for ease of swivelling,
and provided with a catch to prevent displacement of wire rope from
the hook.

C12.10.4 All moving parts of the hoist and trolley shall be greased or oiled
after installation. Ball or roller bearings shall be packed with
appropriate grease.

C12.10.5 Standard I-beam completed with end stopper shall be provided and
ensure that the construction of the stoppers of the I-beams is suitable
to stop the trolley motion outside the working range.

C12.10.6 A qualified surveyor to carry out the formal test under load conditions
is required. The hoist with trolley shall be tested to a proof load of at
least 125% of safe working load on site. Original surveyor certificate
and copy of completed forms for Labour Department shall be
submitted.

Section C12 EE_GS

Page 28 of 31 2007 Edition
C12.11. WARNING SIGN

A warning sign of reasonable size stating "Attention - Engine starts

automatically without warning. Do not come close." in lettering not less than
10 mm high with Chinese translation (注意: 發動機會隨時啓動) shall be
provided and fixed at a prominent position in the generator room.

The warning sign board shall be made from laminated self coloured materials
and engraved with the description as mentioned in the previous paragraph.

C12.12. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

The electrical and control schematic diagrams for the diesel generating set shall
be fixed in wooden frame with transparent pane of suitable size. These
schematic diagrams shall be placed at a prominent position in the generator
room

C12.13 TESTING

C12.13.1 Testing of Diesel Generating Sets

(a) The complete and fully assembled diesel generating set shall
also be tested at the manufacturer's works before despatch,
including full operating tests as well as tests on control,
protections such as over-voltage protection, under-voltage
protection, engine over-speed protection and protection device
overload trip, alarms, governor trials and fuel consumption
tests, and tests showing the step load acceptance capability, in
accordance with the relevant British Standard Specification.

(b) The performance tests for all equipment and systems installed
shall be tested in accordance with "Commissioning and
Testing Procedure for Emergency Generator Installation in
Government Buildings, Hong Kong" published by the
Building Services Branch, Architectural Services Department.
This shall include the necessary adjustment and setting of all
controls, checking the operation of all overload protection and
safety devices and the commissioning of the completed
installation.

(c) All apparatus, fuels, tools and instruments necessary for

testing the installation shall be available. Test methods and
measurements shall be in accordance with ISO 8528-6:2005.
All readings given by the measuring instrument shall be in S.I.
units.

Section C12 EE_GS

Page 29 of 31 2007 Edition
 (d) Diesel fuel, water, lubricants etc. shall be provided for all tests
including dummy load test, actual load test and other fire
services test. Sufficient quantities of these consumables shall
be topped up before carrying out such tests. Two additional
fire service tests shall be allowed following satisfactory
completion of dummy load tests.

(e) Four copies of certified results of the tests are required to show
that the installation of diesel generating set has been tested and
commissioned in accordance with the Commissioning and
Testing Procedure .

(f) Sound pressure level measurement, with octave band

frequency analysis shall be conducted.

C12.13.2 Testing of Control Cubicle

(a) Performance tests for Control Cubicle shall be conducted in

accordance with "Commissioning and Testing Procedure for
Electrical Installation in Government Buildings, Hong Kong"
published by the Building Services Branch, Architectural
Services Department.

(b) Electrical resistance test (Ductor Test) and temperature rise

test for the control cubicle shall be carried out before the
cubicle is accepted and energised. The test shall include the
measurement of electrical resistance for all joints, connections
and internal resistance of protective devices e.g. ACB, MCCB,
F/SW etc. All instruments used inclusive of make, serial
number shall be recorded and the results of the measurements
shall be properly documented.

C12.13.3 Testing of Daily Service Tank, Fuel Storage Tank and Pipework

(a) The daily service tank, fuel storage tank and the completed
pipework shall be hydraulically tested for a period of time not
less than 2 hours without undue deformation and leaking. The
following test pressure shall be used:

(i) 70 kPa for the daily service tank and the fuel storage
tank; and

(ii) 700 kPa for the completed pipework, valves and fittings.

(b) Pressure gauges with full scale deflection readings more than 3
times the test pressures shall not be used. The pressure gauges
employed in test shall be tested and calibrated by approved
laboratory before use.

Section C12 EE_GS

Page 30 of 31 2007 Edition
 (c) Immediately after the hydraulic testing, the daily service tank
and fuel storage tank must be drained and dried out and a thick
coat of linseed oil or equivalent coating shall be applied on the
interior surfaces of the tank to prevent rusting. All pipework,
fittings and valves after tests shall be drained, dried and
flushed out with linseed oil to remove all traces of water to
prevent rusting.

(d) The following information shall be permanently and clearly

marked on a nameplate to be attached to daily service tank and
fuel storage tank in an agreed position:

- Contractor's name;
- Gross capacity in litres; and
- Date of hydraulic test.

C12.13.4 Testing of Noise Control System

After the completion of the acoustic installation, a sound pressure

level measurement, with octave band frequency analysis, at the
agreed points shall be conducted.

The method of measurement shall generally be in accordance with BS

4142:1997 or other technically equivalent national or international
standards. Measurement shall be taken by an industrial grades sound
level meter.

C12.13.5 Testing of Exhaust Fan

The testing of Exhaust Fan and all accessories shall comply with the
testing requirement in accordance with the Building Services Branch,
Commissioning and Testing for Air-conditioning, Refrigeration,
Ventilation and Control Systems in Government Buildings, Hong
Kong.

C12.14 SUBMISSION TO THE AUTHORITIES

4 weeks after the award of the contract, the Contractor shall provide all
necessary information for the submission to the Authorities for the Diesel
Generator Installation for the compliance of various Statutory Regulations,
including but not limit to the Fire ‘Service Regulations, the Dangerous Goods
Regulations and the Air Pollution Control Regulations. The information shall
include drawings, equipment catalogues, data sheets, calculations and other
information as required by the relevant Authorities.

Section C12 EE_GS

Page 31 of 31 2007 Edition
 SECTION C13

HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR AND EQUIPMENT

C13.1 HIGH VOLTAGE - GENERAL

This section covers the design, manufacture, testing and delivery of high voltage
induction motors and associated switchgear of rated voltages 3.3 kV, 6.6 kV or
11 kV.

Unless otherwise specified by the Electricity Supply Company, the following

system fault level shall be assumed:

Table C13.1 - System Fault Level

Nominal system voltage 3.3 kV 6.6 kV 11 kV

Maximum symmetrical fault level 150 MVA 225 MVA 380 MVA

C13.2 HIGH VOLTAGE - ELECTRIC MOTORS

C13.2.1 Performance Requirements

(a) General Requirements

(i) Type - High efficiency 3-phase

squirrel cage induction motor;

(ii) Standards - IEC 60034-1:2004;

(iii) Duty rating - Maximum Continuous Rating

(MCR), SI duty;

(iv) Insulation - Class F design for Class B

operation, IEC 60034-1:2004;

(v) Maximum speed - 25 rev/s synchronous speed;

(vi) Vibration level - IEC 60034-14:2007; and

(vii) Power factor - 0.85 minimum under full load

conditions, otherwise power
factor correction be
incorporated.

(b) Electricity Supply

The electricity supply to the high voltage motors shall be 3.3

kV, 6.6 kV or 11 kV 3 phase, as specified in the Contract
Documents.

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 1 of 38 2007 Edition
 (c) Starting Performance

Unless otherwise specified, the motor shall be provided with

auto-transformer starter to limit the starting current to not
exceeding 2.5 times of full load current.

The motor shall be designed to permit not less than three starts
per hour equally spaced during normal running conditions.
The motor shall also be suitable for two starts in succession
followed by a 30 minutes interval before attempting another
starting sequence.

The minimum voltage at motor windings at starting shall be

50% nominal for motor with auto-transformer starter.

The starting (run-up) torque characteristics of motor at

minimum voltage shall be adequate for driving the load to full
running speed under the most arduous conditions specified.
The accelerating torque at any speed up to the peak torque
point shall not be less than 10% of the motor rated full load
torque.

Motor with auto-transformer starting shall be with 50% rated

voltage across its winding and without changing to its final
connection, and shall run to at least 90% of its synchronous
speed within 10 seconds.

(d) Power Rating

Motors shall be capable of operating continuously at any

voltage in the range 90-110% of rated voltage and shall have
power output of not less than 120% of the maximum power
absorbed by the driven machines.

(e) Transient Recovery

Motors shall be capable of recovering normal operation in the

event of a system disturbance causing temporary loss of
supply voltage for periods of up to 0.2 seconds (fault
clearance-time) followed by a sudden restoration to 80% rated
voltage. At this voltage the motors shall then be capable of
accelerating to ultimate recovery under the most arduous load
conditions.

C13.2.2 Enclosure

For open type motor drive, the enclosure shall have the degree of
protection of minimum IP 44 unless otherwise specified. Dimensions
and frame number of motors shall comply with IEC 60072-1:1991
and IEC 60072-2:1990.

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 2 of 38 2007 Edition
 The motor frame shall be designed to facilitate easy removal of rotor
assembly and to permit access from both motor ends for cleaning and
rewinding of the stator winding and replacement of the complete
stator core assembly.

The motor shall be provided with suitable arrangement to facilitate

lifting and handling during erection and overhaul.

C13.2.3 Thermal Insulation & Characteristics

The motor windings and accessories shall be designed for Class F

insulation with Class B maximum temperature limit to IEC 60034-
1:2004.

Natural rubber insulated cables shall not be used between the stator
windings and motor terminals.

C13.2.4 Motor Stators & Windings

The motor winding insulation shall withstand voltage stress caused by

switching of motor starter using SF6 circuit breaker, vacuum circuit
breaker or vacuum contactor.

Motors shall be designed to permit high voltage tests in accordance

with IEC 60034-1:2004 to be conducted after erection on site.

End windings shall be rigidly braced to prevent their movement at the

specified service duty.

The insulation system of stator windings shall be of the resin-rich

type or the vacuum pressure impregnated type. Windings shall be
given a surface treatment where necessary to prevent deterioration
resulting from adverse environmental conditions and for corona
shield.

Winding coils shall be of the pre-formed type. Random-wound type

windings and hair-pin type windings are not acceptable. Stator slots
shall be of the open type to facilitate easy insertion of replacement
windings.

C13.2.5 Rotor

Unless otherwise specified, the rotor shall have cage type

copper/copper alloy winding.

The limits of vibration shall comply with IEC 60034-14:2007.

The rotor shall be dynamically balanced at its rated speed or a speed

not less than 600 rpm to confirm that vibration levels are within the
specified limit. Means for fixing balancing weights in-situ shall be
provided at both ends of the rotor without the need to dismantle the
motor for balancing on site.

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 3 of 38 2007 Edition
 For motors of 750 kW rating and above or where the induced shaft
voltage exceeds 0.15V, an insulated bearing arrangement shall be
provided. Where such provision is made, all motor bearings shall be
insulated from the stator frame and a removable earth bonding link
shall be provided at the driving end to facilitate insulation tests. Oil
and water pipes etc. where fitted shall be insulated to prevent a
current return path through the bearings of the motor shaft. Care shall
be taken to ensure that any insulation is not short circuited by the
application of electrically conducting paints or fixing clips.

C13.2.6 Bearings

(a) General

Bearings shall be exclusively of metric sizes.

Unless otherwise specified or approved, bearings for

horizontal motors shall be provided in accordance with Table
C13.2.6 below.

Table C13.2.6 - Type of Bearing

Number of Poles Motor Rating Types of Bearing

4 Above 500 kW Plain
Up to 500 kW Rolling
6 or more Above 750 kW Plain
Up to 750 kW Rolling

The motor manufacturer shall examine the external axial and

radial load imposed from the shaft and the driven device in the
selection of the type of bearing to be used. Where damage is
likely to occur to rolling bearings due to thrust load or
stationary vibration, plain type bearings shall be preferred.
Consideration shall also be given to bearing service life, noise,
losses and maintenance convenience in the selection of
bearings. Where rolling type bearing is selected to be used,
the manufacturer shall provide calculation to verify that the
L10 life of bearing is not less than 50,000 hours at the most
onerous operating conditions.

Bearings shall be easily accessible for inspection and shall be

liberally rated to ensure cool, even running. Bearings shall be
suitable for reverse rotation at 150% of the normal running
speed.

Motor bearings supplied shall be prevented from damage by

any stray currents as detailed in Sub-section C13.3.5.

Protective and auxiliary equipment applicable as per Clauses

C13.2.11(b) and C13.2.11(c) shall be provided for bearings.

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 4 of 38 2007 Edition
(b) Plain Type Bearings

Plain type bearings shall be self-lubricated. The lubrication oil

shall be water-cooled unless otherwise specified. The cooler
shall be such as to avoid any electrolytic action or corrosion.
Bearings shall be designed to exclude the ingress of dust and
water and adequately sealed to prevent leakage of oil.

The water pipes shall not run over or adjacent to the HV

terminal boxes and shall not impede access to the bearing for
inspection. The initial filling of bearing lubricating oil shall be
supplied and delivered in an oil drum.

Bearings shall be provided with a filling hole, an air breather,

an accessible drain plug and a clearly visible oil level indicator
to show oil levels during running and at standstill. Sight level
indicators of the type fitted externally to the bearing shall be
designed to prevent rotation about the gland connection.

Besides the normal running operation, the lubrication shall

also be adequate during starting and running down periods.

The bearing design shall avoid oil being drawn into the
winding through the shaft by centrifugal force or the effect of
ventilation fan.

The bearing mounting bracket assembly shall be capable of

completely detached from the stator, viz. no welding to the
stator frame shall be permitted.

Bearing pads shall be self aligning in design, and shall not

require any jacking screws for adjustment.

(c) Rolling Type Bearings

Rolling type bearings shall be adequately lubricated by grease

and sealed against leakage of lubricant along the shaft.
Construction shall be such that bearings can be dismantled and
reassembled without risk of damage.

The bearing assembly shall be designed to prevent the entry of

dust or water. It shall be provided with a separate grease
nipple to serve each lubricating point and a grease relief device
such that when the motor runs at its rated speed any surplus
grease is ejected out of the bearing casing to a separate
container.

Housings for ball/roller bearings shall be packed with

approved lithium-based grease at the time of assembly. The
required re-lubrication interval shall be more than 4,000 hours.

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 5 of 38 2007 Edition
 Grease nipples, oil cups and dip sticks shall be readily
accessible without removal of guarding. Where necessary for
accessibility, nipples shall be remotely mounted at a point as
near as is practicable to the lubrication point.

C13.2.7 Motor Foundation

A motor bedplate/foundation block shall be provided unless the motor

is to be mounted on the soleplate of the compressor.

C13.2.8 Provision for Cabling and Termination

(a) Cabling Provision at Bedplates

Provision shall be made in the steel bedplate where necessary

to facilitate straight run of cable to the bottom of the motor
cable terminal box.

(b) Cabling Provision at Cable Boxes

Unless otherwise specified or approved, the cable terminal box

for the motor shall be positioned at the side of the motor.
Cable entry shall be from below for all box types unless
otherwise specified.

An earthing terminal with the same current carrying capacity

as the line terminals with the minimum size suitable for 25 x 6
mm copper strip shall be provided. A tapped hole with screw
external to the cable box would be acceptable.

Permanent terminal marking and direction of rotation in

accordance with IEC 60034-8:2004 shall be provided in the
cable boxes.

(c) Cabling Provision at Motor Casing

The terminal leads from cable box terminals or connectors to

the windings for a distance of 150 mm beyond their point of
entry into the motor frame, shall be adequately braced to
withstand the forces produced by maximum fault current.

The phase windings shall be accessible for testing. For this

purpose, neutral leads shall be brought out to a separate star-
point terminal box and shorted with an insulated copper bar of
cross-sectional area not less than the conductor of the terminal
lead.

Studs shall be so fixed as to prevent the terminal leads from

turning when the nuts are tightened down. Means shall be
provided to prevent slackening of cable connections due to
vibration.

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 6 of 38 2007 Edition
 (d) Motor Supply Cables

Motor terminations shall be suitable for connection of high

voltage power supply cables which shall be cross linked
polyethylene insulated, PVC-sheathed, galvanised steel wire
and PVC covered XLPE/SWA/PVC copper cables as specified
in Clause C13.6.

(e) Clearances and Creepage Distances

Electrical clearance and creepage distances shall comply with

Table C13.2.8(e) below. These clearance and creepage
distances shall also apply to terminals or connectors which
have to be insulated on site, and shall apply even though the
terminals or connectors are fully insulated, but are not
intended to apply to permanently insulated conductors.

Table C13.2.8(e) - Clearance and Creepage Distances for High

Voltage Terminations

Minimum Clearance Minimum Creepage

Rated Distances over Bushings
Voltage and Surfaces Resistant
Between Between
To Earth Phases To Earth Phases
kV mm mm mm mm
3.3 50 50 59 75
6.6 63 90 90 132
11 75 125 125 190

C13.2.9 Motor Termination Boxes

(a) Construction

Cable boxes for motor power supply shall be of a type fault-

tested design as follows:

3.3 kV - Phase-insulated pressure relief post

type; and

6.6 kV, 11 kV - Phase-segregated containment

pressure relief post type.

The cable box for motor line connections shall each comprise
a sealing chamber and an air insulated termination chamber
bolted together, of degree of protection to IP56. Sealing
chamber is not required for the stator winding star point
termination box.

Termination boxes shall be fabricated from mild steel of a

minimum of 6 mm thickness. Cast iron boxes shall not be
accepted.
Section C13 EE_GS
Page 7 of 38 2007 Edition
 The termination chamber shall be bolted to the motor casing
such that its sides are vertical, with high tensile steel studs and
nuts. The cable sealing chamber shall be fixed to the bottom
of the termination chamber by means of high tensile steel bolts
or studs and nuts.

The cable sealing chamber for XLPE cable shall be of the dry
type suitable for cable termination in heat shrinkable sleeving.
Sealing chamber shall be fitted with a horizontal gland plate
suitable for bottom cable entry.

The termination chamber shall have an insulated assembly and

be fitted with 3 stud terminals in insulating mouldings of
epoxy resin, glass fibre, polyester or approved similar material.
Porcelain insulators shall not be used. Cable-coupler type
terminals shall not be acceptable.

Front access detachable cover plates shall be fixed by studs

and nuts. Separate plates shall be supplied for sealing and
termination chambers.

Joints shall be machined flat and fitted with neoprene rubber

gaskets.

(b) Termination Box Auxiliaries

Brass cable glands shall be provided for motor supply cables.

Cable lugs shall be supplied for the motor supply cable.
Unless special lugs are used in the short circuit type test, cable
lug shall be of the compression type manufactured from tin-
plated seamless copper tubing with single bolt palm terminal.
The cable lug shall be type-tested to IEC 61238-1:2003 with
dimensions conforming to BS 91:1998 Table 2.

C13.2.10 Markings and Data Plates

An instruction and a data plate, of stainless steel, brass or other

approved non-tarnishing metal shall be provided. The instruction
plate shall give the connections and phase rotation for the required
direction of rotation. The required direction of rotation shall be
marked on the motor.

The data plate shall be stamped with the information required by IEC
60034-1:2004. Data plates on which the above required information
is only painted will not be accepted.

The motor serial number shall be stamped with metal dies on the
driving end shaft face of the motor in addition to being stamped on
the stator.

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 8 of 38 2007 Edition
C13.2.11 Temperature Detectors for Motor Protection

(a) Embedded Temperature Detectors (ETD)

Unless otherwise specified, embedded temperature detectors

of linear characteristics, e.g. thermocouple or resistance
thermometer, and complete with monitoring unit shall be
provided to offer protection against over-heating on load and
stalling of the motor. Resistance temperature detector (RTD)
shall comply with Grade 2 of IEC 60751:1995.

At least two detectors of the same characteristics suitably

embedded in the stator shall be installed, positioned at points
at which the highest temperatures are likely to occur, e.g. one
detector between coil sides within the slots, one detector under
the coils at the bottom of the slots and one detector between
the coils and slot wedges. Detector leads shall be wired to an
auxiliary cable box such that any ETD may be isolated for
testing.

The ETD monitoring unit for each motor shall have the
following features:

(i) Alarm contacts to operate at a temperature of 120ºC

which is adjustable for individual detecting elements;

(ii) Trip contacts to operate at a temperature of 140ºC

which is adjustable for individual detecting elements;
and

(iii) A common digital temperature gauge and selection

buttons for reading the winding temperatures of the
individual detecting elements.

(b) Temperature Detectors for Bearings

A temperature detector shall be installed for each bearing for

high temperature alarm and trip operation.

Unless recommended otherwise by the motor manufacturer,

alarms detectors shall operate 10°C lower than the trip
detectors.

Insulated thermometer pockets shall be provided to enable

easy insertion or removal of a temperature detector. Dial type
thermometers or digital indicators, with independently
adjustable alarm and trip contacts, shall be provided at the
motor control switchboard to monitor the bearing temperatures.
Contacts shall be arranged to close for alarm indication or
tripping and shall be so arranged that the operation of the
alarm or tripping may be checked manually.

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 9 of 38 2007 Edition
 (c) Bearing Coolant Failure Detector

Where water cooled bearings are used a flow failure detector

shall be provided.

Suitable timers and relays shall be provided to obviate any

false alarm during the starting up of the motor set or on flow
surges.

C13.3 HIGH VOLTAGE - MOTOR CONTROL SWITCHBOARDS

C13.3.1 General Requirements

(a) The motor control switchboards shall be of the single busbar,

indoor air-insulated, metalclad type formed into complete
switchboards. The high voltage switchgear and switchboards
shall comply with IEC 62271-100:2006 and IEC 62271-
200:2003 respectively.

(b) The power to the high voltage motors shall be distributed from
the high voltage motor control switchboards through the motor
starters incorporated in the switchboards. The control
switchboards shall contain a motor starter for each motor set.

(c) The switchboards shall, but not be limited to, include the
following equipment:

(i) Incoming circuit breaker;

(ii) Motor starter;
(iii) Overcurrent and earth leakage protective relays and
devices;
(iv) Motor temperature monitoring unit;
(v) Motor bearing temperature gauges;
(vi) Emergency stop button;
(vii) Local controls for ancillary equipment;
(viii) Sufficient terminals and cable glands for external cable
connections;
(ix) Anti-condensation heater and associated thermostat;
(x) Isolators, fuses and other wiring ancillaries; and
(xi) Power factor correction capacitors and controlgear.

(d) Type test certificates shall be available for each rating of

circuit breaker and switchboard to be supplied. The results of
all type tests shall be recorded in type test reports containing
sufficient data to prove compliance with the Specification.
Type test certificates shall be issued preferably by the
Association of Short-circuit Testing Authorities (ASTA) or
N.V. tot Keuring van Elektrotechnische Materialen (KEMA).
Test certificates issued by other organisations will only be
accepted if the testing authority is established as being of equal
standard as ASTA or KEMA.

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 10 of 38 2007 Edition
(e) General Design Information

Table C13.3.1(e) - General design information

Rated operational voltage 3.3 kV, 6.6 kV or 11 kV as

specified, 3-phase
Earthing of system Solid
System frequency 50 Hz
Installation type Indoor
Power supply for circuit 110 V dc ± 15%
breaker Operation, controls
and protection
Power supply for auxiliary 220V ac ± 10% 1-phase
Equipment 50 Hz
Degree of protection IP 31
Insulation class Class B

(f) Standards

The switchgear and cubicles for high voltage switchboard shall

comply, in particular, with the following Standards where
appropriate:

Table C13.3.1(f) - Standards

IEC 60269-1:2006 Low–voltage fuses – Part 1:

General requirements
IEC 60051:1997 Direct acting indicating electrical
measuring instruments and their
accessories
IEC 60255:1988 Electrical protective relays
IEC 60282-1:2005 Fuses for voltages exceeding
1000V a.c.
IEC 60044-1:2003 Current transformers
IEC 60044-2:2003 & Voltage transformers
IEC 60044-5:2004
IEC 60947-5-1:2003 Control Switches
IEC 60376:2005 Sulphur hexafluoride for electrical
equipment
IEC 62271-200:2003 A/C metal-enclosed switchgear
and controlgear of rated voltage
above 1 kV and up to and
including 52 kV
IEC 62271-100:2006 A/C circuit breakers for rated
voltage above 1 kV
IEC 62052-11:2003 Electricity meters
BS 6231:2006 PVC-insulated cables for
switchgear and controlgear wiring
IEC 60694:2002 High-voltage switchgear and
controlgear standards

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 11 of 38 2007 Edition
C13.3.2 General Construction

The switchboards shall consist of dust and vermin-proof cubicles

segregated into single or multi-tier compartments. They shall be
made from sheet steel of 2.5 mm minimum thickness.

The edges of hinged panel doors shall have deep return flanges for
rigidity and fitting of gaskets. Gaskets shall be of neoprene or rubber,
continuous without joints around corners and suitably arranged to
minimise the transmission of vibration and to prevent the entry of
dust. Hinged panel doors shall be fitted with chromium plated solid
rod type detachable hinges and chromium plated car door type
lockable handles.

Forced ventilation shall not be allowed under an ambient temperature

of 40oC. Ventilating grills, where required, shall not be located on
top of a panel.

Each switchgear unit shall comprise three main portions:

(a) Separate chambers at the top of the switchboard housing the

busbars, current transformers and voltage transformers, and
shall be accessible through bolted covers only;

(b) A compartment housing the relays and instruments; and

(c) A moving portion comprising a carriage complete with circuit

breaker. The circuit breaker shall preferably be arranged for
vertical isolation from the busbars.

The circuit breaker compartment shall be accessible through a hinged

door fitted with a glazed window for viewing the circuit breaker
mechanical status indicators.

The relay and instrument compartment shall be located at the front of

each switchgear unit and shall be provided with a hinged door for
access to the internal wiring and terminals. Moulded gaskets of non-
aging material shall be used to provide close sealing. The height of
the instrument panel above floor level shall not exceed 2400 mm. All
panels constituting a complete switchboard shall be of equal height.

Bolted-on rear and top covers shall be designed to gain access to

individual circuits without exposing other circuits which may be alive.
Switchboards shall not be located across floor expansion joints.

Before steelworks is painted, it shall be treated and degreased by an

approved method such as grit blasting to ISO 8501-1:1994 or
chemical pickling and an approved anti-rusting priming coat applied.
The panels shall be externally finished in semi-gloss stoved enamel or
cellulose to a color to be approved by the Architect.

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 12 of 38 2007 Edition
C13.3.3 Primary Busbars and Connections

Primary busbars and connections between the several pieces of

apparatus forming the equipment of a switchboard shall be of high
conductivity copper to BS EN 13601:2002. Construction, marking
and arrangement of busbars, connections and auxiliary wiring shall be
to IEC 62271-200:2003 and BS 159:2006.

Primary busbars shall be contained in a separate compartments within

the switchboard and access shall be possible only by means of bolted-
on sheet steel covers which shall clearly be marked 'BUSBARS'.
Busbars and busbar connections shall not be exposed when covers
and doors are opened for access to the remainder of the switchgear.
Busbars shall be readily extensible.

Each phase conductor of the primary busbars including all through

joints and tapping connections shall, in addition to being spaced at
such intervals as to give the necessary air clearance for the voltage
rating, shall be epoxy encapsulated solid copper bars. Joints shall be
insulated with moulded removable insulated covers. Taping shall not
be accepted.

Primary busbars, connections and their supports shall be capable of

carrying the short-time current associated with their short-circuit
ratings for a period of 3 seconds.

Where busbar supports use insulation of moulded or resin bonded

material, it shall have a durable anti-hygroscopic surface finish with
high anti-tracking properties.

The connections from busbars in individual units shall have a

continuous current rating of not less than that of the equipment
comprising the unit.

At all points where connections or joints occur, the busbars and

connecting pieces shall be tinned or silver-plated. The resistance of
any length of conductor containing a joint shall not be greater than
that of an equal length without a joint.

Jointing of sections of busbars shall be done by mechanical means.

Soldered, braced, welded or riveted joints shall not be used in busbars.
Jointing faces of copper conductors shall be tinned or silver plated, or
applied with other approved treatment to maintain effective
conductivity of the joint. All necessary busbar jointing bolts, nuts,
and fixing accessories shall be provided. The recommended torque
for tightening the bolts shall be stated in the maintenance manual.

Primary busbars and connections shall be clearly marked and shall be

displayed for standard phase sequence in accordance with the cable
color coding system, i.e. L1, L2 and L3, counting from front to rear,
top to bottom, or left to right as viewed from the switching device
operating mechanism side to BS EN 60298:1998, IEC 62271-
100:2006 or IEC 62271-200:2003.
Section C13 EE_GS
Page 13 of 38 2007 Edition
C13.3.4 Circuit Breakers

(a) General

Unless otherwise specified, the 11 kV circuit breaker units

shall be of the vacuum type complying with IEC 62271-
100:2006, and the 3.3 kV or 6.6 kV circuit breaker units shall
be of the vacuum type or the sulphur hexafluoride (SF6) type
complying with IEC 62271-100:2006. They shall be of a
design with vertical isolation, horizontal withdrawal facilities.

The moving portion of each circuit breaker unit shall consist of

a three-pole circuit breaker with operating mechanism,
primary and secondary disconnecting devices, auxiliary
switches, position indicators and the necessary control wiring
all mounted on a substantial steel framework. The framework
and all metal part of the moving portion apart from current
carrying parts, shall be solidly earthed via the fixed portion.
The earthing of the moving portion shall be to the approval of
the Architect. Means of registration shall be provided so that
circuit breakers may be readily placed and secured in the
correct position in the fixed portion.

Circuit breakers of the same current and voltage rating shall be

fully interchangeable with one another. Means shall be
provided to prevent circuit breakers from being placed into
fixed housings of different ratings. This device shall also
prevent damage to isolating and other contacts.

(b) Vacuum Circuit Breakers

For vacuum circuit breakers, means of confirming the validity

of vacuum by the occurrence of flash-over when a voltage is
applied between the vacuum interrupter contacts shall be
included in the maintenance tools. Vacuum leakage shall be
monitored to initiate an alarm and it shall not be possible to
close a circuit breaker when vacuum leakage is serious enough
to threaten safe operation of the switchgear.

Vacuum circuit breakers for motor circuits shall incorporate

surge suppressers to minimise the effects of switching
transient voltage on the motor insulation.

(c) SF6 Circuit Breakers

A pressure switch shall be provided on the SF6 gas

compartment to monitor the gas pressure. The system of gas
monitoring shall be temperature compensated.

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 14 of 38 2007 Edition
 Alarm and lockout feature shall be incorporated. Alarm signal
shall be initiated and the breaker shall be inhibited from
closing whenever the gas pressure drops below a preset level.
The circuit breaker shall be prevented from operation. Means
shall be provided in the gas compartment for the connection of
service equipment and for the topping up of the gas.

The circuit breaker shall be suitable to interrupt its rated

normal current with SF6 gas at atmospheric pressure. The
sealing of the gas compartment shall be designed so that there
is no need for the SF6 gas to be replenished within reasonable
periods. The gas leakage shall not exceed 1% per annum at
site ambient temperature.

An external contact indicator shall be provided to check the

extent of contact wear. Means shall also be provided to allow
access to the contacts of the interrupter units for necessary
inspection and maintenance. All contact assemblies shall be
replaceable. Safeguards shall be provided to prevent incorrect
replacement of contacts.

The designed electrical and mechanical life shall be at least

5,000 and 10,000 cycles respectively. The circuit breaker shall
be capable of undergoing 40 cycles of fault breaking
operations at 50% rated short-circuit breaking current or
equivalent without any need of opening up the tank for
inspection or contact replacement.

Instructions for post-fault maintenance, gas top-up contact and

seal replacement shall be clearly detailed in the manual.

(d) Operating Mechanisms

The circuit breaker operating mechanism shall be of the

following types as specified:

- Stored energy operation by means of a manually

charged spring with mechanical release;

- Stored energy operation by means of a motor-charged

spring with manual and electrical release; and

- Solenoid operated.

The mechanism shall be of the trip free type so that the circuit
breaker shall be free to open during the closing operation
immediately its tripping device operates. The circuit breaker
shall be capable of closing fully and latching against its rated
making current.

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 15 of 38 2007 Edition
Spring operated mechanisms shall have the following
additional measures:

- If the circuit breaker is opened and the springs charged

the circuit breaker shall be able to be closed and then
tripped;

- If the circuit breaker is closed and the springs charged

there shall be sufficient energy to trip, close and then
trip the circuit breaker;

- Mechanical indication and an auxiliary switch for

remote electrical indication shall be provided to
indicate the state of the springs;

- Motor charged mechanisms shall be provided with

means for charging the springs by hand, and also a
shrouded push button for releasing the springs. An
electrical release coil shall also be provided;

- Under normal operation, motor recharging of the

operating springs shall commence immediately and
automatically upon completion of each circuit breaker
closing operation. The time required for spring
recharged shall not exceed 30 seconds; and

- It shall not be possible to close a circuit breaker, fitted

with a motor charged closing mechanism, whilst the
spring is being charged. It shall be necessary for the
spring to be fully charged and the associated charging
mechanism fully prepared for closing before it can be
released to close the circuit breaker.

All circuit breaker operating mechanism shall be fitted with an

electrical shunt trip release coil and in addition a mechanical
hand tripping device.

The electrical tripping and closing devices shall be suitable for

operation from a 110 V d.c. battery supply and but shall
operate continuously with their coils at an ambient temperature
of 40°C, over a voltage range as follow:

- Closing solenoid 80 to 120% of nominal

voltage;
- Spring charging motor 80 to 110% of nominal
voltage;
- Closing release coil 80 to 110% of nominal
voltage; and
- Shunt trip release coil 50 to 120% of nominal
voltage.

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 16 of 38 2007 Edition
 except that under battery boost charge conditions when they
shall be capable of operating at rated output and 130% of
nominal voltage for up to two hours.

All operating coils for use on the d.c. supply shall be

connected so that failure of insulation to earth does not cause
the coil to become energised.

Tripping and closing circuits shall be provided with a fuse in

each pole on each unit and shall be independent of each other
on all other circuits.

Approved, positively driven mechanically operated indicating

devices shall be provided to indicate whether a circuit breaker
is in the open or closed service, isolated or earthed position.

(e) Isolating Devices

All circuit breakers shall be connected to their associated

busbars and cables through isolating devices of an approved
design to IEC 62271-100:2006 and IEC 62271-200:2003
which shall be arranged for operation whilst the main circuit is
live but no current passing.

The design shall be such that it is impossible for the isolating

devices to be opened by forces due to current in the primary
circuit and shall be interlocked with the circuit breaker so that
it is impossible to make or break current with the isolating
device. Attempted isolation shall not trip the circuit breaker.

When isolation is effected by withdrawal of the circuit breaker,

provision shall be made for positively locating the circuit
breaker in the service, isolated and, earthing positions. Stops
shall be provided to prevent over-travel and each position shall
be clearly indicated. Preferably a mechanical selector
mechanism shall be utilised such that when a particular
position is selected, it is impossible to locate the circuit
breaker in any other position.

Isolating devices shall incorporate self-aligning contacts, the

fixed contact of which shall be such that access can readily be
obtained for maintenance purposes.

(f) Overcurrent and Earth Fault Protection

All circuit breakers other than those used for controlling the
incoming supply, shall have overcurrent tripping facilities to
give time delay overload current protection and instantaneous
short circuit interruption. The time-current characteristics
shall be submitted for inspection. Shunt trip coils operated by
power supply from the mains shall not be used.

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 17 of 38 2007 Edition
 For circuit breakers controlling the incoming supply to the
Switchboard, the circuit protection shall be provided by the
following devices:

- Overcurrent Protection Relay;

- Earth Fault Relay; and
- Shunt-Trip Release.

It shall be operated by a DC supply of 110 V obtained from

the secondary batteries complete with battery charger, etc. of
suitable rating

(g) Safety Shutters

Metal shutter shall be provided to completely shroud fixed

isolating contacts of the circuit breaker busbar and feeder
circuits. These shutters shall be opened and closed
automatically by the movement of the circuit breaker carriage
and shall prevent access to fixed isolating contacts when the
circuit breaker is withdrawn.

The shutters for fixed isolating contacts connected to busbars

and cables shall have independent operating mechanisms. All
shutters shall have painted labels indicating whether they are
busbar or feeder shutters.

To facilitate high voltage and current injection testing via

isolating contacts, a device shall be provided for fixing, but not
locking, shutters in the open position and for releasing them to
the closed position. This device shall be arranged to be
disengaged as soon as the circuit breaker is pushed into the
service position to ensure that the automatic features of the
shutters are restored.

Self-aligning plug and socket isolating devices shall be

provided for all auxiliary circuits. The position of these
devices shall be such that individual circuits on different units
are in the same relative physical positions.

(h) Interlocking Gear

Interlocks shall be of the mechanical or key operated type and

shall be provided to prevent the following operations:

(i) A moving portion from being withdrawn from or

inserted into the isolating contacts when the circuit
breaker is closed;
(ii) The closing of the circuit breaker unless the movable
portion is correctly plugged in or isolated from the
equipment;

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 18 of 38 2007 Edition
(iii) The movable portion being withdrawn or replaced
unless the circuit breaker is isolated and in the
appropriate position;

(iv) The movable portion being plugged in without the

circuit breaker tank in position;

(v) The circuit breaker being closed in the 'SERVICE' or

'EARTH' location without completing the appropriate
auxiliary circuits; and

(vi) To apply an earth to busbars until all circuit breakers

which can feed the busbars, are locked open.

When key interlocking is employed, any attempt to remove the

trapped key shall not cause closing or opening of the
associated equipment.

Where a circuit breaker is fitted with means for mechanical or

electrical operation, interlocks shall be provided so that it is
impossible for the mechanical and electrical devices to operate
simultaneously.

The earthing devices shall be provided with interlocks to

ensure correct operation in conjunction with the associated
circuit breaker.

In the case of circuit breaker earthing, the electrical tripping of

the circuit breaker shall be rendered inoperative during
earthing operations both when closing and when closed in the
earthed position. It shall not be possible to return to the
service position and close the circuit breaker until the
electrical tripping is again operative.

A mechanical key interlocking system shall be provided

whereby it is not possible to apply an earth to busbars until all
circuit breakers which can feed the busbar are locked open. In
addition it shall not be possible to earth busbars and cable
circuit at the same time by means of the same circuit breaker.

In addition to safety interlocking which is integral to a circuit

breaker unit to prevent wrong or dangerous operation of the
unit itself, further interlocking shall be provided.

In general, interlocking shall be electrically isolating the

closing contactor coil circuit of a circuit breaker being
interrupted unless the necessary conditions for closure are met.
The interlocking shall be designed on a system wide basis to
ensure that subsequent operation of a non-interlocked circuit
breaker does not result in a set of conditions that would
contradict the original 'permission to close'.

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 19 of 38 2007 Edition
(i) Interlocking Circuits

Where interlocking over a distance is required, two

independent criteria shall be used, such as absence of a voltage
and remote feeding circuit breaker open. Indication of the
remote condition shall be by single purpose circuit, care being
taken that the conductors used are adequately screened and
shielded to minimise both transverse and longitudinal voltages
resulting from electromagnetic induction and differences in
earth potential. The cable containing cores for interlocking
circuits shall be separate from all other multi-core cables.

All interlocking circuits shall be of the 'go and return' design,

and in no instance will interconnection of batteries in different
locations be permitted.

Where a circuit breaker is capable of manual operation in

addition to electrical operation, except where such manual
operation is possible only for maintenance purposes, key-
operated interlocking shall additionally be provided, operative
only in the instance of manual operation.

Electrical interlocks on withdrawable equipment shall be

arranged so that when withdrawn, the equipment operation
will be independent of the remote interlocking contacts. In
addition, the interlocks shall be such that, when the equipment
is withdrawn, the interlocking of associated apparatus is
correct, and operation of the equipment in the withdrawn
position will have no effect.

(j) Locking Facilities

Locking facilities shall be provided so that the circuit breaker

can be prevented from being closed when it is open and from
being manually tripped when it is closed. These facilities shall
not require the fitting of any loose components prior to the
insertion of the single padlock required. It shall not be
possible, without the aid of tools, to gain access to the tripping
toggle or any part of the mechanisms which would permit
defeat of the locking of the manual trip. It shall not be
possible to lock mechanically the trip mechanisms so as to
render inoperative the electrical tripping.

In addition, the following padlocking facilities shall also be

included:

(i) Selector mechanisms on circuit breaker isolated and

service positions; and

(ii) Safety shutters on primary contact isolating orifices in

closed position.

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 20 of 38 2007 Edition
 All switchboard access doors, other than those which are
interlocked with a switching device, shall be provided with an
integral type locking facility.

C13.3.5 Earthing and Earthing Devices

All metal parts other than those forming part of an electrical circuit
shall be connected in an approved manner to a hard drawn, high
conductivity copper earth busbar which shall run the full length of,
and be bolted to, the main frame of the switchboard. At the position
where joints occur, the earth busbar shall be tinned. The earth busbar
shall be rated to carry currents equal in magnitude and duration to that
associated with the short circuit rating of the equipment.

The design and construction of the equipment shall be such that all
metal parts, other than the current carrying parts, or the withdrawal
equipment are earthed before the primary connections are made.

Metal cases supports and bases of all instruments, relays or other

associated components mounted on the switchgear shall be connected
to the earth busbar by conductors of not less than 2.5 mm2 cross-
sectional area.

When components are provided for mounting separately each shall be

provided with an earthing terminal of not less than 30 mm2 cross
sectional area.

Earthing devices shall be provided on all circuit breaker units

whereby the circuit can be earthed. With the circuit earthed, shutters
over unearthed fixed main isolating contacts shall be closed.

Busbar earthing facilities shall be provided on selected circuits of

each separate switchboard, these circuits shall be agreed with the
Architect.

Circuit and busbar earthing shall be of the transfer circuit breaker

arrangement and it is preferred that the facilities shall be integral in
the design and construction of the switchgear. Earthing devices for
fitting to the circuit breakers are acceptable but they shall be supplied
in a separate container together with a set of instructions for fitting
and operating the equipment. Designs effecting earthing by means of
a separate fault-making switch are not acceptable.

Feeder and busbar earthing devices shall have a short circuit rating
equal to that of their associated circuit breaker.

Padlocking facilities shall be provided for the purpose of preventing

inadvertent earthing.

Labeling shall be provided to show whether the equipment is

prepared for 'SERVICE', 'BUSBAR EARTH' or 'CIRCUIT EARTH'.
Such indication shall be visible from the front of the equipment at all
times. Duplicate labels in Chinese and English shall be provided.
Section C13 EE_GS
Page 21 of 38 2007 Edition
C13.3.6 Testing Facilities

All circuit breaker units shall be provided with facilities to enable

applied high voltage tests to be carried out.

Provision shall also be made for temporarily completing the auxiliary

circuits when the circuit breaker is isolated and if applicable,
withdrawn to enable the functioning of the circuit breaker to be tested.

When current transformers and protective relays are fitted, facilities

shall be provided for primary and secondary injection tests to be
carried out.

These facilities shall preferably be such that wires and connections

need not be disconnected for the tests to be carried out.

C13.3.7 Mechanical Indication

Indication shall be provided to clearly indicate whether a circuit

breaker is in the open or closed service, isolated or earthed position.

Positively driven mechanical indicating devices shall be provided on

all equipment to indicate the following where applicable:

(a) Circuit breaker 'OPEN' or 'CLOSED'; and

(b) Circuit breaker 'SPRING CHARGED' or 'SPRING FREE'

C13.3.8 Auxiliary Switches

Auxiliary switches of the double-break type and positively driven in

both directions shall be provided on all circuit breakers and isolators
for indication, control and interlocking.

Auxiliary switches shall be strong, have a positive wiping action

when closing and shall be mounted in an accessible position clear of
operating mechanisms.

They shall be designed to make, break and carry, without undue

heating, the current of their associated circuit. Auxiliary switches
shall be rated for 10A operational current, and shall be capable of
breaking at least 2A at 110 V d.c.

No less than eight spare auxiliary switches shall be provided with

each circuit breaker and no less than four with each isolator. Each
spare contact shall be readily changeable from normally open to
normally closed and vice versa. All auxiliary switches shall be wired
up (via secondary disconnecting devices if on withdrawable
equipment) to a terminal board on the front of the fixed portion,
arranged in the same sequence for each individual unit of the same
type.

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 22 of 38 2007 Edition
C13.3.9 Anti-Condensation Heaters

Anti-condensation heaters of an approved type shall be provided

inside each cubicle. They shall be thermostatically controlled and
shall operate at black heat and shall be shrouded and located so as not
to cause injury to personnel or damage to equipment. The heaters
shall be controlled from a double-pole miniature circuit breaker, with
a lamp to indicate 'cubicle heaters on'. The circuit breaker and
indicating lamp shall be mounted externally at one end of the
switchboard. The heaters shall operate from 220 V 50 Hz single
phase a.c. supply.

C13.3.10 Current Transformers

Current transformers shall comply with IEC 60044-1:2003 and shall

be suitable for the operation of protective gear, instruments and/or
metering equipment.

Current transformers shall be of the epoxy resin encapsulated type

and shall have necessary output to operate the connected protective
devices or instruments.

The primary windings shall have a short time current rating not less
than that specified for the associated circuit breaker. The rated
secondary current shall be 1A or 5A.

Protection current transformers shall be of Class 10P accuracy or

better. The product of rated accuracy limit factor and rated output of
the protection current transformer shall not be less than 10 times the
rated burden of the trip circuit including the relays, connection leads
and overcurrent release where applicable.

Measurement current transformers shall be suitably rated and have

accuracy Class of 3 for use with ammeters, and Class 1 for other
types of meters.

The polarity of the primary and secondary windings of each current

transformer shall be clearly indicated and in addition labels shall be
fitted in a readily accessible position to indicate the ratio, class and
duty of each transformer. The current transformer particulars as
specified in IEC 60044-1:2003 shall be given on an accessible plate
mounted external to the current transformer.

All connections from secondary windings shall be brought out and

taken by means of separate insulated leads to a terminal board
mounted in an accessible position. Where multi-ratio secondary
windings are required, a label shall be provided at the secondary
terminal board clearly indicating the connections required for each
ratio.

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 23 of 38 2007 Edition
 Current transformers for indication or metering shall have their
secondary windings earthed at the switchgear. The secondary
windings of current transformer for protection shall be earthed at the
panel which accommodates the associated relay. The earth
connection shall be made via a removable link.

Each current transformer shall have a certified maximum rating of at

least 1.2 times the rated current.

C13.3.11 Voltage Transformers

Voltage transformers shall comply with IEC 60044-2:2003 and IEC

60044-5:2004 and suitable for the operation of protective gear,
voltage regulating equipment, instruments and/or metering. All
voltage transformers shall be of the dry type with epoxy
encapsulation. The rated output per phase at a power factor 0.8
lagging shall not be less than 100 VA. The rated voltage factor shall
be 1.2. They shall have a measuring accuracy class of 0.5 and a
protective accuracy class of 3P.

Voltage transformers shall be capable of carrying continuously

without injurious heating 50% burden above their rated burden. The
rated primary voltage of voltage transformers shall be the appropriate
nominal system voltage.

Unless specified otherwise, voltage transformer primary windings

shall be connected to the circuit side of the current transformers
remote from the busbars so as to be included in the protected zone of
the associated feeder.

The primary of a single phase voltage transformer shall be connected

across L1 and L2 or A and B phases, unless otherwise approved. L1
and L2 phases shall be used in a synchronising scheme, unless
otherwise approved.

Voltage transformers shall be capable of being connected and

disconnected from the equipment whilst in service. Facilities for
padlocking in the service position shall be provided. Where isolating
is carried out by withdrawal, a set of shutters, capable of being
padlocked, shall be provided to cover the stationary isolating contacts.
The shutters shall operate automatically by positive driven drive
actuated by movement of the voltage transformer assembly.

The primary windings shall preferably be connected via renewable

fuses with current limiting features which shall be readily accessible
with the circuit alive and the secondary windings through fuses and
links, labelled to indicate their function and phase color, to the
appropriate circuits.

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 24 of 38 2007 Edition
 For single phase voltage transformers, both ends of each secondary-
winding shall be brought out to insulated links. For three phase
voltage transformers, each phase end shall be brought out to fuses,
and the neutral of the secondary winding shall be brought out to
insulated links. The fuses and links shall then be brought out to
insulated terminals located in a terminal box.

The primary and secondary fuses shall be capable of being removed

and replaced when the circuit breaker is closed in the service position.
Isolation of the primary fuses for this purpose shall be carried out,
preferably by withdrawing the entire voltage transformer assembly.
Additionally, it shall be possible to remove secondary fuses whilst the
voltage transformer is padlocked in the service location.

For single phase units, separate earth links for each secondary
winding shall be provided. Each of the neutral leads shall be
connected together at a single point and earthed as close as possible to
the voltage transformer.

Voltage transformer secondary windings shall be earthed at the

switchgear through a link which can be removed for insulation testing.

Voltage transformers having the neutral point of their higher voltage

windings earthed, shall be designed so that saturation of the core and
dangerous over-heating arising therefrom shall not occur when 1.73
times normal voltage is applied to each winding for a period of 15
minutes.

Secondary circuits of voltage transformer shall not be parallel.

The secondary voltage connections to metering circuits shall be

broken automatically when the circuit breaker is opened.

C13.3.12 Cables Boxes

Cable boxes shall be suitable for terminating the cables directly into
the switchgear. The dimensions and terminal arrangements, together
with details of air insulated heat-shrinkable elastomeric PCP cable
termination, shall be submitted for approval by the Architect before
manufacture.

All cable boxes shall be suitable for use with air insulated heat-
shrinkable elastomeric PCP cable termination and shall be designed
with joint faces which will ensure leak-free operation and exclude the
entry of air, dust or moisture. The internal surfaces of cable boxes
shall be cleaned of all scale and rust and after cleaning and priming,
shall be finished with a hard setting paint compatible with the filling
medium.

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 25 of 38 2007 Edition
 Where cable boxes are provided for three-core cables, the sweating
sockets on the two outer phases shall be inclined towards the centre to
minimise bending of the cable cores. Where there is more than one
core per phase, the socket block shall be so designed as to minimise
bending of the cable cores, and spacer clips shall be incorporated.

All cable terminals shall be of adequate size to ensure no overheating

takes place at rated current.

The insulators and fittings shall be unaffected by atmospheric and

climatic conditions, ozone, acids or alkalis, dust deposits or rapid
temperature changes likely to arise when operating in the specified
site conditions and shall be designed so as to facilitate cleaning.

C13.3.13 Protective Relays

Unless otherwise specified, Clause C5.26 shall apply.

C13.3.14 Control and Timer Relays

Control and timer relays shall be of the plug-in type, rack mounted,
provided with cable connection terminal and anchored by quick
fastening vibration-proof devices. Timer shall be of the solid-state
type with proven reliability.

C13.3.15 Indicating Instruments

Unless otherwise specified, Clause C5.26 shall apply.

C13.3.16 Labels and Warning Notice

Laminated 'Traffolyte' or similar labels of ample size shall be

provided for each of the units on the switchboards engraved in
English and Chinese characters. Labels shall be fixed by screws on
the non-detachable parts of the panel at a height of 1350 mm or above.

During the progress of manufacture of the switchboard, a schedule of

labels shall be submitted for approval by the Architect before
engraving is carried out.

'Danger - H.V. Live Terminals/ 危險 – 高壓帶電電極' warning labels

shall be attached to the access covers of the air insulated cable boxes,
CT chambers and busbar, and shall be colored red with white lettering
in both English and Chinese characters.

In addition to automatic screening shutters and barriers, warning

labels shall also be provided for all live parts, such as test terminal
blocks.

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 26 of 38 2007 Edition
C13.3.17 Ancillary Equipment

Battery charger/batteries system shall be provided for the proper

functions of the switchgear in the switchboard.

The switchboard shall be supplied complete with one hydraulic

operated handling device suitable for handling all sizes of air circuit
breakers in the switchboard, and one set of portable earthing
equipment for each main incoming air circuit breaker. Portable
earthing leads will not be accepted as an alternative to the earthing
equipment.

The switchboard shall be supplied complete with all operating

handles, jigs, etc. required for the normal charging, closing, opening,
racking in and out operations of all circuit breakers of the
switchboard and shall be properly fixed in a neat manner on a board
with brass hooks inside the main switch room where the switchboard
is installed.

The switchboard shall be provided with two rubber mats of ribbed

surface, complying to BS 921:2004, laid in front of and at the rear of
the switchboard. The rubber mats shall be continuous sheets of 10
mm minimum thickness, each of the same length as the cubicle
switchboard and a minimum width of not less than 1000 mm or the
width of the space between the front or back of the switchboard to the
adjacent wall.

C13.3.18 Operation Diagram

For high voltage switchboards with interlocking facility, a brief

operation instruction of the switchboards together with a detailed
schematic wiring diagram, listing out all the relevant switching steps
and interlocks for commissioning/decommissioning of part or whole
of the high voltage switchboards shall be provided in a framed,
transparent perspex sheet mounted adjacent to the switchboards.

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 27 of 38 2007 Edition
C13.4 HIGH VOLTAGE - AUTO-TRANSFORMERS

C13.4.1 General

The auto-transformers for the auto-transformer motor starters shall

comply with the following specific requirements:

(a) Type - Indoor and floor mounted type for no

breaking starting of squirrel cage 3-phase
induction motor;

(b) Standard - IEC 60076:2000;

(c) System Voltage - 3.3 kV, 6.6kV or 11kV as specified;

(d) Frequency - 50 Hz;

(e) Connections - Auto-star for auto-transformer starting;

(f) Insulation Level - 45 kV peak impulse voltage for 1/50

microsecond;

(g) Cooling - Natural air cooled; and

(h) Tappings - Off load tap changers with 60%, 75% and
85% of the line voltage to limit the
starting current to 2.5 times of full load
current.

The auto-transformers shall be mounted on wheels to facilitate

positioning and removal. The transformers shall be externally
finished in semi-gloss stoved enamel or cellulose.

C13.4.2 Rating

The rating of the auto-transformer shall be designed to suit the

starting duty of the motor. Motor starting time shall be taken as 10
seconds at 75% or higher taps and 15 seconds at 60% or lower taps
unless otherwise specified in the Particular Specification.

C13.4.3 Insulation

(a) Insulation Medium

Unless otherwise specified, for 11 kV nominal voltage, oil-

filled transformers are preferred. Epoxy resin encapsulated
auto-transformers shall be preferred for nominal voltage up to
6.6 kV.

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 28 of 38 2007 Edition
 (b) Class

Oil immersed transformer windings shall be designed for Class

E insulation for Class E operation.

Epoxy resin encapsulated transformer windings and live parts

in air shall be designed for Class F or Class B insulation for
Class B operation.

(c) Coordination of equipment insulation

Table C13.4.3(c) - Coordination of Equipment Insulation

Rated system voltage 12kV 7.2kV 3.6kV

Nominal system voltage 11kV 6.6kV 3.3kV
Minimum impulse withstand 75kV 60kV 40kV
voltage (1.2kV per micro-
second)
Minimum power frequency 28kV 20kV 10kV
withstand voltage (1 min)

C13.4.4 Transformer Windings

All windings, terminals and connections shall be of copper. To

protect windings against high humidity, the core shall be protected by
a resin encasement which shall be resistant to moisture but elastic
enough to withstand the expansion and contraction caused by the
loading cycles.

Impregnation shall be carried out under vacuum to obviate the

presence of any air bubbles. Means shall be employed to eliminate
any partial discharge or corona that may occur after a prolonged
service period. For epoxy resin transformers, suitable fillers shall be
mixed in the epoxy resin to provide high mechanical strength and
resilience to shock.

Natural ventilation shall be used for attaining the rated output and air
channels through winding spools to attain sufficient cooling shall not
be accepted.

Internal electrical connections shall be brazed and/or fixed with bolts

and nuts. Soldered or mechanically crimped joints shall not be
accepted.

Core bolts where used shall be insulated from the respective magnetic
circuits with material capable of withstanding a test voltage of 2000V
r.m.s. for one minute.

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 29 of 38 2007 Edition
C13.4.5 Tap Changers

The off-load tap changers shall be accessible through the transformer

top cover plate by means of copper links. The transformer top cover
plate shall be fitted with an electrical and mechanical interlock
designed to prevent access to the transformer tapping links until the
auto-transformer starter circuit breakers are open and the 'START'
and 'RUN' circuit breakers are in the 'CIRCUIT EARTH' position.

C13.4.6 Internal Earthing of Transformers

Metal parts of the transformer with the exception of individual core

laminations, core bolts and associated individual clamping plates
shall be maintained at some fixed potential. Where metal parts of the
core are connected to earth this shall be done by way of accessible
links to allow the insulation between core and earth to be tested. This
insulation shall be able to withstand a test voltage of 2000V r.m.s.

The magnetic circuit shall be earthed to the clamping structure at one

point only through a removable link placed in an accessible position
beneath an inspection opening in the tank cover. The connection to
the link shall be on the same side of the core as the main earth
connection.

Where coil clamping rings are of metal at earth potential, each ring
shall be connected to the adjacent core clamping structure.

C13.4.7 Enclosure

(a) General

The enclosure shall be of rigid construction and shall not be

damaged at short-circuit faults. Exterior corners and edges
shall be rounded to give a smooth overall appearance. The
design of the enclosure shall ensure adequate ventilation and
air circulation without forced cooling or additional electric
fans.

The enclosure shall be designed so as to allow the complete

auto transformer in the tank and filled with oil, to be lifted by
crane or jacks, transported by road, rail or water, skidding in
any direction on plates or rails without over-straining any
joints and without causing subsequent leakage of oil.

The tank or enclosure exterior shall be fitted with a M12 stud

at the bottom of the unit suitable for termination of a copper
earthing bar of 32 x 3 mm.

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 30 of 38 2007 Edition
(b) Enclosures for Epoxy Resin Cast Auto-transformers -
Additional Requirements

Unless otherwise specified, a rectangular splash-proof

enclosure of degree of protection to IEC 60529:2001, IP32
shall be provided covering the entire unit. The enclosure shall
be sheet steel of 2 mm minimum thickness and suitably braced
to form a rigid structure. The enclosure shall be bolted to the
transformer frame and shall be easily removable when
required. Access panels and openings shall be provided to
facilitate routine inspection and maintenance, and changing of
tap position without the need for dismantling the enclosure
completely.

(c) Enclosure (Tank) for Oil-filled Auto-transformers

(i) General

A rectangular totally enclosed tank to IP65 shall be

supplied covering the entire unit.

Oil tank shall be fabricated from weldable structural

steel to BS EN 10025:2004, BS EN 10029:1991 or
products having equivalent functions or performance,
with all welding to BS EN 1011-1:2004 or equivalent.
Fabricated under bases shall be provided with skids and
detachable rollers. The exterior of the tank shall be of
plain sheet steel without stiffeners. Tank stiffeners
shall be continuously welded.

Wherever possible the transformer tank and its

accessories shall be designed without pockets wherein
gas may collect. All joints of the oil tank other than
those which may have to be broken shall be welded.
Caulking of defective welded joints will not be
permitted. All joint faces shall be designed to prevent
the ingress of water or leakage of oil with a minimum
of gasket surface exposed to the action of oil or air.

Unless otherwise approved, oil resisting synthetic

rubber gaskets shall not be used, except where the
synthetic rubber is used as a bonding medium for cork
or similar material.

(ii) Pressure Relief Device

Each tank shall be fitted with an approved pressure

relief device designed to protect the tank from damage
and control the explosion of oil under internal fault
conditions. The device shall operate at a static pressure
of less than the hydraulic test pressure for transformer
tank but not exceeding 70 kPa. Means shall be
provided to prevent the ingress of moisture and dust.
Section C13 EE_GS
Page 31 of 38 2007 Edition
 Unless otherwise approved the relief device shall be
mounted on the main tank and, if on the cover, shall be
fitted with a skirt projecting 25 mm inside the tank to
prevent gas accumulation. If a diaphragm is used, it
shall be of approved design and material and situated
above the maximum oil level.

(iii) Tank Cover

Each tank cover shall be of adequate strength, and shall

not distort when lifted. Inspection openings shall be
provided as necessary for changing tap position. Each
inspection opening shall not be less than 450 mm by
360 mm and shall not weigh more than 25 kg. The tank
cover shall be provided with lifting welded eyes. The
bolt holds in all cover plates shall be provided with
washers which will prevent the collection of moisture
in the bolt hole.

The tank cover shall be fitted with pockets for a

thermometer and for the bulbs of the winding or oil
temperature indicators. Protection shall be provided
where necessary for each capillary tube. The
thermometer pocket shall be fitted with a captive
screwed cap to prevent the ingress of water. The
pockets shall be located in the position of maximum oil
temperatures at full rated power and it shall be possible
to remove the instrument bulbs without lowering the oil
level in the tank.

(iv) Transformer Auxiliaries

Each transformer shall be fitted with:

- An oil level indicator of prismatic glass visible

from ground level and indicating the oil levels
over the range specified. The oil level indicator
shall be marked to indicate the correct oil level
with the oil at a temperature of 15ºC, 50ºC and
90ºC; and

- An oil seal silica gel breather or other approved

type device complete with dehydrating agent,
indicator and sight glass. Breathers shall be at
least one size larger than the size that would be
fitted in temperate climate and shall be mounted
approximately 1000 mm above ground level.

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 32 of 38 2007 Edition
(v) Transformer Oil

The transformer oil shall comply with IEC 60296:2003.

The first filling of transformer oil shall be supplied with
the Contract. All oil that may be used for works
processing or testing shall be compatible with the oil to
be used on site.

(vi) Valves and Flanges

All valves up to and including 100 mm shall be of

gunmetal. Larger valves may be gunmetal or may have
cast iron bodies with gunmetal fittings. They shall be
of the full way type with internal screw and shall be
opened by turning counter-clockwise when facing the
handwheel. Butterfly type valves shall only be used for
isolation of radiator.

Means shall be provided for padlocking the valve in the

open and closed positions.

Every valve shall be provided with a mechanical

indicator to show clearly the position of the valve.

All valves shall be provided with flanges having

machined faces.

Each transformer shall be fitted with the following:

- One 50 mm filter valve at the top and one 50

mm combined filter and drain at the bottom of
the tank mounted diagonally opposite to each
other for connection to oil circulating equipment;

- A robust sampling device at the top and bottom

of the main tank. The sampling devices shall
not be fitted on the filter valves specified above;

- A drain valve for oil tank; and

- Flanged type air release plugs as necessary.

All valves opening to atmosphere shall be fitted with

blank flanges.

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 33 of 38 2007 Edition
C13.4.8 Finishes

(a) Surface Preparation

Before untreated steelwork is painted it shall be thoroughly

cleaned by an approved method such as grit blasting to ISO
8501:1994 or chemical pickling and an approved anti-rusting
priming coat applied. Treated steelwork shall be suitably
cleaned and degreased.

(b) Painting - External Surfaces

Panel surfaces shall have not less than one primer coat, two
stoved undercoats and two top stoved coats of paint.
Undercoats shall be epoxy based and easily distinguishable in
shade or color from the priming and finishing coats. The two
final coats shall have a total minimum dry film thickness of
0.075 mm with each coat separately stoved in an air-
circulating oven. The final paint coating shall be of semi-matt
finish and the color shall be approved by the Architect.

Oil tanks and other accessories shall be coated with air-drying

paints by cold airless spray to a minimum total dry film
thickness of 0.127 mm.

Bright/gloss parts shall be protected with a coat of readily

removable composition which shall be effective in preventing
corrosion during transport and storage.

(c) Painting - Internal Surfaces

In oil tank, interior surfaces shall be painted in an identical

manner to the external surface with air-drying oil and
petrol-proof paint. The finishing color of oil tank shall be red.

For epoxy resin transformer enclosures, the interior surfaces

shall be finished in white with anti-condensation paint.

C13.4.9 Rating Plates and Diagrams

The following plates shall be fixed to the transformer enclosure or

tank at 1700 mm average height above ground level:

(a) A rating plate bearing the data specified in IEC 60076:2000

and the duty rating;

(b) A diagram plate showing the internal connections and in

addition a plan view of the transformer giving the correct
physical relationship of the terminals. The percentage tapping
shall be indicated for each tap;

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 34 of 38 2007 Edition
 (c) For oil immersed transformers, a plate showing the location
and function of all valves and air release cocks or plugs. This
plate shall also warn operators to refer to the Maintenance
instructions before applying vacuum treatment; and

(d) Identification plates for the purpose of each removable

inspection cover e.g. tap changer access etc.

The above plates shall be of stainless steel or brass.

External plates and labels shall be fixed by phosphor bronze, stainless

steel or brass screws with 3 mm thick fibre washers at the front and
back of the fixing holes. Tapping holes in transformer tank walls for
fixing plates will not be accepted.

C13.4.10 Cable Boxes

The auto-transformer cable boxes complete with cable glands shall be

suitable for the termination of high voltage power cables.

Cable boxes shall be air insulated and designed to suit the termination
of high voltage cables.

Cable boxes shall be designed to accommodate all cable joint fittings

or sealing-ends required by the manufacturers of the cables, including
stress cones or other approved means for grading the voltage stress on
the terminal insulation of cables.

Provision for earthing the body of each cable box shall be made.

Cable boxes designed for three-core cable shall have seating sockets
on the two outer phases inclined towards the centre to minimise
bending of the cable cores. Where there is more than one core of
cable per phase, the socket block shall be so designed as to minimise
bending of the cable cores.

C13.5 HIGH VOLTAGE - POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS

The power factor correction capacitors for the high voltage chiller motors shall
improve the overall power factor of the chiller motors to 0.95 lagging at rated
output power. The kVAr rating of the capacitor shall not exceed 85% of the no
load magnetising kVAr of the chiller motor.

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 35 of 38 2007 Edition
 Specific requirements of the power factor correction capacitors shall be as
follows:

(a) Type - Low loss dielectric type, indoor and enclosed in

floor-mounted cubicles;

(b) Rated Capacity - To suit the power factor to be improved;

(c) System voltage - 3.3 kV, 6.6 kV or 11 kV as specified;

(d) Frequency - 50 Hz;

(e) Connection - Delta-connected single-phase units;

(f) Insulation Level - 45 kV peak impulse voltage for 1/50

microseconds; and

(g) Protection - 3 line connected high voltage HBC fuses to IEC

60282-1:2005 with striker pin.

The output ratings of the power factor correction capacitor may require
modification subject to the no-load magnetising kVAr rating of the high voltage
motors to be driven.

The power factor correction capacitors shall be provided with combined jacking
and haulage lugs to facilitate positioning. The capacitors shall be externally
finished where applicable in semi-gloss stoved enamel or cellulose.

The power factor correction capacitors shall be protected by high voltage high
breaking capacity fuses with striker pins to IEC 60282-1:2005. The striker pin
shall be arranged to operate an auxiliary contact to trip the starter circuit
breakers.

The power factor correction capacitor cable box complete with cable glands
shall be suitable for the termination of the high voltage power cables.

C13.6 HIGH VOLTAGE - POWER CABLES

C13.6.1 General

All high voltage power cables shall be insulated with cross-linked

polyethylene. The 3.3 kV power cables shall comply with IEC 60502-
1:2004 whereas 6.6 kV and up to 33 kV power cables shall comply
with IEC 60502-2:2005. Where specified, cables shall be wire
armoured and finished overall with a continuous outer sheathing of
polyvinyl chloride (PVC).

All cables shall be designed for operation on a system earthed either

direct or through resistance or reactance at one or more neutral points.

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 36 of 38 2007 Edition
 No straight through cable joints shall be installed without the
approval of the Architect.

For identification the rating of the cable shall be impressed into the
outer insulation at regular intervals.

C13.6.2 Cross-Linked Polyethylene (XLPE) Cables

High voltage cross-linked polyethylene insulated (XLPE) cables shall

be of the 1900/3300 V grade for 3.3 kV power cables, 3800/6600 V
grade for 6.6 kV power cables and 6350/11000 V grade for 11 kV
power cables.

Multi-core cables shall comprise stranded annealed copper

conductors. The insulation shall consist of cross-linked polyethylene
applied by extrusion, bedded in a minimum of two layers of suitable
tape. Armouring, where specified, shall comprise a single layer of
galvanised steel wires or aluminium strip and the cable shall be
served with an extruded layer of PVC.

Single core cables shall comprise circular copper conductors and

where armoured shall comprise non-magnetic aluminium wire or strip.

C13.6.3 Conductors

Copper conductors shall be stranded and shall consist of plain

annealed copper. Before stranding, the conductors shall be
approximately circular in section, smooth, uniform in quality, free
from scale, inequalities, spills, splits and other defects. There shall be
no joints in the wire except those made in the base rod or wire before
final drawing.

The term 'annealed' signifies that the wire before stranding is capable
of at least 15 percent elongation without fracture, the test piece being
not less than 150 mm and not more than 300 mm long.

The stranded conductor shall be clean and reasonably uniform in size

and shape and its surface shall be free from sharp edges.

In the formation of shaped conductors containing less than 19 strands

the same number of strands shall be used as for a circular conductor
of equivalent area.

For conductors having 19 strands or more the number of strands shall

be the same as in a circular conductor of equivalent area, subject to a
maximum permissible variation of plus or minus one strand. All the
strands in any given shaped conductor shall be of the same nominal
size.

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 37 of 38 2007 Edition
C13.6.4 Cable Terminations

Cables shall be terminated in approved non-ferrous mechanical

glands which comply with BS EN 50262:2005 complete with
compression devices for securing the cable sheath. An armour clamp
may be required for bonding to metal sheaths. Where the cables are
installed in entirely dry situations, the gland shall be designed with a
compressible gasket or packing for securing the inner sheath and
means of anchoring the armour. For cables installed wholly or partly
in outdoor or damp conditions compressible sealing and clamping
features shall be provided for securing the inner and outer sheaths and
also the armour; barriers shall be incorporated to prevent the ingress
of moisture.

Section C13 EE_GS

Page 38 of 38 2007 Edition
PART D - INSPECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING DURING
CONSTRUCTION PERIOD

SECTION D1

GENERAL REQUIREMENT

D1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENT

The inspection, testing and commissioning shall be carried out in accordance

with the requirements specified in this Part, IEC 60364:2005, Code of Practice
for the Electricity (Wiring) Regulations (COP) and Testing and Commissioning
Procedure for Electrical Installation in Government Buildings which shall be
referred to and adopted where appropriate.

The Contractor shall follow the administrative requirements, including but not
limited to submitting the standard test forms of the testing and commissioning
and giving advanced notices before carrying out any inspections or tests, as
agreed between the Architect or his representative and the Contractor.

The Contractor shall provide all the necessary provision of labour, specialists,
materials and other consumables. The Contractor shall also supply all necessary
calibrated instruments for carrying out the testing and commissioning work. The
instruments shall not be limited to the typical instruments as detailed in Table
D1.1. The instrument shall be calibrated by laboratories accredited by the Hong
Kong Laboratory Accreditation Scheme (HOKLAS) or other recognized
accredited laboratories. The calibration shall be made against certified
equipment having a known valid relationship to internationally or nationally
recognized standards. Where no such standards exist, the basis used for
calibration shall be documented. In such cases, the laboratories shall provide
satisfactory evidence of correlation of results, for example by participation in a
suitable programme of inter – laboratory comparisons or proficiency testing.

Upon completion of the installation but prior to acceptance, the Contractor shall
submit to the Architect or his representative in good time the supplementary
inspection, testing and commissioning proposals and their schedules to be
carried out. The proposals and schedules shall be agreed by the Architect or his
representative before any inspection and testing and commissioning work are
carried out.

Section D1 EE_GS
Page 1 of 2 2007 Edition
Table D1.1 - Testing Instrument Required for Acceptance Tests

Tests for which Test Test

Instrument Instrument can Resolution Accuracy
Perform Current Voltage
Multi-tester 1. Continuity of 0.01ohm +2% to -
comprising protective (on low 2%
low voltage conductor scale)
ohmmeter, 2. Continuity of
ammeter ring conductor
and voltage 3. Polarity
tester, DC & 4. Current
AC measurement
5. Voltage
measurement

Earth loop 1. Earth fault loop +5% to -

tester test 5%
2. Continuity of
protective
conductor
3. Earth electrode
resistance

RCD tester RCD test Test

current:
10%
Time
duration:
5%

Insulation Insulation 250V for +3% to -

resistance resistance test ELV 3%
tester circuits,
500V for
circuits up
to 500V,
1,000V for
circuits
between
500V to
1,000V

Low Ductor Test Up to 10A +5% to -

resistance D.C. 5%
ohmmeter

Section D1 EE_GS
Page 2 of 2 2007 Edition
 SECTION D2

ROUTINE INSPECTION

D2.1 OFF-SITE ROUTINE INSPECTION AND FUNCTIONAL TEST

Before carrying out any off-site inspection and functional test, the Contractor
shall give due advanced notice and provide details of date, time and list of
inspections and tests to the Architect or his representative for approval.

D2.2 INSPECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT DELIVERED TO

SITE

Before any materials and equipment delivered to site, the Contractor shall give
due advanced notice of not less than 3 days and provide details of date, time and
list of items to be inspected to the Architect or his representative for approval.

D2.3 VISUAL INSPECTION OF INSTALLATION

A visual inspection shall be carried out in accordance with Code 21A and Code
21C of the COP before testing of the installation in order to verify the following:

(a) The installation has been carried out in compliance with regulations
and/or COP;

(b) The correctness of the designation of the installation; and

(c) There is no visual damage to the installation.

D2.4 INSPECTION AND FUNCTIONAL TEST OF INSTALLED WORKS

Where tests are required to be witnessed by the Architect or his representative

and site supervisory staff, the Contractor shall give due advanced notice of not
less than 3 days and provide details of date, time and lists of works to be
inspected and tested.

The Contractor shall carry out the tests and inspections as shown in the
following sections and record the test results and as agreed between the
Architect or his representative and the Contractor.

Registered or suitably qualified electrical workers shall be employed to conduct

such tests.

Section D2 EE_GS
Page 1 of 1 2007 Edition
 SECTION D3

HANDOVER INSPECTION

Before handover of any materials and equipment to the Architect or his representative, the
Contractor shall give due advanced notice of not less than 3 days and provide details of
date, time and list of items to be tested and commissioned to the Architect or his
representative for approval. The Contractor shall follow the details of the testing and
commissioning procedures as shown in Section D4.

Section D3 EE_GS
Page 1 of 1 2007 Edition
 SECTION D4

TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

D4.1 GENERAL

Upon completion of the installed works, the Contractor shall give due advanced
notice and provide details of date, time and list of testing and commissioning
works to the Architect or his representative for approval.

The Contractor shall submit the appropriate schedule and phasing of the testing
and commissioning works as agreed by the Architect or his representative.

Where testing and commissioning works are required to be witnessed by the

Architect or his representative and site supervisory staff, the Contractor shall
carry out the proper testing and commissioning works before inviting them to
witness the works.

D4.2 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES

The Contractor shall carry out the testing and commissioning works in
accordance with the Testing and Commissioning Procedure for Electrical
Installation in Government Building.

D4.3 TESTING OF EMERGENCY LIGHTING, EXIT SIGN AND

EMERGENCY GENERATOR INSTALLATIONS

Where there are emergency lighting, exit sign and emergency generator
installations included in the Contract under the Electrical Installation, the
Contractor shall be responsible for the following duties:

(a) Confirmation to the Fire services Contractor on the completion and

readiness of these installations for fire service inspection by FSD;

(b) Provision of drawings and necessary information to the Fire Service

Contractor for inclusion in the submission to FSD for comments and
inspection;

(c) Co-ordination with the Fire Service Contractor to inspect and witness the
final tests of these installations and rectification of any works found not
complying with the fire service requirements of FSD; and

(d) Co-ordination with the Fire Services Contractor to carry out the final
functional test and performance test.

Section D4 EE_GS
Page 1 of 1 2007 Edition
 PART E - TRAINING, INSPECTION, ATTENDANCE AND
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DURING
MAINTENANCE PERIOD

SECTION E1

TRAINING TO USERS AND OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE AGENTS

E1.1 PARTICULARS OF TRAINING COURSE AND TRAINING SCHEDULE

Whenever possible, the training courses shall be held before or during the
commissioning period and shall be in Hong Kong. To reach the required depth
of appreciation, the principles, theory and practical “hand-on” demonstration
shall be included.

Training for the operation and maintenance of sophisticated equipment shall be

provided and arranged by the Contractor. The training shall include all training
facilities, material and handouts etc. The Contractor shall submit a “Training
Schedule” at least 2 months prior to completion of installation for the
Architect’s approval. The schedule shall consist of but not limited to the
following requirements:

(i) Facilities and training program to ensure that the Employer’s operation
and maintenance staff acquire full knowledge and appreciation of all
aspects of the design, day-to-day operation, breakdown and routine
maintenance, diagnosis and hence capable to effectively and efficiently
operate and maintain the system/equipment. The training proposal shall
be submitted at least 3 months prior to completion of the Contract and
shall include all aspects of operation and maintenance of the plant
including the use of special tools;

(ii) Details and duration of the training course(s), qualifications of the

instructor and the qualification requirements for the trainee(s); and

(iii) Full details of the training syllabus.

Section E1 EE_GS
Page 1 of 1 2007 Edition
 SECTION E2

EMERGENCY SERVICES AND ATTENDANCE TO FAULT CALLS

E2.1 REQUIREMENTS ON RESPONSE TIME

The Contractor shall maintain efficient and prompt response to breakdown;

emergency call-out or complaint for the timely attendance of faults on
installation/equipment and/or unsatisfactory services. The works shall be in
accordance with the following categories:

(a) VERY URGENT

This refers to installation breakdown i.e. interruption more than one final
sub-circuit, system or equipment failure bearing safety implication or
seriously affecting the operation of the whole system. Emergency fault
includes failure of switchboard, pipe burst or water dripping which may
jeopardize the electrical installation, fire alarm and all types of electricity
supply system failure or other situation the Architect or his representative
shall determine. For Very Urgent situation, the Contractor shall attend to
the call immediately.

(b) URGENT

This refers to unsatisfactory services including individual lamp or socket

outlet failure not involving more than one final sub-circuit and
abnormality of equipment operation. Under this circumstance, the
Contractor shall attend the Urgent calls within one hour from the receipt
of the calls and provide temporary/permanent repair within 1 day after
the receipt of the calls.

(c) NON URGENT

This refers to any incident for anything that is not as serious as being
included in (a) or (b) above. The Contractor shall attend the Non Urgent
calls within 4 hours from receipt of the calls.

The Contractor shall promptly complete any repair necessary for

resuming the breakdown installation. In case immediate permanent
repair is not possible due to safety related reason, the following "time for
repair" targets counted from the receipt of breakdown or fault call shall
be complied with:

(a) Complete temporary repair for resumption of the suspended or

breakdown services to a safe operating condition within 24 hours;
and

(b) Complete permanent rectification works within 3 and 7 working

days unless long component and parts delivery time is required.

Section E2 EE_GS
Page 1 of 2 2007 Edition
 If the Contractor fails to respond promptly within the specified period, the
Contractor shall immediately contact the Architect or his representative and
provide sufficient justification for his incapability to comply with the
requirement of response.

E2.2 MONITORING MECHANISM ON CONTRACTOR’S PERFORMANCE

The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining a log book with each switch
room or other specific area requested by Architect or his representative. Every
attendance and details of work done for the installation shall be entered into the
log book by the Contractor so as to form a comprehensive repair record and
evidence to certify that the Contractor has accomplished the Works.

E2.3 FOLLOW UP ACTION AFTER EMERGENCY AND FAULT CASES

The Contractor shall submit to the Architect or his representative the following
documentation and reports at the specified intervals of time:

(a) Fault/Complaint Call Report

Immediately after each attendance of fault/complaint, a report shall be

submitted to the Architect or his representative as soon as practicable but
in any case not exceeding 72 hours after the receipt of fault
call/complaint.

(b) Equipment Breakdown Report

The equipment breakdown report shall have full details of findings

during investigation/examination on cause of breakdown, account of
repair/replacement work done, suggested precaution and/or action
required to prevent the recurrence of similar incident. Interim report with
proposal for repair/replacement work shall be submitted to the Architect
or his representative within 48 hours after the receipt of breakdown call.
A full report shall be available immediately after the rectification of
breakdown for submission to the Architect and his representative.

Sample format of log and system performance sheet and breakdown report shall
be submitted to the Architect or his representative for approval 2 months before
completion of the installation. If sample format is approved, the Contractor shall
provide at his own expenses all copies of log and system performance sheets and
breakdown reports to be used within the Maintenance Period.

Section E2 EE_GS
Page 2 of 2 2007 Edition
 SECTION E3

INSPECTION, OPERATION & MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

During the Maintenance Period, the Contractor shall supply and install, without additional
cost to the Employer, replacements for all and any equipment or parts thereof, which may,
in the opinion of the Architect, become unserviceable, especially where the causes are
attributable to faulty materials, workmanship, or inadequate performance.

The Contractor shall also replace all burnt out lamps at no cost to the Employer if the
failure of lamps is still within the manufacturer’s guaranteed life period. The Contractor
will be permitted to charge for the cost of lamps only if they fail beyond the guaranteed life
period.

In the execution of servicing and maintenance, repair and operation work on site, apart
from transportation, necessary labour, tools, equipment and testing instruments, the
Contractor shall also be responsible for keeping adequate stocks of spare parts/equipment
and other items necessary to maintain all emergency repair in an efficient, satisfactory and
safe operation condition at all time.

The interruption of electricity supply to the existing installations during execution of works
shall be kept to the minimum and shall only be allowed with the prior approval of the
Architect or his representative.

E3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

The Contractor shall prepare and submit the maintenance program before the
commencement of the Maintenance Period for the approval of the Architect or
his representative.

Upon the approval of the above maintenance program, the Contractor shall
prepare a comprehensive maintenance schedule for all installations and indicate
dates for routine maintenance of the installations before the commencement of
the Maintenance Period. The schedule shall include but not limited to the
following:

- Infra-red scan of bus duct at 3 months interval;

- servicing of switchgear at L.V. switchboard at 6 months interval; and
- calibration of the instruments of L.V. switchboard at 6 months interval.

E3.2 MONITORING MECHANISM ON CONTRACTOR’S PERFORMANCE

Every attendance and details of work done on each installation should be

entered into the log book as required in Clause E2.2 by the Contractor to form a
works record, and/or to certify his attendance visits as required by the Contract.
In addition to this log book record, the Contractor shall also keep maintenance
record in his own office. On the request of the Architect or his representative,
the Contractor shall be required to forward his own maintenance record for
checking.

Section E3 EE_GS
Page 1 of 2 2007 Edition
E3.3 FINAL INSPECTION BEFORE THE END OF MAINTENANCE PERIOD

The Contractor shall, in addition to the routine maintenance, make further visit
to the site one month before the end of the maintenance period to check and, if
necessary, re-adjust the systems to meet the actual operation conditions.

The Contractor shall attend inspection to the installation at the end of the
Maintenance Period in order to facilitate the acceptance and handing over of the
installation to the Employer’s representatives.

E3.4 FINAL INSPECTION BEFORE THE END OF MAINTENANCE PERIOD

FOR LOW VOLTAGE CUBICLE SWITCHBOARD

The following tests shall be carried out before the end of the Maintenance
Period or at a timing specified by the Architect if he considers that the electrical
loads supplied by the Switchboard at such time period is more representative of
the full load condition, and defects so identified shall be rectified by the
Contractor:

(i) Insulation This shall be carried out by means of a 1000V "Megger"

Test tester or similar instrument.
(ii) Contact This shall be required as determined by the Architect if
Resistance the thermographic scanning (item (iv) below) detects
Test abnormal hot spots and the Switchboard needs to be
overhauled, and be carried out after the overhaul by
means of "Ductor" tester or similar instrument to ensure
that contacts and joints for switchgears, cables, busbars
as well as the contacts and joints for outgoing cables and
busbars are maintained in good condition.
(iii) Functional This shall be carried out to ensure that all devices
Test operate properly as intended.
(iv) Thermographic This shall be carried out to ascertain whether abnormal
Scanning hot spots exist at the switchgears, cables, busbars, joints
and other components of the Switchboard.

An Inspection and Test Report shall be submitted to the Architect within two
weeks before the completion of the Maintenance Period. Such Inspection and
Test Report shall incorporate records of the tests and state clearly also the
following:

(i) The “Switchboard” is operated in good condition;

(ii) The work carried out and any adjustments made during Maintenance
Period; and
(iii) Any recommendation on the necessary improvement or rectification on
the “Switchboard”.

The test and inspection shall be carried out with the prior approval of the
Architect if such would require shut-down of the “Switchboard” and the work
may be carried out at any time outside normal hours as required by the Architect.
Section E3 EE_GS
Page 2 of 2 2007 Edition
 SECTION E4

COMPLETION OF OUTSTANDING AND DEFECTIVE WORKS

After receiving the Architect’s completion certificate, the Contractor shall complete all
outstanding works listed thereon and rectify any defects that have occurred up to that time.
The defect completion schedule shall be approved by Architect.

Section E4 EE_GS
Page 1 of 1 2007 Edition
 ANNEX I
LIST OF TECHNICAL STANDARDS QUOTED IN
THIS GENERAL SPECIFICATION

Standard Description Part and Clause No.

IEC 60364-7-704 Low-voltage electrical installations – Part 7-704: A2.1.3 (g)
Ed. 2.0:2005 Requirements for special installations or locations –
Construction and demolition site installations

IEC 60364-1:2005 Low-voltage electrical installations – Part 1: A2.2 (f), B1.4,

Fundamental principles, assessment of general B2.2.4, B2.3.9,
characteristics, definitions B2.4.5 (m), B3.7.11
(b), B7.1, B7.7.4,
B7.10.2
ISO 5457:1999 Technical Product Documentation - Sizes and A4.3.2, A4.4.2
Layout of Drawing Sheets
BS 1710:1984 Identification of Pipelines and Services B1.4
BS 4800:1989 Paint Colours for Building Purposes B1.4
IEC 61238-1:2003 Compression and mechanical connectors for power B2.7.1, C13.2.9 (b)
cables for rated voltages up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV)
Part 1: Test methods and requirements
IEC 60228:2004 Conductors of Insulated Cables B3.8.5, C2.1.5

IEC 60702-2:2002 Mineral Insulated Cables and Their Terminations B3.8.5, C3.2 (d),
with a Rated Voltage Not Exceeding 750 V Part 2: C3.2 (e)
Terminations
BS 1494-1:1964 Fixing Accessories for Building Purposes Part 1: B3.9.1
Fixings for Sheet, Roof and Wall Coverings
IEC 60079-0:2004 Electrical Apparatus for Explosive Gas B4.4.3
Atmospheres - Part 0: General Requirements
IEC 61558-2-5:1997 Safety of Power Transformers, Power Supply Units B4.4.6
and Similar - Part 2-5: Particular Requirements for
Shaver Transformers and Shaver Supply Units
IEC 60127-1:2006 Miniature Fuses - Part 1: Definitions for Miniature B5.1.1
Fuses and General Requirements for Miniature
Fuse-Links
IEC 60189-1:2007 Low-Frequency Cables and Wires with PVC B5.1.1
Insulation and PVC Sheath Part 1: General Test and
Measuring Methods
IEC 60245-1:2003 Rubber Insulated Cables - Rated Voltages up to and B5.1.1
Including 450/750 V - Part 1: General
Requirements
IEC 61140:2001 Protection Against Electric Shock - Common B5.1.1, B5.1.4
Aspects for Installation and Equipment

Annex I EE_GS
Page 1 of 18 2007 Edition
Standard Description Part and Clause No.
IEC 60227-1:1998 Polyvinyl Chloride Insulated Cables of Rated B5.1.1, B7.10.1
Voltages up to and Including 450/750 V Part 1:
General Requirements
IEC 60670-1:2002 Boxes and enclosures for electrical accessories for B5.2.1, B5.2.3,
household and similar fixed electrical installations B5.6.1, B5.8, B7.6.4,
Part 1: General requirements B8.1.3, B8.1.4,
B8.1.5, B8.2.7,
B8.2.9, C2.2.3,
C2.2.4, C2.2.5,
C2.3.3, C4.1
IEC 61035-1:1990 Specification for conduit fittings for electrical B5.2.1, C2.2.3,
installations - Part 1: General requirements C2.3.1, C2.3.2,
C2.3.4
IEC 60439-2:2005 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies B6.10, C5.9.1,
- Part 2: Particular requirements for busbar trunking C5.9.4, C6.1, C6.2,
systems (busways) C6.10.6, C6.11.5
IEC 60189-1:2007 Low-Frequency Cables and Wires with PVC B7.10.1
Insulation and PVC Sheath Part 1: General Test and
Measuring Methods
BS 6004:2000 Electric cables PVC insulated, non-armoured cables B7.10.1, C2.1.3 (f),
for voltages up to and including 450/750 V, for C2.1.3 (g), C2.1.3
electric power, lighting and internal wiring (h), C2.1.4 (d),
C2.1.4 (e)
IEC 60755:1983 General Requirements for Residual Current B7.12.1
Operated Protective Devices
IEC 61008-1:2006 Residual current operated circuit-breakers without B7.12.1, C5.7.1,
integral overcurrent protection for household and C5.7.2
similar uses (RCCBs) – Part 1: General rules
EN 60742:1995 Isolating Transformers and Safety Isolating B8.2.5
Transformers Requirements
BS EN 50014 to Electrical Apparatus for Potentially Explosive B8.3.1 (a), B8.3.1 (c)
50039 Atmospheres

IEC 60079-0:2004 Electrical Apparatus for Explosive Gas B8.3.1 (a), B8.3.6,
Atmospheres - Part 0: General Requirements C7.4.4 (a), C12.7.5
(a)(i), C12.7.5 (b)(i)
IEC 60079-12:1978 Electrical Apparatus for Explosive Gas B8.3.2 (c), B8.3.4,
Atmospheres Part 12: Classification of Mixtures of B8.3.6, C7.4.4 (a)
Gases or Vapours with Air According to Their
Maximum Experimental Safe Gaps and Minimum
Igniting Currents
BS 2470:1973 Hexagon Socket Screws and Wrench Keys. Inch B8.3.5
Series
BS 2558:1954 Tubular Box Spanners B8.3.5

BS 476-4:1970 Fire tests on building materials and structures Part B8.3.8

4: Non-combustibility test for materials

Annex I EE_GS
Page 2 of 18 2007 Edition
Standard Description Part and Clause No.
BS 729:1971 Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings on Iron and Steel B8.4.4
Articles
IEC 60502-1:2004 Power Cables with Extruded Insulation and Their B8.4.8, C2.1.3 (a),
Accessories for Rated Voltages from 1 kV (Um = C2.1.3 (b), C2.1.3 (c),
1.2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV) - Part 1: Cables C2.1.3 (d), C2.1.3 (l),
for Rated Voltages of 1 kV (Um = 1.2 kV) and 3 C3.2 (a), C3.2 (b),
kV (Um = 3.6kV) C3.2 (f), C13.6.1
IEC 62305-1:2006 Protection against lightning – Part 1: General B8.5.2, B8.5.10
principles
ISO 8502:2006 Preparation of steel substrates before application of B9.5.1 (d)
paints and related products Tests for the assessment
of surface cleanliness
IEC 60454-3-1:2002 Pressure-sensitive adhesive tapes for electrical C1.3
purposes Part 3 Specifications for individual
materials Sheet 1: PVC film tapes with pressure-
sensitive adhesive
BS 1210:1963 Wood Screws C1.6
BS EN 24016:1992 Hexagon Head Bolts - Product Grade C (ISO 4016: C1.6
1988)
BS EN 24018:1992 Hexagon Head Screws - Product Grade C (ISO C1.6
4018: 1988)

BS EN 24034:1992 Hexagon Nuts - Product Grade C (ISO 4034: 1986) C1.6

ISO 885:2000 General Purpose Bolts and Screws - Metric Series - C1.6
Radii under the Head

ISO 683-13:1986 Heat-Treatable Steels, Alloy Steels and Free- C1.7, C3.11.1
Cutting Steels - Part 13: Wrought Stainless Steels

BS 3858:1992 Binding and Identification Sleeves for Use on C1.8.1, C3.7

Electric Cables and Wires (E)
IEC 60227-3:1997 Polyvinyl Chloride Insulated Cables of Rated C2.1.2 (a), C2.1.2 (b)
Voltages up to and Including 450/750 V - Part 3:
Non-Sheathed Cables for Fixed Wiring
BS 7211:1998 Electric cables Thermosetting insulated, non- C2.1.2 (e), C2.1.3 (i),
armoured cables for voltages up to and including C2.1.3 (j)
450/750 V, for electric power, lighting and internal
wiring, and having low emission of smoke and
corrosive gases when affected by fire
IEC 60245-7:1994 Rubber Insulated Cables - Rated Voltages up to and C2.1.2. (c), C2.1.2
Including 450/750 V - Part 7: Heat Resistant (d), C2.1.4 (k),
Ethylene-Vinyl Acetate Rubber Insulated Cables C2.1.4 (l)
IEC 60227-4:1997 Polyvinyl Chloride Insulated Cables of Rated C2.1.3 (e)
Voltages up to and Including 450/750 V - Part 4:
Sheathed Cables for Fixed Wiring

Annex I EE_GS
Page 3 of 18 2007 Edition
Standard Description Part and Clause No.
BS 7629-1:1997 Specification for 300/500 V fire resistant electric C2.1.3 (k)
cables having low emission of smoke and corrosive
gases when affected by fire Part 1: Multicore cables
IEC 60227-5:2003 Polyvinyl Chloride Insulated Cables of Rated C2.1.4 (a)
Voltages up to and Including 450/750 V - Part 5:
Flexible Cables (Cords)
IEC 60245-4:2004 Rubber insulated cables Rated voltages up to and C2.1.4 (b), C2.1.4 (c)
including 450/750 V Part 4: Cords and flexibe
cables
BS 6007:2006 Electric Cables - Single Core Unsheathed Heat C2.1.4 (f)
Resisting Cables for Voltages up to and Including
450/750 V, for Internal Wiring
BS 6500:2000 Electric cables Flexible cords rated up to 300/500 C2.1.4 (g), C10.1.2
V, for use with appliances and equipment intended (e), C10.9.3 (d)(ii),
for domestic, office and similar environments C10.18.3 (l),
C10.19.3 (k),
C10.20.3 (n),
C10.23.3 (f)
BS 7919:2001 Electric cables Flexible cables rated up to 450/750 C2.1.4 (h), C2.1.4 (i),
V, for use with appliances and equipment intended C2.1.4 (j)
for industrial and similar environments
IEC 60245-3:1994 Rubber Insulated Cables - Rated Voltages up to and C2.1.4 (m)
Including 450/750 V - Part 3: Heat Resistant
Silicone Insulated Cables
IEC 60332-1-1:2004 Tests on electric and optical fibre cables under fire C2.1.6, C2.1.7
conditions Part 1-1: Test for vertical flame
propagation for a single insulated wire or cable
Apparatus
IEC 61034-2:2005 Measurement of smoke density of cables burning C2.1.6, C2.1.7
under defined conditions – Part 2: Test procedure
and requirements
IEC 60754-1:1994 Test on Gases Evolved During Combustion of C2.1.6, C2.1.7, C3.5,
Materials from Cables - Part 1: Determination of C3.8.1
the Amount of Halogen Acid Gas
BS 6387:1994 Specification for Performance Requirements for C2.1.7
Cables Required to Maintain Circuit Integrity
Under Fire Conditions
IEC 61386-21:2002 Conduit Systems for Cable Management - Part 21: C2.2.1
Particular Requirements - Ridgid Conduit Systems
IEC 61386-23:2002 Conduit Systems for Cable Management - Part 23: C2.2.2
Particular Requirements - Flexible Conduit Systems
IEC 60670-21:2004 Boxes and enclosures for electrical accessories for C2.2.3
household and similar fixed electrical installations
Part 21: Particular requirements for boxes and
enclosures with provision for suspension means

Annex I EE_GS
Page 4 of 18 2007 Edition
Standard Description Part and Clause No.
BS 4662:2006 Boxes for flush mounting of electrical accessories – C2.2.4, C2.2.5,
Requirements and test methods and dimensions C2.3.3
IEC 61386-1:1996 Conduit Systems for Electrical Installations - Part C2.2.5
1: General Requirements
BS 3382-2:1961 Electroplated Coatings on Threaded Components C2.2.6, C2.4.7
Part 1: Cadmium on Steel Components Part 2: Zinc
on Steel Components
IEC 60614-2-2:1980 Specification for conduits for electrical installations C2.3.1
- Part 2: Particular specification for rigid plain
conduits of insulating materials
IEC 60614-2-3:1990 Specification for conduits for electrical C2.3.2
installations. Part 2: Particular specifications for
conduits. Section Three: Pliable conduits of
insulating material
IEC 61084-2-2:2003 Cable trunking and ducting systems for electrical C2.4.1
installations Part 2-2: Particular requirements Cable
trunking systems and cable ducting systems
intended for underfloor and flushfloor installations
IEC 61084-1:1991 Cable Trunking and Ducting Systems for Electrical C2.4.1, C2.5
Installations Part 1: General Requirements

BS 4678-1:1971 Cable Trunking Part 1: Steel Surface Trunking C2.4.2

BS EN 10143:1993 Continuously Hot-Dip Metal Coated Steel Sheet C2.4.2
and Strip - Tolerances on Dimensions and Shape

BS 7846:2000, Electric Cables - 600/1 000 V Armoured Fire- C3.2 (c)

Category F2 Resistant Cables Having Thermosetting Insulation
and Low Emission of Smoke and Corrosive Gases
When Affected by Fire
IEC 60702-1:2002 Mineral Insulated Cables and Their Terminations C3.2 (d), C3.2 (e)
with a Rated Voltage Not Exceeding 750 V Part 1:
Cables
BS 1449-1:1991 Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip Part 1: Carbon and C3.10.1, C3.11.1
Carbon-Manganese Plate, Sheet and Strip

ISO 1460:1992 Metallic Coatings - Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings C3.10.1, C3.11.1
on Ferrous Materials - Gravimetric Determination
of the Mass per Unit Area
ISO 1461:1999 Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings on Fabricated Iron C3.10.1, C3.11.1
and Steel Articles - Specifications and Test Method

BS 5733:1995 General Requirements for Electrical Accessories C4.1

IEC 60669-1:2007 Switches for Household and Similar Fixed- C4.2.1
Electrical Installations - Part 1: General
Requirements

Annex I EE_GS
Page 5 of 18 2007 Edition
Standard Description Part and Clause No.
IEC 60529:2001 Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP C4.2.1, C4.2.5,
Code) C4.3.1, C4.7.6,
C5.1.5, C5.26.2,
C6.2, C7.3.2, C7.4.2
(a), C7.4.3 (a), C7.4.4
(a), C8.5.1, C11.4,
C12.1.3 (c), C12.2.1,
C12.7.3 (a)(v),
C13.4.7 (b)
BS 1363-2:1995 13 A Plugs, Socket-Outlets, Adaptors and C4.3.1
Connection Units - Part 2: Specification for 13 A
Switched and Unswitched Socket-Outlets
BS 546:1950 Two-Pole and Earthing-Pin Plugs, Socket-Outlets C4.3.1
and Socket-Outlet Adaptors for AC (50-60 Hz)
Circuits up to 250 V
IEC 60309-2:2005 Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers for industrial C4.3.1
purposes – Part 2: Dimensional interchangeability
requirements for pin and contact-tube accessories
IEC 61558-1:2005 Safety of power transformers, power supplies, C4.3.2
reactors and similar products - Part 1: General
requirements and tests
IEC 61558-2-5:1997 Safety of Power Transformers, Power Supply Units C4.3.2
and Similar - Part 2-5: Particular Requirements for
Shaver Transformers and Shaver Supply Units
IEC 60269-1:2006 Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 1: General Requirements C4.3.3, C4.4.2,
C5.6.3, C5.8.2,
C5.8.5, C5.26.4
(a)(xi), C6.6, C6.10.6,
C6.11.5, C13.3.1 (f)
BS 1363-1:1995 13 A Plugs, Socket-Outlets, Adaptors and C4.4.2, C10.1.2 (f)
Connection Units - Part 1: Specification for
Rewirable and Non-Rewirable 13 A Fused Plugs
IEC 60570:2003 Electrical supply track systems for luminaires C4.6.1

BS 667:2005 Illuminance meters Requirements and test methods C4.6.2

BS 67:1987 Ceiling Roses C4.6.3
IEC 60061-1:2005 Lamp caps and holders together with gauges for the C4.6.4
control of interchangeability and safety Part 1:
Lamp caps
IEC 60061-2:2005 Lamp caps and holders together with gauges for the C4.6.4
control of interchangeability and safety Part 2:
Lampholders
IEC 60238:2004 Edison Screw Lampholders C4.6.4
IEC 61184:1997 Bayonet Lampholders C4.6.4

Annex I EE_GS
Page 6 of 18 2007 Edition
Standard Description Part and Clause No.
IEC 62053-11:2003 Electricity metering equipment (a.c.) Particular C4.7.1
requirements Part 11: Electromechanical meters for
active energy (classes 0,5, 1 and 2)
IEC 60051-1:1997 to Direct Acting Indicating Analogue Electrical C4.7.2
IEC 60051-9:1988 Measuring Instruments and Their Accessories - Part
1: Definitions and General Requirements Common
to All Parts, Part 2: Special Requirements for
Ammeters and Voltmeters, Part 3: Special
Requirements for Wattmeters and Varmeters, Part
4: Special Requirements for Frequency Meters, Part
5: Special Requirements for Phase Meters, Power
Factor Meters and Synchroscopes, Part 6: Special
Requirements for Ohmmeters (Impedance Meters)
and Conductance Meters, Part 7: Special
Requirements for Multi-Function Instruments, Part
8: Special Requirements for Accessories, Part 9:
Recommended Test Methods
IEC 60044-1:2003 Instrument transformers - Part 1: Current C4.7.3, C5.5.2,
transformers C11.9, C13.3.1 (f),
C13.3.10
IEC 60947-1:2007 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 1: C5.1.1
General rules
IEC 60439-1:2004 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear C5.1.1, C5.9.1,
assemblies – Part 1: Type-tested and partially type- C5.9.4, C5.10.5,
tested assemblies C5.10.7, C5.11.1,
C5.26.2, C6.3, C6.4,
C6.10.2, C6.10.6,
C6.11.5, C11.3,
C11.4, C11.4 (c),
C11.7, C11.16 (a)(i),
C11.16 (a)(viii),
C12.2.6, C12.2.11
IEC 60947-3:2005 Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear - Part 3: C5.1.7, C5.2.2,
Switches, Disconnectors, Switch-Disconnectors and C5.2.5
Fuse-Combination Units
IEC 60947-2:2006 Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear - Part 2: C5.4.1, C5.4.2,
Circuit-Breakers C5.5.1, C5.5.3, C6.6
IEC 60755:1992 General Requirements for Residual Current C5.5.2
Operated Protective Devices
IEC 60255-6:1988 Electrical relays - Part 6: Measuring relays and C5.5.2, C11.9,
protection equipment C13.3.1 (f)
IEC 60898-1:2003 Electrical Accessories - Circuit-Breakers for C5.6.1, C5.6.2,
Overcurrent Protection for Household and Similar C5.6.3
Installations - Part 1: Circuit-Breakers for A.C.
Operation
BS 88:1994 Cartridge Fuses for Voltages up to and Including C5.6.3
1000 V a.c. and 1500 V d.c.

Annex I EE_GS
Page 7 of 18 2007 Edition
Standard Description Part and Clause No.
IEC 61009-1:2006 Residual current operated circuit-breakers with C5.7.4, C5.7.5
integral overcurrent protection for household and
similar uses (RCBO’s) Part 1: General rules
IEC 60269-2-1:2004 Low-voltage fuses – Part 2-1: Supplementary C5.8.5
requirements for fuses for use by authorized
persons (fuses mainly for industrial application) –
Sections I to VI: Examples of types of standardized
fuses
IEC 60364:2005 Low-voltage electrical installations C5.9.4, D1.1

IEC 60439-3:2001 Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear C5.11.1, C5.12.1

Assemblies - Part 3: Particular Requirements for
Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear
Assemblies Intended to Be Installed in Places
Where Unskilled Persons Have Access for Their
Use - Distribution Boards
IEC 60947-4-1:2005 Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear Part 4-1: C5.14.1, C5.14.2,
Contactors and Motor-Starters - Electromechanical C5.14.3, C5.15,
Contactors and Motor-Starters C5.26.4 (a)(i),
C5.26.4 (a)(vii),
C5.26.4 (a)(viii),
C5.26.4 (a)(ix)
IEC 61000-4-2:2001 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 4-2: C5.16.1 (c), C5.18.1
Testing and Measurement Techniques - (b)(iii), C5.19.1 (a),
Electrostatic Discharge Immunity Test C5.24.1 (d)
IEC 61000-4-3:2006 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 4-3: C5.16.1 (c), C5.18.1
Testing and measurement techniques – Radiated, (b)(iv), C5.19.1 (a)
radio-frequency, electromagnetic field immunity
test
IEC 61000-4-4:2004 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 4-4: C5.16.1 (c), C5.18.1
Testing and measurement techniques – Electrical (b)(v), C5.19.1 (a),
fast transient/burst immunity test C5.24.1 (d)
IEC 61000-4-5:2005 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Part 4-5: C5.16.1 (c), C5.18.1
Testing and measurement techniques – Surge (b)(vi), C5.19.1 (a),
immunity test C5.24.1 (d)
ISO 9001:2000 Quality Management Systems - Requirements C5.16.1 (c), C5.19.1
(a)
IEC 61643-1:2005 Low-voltage surge protective devices – Part 1: C5.17.1 (d)
Surge protective devices connected to low-voltage
power distribution systems – Requirements and
tests
IEC 60364-4-44:2006 Electrical Installations of Buildings - Part 4-44: C5.17.2 (c)
Protection for Safety - Protection Against Voltage
Disturbances and Electromagnetic Disturbances
IEC 60068-2-6:1995 Environmental Testing - Part 2: Tests - Test FC: C5.18.1 (b)(i)
Vibration (Sinusoidal)

Annex I EE_GS
Page 8 of 18 2007 Edition
Standard Description Part and Clause No.
IEC 60068-2-27:1987 Basic Environmental Testing Procedures Part 2: C5.18.1 (b), C11.4
Tests - Test Ea and Guidance: Shock

BS EN 61800-3:2005 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems C5.19.1 (a)

Part 3: EMC requirements and specific test methods

BS 7430:1998 Code of Practice for Earthing C5.21.1 (c)

BS EN 61204:1995 Low-Voltage Power Supply Devices, d.c. Output - C5.21.1 (c)

Performance Characteristics

IEC 60478-1:1974 Stabilized power supplies, d.c. output Part 1: Terms C5.21.1 (c)
and definitions

IEC 60950-1:2005 Information technology equipment – Safety – Part C5.21.1 (c)

1: General requirements

IEC 61204:2001 Low-Voltage Power Supply Devices, D.C. Output - C5.21.1 (c)
Performance Characteristics

IEC 61951-2:2003 Secondary Cells and Batteries Containing Alkaline C5.21.1 (e)
or Other Non-Acid Electrolytes - Portable Sealed
Rechargeable Single Cells - Part 2 Nickel-Metal
Hydride
BS EN 60529:1992 Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP C5.21.3 (a)
Code)
BS EN 60831-2:1996 Shunt Power Capacitors of the Self-Heating Type C5.22.2 (a)
for a.c. Systems Having a Rated Voltage up to and
Including 1 kV Part 2: Ageing Test, Self-Healing
Test and Destruction Test
IEC 60931-1:1996 Shunt power capacitors of the non-self-healing type C5.22.2 (a)
for a.c. systems having a rated voltage up to and
including 1 000 V Part 1: General Performance,
testing and rating Safety requirements Guide for
installation and operation
BS EN 60947-4- Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear - Part 4- C5.22.2 (d)
1:2001 1: Contactors and Motor-Starters -
Electromechanical Contactors and Motor-Starters
IEC 62271-200:2003 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 200: C5.22.2 (f)
AC metal-enclosed switchgear and controlgear for
rated voltages above 1 kV and up to and including
52 kV
IEC 60255-26:2004 Electrical relays Part 26: Electromagnetic C5.23.1 (b)
compatibility requirements for measuring relays
and protection equipment

Annex I EE_GS
Page 9 of 18 2007 Edition
Standard Description Part and Clause No.
IEC 60255-21-1:1988 Electrical relays - Part 21: Vibration, shock, bump C5.23.1 (f)
and seismic tests on measuring relays and
protection equipment - Section One: Vibration tests
(sinusoidal)
IEC 60255-21-2:1988 Electrical relays - Part 21: Vibration, shock, bump C5.23.1 (f)
and seismic tests on measuring relays and
protection equipment - Section Two: Shock and
bump tests
IEC 60255-22-2:1996 Electrical Relays - Part 22: Electrical Disturbance C5.23.1 (f)
Tests for Measuring Relays and Protection
Equipment - Section 2: Electrostatic Discharge
Tests
IEC 60255-22-3:2007 Electrical Relays - Part 22-3: Electrical Disturbance C5.23.1 (f)
Tests for Measuring Relays and Protection
Equipment - Radiated Electromagnetic Field
Disturbance Tests
IEC 60255-22-4:2002 Electrical Relays Part 22-4: Electrical Disturbance C5.23.1 (f)
Tests for Measuring Relays and Protection
Equipment - Electrical Fast Transient/Burst
Immunity Test
IEC 60255-22-5:2002 Electrical Relays - Part 22-5: Electrical Disturbance C5.23.1 (f)
Tests for Measuring Relays and Protection
Equipment - Surge Immunity Test
IEC 60255-25:2000 Electrial Relays - Part 25:Electromagnetic Emission C5.23.1 (f)
Tests for Measuring Relays and Protection
Equipment
IEC 61000-3-2:2005 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . Part 3-2: C5.24.1 (d), C7.8.1
Limits . Limits for harmonic current emissions (c), C9.3.2
(equipment input current .16 A per phase)
IEC 60034-5:2006 Rotating Electrical Machines - Part 5: Degrees of C5.25.1
Protection Provided by the Integral Design of
Rotating Electrical Machines (IP Code)
IEC 60085:2004 Electrical insulation – Thermal classification C5.25.1, C10.8.1 (b),
C10.9.3 (a)(ii),
C12.1.3 (f)
IEC 60034-1:2004 Rotating electrical machines Part 1: Rating and C5.25.1, C5.25.7,
performance C10.9.3 (a)(i),
C12.1.5, C13.2.1
(a)(ii), C13.2.1
(a)(iv), C13.2.3,
C13.2.4, C13.2.10
BS 3790:2006 Specification for belt drives – Endless wedge belts, C5.25.11
endless V-belts, banded wedge belts, banded V-
belts and their corresponding pulleys
IEC TS 60034- Rotating electrical machines Part 25: Guide for the C5.25.13
25:2007 design and performance of cage induction motors
specifically designed for converter supply

Annex I EE_GS
Page 10 of 18 2007 Edition
Standard Description Part and Clause No.
IEC 60034-9:2007 Rotating Electrical Machines - Part 9: Noise Limits C5.25.5
IEC 60034-14:2007 Rotating electrical machines Part 14: Mechanical C5.25.5, C13.2.1
vibration of certain machines with shaft heights 56 (a)(vi), C13.2.5
mm and higher Measurement, evaluation and limits
of vibration severity
IEC 60470:2000 High-Voltage Alternating Current Contactors and C5.26.4 (a)(i),
Contactor-Based Motor-Starters C5.26.4 (a)(vii)
BS EN 13601:2002 Copper and Copper Alloys - Copper Rod, Bar and C6.4, C11.7, C13.3.3
Wire for General Electrical Purposes
IEC 60667-1:1980 Specification for vulcanized fibre for electrical C6.10.2
purposes. Part 1: Definitions and general
requirements
IEC 60081:2002 Double-Capped Fluorescent Lamps - Performance C7.1.2
Specifications
IEC 60155:2006 Glow-Starters for Fluorescent Lamps C7.1.2
IEC 60400:2004 Lampholders for Tubular Fluorescent Lamps and C7.1.2
Starterholders
IEC 60901:2004 Single-Capped Fluorescent Lamps - Performance C7.1.2
Specifications
IEC 60920:1990 Ballasts for Tubular Fluorescent Lamps General C7.1.2
and Safety Requirements
IEC 60921:2006 Ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps – C7.1.2
Performance requirements
IEC 60927:2007 Auxiliaries for Lamps - Starting Devices (Other C7.1.2
Than Glow Starters) - Performance Requirements
IEC 61048:2006 Auxiliaries for lamps – Capacitors for use in C7.1.2
tubular fluorescent and other discharge lamp
circuits – General and safety requirements
IEC 61049:1992 Capacitors for Use in Tubular Fluorescent and C7.1.2
Other Discharge Lamp Circuits Performance
Requirements
IEC 61347-1:2007 Lamp Controlgear - Part 1: General and Safety C7.1.2
Requirements
IEC 61347-2-1:2006 Lamp Controlgear - Part 2-1: Particular C7.1.2
requirements for starting devices (other than glow
starters)
IEC 60598-2-1:1979 Luminaires Part 2: Particular Requirements Section C7.1.2, C7.1.5
One - Fixed General Purpose Luminaires

IEC 60598-2-2:1997 Luminaires - Part 2: Particular Requirements - C7.1.2, C7.1.5

Section 2: Recessed Luminaires

IEC 60598-1:2006 Luminaires - Part 1: General requirements and tests C7.1.2, C7.3.2,
C7.4.2 (a), C7.4.3 (a),
C8.5.1
Annex I EE_GS
Page 11 of 18 2007 Edition
Standard Description Part and Clause No.
IEC 61347-2-3:2004 Lamp Controlgear - Part 2-3: Particular C7.1.2, C7.8.1 (a)
Requirements for A.C. Supplied Electronic Ballasts
for Fluorescent Lamps
IEC 60929:2006 AC-supplied electronic ballasts for tubular C7.1.2, C7.8.1 (b)
fluorescent lamps – Performance requirements
ISO 9000:2005 Quality Management Systems - Fundamentals and C7.1.2, C8.2, C8.3,
Vocabulary C9.1

IEC 60079-10:2002 Electrical Apparatus for Explosive Gas C7.4.3 (a), C7.4.4 (a)
Atmospheres Part - 10: Classification of Hazardous
Areas
IEC 60079-1:2003 Electrical Apparatus for Explosive Gas C7.4.4 (a)
Atmospheres - Part 1: Flameproof Enclosures "D"
BS 1490:1988 Aluminium and Aluminium Alloy Ingots and C7.4.4 (b)
Castings for General Engineering Purposes
ISO 3522:2006 Aluminium and aluminium alloys Castings - C7.4.4 (b)
Chemical composition and mechanical properties
IEC 60598-2-22:2002 Luminaires - Part 2-22: Particular Requirements - C7.5.2
Luminaires for Emergency Lighting
IEC 61347-2-7:2000 Lamp Controlgear - Part 2-7: Particular C7.5.2
Requirements for D.C. Supplied Electronic Ballasts
for Emergency Lighting
IEC 61951-2:2003 Secondary Cells and Batteries Containing Alkaline C7.5.3 (a)
or Other Non-Acid Electrolytes - Portable Sealed
Rechargeable Single Cells - Part 2 Nickel-Metal
Hydride
EN 55015:2006 Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio C7.8.1 (d), C9.3.2
Disturbance Characteristics of Electrical Lighting
and Similar Equipment
IEC 61547:2000 Equipment for General Lighting Purposes - EMC C7.8.1 (e)
Immunity Requirements

IEC 60662:2002 High-Pressure Sodium Vapour Lamps C8.2, C8.4

IEC 60188:2001 High-Pressure Mercury Vapour Lamps - C8.3
Performance Specifications

IEC 61167:1992 Metal Halide Lamps C8.4

IEC 60598-2-5:1998 Luminaires - Part 2-5: Particular Requirements - C8.5.1
Floodlights

IEC 60432-2:2005 Incandescent Lamps - Safety Specifications - Part C9.1

2: Tungsten Halogen Lamps for Domestic and
Similar General Lighting Purposes
IEC 60357:2002 Tungsten halogen lamps (non-vehicle) - C9.2
Performance specifications

Annex I EE_GS
Page 12 of 18 2007 Edition
Standard Description Part and Clause No.
IEC 61046:1995 D.C. or A.C. Supplied Electronic Step-Down C9.3.2
Convertors for Filament Lamps General and Safety
Requirements
IEC 61047:2004 D.C. or A.C. Supplied Electronic Step-Down C9.3.2
Convertors for Filament Lamps - Performance
Requirements
IEC 60335-1:2006 Household and similar electrical appliances - Safety C10.1.1 (b), C10.13.1
- Part 1: General requirements (a)

IEC 60879:1986 Performance and construction of electric circulating C10.2.1 (b)(i)

fans and regulators

IEC 60335-2-80:2004 Household and similar electrical appliances - Safety C10.2.1 (b)(ii),
- Part 2-80: Particular requirements for fans C10.3.1 (c)(i),
C10.4.1 (c)(i),
C10.5.1 (c)(i),
C10.6.1 (c)(i),
C10.7.1 (a)
BS EN 10255:2007 Non-alloy steel tubes suitable for welding and C10.2.3 (c)(ii)
threading — Technical delivery conditions

JIS C 9601:1990 Electric Fans C10.3.1 (c)(ii),

C10.4.1 (c)(ii),
C10.5.1 (c)(ii),
C10.6.1 (c)(ii)
IEC 60335-2-30:2004 Household and Similar Electrical Appliances - C10.10.1 (a),
Safety - Part 2-30: Particular Requirements for C10.11.1 (a),
Room Heaters C10.12.1 (a),
C10.13.1 (a)
BS EN ISO Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings on Fabricated Iron C10.13.3 (n)
1461:1999 and Steel Articles - Specifications and Test
Methods
IEC 60335-2-21:2004 Household and similar electrical appliances - Safety C10.14.1 (d),
- Part 2-21: Particular requirements for storage C10.15.1 (f)(i)
water heaters
BS 7206:1990 Unvented Hot Water Storage Units and Packages C10.15.1 (f)(i)

BS EN 60730-2- Automatic electrical controls for household and C10.15.1 (f)(ii),

15:2007 similar use — Part 2-15: Particular requirements for C10.15.3 (e)
automatic electrical water level sensing controls of
the float or electrode-sensor type used in boiler
applications

BS 6283-2:1991 Safety and control devices for use in hot water C10.15.1 (f)(iii),
systems. Specifications for temperature relief C10.15.3 (f)(i),
valves for pressures from 1 bar to 10 bar C10.15.3 (f)(ii)

Annex I EE_GS
Page 13 of 18 2007 Edition
Standard Description Part and Clause No.
BS 6282-1:1982 Devices with Moving Parts for the Prevention of C10.15.4 (b)
Contamination of Water by Backflow Part 1: Check
Valves of Nominal Size up to and Including DN 54

IEC 60335-2-63:1990 Safety of Household and Similar Electrical C10.16.1 (b)

Appliances Part 2: Particular Requirements for
Commercial Electric Water Boilers and Liquid
Heaters
IEC 60335-2-15:2005 Household and Similar Electrical Appliances - C10.17.1 (a),
Safety - Part 2-15: Particular Requirements for C10.22.1 (a)
Appliances for Heating Liquids

IEC 60335-2-24:2005 Household and similar electrical appliances – C10.18.1 (c),

Safety – Part 2-24: Particular requirements for C10.32.2 (a)
refrigerating appliances, ice-cream appliances and
ice-makers
IEC 60335-2-6:2005 Household and similar electrical appliances – C10.19.1 (c),
Safety – Part 2-6: Particular requirements for C10.20.1, C10.21.1
stationary cooking ranges, hobs, ovens and similar
appliances
IEC 60335-2-9:2006 Household and similar electrical appliances – C10.23.1
Safety – Part 2-9: Particular requirements for grills,
toasters and similar portable cooking appliances
IEC 60335-2-23:2003 Household and Similar Electrical Appliances - C10.24.1 (a)
Safety - Part 2-23: Particular Requirements for
Appliances for Skin or Hair Care
IEC 60335-2-3:2005 Household and similar electrical appliances – C10.27.1 (b)
Safety – Part 2-3: Particular requirements for
electric irons
IEC 60335-2-2:2006 Household and similar electrical appliances – C10.28.1 (a)
Safety – Part 2-2: Particular requirements for
vacuum cleaners and water-suction cleaning
appliances
IEC 60335-2-40:2006 Household and similar electrical appliances – C10.29.1 (a),
Safety – Part 2-40: Particular requirements for C10.30.1 (a),
electrical heat pumps, air conditioners and C10.31.2 (a)
dehumidifiers
ISO 5151:1994 Non-Ducted Air Conditioners and Heat Pumps - C10.31.3 (d)
Testing and Rating for Performance

ISO 8187:1991 Household Refrigerating Appliances - Refrigerator- C10.32.2 (b),

Freezers - Characteristics and Test Methods C10.32.3 (b)(ii)
IEC 60068-2-29:1987 Basic Environmental Testing Procedures Part 2: C11.4
Tests - Tests Eb and Guidance: Bump

Annex I EE_GS
Page 14 of 18 2007 Edition
Standard Description Part and Clause No.
IEC 60068-2-64:1993 Environmental Testing Part 2: Test Methods Test C11.4
Fh: Vibration, Broad-Band Random (Digital
Control) and Guidance
BS 6231:2006 Electrical cables - Single core PVC insulated C11.7, C13.3.1 (f)
flexible cables of rated voltage 600/ 1000 V for
switchgear and controlgear wiring
IEC 62053:2003 Electricity metering equipment (a.c.) Particular C11.9
requirements

IEC 60051:1997 Direct Acting Indicating Analogue Electrical C11.9, C13.3.1 (f)
Measuring Instruments and Their Accessories

BS 921:2004 Rubber mats for electrical purposes C11.14, C13.3.17

ISO 8528:2005 Reciprocating internal combustion engine driven C12.1.1, C12.1.2 (a),
alternating current generating sets C12.1.2 (c)

BS EN 590:2004 Automotive fuels Diesel Requirements and test C12.1.2 (a)

methods
ISO 8528-2:2005 Reciprocating internal combustion engine driven C12.1.2 (b)(vii)
alternating current generating sets -- Part 2: Engines

ISO 8528-3:2005 Reciprocating internal combustion engine driven C12.1.3 (a)

alternating current generating sets -- Part 3:
Alternating current generators for generating sets
ISO 8528-5:2005 Reciprocating internal combustion engine driven C12.1.3 (b)
alternating current generating sets -- Part 5:
Generating sets
BS EN 55014:1997 Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio C12.1.7
Disturbance Characteristics of Electrical Motor-
Operated and Thermal Appliances for Household
and Similar Purposes, Electric Tools and Similar
Electric Apparatus
BS 1821:1982 Class I Oxy-Acetylene Welding of Ferritic C12.1.10
Pipework for Carrying Fluids

BS 2640:1982 Class II Oxy-Acetylene Welding of Carbon Steel C12.1.10

Pipework for Carrying Fluids

BS EN 1011-2:2004 Welding - Recommendations for Welding of C12.1.10

Metallic Materials - Part 2: Arc Welding of Ferritic
Steels
BS 4:2005 Structural Steel Sections C12.1.11
BS 7668:2004 Weldable structural steels Hot finished structural C12.1.11
hollow sections in weather resistant steels
Specification
BS 921:1976 Rubber mats for electrical purposes C12.2.12

Annex I EE_GS
Page 15 of 18 2007 Edition
Standard Description Part and Clause No.
BS EN 1057:1996 Copper and Copper Alloys - Seamless, Round C12.6.6
Copper Tubes for Water and Gas in Sanitary and
Heating Applications
IEC 60189-2:1981 Low-Frequency Cables and Wires with P.V.C C12.6.8 (a)
Insulation and P.V.C Sheath Part 2: Cables in Pairs,
Triples, Quads and Quintuples for Inside
Installations
BS 2594:1975 Specification for Carbon Steel Welded Horizontal C12.7.1 (a)(i),
Cylindrical Storage Tanks C12.7.1 (a)(iii)

BS EN 499:1995 Welding Consumables - Covered Electrodes for C12.7.1 (a)(ii)

Manual Metal Arc Welding of Non Alloy and Fine
Grain Steels - Classification (F)
EN 1011-1:1998 Welding Recommendations for welding of metallic C12.7.1 (a)(ii)
materials Part 1: General guidance for arc welding

ISO 12944:1998 Paints and Varnishes - Corrosion Protection of C12.7.1 (b)

Steel Structures by Protective Paint Systems

BS 1600:1991 Dimensions of Steel Pipe for the Petroleum C12.7.4 (a)(ii)

Industry
ISO 65:1981 Carbon steel tubes suitable for screwing in C12.7.4 (a)(ii)
accordance with ISO 7-1
ISO 7005-1:1992 Metallic flanges -- Part 1: Steel flanges C12.7.4 (a)(iii)
ISO 7-1:1994 Pipe threads where pressure-tight joints are made C12.7.4 (a)(iii)
on the threads -- Part 1: Dimensions, tolerances and
designation
BS 476-7:1997 Fire Tests on Building Materials and Structures Part C12.8.3 (d)
7: Method of Test to Determine the Classification
of the Surface Spread of Flame of Products
ISO 1834:1999 Short link chain for lifting purposes -- General C12.10.2
conditions of acceptance

ISO 1835:1980 Short link chain for lifting purposes -- Grade M (4), C12.10.2
non-calibrated, for chain slings etc.

ISO 3075:1980 Short link chain for lifting purposes -- Grade S (6) C12.10.2
non calibrated, for chain slings etc.

ISO 3076:1984 Short link chain for lifting purposes -- Grade T (8), C12.10.2
non-calibrated, for chain slings etc.

ISO 3077:2001 Short-link chain for lifting purposes -- Grade T, C12.10.2

(types T, DAT and DT), fine-tolerance hoist chain

Annex I EE_GS
Page 16 of 18 2007 Edition
Standard Description Part and Clause No.
EN 1677-5:2001 Components for Slings - Safety - Part 5: Forged C12.10.3
Steel Lifting Hooks with Latch - Grade 4

ISO 8528-6:2005 Reciprocating internal combustion engine driven C12.13.1 (c)

alternating current generating sets -- Part 6: Test
methods
BS 4142:1997 Method for Rating Industrial Noise Affecting C12.13.4
Mixed Residential and Industrial Areas

IEC 60072-1:1991 Dimensions and Output Series for Rotating C13.2.2

Electrical Machines Part 1: Frame Numbers 56 to
400 and Flange Numbers 55 to 1080
IEC 60072-2:1990 Dimensions and Output Series for Rotating C13.2.2
Electrical Machines Part 2: Frame Numbers 355 to
1 000 and Flange Numbers 1180 to 2360
IEC 60034-8:2004 Rotating Electrical Machines - Part 8: Terminal C13.2.8 (b)
Markings and Direction of Rotation

BS 91:1998 Electric Cable Soldering Sockets - Specification C13.2.9 (b)

IEC 60751:1995, Industrial Platinum Resistance Thermometer C13.2.11 (a)

Grade 2 Sensors

IEC 62271-100:2006 High-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear - Part C13.3.1 (a), C13.3.1
100: High-Voltage Alternating-Current Circuit- (f), C13.3.3, C13.3.4
Breakers (a), C13.3.4 (e)

IEC 62271-200:2003 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 200: C13.3.1 (a), C13.3.1
AC metal-enclosed switchgear and controlgear for (f), C13.3.3, C13.3.4
rated voltages above 1 kV and up to and including (e)
52 kV
IEC 60376:2005 Specification of technical grade sulfur hexafluoride C13.3.1 (f)
(SF6) for use in electrical equipment

IEC 60694:2002 Common Specifications For High-Voltage C13.3.1 (f)

Switchgear and Controlgear Standards

IEC 60947-5-1:2003 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear Part 5-1: C13.3.1 (f)
Control circuit devices and switching elements
Electromechanical control circuit devices
IEC 62052-11:2003 Electricity metering equipment (AC) General C13.3.1 (f)
requirements, tests and test conditions Part 11:
Metering equipment
IEC 60044-2:2003 Instrument Transformers - Part 2: Inductive C13.3.1 (f), C13.3.11
Voltage Transformers

Annex I EE_GS
Page 17 of 18 2007 Edition
Standard Description Part and Clause No.
IEC 60044-5:2004 Instrument transformers . Part 5: Capacitor voltage C13.3.1 (f), C13.3.11
transformers

IEC 60282-1:2005 High-Voltage Fuses - Part 1: Current-Limiting C13.3.1 (f), C13.5,

Fuses C13.5 (g)

ISO 8501-1:1994 Preparation of Steel Substrates Before Application C13.3.2

of Paints and Related Products - Visual Assessment
of Surface Cleanliness - Part 1: Rust Grades and
Preparation Grades of Uncoated Steel Substrates
and of Steel Substrates After Overall Removal of
Previous Coatings
BS 159:2006 High-Voltage Busbars and Busbar Connections C13.3.3

BS EN 60298:1998 A.C. Metal-Enclosed Switchgear and Controlgear C13.3.3

for Rated Voltages Above 1 kV and up to and
Including 52 kV
IEC 60076:2000 Power Transformers C13.4.1 (b), C13.4.9
(a)
BS EN 10025:2004 Hot Rolled Products of Non-Alloy Structural Steels C13.4.7 (c)(i)
- Technical Delivery Conditions

BS EN 10029:1991 Tolerances on Dimensions, Shape and Mass for Hot C13.4.7 (c)(i)
Rolled Steel Plates 3 mm Thick or Above (Q)

BS EN 1011-1:2004 Welding Recommendations for welding of metallic C13.4.7 (c)(i)

materials Part 1: General guidance for arc welding

IEC 60296:2003 Fluids for electrotechnical applications Unused C13.4.7 (c)(v)

mineral insulating oils for transformers and
switchgear
ISO 8501:1994 Preparation of Steel Substrates Before Application C13.4.8 (a)
of Paints and Related Products - Visual Assessment
of Surface Cleanliness
IEC 60502-2:2005 Power Cables with Extruded Insulation and Their C13.6.1
Accessories for Rated Voltages from 1 kV (Um =
1,2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV) - Part 2: Cables
for Rated Voltages from 6 kV (Um = 7,2 kV) and
up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV)
BS EN 50262:2005 Cable glands for electrical installations C13.6.4

Annex I EE_GS
Page 18 of 18 2007 Edition